BOTANIC

GARDENS

MELBOURNE

ROYAL BOTANICAL GARDENS MELBOURNE

NATIONAL HERBARIUM OE VICTORIA

Muelleria is published by the National Herbarium of Victoria, Royal Botanic Gardens,
Melbourne. It specialises in the flora of Victoria.

Editor: D.B. Foreman

Cover Design: Tactix Design, North Melbourne.

Muelleria is published annually.

Subscription details can be obtained from: '

The Editor Muelleria
Royal Botanic Gardens Melbourne
National Herbarium of Victoria
Birdwood Avenue

South Yarra, 3141, Victoria, Australia.

© 1996

ISSN 0077-1813

MUELLERIA

CONTENTS

VOLUME 9 1996

Page

Obituary

Dr James Hamlyn Willis AM — 28 January 1910-10 November 1995

— Helen I. Aston 1

Systematics

A taxonomic revision of Aleurites J.R.Fqrst. & G.Forst. (Euphorbiaceae)
in Australia and New Guinea

— Paul I. Forster 5

Notes on Hovea R.Br. (Fabaceae): 6

— J.H. Ross 15

Ectocarpus silicitlosus (Dillwyn) Lyngb. from Hopkins River Falls,

Vietoria — the first record of a freshwater brown alga in Australia

— John A. West & Gerry T. Kraft 29

New combination in Viola (Violaceae)

— T.A. James 35

A new species of Asplenium L. section Thamnopteris C.Presl
(Aspleniaceae) from Lord Howe Island

— David L. Jones 37

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina R.S. Rogers (Orchidaceae) as distinct
from Caladenia lyallii Hook.f and the description of Caladenia cracens,
a related new species from southern Tasmania

— David L. Jones 4 1

Resolution of the Prasophyllum alpinum R.Br. (Orchidaceae) complex in
mainland south-eastern Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand

— David L. Jones 5 1

Two new endemic species of Sagina L. (Caryophyllaceae) from Australia

— L.G. Adams 53

Miscellaneous notes on Genoplesium ciliatiim (Ewart & B.Rees)

D.L. Jones & M. A. Clem. (Orchidaceae)

— David L. Jones & Jeffrey A. Jeanes 67

New taxa and some new nomenclature in Eucalyptus

— MJ.H. Brooker & A. V. Slee 75

Notes on Tetratheca procumbens Gunn ex Hook.f (Tremandraceae)

— Jeffrey A. Jeanes 37

New species of Pronectria, Vouauxiomyces, Wentiomvces and
Zwackhiomyces from Australasia

— Sergey Y. Kondratyuk 93

Dipodium pardalinum (Orchidaceae), a new species from Victoria and
South Australia

— David L. Jones \ Q5

The consequences of a footnote: typifications and place of first valid
publication of two Australian Ahutilon (Malvaceae) species published by
Mueller

— R.M. Barker 1 1 1

Australian alpine scapose radiate taxa of Senecio (Asteraceae)

— Robert O. Belcher 1 1 5

Three new Victorian species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia L.D. Pryor
& J.H. Willis and notes on the polymoiphic nature of that species I

— K. Rule Tta

A revision of the Cardarnine gunnii-lilacina complex (Brassicaceae)

— Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges 145

Revision of the Cardarnine paucijuga complex (Brassicaceae)

— Ian R. Thompson 161

A review of the Erigeron pappocromus Labill. complex

— Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris 175

A new species of Gynatrix Alef (Malvaceae) from eastern Victoria

— N.G. Walsh 191

Nomenclatural changes in Cullen (Fabaceae: Psoraleeae)

— James W. Grimes 195

Karyology

Chromosome number determinations in the Australian Astereae
(Asteraceae)

— K. Watanabe, P.S. Short, T. Denda, Y. Suzuki, M. I to,

T. Yahara & K. Kosuge 1 97

Paleobotany

Elaeocarpus (Elaeocarpaceae) endocarps from the Early to Middle
Miocene Yalloum Formation of Eastern Australia

— Andrew C. Rozefelds cfe D.C. Christophel 229

Checklist

An annotated list of the taxa of fungi in the published Australian papers
of H.J. Swart

— J.A. Simpson <4 C.A. Grgurinovic 239

Book Review

The Orchids of Victoria

— Tim Entwisle , 255

Corrigendum 257

Muelleria 9;l-4 (1996)

Obituary: Dr James Hamlyn Willis AM

28 January 1910-10 November 1995

Dr James H. Willis AM, photographed in June 1981. (Photograph provided by the Library, Royal Botanic
Gardens, Melbourne.)

I

2

Helen I. Aston

It is with great sadness but with sincere thankfulness for his long and fruitful life that
we record the death of Dr James Hamlyn Willis AM on 10 November 1995, in his
eighty-sixth year. His death followed a severe cerebral haemorrhage less than two days
previously.

To all his friends and colleagues Dr Willis was simply and affectionately known as
‘Jim’. An unassuming man of gentle and compassionate disposition, his friendliness
and help enriched the lives of all he encountered. He was a man both liked and respected
and we will miss him greatly.

Jim Willis was born in the Melbourne suburb of Oakleigh, Victoria, on 28 January
1910. His boyhood years were spent with his parents 'and older brother Rupert first at
Yarram, in South Gippsland, Victoria, and then at Stanley in north-west Tasmania.
When fourteeen years of age he was sent to Melbourne for secondary schooling at
Melbourne High School, from where he matriculated at the end of 1927. Obeying the
call of an open-air life, he obtained a three-year scholarship to the Victorian School of
Forestry, Creswick, completing his course there in December 1930, and receiving the
Diploma of the Victorian Forests Commission.

For the following seven years from 1931 to 1937, Jim served as a forest officer
with the Commission, moving between varied forest districts as instructed. Based
consecutively at Creswick, Belgrave, Cockatoo, Maryborough, Bealiba and Daylesford,
he took every opportunity to acquaint himself with the flora and fauna around him.
Forestry was never his true calling, his desire being to enter the field of professional
botany. When he heard of forthcoming retirements from the National Herbarium of
Victoria, Melbourne, he successfully negotiated an inter-departmental secondment, then
transfer, out of the Forests Commission. Thus in October 1937 Jim Willis commenced
his outstanding career of 34 years as a professional taxonomic botanist at the National
Herbarium of Victoria, a career which only ended with his voluntary retirement on his
sixty-second birthday on 28 January 1972.

While a forestry student, Jim had met Mavis Howie, a Creswick local and a bush-
lover like himself They mainied in October 1933. Soon after Jim commenced work in
Melbourne the couple took up residence in the bayside suburb of Brighton, which
became their peimanent home. From here Jim cycled to and from the Herbarium each
day, a practice which he maintained for many years until eventually train travel
superceded his bike. While working, he attended the University of Melbourne part-time
during 1938 and 1939 to qualify for the Bachelor of Science degree (with honours),
conferred in April 1940.

Herbarium employment gave Jim increased contact with both amateur and
professional botanists and increased opportunities to visit new areas. He corresponded
widely with interstate and overseas botanists and revelled in field expeditions to
different floristic regions. The Victorian Alps in 1938 and East Gippsland in the 1940s
and 1950s provided notable new field experiences within Victoria and he was delighted
with his inclusion in expeditions to Western Australia, first as a member of the Sir
Russel Grimwade Expedition in 1947 and then to the Recherche Archipelago in 1950.
He became the first editor of the Herbarium’s research journal, Miielleria, editing the
first three numbers, Vol.l no.l being distributed in 1956. As his knowledge, researches
and publications grew, he received progressive promotions within the Herbarium.

During 1958-1959 Jim spent 14 months on secondment as Australian Botanical
Liaison Officer at Kew Herbarium, England, making many botanical contacts and
travelling both in the United Kingdom and in European countries during this tenn. On
return from secondment he resumed duties at the National Herbarium and in May 1961
he was promoted to the position of Assistant Government Botanist. Despite increased
administrative responsibilities his researches and field trips continued, including forays
to New Guinea and New Zealand. For the last 15 months of his service he became
Acting Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium pending the
appointment of a new Director. He neither wanted nor particularly enjoyed the greater
managerial role that the position imposed, but the work had to be done and he applied
himself diligently and successfully to the task.

James Hamlyn Willis

3

From his boyhood years in Tasmania, through his early forestry years and his long
herbarium career in taxonomic botany, Jim pursued his innate interest in natural
history with unfailing enthusiasm. Rocks, minerals, shells and plants were all collected
and studied; birds, insects and other faunal groups received his intelligent attention.
Botanically he researched and published not only on flowering plants but on lower
plant groups also, particularly mosses and fungi. He was a man of prodigious energy,
with an enormous capacity for work, frequently continuing throughout his lunchtime
and late into the night. His activities continued unabated after his retirement and even
his declining health during the last two years did not defeat him. Only a few weeks
before his death he had delivered the opening address to the national conference of the
Society for Growing Australian Plants, held in Ballarat.

In his taxonomic role, Jim described 42 new plant species himself and a further 22
species with co-authors, besides describing several new plant varieties and publishing
many new nomenclatural combinations. He was a prolific correspondent and avid
reader, with a full realisation of the importance of history in taxonomy. His
meticulously compiled files on botanists, collectors, explorers, collecting localities and
handwritings are invaluable taxonomic and curatorial tools, and his publications
include many on the history of botanical exploration and on the biographies of botanists.
Annotations in Jim’s exquisitely neat handwriting are prolific throughout the Herbarium
collections and library and show how carefully he would cross-check
information, correcting or expanding as required. Inevitably his botanical interests
extended beyond taxonomy. He prepared floristic lists for local areas, published
descriptive accounts of vegetation, and was an early voice for conservation. Exotic
plants and horticulture also received his attention and his total revision of E.E. Lord’s
book Shrubs and Trees for Australian Gardens for its fifth edition (1982) is a notable
contribution in this field.

In all, Jim has published approximately 883 books, scientific and popular papers,
pamphlets, essays and reviews. His A Handbook to Plants in Victoria, Vol. 1 (1962;
2nd edn 1970) and Vol. 2 (1973), marked a milestone for Victorian botany, not only by
replacing A.J. Ewart’s outdated Flora of Victoria (1931) but also because of its
originality. This was no slavish compilation from the writings of others but a work
based largely on Jim’s own meticulously gathered, first hand observations. The
‘Handbook’ is only now being replaced as a new, multi-authored, four-volume Flora of
Victoria comes off press.

In the field, Jim’s energy and enthusiasm knew no bounds. Time would be forgot-
ten as he searched and collected and he has been known to descend the most rugged of
mountains in the dark alone after having failed to notice how rapidly daylight was
departing. He could not drive a car himself, but his many friends and colleagues were
always delighted to have him accompany them on their bush expeditions for he was
both a splendid companion and a fountain of information.

Jim Willis gave his time and knowledge and encouragement unstintingly to those
who sought his help, extending courtesy and friendship to professional and amateur,
adult or schoolchild, alike. He would identify piles of specimens for enquirers but no
one was ever made to feel that they were intruding on his time. His popularity as a
clear, fluent and erudite public speaker was enonuous and he was always in demand for
lectures to scientific and community groups. For these he had thousands of colour
transparencies, almost all taken by himself, all neatly labelled and catalogued according
to subject matter. Topics covered were as diverse as his many interests. He was an
active member of some 16 botanically-oriented organizations, including the Field
Naturalists Club of Victoria (continuous membership since 1932), Royal Society of
Victoria, National Trust of Australia (Victoria), Australian Conservation Foundation,
Victorian National Parks Association and the Society for Growing Australian Plants'
Additionally he would often travel far afield throughout Victoria to speak to local
groups or lead them on field excursions. He has given so much of his talent to so many
that the flow-on effect of this alone has ensured his place as one of the great men of
Australian botanical and natural history science.

4

Helen 1. Aston

Although Jim never had any desire for fame, status or prestige, honors naturally
came his way over the years. His contributions were too great to remain unrecognised.
Professional colleagues have named eight plant species with the epithets ‘willisif,
"willisiana’ and ‘jamesiana" in his honour. In 1960 he received the Australian Natural
History Medallion ‘for special study and for increasing knowledge and appreciation of
natural historj' in Australia’. In 1973 he was awarded the Royal Society of Victoria’s sil-
ver medal for research. In January 1974 the Faculty of Science, Monash University,
appointed him an honorary Fellow and in August of the same year he received his
Doctorate of Science from The University of Melbourne for published works. In May
1976 he became a Fellow of the Linnean Society of London {Honoris causa). The
Friends of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, appointed him an Honorary Life
Member in November 1989 and in September 1990 he was the first Victorian to receive
the Award of Excellence from the Australian Institute of Horticulture. The Australian
Conservation Foundation conferred Honorary Life Membership upon him in November
1991 and in 1993 the Victorian Division of the National Trust of Australia awarded him
its Certificate of Honour. Most recently, to the delight of his family and all associated
with him, Jim was made a Member of the Order of Australia in June 1995.

Jim’s marriage in 1933 has already been mentioned. He could not have chosen a
more loving or supportive wife and Mavis has her own well-deserved place in our
affections. As devout and committed Christian people, both have lived lives of service
to others and been active in their local Uniting (fonnerly Methodist) Church in New
Street, Brighton. Here Jim was a lay preacher and sometime choir member, with a fine
bass-baritone solo voice. Together Jim and Mavis have shared their lives and activities,
supported local communities, given solace and practical help to those in need, raised
two sons and 3 daughters (Ruth, Ian, David, Helen and Dorothy), and delighted in their
15 grandchildren and 4 great-grandsons.

Jim Willis was a superb all-round naturalist and one of the greatest Australian
botanists of this century. He was also a man of absolute personal integrity, a caring
family and community man, and a splendid companion and friend. He inspired and led
by example. The over-capacity attendance and the eulogies spoken at the thanksgiving
service for his life are testimony to the high esteem and affection in which he was held.

80

For a greater appreciation of Jim’s life and work refer to the biographical sketch and
list of publications in Muelleria 3(2): 69-88 (1975). It is hoped that an updated list of
publications will be placed in the 1997 issue. An account of Jim’s contribution to
mycology is detailed in the Australasian Mycological Newsletter No 15(1): 3-7 (March
1996) and an account of his contribution to the Field Naturalists Club of Victoria has
appeared in the Victorian Naturalist 1 13: 44^6 (1996).

Helen /. Aston

Mtielleria 9: 5-13 ( 1996 )

A Taxonomic revision of Aleurites J.R. Forst. & G.Forst.
(Euphorbiaceae) in Australia and New Guinea

Paul I. Forster

Queensland Herbarium, Department of Environment, Meiers Road, Indooroopilly, 4068,
Queensland, Australia.

ABSTRACT

The genus Aleurites J.R.Forst. & G.Forst. is revised for Australia and New Guinea, and
includes two species Aleurites nioluccana (L.) Willd. and A. rockinghaniensis (Baill.)
P. I. Forst. comb, et stat. nov. Both species are illustrated and notes on distribution,
habitat, typification and conservation status are provided. A lectotype is selected for the
nameH. moluccana var. rockinghaniensis Baill.

Introduction

The genus Aleurites was described by J.R. & G. Forster (1776). It included the single
species A. triloba, based on a collection that they had made at Tonga in the Pacific
Ocean while naturalists on James Cook s third voyage of discovery. The same species
had been previously described under Jatropha as J. moluccana L. (Linneaus 1753) and
this earlier name was subsequently transferred to Aleurites by Willdenow ( 1 805).

Aleiuites has a wide distribution in Asia, Malesia, Melanesia and Australia, with
one species A. moluccana widespread and common throughout the entire range (Airy
Shaw 1980, 1981; Smith 1981; Wagner et al. 1990). The genus was included by
Webster (1994) m Euphorbiaceae subfamily Crotonoideae, tribe Aleuritideae Hurusawa,
Subtnbe Aleuritinae (Hurusawa) Webster, together with Vernicia Lour and Reutealis
Airy Shaw.

At times Aleurites has had up to six species included in it (e.g. Mueller 1866'
Webster 1967; Wagner et al. 1990); however, several of these, including the Chinese
lung-Oil Tree (formerly A. fordii Hemsl.) are better placed in Vernicia (e.g. Radcliffe-
Smith 1987). Authors of recent accounts of Aleurites have indicated that only a single
species A. moluccana exists with two or three varieties (Airy Shaw 1981) although
Radcliffe-Smith (1987) considered the genus to comprise two species. Aleurites
nioluccana has been considered a polymorphic species by several authors with
A. nioluccana var. moluccana being widespread throughout the species range-
A moluccana var. rockinghaniensis Baill. being endemic to Australia (Baillon 1866), a\
moluccana var. floccosa Airy Shaw endemic to New Guinea (Airy Shaw 1966) and
endemic to Hawaii (Sherff 1951; Stone 1967; Degener & Degener
1 y / 1 ). 1 hese Hawaiian varieties are no longer recognised (Wagner et al 1 990)

There is also the problem of A. erratica Deg., 1. Deg. & Hummel. Aleurites
erraUca was named on the basis of drift seed collected at Canton Atoll in the Pacific by
^ / 1 distinguished it from A. nioluccana on surface patterning (Degener et

al. 1978). The name A. erratica has been applied to drift seed on an atoll on the north-
east Australian coast (Smith 1994), but not to any naturally occurring populations in
Australia and New Guinea. Although A. erratica is probably a synonym of A.
moluccana, some critical attention is required to determine why the different seed
patterning occurs, before it is dismissed out of hand.

In the present paper 1 have restricted the geographical coverage to populations of
Aleurites that occur naturally in Australia and New (Tuinea. Most of the range outside

this area has on y A. moluccana s.s. present, and there is little need to review the
available material yet again.

5

6

Paul L. Forster

Thus, this leaves the question of the two or three varieties of A. moluccana in
Australia and New Guinea (Airy Shaw 1980, 1981). Aleurites was first recorded for
Australia by Mueller (1865), who thought that the Australian species was A. triloba.
Shortly after, Baillon (1866) described A. moluccana var. rockinghamensis from
material collected by Dallachy in north Queensland, although only A. moluccana was
recognised by Bentham (1873) and Bailey (1902). In New Guinea, the first record of
Aleurites was for A. moluccana (Smith 1910), with A. moluccanna var. floccosa
described from the Bulolo Valley by Airy Shaw (1966).

In his final contribution on the genus. Airy Shaw' (1981) enumerated two varieties
for Australia, A. moluccana var. moluccana and A. moluccana var. rockinghamensis
and placed A. moluccana var. floccosa from New Guinea, with a question mark, in the
synonymy of A. moluccana var. rockinghamensis. He distinguished the two varieties
with:

‘var. moluccana . . . Indumentum thin, evanescent; leaves relatively narrow, not or
rarely cordate; ovary and fruit bilocular . . .

var. rockinghamensis . . . Indumentum evident, subfloccose; leaves broader,
mostly cordate; ovary and fruit 3(-4)-locuIar.’

Aleurites moluccana s.s. and A. moluccana var. rockinghamensis are largely
allopatric throughout their known range with the former growing in more xeromorphic
rainforest/vineforest communities than the latter. There are several known examples of
sympatry, namely at the base of Big Tableland (G. Sankowsky pers. comm. 1992) and
just north of the Bloomfield River at Wujal Wujal (pers. obs. 1994). No intermediate
individuals have been observed at these localities. In addition to the differences outlined
by Airy Shaw (1981), there are also discontinuities in floral and seedling morphology.
Given the distribution of the two taxa, the lack of intermediates and the many
morphological discontinuities, A. moluccana var. rockinghamensis is elevated to
species status in this paper.

Materials and methods

This revision is based on herbarium holdings at AD, BRI, CANB, CBG, DNA, MEL,
NSW and QRS and field observations and collections by the author in Australia and
New Guinea.

Floral descriptions were prepared from material preserved in spirit (FAA or 70%
alcohol and glycerol) or reconstituted by boiling in water and detergent. Fruit and seed
descriptions were prepared from material preserved in spirit or dried. Foliage and
inflorescence descriptions were prepared from dried material. Indumentum cover is
described using the terminology of Hewson (1988), except that ‘scattered’ is used
instead of isolated’.

The ‘Wet Tropics’ is defined as the area of north-eastern Queensland that encom-
passes the ‘hot, humid, vine forests’ from near Cooktown in the north to Paluma
in the south (Webb & Tracey 1981; Barlow & Hyland 1988). Rainforest terminology
follows Webb ( 1 978).

Taxonomy

Aleurites J.R.Forst. & G.Forst., Char. Gen. PI. Ill (1776). type; Aleurites moluccana
(L.) Willd.

Derivation of name: from the Greek for ‘wheaten flour’, alluding to the mealy
appearance of the lower leaf surface.

Trees, monoecious, evergreen, perennial; stems and foliage without obvious latex.
Indumentum of simple or stellate, multicellular trichomes, not glandular, stinging hairs
absent. Stipules entire, inconspicuous, deciduous. Leaves alternate, petiolate,
palminerved, lobate, entire, with 2 glands at base of lamina. Inflorescences terminal,
paniculate, solitary, uni- or bisexual with the flowers in bracteate clusters. Bisexual

Taxonomic revision of Aleurites

7

inflorescences with a solitary female flower terminating each major axis, lateral
cymules male. Female flowers', short pedicellate; calyx closed in bud, rupturing into 2
or 3 lobes; petals 5(6), free, imbricate, disc 5-lobed; ovary 2-4-locular, ovules
uniloculate; styles 2 or 3, fused at base, bilobed. Male flowers', long pedicellate; calyx
closed in bud, rupturing into 2 or 3 lobes; petals 5(6), free, imbricate, disk 5-lobed;
stamens 4-verticillate, numerous, the outer ones free, the inner ones ± united and borne
on a conical receptacle, anthers dorsifixed, introrse and bilobate, tbecae oblong and
longitudinally dehiscent; pistillodes absent. Fruits drupaceous, indehiscent; exocarp
fleshy; endocarp woody, 1-4-locular. Seeds ovoid to globose; testa woody; albumen
hard; ecarunculate; germination epigeal; cotyledons broad, flat.

A genus of two (or perhaps three) species in tropical Asia, Malesia, Melanesia and
Australia. Two species in Australia and New Guinea.

K.EY TO THE SPECIES OF ALEURITES IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

1 Indumentum silver; lower leaf surface glabrous or with scattered trichomes; flowers
5-8 mm long; stamens 18-26; styles 0.5-2 mm long; ovary and fruit

l-2(-3)-locular 1 . Aleurites moliiccana

1: Indumentum ferruginous-silver; lower leaf surface with sparse to dense, generally
velutinous trichomes; flowers 8-12 mm long; stamens 24-32; styles 2.8-3 mm
long; ovary and fruit 3-4-locular 2 . Aleurites rockinghaineitsis

1 . Aleurites moluccana (L.) Willd., Sp. PL 4: 590 (1805). Jatrophci moluccana L., Sp.
PI. 1006 (1753). type; Ceylon, Hermann Herbarium Vol. Ill, p. 27 (lectotype.' fide
Radcliffe-Smith (1987; 176); BM [photo at BRl]). Aleurites triloba Forst. & G.Forst.
Char. Gen. PI. 112, t. 56 (1776). type; Tonga, Forster 214.360 (holotype; BM [photo
at BRI]).

Illustrations; Christophel & Flyland ( 1993; 96, plate 34d); Radke et al. (1993; 16).

Large spreading tree to 30 m high; trunk straight and without fluting or buttressing.
Bark smooth, grey, nondescript; blaze pink to red. Young shoots with dense, short,
silver, stellate hairs. Stipules cylindric, c. 1 mm long, with dense short, silver, stellate
hairs. Petioles 35-110 mm long, 1-1.5 mm diameter, with dense, short, silver stellate
hairs. Leaf laminas entire or 3 or 5-lobed, ovate, ovate-lanceolate or ovate-trullate,
70-200 mm long, 40-130 mm wide, 3 or 5-veined from base and with 6-8 major lateral
veins per side of midrib; upper surface dull green, glabrous or with scattered silver
stellate bairs when young; lower surface pale green, glabrous or with scattered, silver,
stellate hairs when young; apex acute to acuminate; base cuneate. Inflorescence conical,
30-100 mm long and wide; axis with dense, short, silver, stellate hairs. Male flowers
5-6 mm long, c. 5 mm diameter; pedicels filiform, 5.5-8 mm long, 0.3-6. 5 mm
diameter, with dense, short, silver, stellate hairs; buds ovoid, 2.5-3 mm long,
2-2.5 mm diameter; calyx 2 or rarely 3-parted, halves often unequal, lanceolate to
ovate, 2.5-3 mm long, 1.5-2 mm wide, with dense, short, silver, stellate hairs; petals
oblanceolate to spathulate, 4-6 mm long, 1 .5-3 mm wide, white to cream, glabrous;
stamens 18-26; filaments 0.8-1. 5 mm long, with sparse simple hairs; anthers 0. 6-0.8 mm'
long, 0.3-0. 6 mm wide, glabrous or with scattered, simple hairs; disc lobes convulate.
Female flowers 7-8 mm long, 8-10 mm diameter; pedicels stout, 2-3.5 mm long,
1-2 mm diameter, with dense, short, silver, stellate hairs; buds ellipsoid, 4-5 mm long’
c. 2 mm diameter; calyx with 2 or 3 unequal lobes, each lobe 3-3.5 mm long, 1.5-2 mm
wide, lanceolate to ovate, with dense, short, silver, stellate hairs; petals oblanceolate to
spathulate, 6-8 mm long, 1.8-2 mm wide, white to cream, internally glabrous, externally
glabrous or with a few simple hairs in a longitudinal band in the middle; ovaries
1-2-celled, subglobose, 2-3 mm long, 2-4 mm diameter, with dense, yellow, stellate
hairs; styles 0.5-2 mm long, ± glabrous or with a few simple hairs; disc glands small and
rounded. Fruit oyoid-subglobose, 40-45 mm long, 40-60 mm diameter, with scattered
silver, stellate hairs. Seed broadly ovoid, 23-32 mm long, 20-32 mm diameter, greyish
Seedlings at third leaf stage (voucher; Hyland RFK25545): cotyledons’ broadly
ovate-obovate, 18-22 mm long, 18-20 mm wide, strongly 5-veined from base, glands

Paul L. Forster

not obvious; first seedling leaf trilobed with the median lobe long-acuminate;
later leaves becoming 5-lobed. (Fig. 1)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Aleurites moliiccana is widespread in Malesia and Melanesia, and often planted in other
tropical areas. In Australia A. moliiccana is restricted to north Queensland where it is
common on Cape York Peninsula and in the northern part of the ‘Wet Tropics’ region
reaehing a southern limit on the Windsor Tableland. There is also a southerly disjunct
population at Daydream Island. In New Guinea, A. moliiccana is found in lowland areas,
and is widespread on the island.

Aleurites moliiccana is common throughout its range.

HABITAT AND ECOLOGY

Plants grow in semi-deciduous to evergreen notophyll or mesophyll vineforest, on a
variety of substrates, but often on alluvium or near the sea. Young plants are common
as pioneers in disturbed gaps or margins of the vineforest. The seed is a distinctive
component of the drift flora of the Pacific (cf Degener et al. 1978; Smith 1994).

The plant (and also A. rockinghamensis) is commonly known as ‘Candle-Nut’ and
it is possible to use the fruits as a source of light by stringing them on wire and setting
them alight.

NOTES

Aleurites moliiccana may be distinguished from A. rockinghamensis on at least five
morphological discontinuities (as given in the species key), as well as the seedling
characters outlined in the species descriptions. It should be noted that the dimensions of
seedling leaves and cotyledons may change with age and subsequent development;
however, the basic differences of shape and venation remain the same.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS

IRIAN JAVA: Warnapi, 15 km N of Ransiki, Sep. 1948, Kostermans 425 (BRI); Sorong, behind Kp. Baroe,
July 1948, Pleyte 454 (BRI); Kebar Valley, Oct. 1958, Schram BW7709 (CANB).

PAPUA NEW guinea: Madang Province: near Gurumbu Village, SW foothills of Finistcrre Mtns, Aug.
1955, Hoogland 5140 (BRI, CANB). New Britain Province: NE ridge of Mt Penak, N of S.D.A. Mission,
Talasea, May 1968, Frodin NGF26729 (BRI). Western Province: Lower Fly river, east bank opp. Sturt Island,
Oct. 1936. Brass 7997 (BRI, CANB). Northern Province: Kokoda Trail, July 1964, Millar NGF23573 (BRI).
Central Province: Kaota, Rona, Laloki River, Mar. 1933, Brass 3644 (BRI). Milne Bay Province: Fife Bay,
Sep. 1930, Turner [AQ201270] (BRI).

QUEENSLAND: Cook District: Eliott Falls, Jardine River, Oct. 1989, O’Reilly 560 (BRI); Claudie River,
Oct. 1972, Dockritl 533 (BRI, QRS); Chester River Scrub, eastern fall of Mcllwraith Range, June 1992,
Forster 10439 et al. (BRI, QRS); Near T.R. 9, Lankclly to Pandanus Creek, Sep. 1971, Hyland 5406 (BRI,
QRS); Rocky River, Sep. 1971, Hyland 5513 (BRI, QRS); Rocky River Scrub, Silver Plains, July 1993,
Forster 13622 et al (BRI); T.R. 176, Shipton L.A.. Aug. 1982, Hyland 11923 (QRS); S.F.R. 144 Windsor
Tableland, Oct. 1971, Hyland 5577 (tSKl QRS); S.F.R. 144, Whypalla, Chovrchilla L.A., Dec. 1987, Hyland
13474 (QRS). North Kennedy District: Daydream Island, Whitsunday Region, Apr. 1990, Batianoff 90043 1
(BRI).

2. Aleurites rockinghamensis (Baill.) P.l.Forst. comb, et stat. nov.

Aleurites moliiccana var. rockinghamensis Baill., Adansonia 6: 297 (1866), basionym.
type: Queensland, Cook District: Rockingham’s Bay [Dallachy]. lectotype: (here
designated): MEL232486. lectoparatypes: MEL232495, 232496, 232497, 232498.
Aleurites moliiccana va.r. floccosa Airy Shaw, Kew Bull. 20: 26 (1966). type.- Papua
New Guinea, Morobe Province: Wau, 28 June 1962, J.J. Havel NGF9169 (holotype.'
K, n.v. ISOTYPES: BRI, QRS).

Illustration: Christophel &. Hyland (1993: 97, plate 35a).

Large spreading tree to 30 m high; trunk straight and without fluting or buttressing.
Bark smooth, grey, nondescript; blaze brown speckled to cream. Young shoots with

Taxonomic revision of Aleurites

9

Fig. 1. Aleurites moluccana. a - flowering branch tip xO.4. b - gynostegium xlO. c - lateral view of female
flower x5. d - face view of male flower x5. e - lateral view of staminal mass xlO. f - stamen showing
stellate hairs xl5. g - juvenile leaf showing lobing xO.4. a from G.N.Batianoff 900431 (BRI); b, c from
B. Hyland 7809 (QRS); d-f from B. Hyland RFK25167 (QRS); g from M. O'Reilly 560 (BRI). Del.
W. Smith.

10

Paul L. Forster

dense, short, ferruginous-silver, stellate hairs. Stipules cylindric, c. 1 mm long, with
dense short, ferruginous-silver, stellate hairs. Petioles 30-210 mm long, 3-6 mm
diameter, with dense, short, fermginous-silver, stellate hairs. Leaf laminas entire or 3-
lobcd, ovate, ovate-lanceolate or ovate-trullate, 110-400 mm long, 70-300 mm wide, 3
or 5-veined from base and with 6-8 major lateral veins per side of midrib; upper surface
glossy green, with dense, short, feiTuginous-silver, stellate hairs, becoming restricted to
the veins with age; lower surface pale green, with sparse to dense, ferruginous-silver,
stellate hairs when young, often becoming restricted to the veins with age but often
remaining velutinous; apex acute to acuminate; base cuneate. Inflorescence conical,
10-300 mm long and wide; axis with dense, short, femiginous-silver, stellate hairs. Male
flowers 10-12 mm long, 10-12 mm diameter; pedicels filiform, 5-15 mm long, c. 1 mm
diameter, with dense, short, ferruginous-silver, stellate hairs; buds ovoid, 3. 5-4.5 mm
long, 3.5-4 mm diameter; calyx 2 or rarely 3-parted, halves often unequal, lanceolate to
ovate, 3-5.8 mm long, 3-4 mm wide, with dense, short, ferruginous-silver, stellate hairs;
petals oblanceolate to spathulate, 5.5-10 mm long, 2-4 mm wide, white to cream,
externaUy glabrous, internally with longitudinal strip of dense, simple hairs; stamens
24-32; filaments 0.8-1 mm long, with scattered simple hairs; anthers 0.5-0.9 mm long,
0.3-0. 7 mm wide, with scattered, simple hairs; disc lobes convulate. Female flowers
8-10 mm long, 10-12 mm diameter; pedicels stout, 2-3 mm long, 1-2 mm diameter, with
dense, short, ferruginous-silver, stellate hairs; buds ellipsoid, 4.5-6 mm long, 3-3.5 mm
diameter; calyx with 2 or 3 unequal lobes, each lobe 4-7 mm long, 3-4.5 mm wide,
lanceolate to ovate, with dense, short, fen-uginous-silver, stellate hairs; petals oblanceo-
late to spathulate, 9-12 mm long, 3-4 mm wide, white to cream, internally glabrous,
externally with a longitudinal band of dense, simple hairs in the middle; ovaries
3-4-celled, subglobose, c. 2 mm long and 2.5 mm diameter, with dense, yellow, simple
or rarely stellate hairs; styles 2.8-3 mm long, with sparse, simple hairs; disc glands small
and rounded. Fruit ovoid-subglobose, 50-65 mm long, 70-80 mm diameter, with sparse
ferruginous-silver, stellate hairs. Seed globose, 20-25 mm long, 20-25 mm diameter,
dark brown. Seedlings at third leaf stage (voucher: Irvine 477 (QRS)): cotyledons
broadly ovate-obovate, 95-100 mm long, 67-70 mm wide, weakly 5-veined from base,
basal glands obvious; first seedling leaf trilobed with the median lobe acute; later leaves
becoming entire. (Fig. 2)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Aleurites rockinghainensis occurs in Australia and Papua New Guinea. In Australia it is
largely restricted to the ‘Wet Tropics’ region of north-east Queensland, apart from a
disjunct southerly occurrence near Ingham. In Papua New Guinea it has been recorded
from lower montane parts of Morobe and Central Provinces.

Aleurites rockinghainensis is widespread and common in its known range.

HABITAT AND ECOLOGY

Plants grow in evergreen notophyll to mesophyll vineforests on a variety of substrates
usually of volcanic origin. The species is a widespread pioneer and seedlings are
common in gaps and margins of the forest.

NOTES

There are six sheets present in MEL that probably represent type material of the name
A. moluccana var. rockinghainensis. None of them has a collector listed, although the
‘Rockingham! ‘s) Bay’ labels are typical of those accompanying specimens collected by
Dallachy and it seems reasonable to assume that he was indeed the collector. As
lectotype 1 have selected one of the flowering portions that is also accompanied by nine
lines of latin text. Some of the lectoparatypes are fertile, but most are leaves only.
Specimens of Aleurites arc difficult to fit onto a standard herbarium sheet and it is
probable that the original collection has been split up in the mounting process.

Airy Shaw (1981) tentatively referred .4. moluccana vd^r. floccosa Airy Shaw to
synonymy under A. moluccana var. rockinghainensis. The Papua New Guinean

Taxonomic revision of Aleurites

specimens identified as /I. moluccana var. Jloccosa, including the type, when compared
with Australian material of^. rockinghamensis, often have male flowers with generally
longer pedicels, and more noticeably velutinous lower surfaces of the leaves. The leaf
indumentum cover is not consistent on all specimens and as there are no other differ-
ences, this later variety is reduced to synonymy.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS

PAPUA NEW guinea: Morobc Province: Crooked Creek, Bulolo, June 1962, Havel & Henry NOrvloi
(BRI)- Watut Divide, Bulolo, Oct. 1969, Streimann NGF44233 (CANB); Upper Watut, Feb. 1971, Streimann
& Ka'iro NGF44575 (BRI, CANB); Kauli Creek, Wau, Mar. 1962, Millar NGFI4503 (BRI, CANB); Edie
Creek road above Wau, May 1963, van Raven NGF16311 (BRI, CANB); Sopa, June 1962, Hartley 10342
(BRI, CANB); Boana, Apr. 1938, Clemens 8119 (CANB). Central Province; On ridge below Bondi Village,
Oct. \973, Foreman & Villas LAE60238 {BK\). .

QUEENSLAND: Cook District! c. 6 miles [10 km] NW of Daintree on bank of Daintrce River, Nov. 1967,
Borland 516 & Gillieatt (BRI); Porn. 188 Alexandra, Hutchinson Creek, Hyland 6726 (BRI, CANB, QRS);
Rex Range, Little Mossman L.A., S.F. 141, Jan. 1993, Forster 13073 & Bean (BRI, L, MEL, QRS); Kuranda
Range road Mar 1987, Godwin C3034 (BRI); Mowbray River, Jan. 1932, Brass 1991 (BRI); S.F.R. 933, Feb.
1975 Hvland 8014 (BRI, CANB, QRS); S.F. 185 Danbulla, 1.5 km SW of Hoop Pine Triangle, Jan. 1993,
Forster' 1 3080 & Bean (BRI, MEL, QRS); S.F.R. 185, Nursery L.A., Dec. 1971, Hyland 5737 (BRI, QRS);
S F R 194, on the Dividing Range near Oaky Creek, Jan. 1972, Hyland 5749 (BRI, QRS); Tolga Scrub. Mar.
1973 Irvine 477 (BRI QRS); Near Barron River on Atherton to Yungaburra road. Mar. 1971, Stocker 613
(BRL QRS); Lake Eacham, Atherton Tableland, Aug. 1929, Kajewski 1180 (BRI). North Kennedy District;
S.F. 268, June 1994, Fonster 75640 (BRI, K, L, MEL, NSW, QRS).

Acknowledgements

W. Smith (BRI) provided the illustrations that were funded by the Australian Biological
Resources Study (ABRS). Field collections and observations were made with the assist-
ance of A.R. Bean, G. Kenning, D. & I. Liddle, G. & N, Sankowsky and M.C. Tucker.
The Directors or Curators of the cited herbaria allowed access to collections either on
loan or in situ. Aspects of this study were discussed with B. Hyland (QRS). Comments
on an earlier draft of the manuscript were provided by A.R. Bean (BRI) who also drew
my attention to the population of A. rockinghamensis near Ingham. This work was
funded by ABRS in 1992-1994. Additional fieldwork in the ‘Wet Tropics’ of north-east
Queensland was supported by a travel grant from the Wet Tropics Management
Authority during 1993-1994 for the project ‘Rare and Endangered Euphorbiaceae of the
Wet Tropics’.

References

Airy Shaw, H.K. (1966). Notes on Malaysian and other Asiatic Euphorbiaceae. Kew Bulletin 20; 25-49.

Airy Shaw. H.K. (1980). The Euphorbiaceae of New Guinea. Kew Bulletin. Additional Series VIII. (Her
Majesty’s Stationary Office: London.)

Airy Shaw, H.K. (1981). A partial synopsis of the Euphorbiaceae - Platylobcae of Australia (excluding
Phvllanthus, Euphorbia and Calvcopeplus). Kew Bulletin 35: 577-700.

Bailey, F.M. (1902). Euphorbiaceae. Queensland Flora. Vol. 5 (H.J. Diddams & Co.: Brisbane.) pp. 1392-
1457.

Baillon, H.E. (1866). Species Euphorbiacearum Euphorbiacees Australicnnes. Adansonia 6: 282-345.

Barlow, B.A. & Hyland, B.P.M. (1988). The origins of the flora of Australia's wet tropics. Proceedings of the
Ecological Society of Australia 15: 1-17.

Bentham, G. (1873). Euphorbiaceae. Flora Australiensis. Vol. 6. (L. Reeve & Co.: London.) pp. 41-153,

Christophel, D.C. & Hyland, B.P.M. (1993). Leaf Atlas of Au.stralian Tropical Rain Forest Trees. (CSIRQ
Publications: East Melbourne.)

Degener, O. & Dcgener, I. ( 1971 ). Some Aleurites taxa in Hawaii and a note regarding Argemone. Phytologia
21: 315-319.

Degener, O., Degener, I. & Hummel, K. (1978). Aleurites erratica Deg., Deg. & Hummel sp. nov.,
(Euphorbiaceae) dcs stillen ozcans. Phytologia 38: 361-364.

Forster, J.R. & Forster, G. (1776). Characteres Generum Plantarum. (White et ah: London.)

Hewson, H. (1988). Plant Indumentum. A Handbook of Terminology. Australian Flora & Fauna Series No. 9.
(Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra.)

Linnaeus, C. (1753). Species Plantarum. (Laurentii Salvii: Stockholm.)

Mueller, F. ( 1 865). Qchnaceae. Fragmenta Phytograpiae Australiae 5: 30.

Mueller, J. (1866). Euphorbiaceae. In A.L.L.P. de Candolle (Ed.), Prodromus Svstematis Naturalis Regni
Vegetabilis 15(2): 189-1260.

12

Paul L. Forster

Fig. 2. Aleurites rockinghamensis. a - flowering branch tip xO.5. b - lateral view of female flower x4. c - face
view of female flower x4. d - lateral view of gynostegium x8. e - face view of male flower x4. f - lat-
eral view of staminal mass x8. g - stamen showing simple hairs xl6. h - lateral view of fruit x0.4.i -
cross-section of fruit showing 4 seeds xO.4. a-d from P. I. Forster 13073 & A.R.Bean (BRl); e-h from
P.I. Forster 13080 & A.R.Bean (BRl): i from W.Birch 55 (BRl). Del. W. Smith.

Taxonomic revision of Aleurites

13

Radcliffe-Smith, A. (1987). Euphorbiaceae, I. In Flora of East Tropical Africa. (A. A. Balkema:
Rotterdam/Boston.)

Radke, P., Radke, A., Sankowsky, G. & Sankowsky, N. (1993). Growing Australian Tropical Plants. (Frith &
Frith Books: Malanda.)

Sherff, E.E. (1951). Miscellaneous notes on new or otherwise noteworthy dicotyledonous plants. American
Journal of Botany 38: 54-74.

Smith, A.C. (1981 ). Euphorbiaceae. Flora Vitiensis Nova. Vol. 2. (Pacific Tropical Botanical Garden: Lawai,
Hawaii.) pp. 439-575.

Smith, J.J. (1910). Euphorbiaceae. Nova Guinea 8(1): 221-245.

Smith, J.M.B. (1994). Patterns of disseminule dispersal by drift in the north-west Coral Sea. New Zealand
Journal of Botany 32: 453-46 1 .

Stone, B.C. (1967). Notes on the Hawaiian Flora. Pacific Science. 21: 550-557.

Wagner, W.L., Herbst, D.R. & Sohmer, S.H. (199(j). Euphorbiaceae. Manual of the Flowering Plants of
Hawaii. (University of Hawaii Press/Bishop Museum Press: Honolulu.)

Webb, L.J. (1978). A general classification of Australian rainforests. Australian Plants 9: 349-363.

Webb, L.J. & Tracey, J.G. (1981). Australian rainforests: pattern and change. In A. Keast (Ed), Ecological
Biogeographv of Australia. (W. Junk: The Hague.) pp. 605-694.

Webster, G.L. (1967). The genera of Euphorbiaceae in the southeastern United States. Journal of the Arnold
Arboretum 48: 303-430.

Webster, G.L. (1994). Synopsis of the genera and suprageneric taxa of Euphorbiaceae. Annals of the Missouri
Botanic Garden 81: 33-144.

Willdenow, C.L. (ed.) (1805). Species Plantarum. 4th ed. Vol. 4. (G.C.Nauck: Berlin.) p. 590.

Revised paper received 5 June 1995.

Muelleria 9: 15-28 (1996)

Notes on Hovea R.Br, (Fabaceae): 6

J.H. Ross

National Herbarium of Victoria, Royal Botanic Gardens, Birdwood Avenue, South
Yarra, 3141, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Accounts of Hovea linearis (Sm.) R.Br., H. longifolia R.Br. and H. acntifolia A.Cunn.
ex G.Don are provided. Hovea linearis, H. heterophylla A.Cunn. ex Hook.f.,
H. heterophylla forma decipiens Domin, H. longifolia and H. acntifolia are
lectotypified.

Introduction

While continuing studies of the eastern Australian Hovea species, it became apparent
that the description of H. linearis was based on discordant elements. This opportunity is
taken to lectotypify the species in a manner that preserves the traditional and current
usage of the name and to provide an account of the species. Accounts are also provided
of H. longifolia and H. acntifolia and a lectotype is selected for each. Bentham,
FI. Anstral. 2: 172 (1864), adopted a very broad concept of H. longifolia, as a result of
which the name has been widely used for plants from South Australia, Queensland, New
South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania. However, the species has a fairly restricted
distribution in New South Wales. Attention is drawn to the range of morphological
variation encountered within H. acntifolia and to difficulties experienced in naming
some specimens with certainty.

Taxonomy

1. Hovea linearis (Sm.) R.Br. in W.T.Aiton, Hortns Kew. edn 2, 4: 275 (1812);
Edwards, Bot. Reg. 6: t.463 (1820); DC., Prodr. 2: 115 (1825); Lodd., Bot. Cab.
13: t.l222 (1827); Paxton, Bot. Mag. 12: 75 (1846); Benth., FI. Anstral. 2: 172 (1864);
Stanley & E. Ross, FI. South-eastern Queensland 1: 270 (1983); Thompson & Lee
in Lee & Thompson, FI. New South Wales 101(2): 135 (1984). Poiretia linearis
Sm., Trans. Linn. Soc. London 9: 304 (1808) comb, illegit.. Phusicarpos linearis
(Sm.) Poir. in Lamarck & Poiret, Encycl, meth. Bot., suppl. 4: 400 (1816). type: New
South Wales, Port Jackson, 1791, J. White s.n. lectotype (here selected) : LINN
(sheet 1190.1 pro parte.) Hovea heterophylla A.Cunn. ex Hook.f, FI. Tasmaniae 1: 93
(1856), 1. 15 (1855); Benth., FI. Austral. 2: 172 (1864); Domin, Bihlioth. Bot. 22: (89^):
728 (1925); J.M. Black, FI. S. Australia edn 2: 447 (1948); Burbidge & Gray, FI.
Austral. Cap. Territ. 218 (1970): J.H. Willis, Handh. PI. Victoria 2: 281 (1973); W.M.
Curtis, Student’s FI. Tasmania edn 2, 1: 148 (1975). type: Tasmania, 1833, R. Gunn
139. LECTOPTYPE (here selected): K. Hovea heterophylla forma decipiens Domin,
Biblioth. Bot. 22 (89^): 175 (1925). type: prope Brisbane River, Queensland, A. Dietrich
s.n. LECTOTYPE (here selected) : HBG; isolectotypes: BRI 345555, HBG (3 sheets),
NSW 166774, PR 527083, 527084, PRC.

Subshrub to 1 m high, stems usually several, slender, procumhent, straggling or erect,
sparingly to densely clothed with appressed to slightly spreading antrorse hairs. Leaves
usually dimorphic, lamina of lower leaves usually ovate or elliptic, rarely rotund,
(0.3-)l-5 cm long, (0.2-)0.5-1.3(-L6) cm wide, lamina of upper leaves linear, linear-
oblong or narrow ovate-oblong, 1.4-11 cm long, 0.3-0.7(-l) cm wide, the lamina

15

16

J.H. Ross

arched up slightly on either side of the midrib and the margins slightly recurved, upper
surface glabrous and usually minutely bullate, lower surface sparingly to densely
clothed with more or less appressed hairs; petiole 1-2 mm long, pubescent like the
stem. Stipules subulate, 0.8-1. 8 mm long, reflexed apically, persisting for some time
and often glabrescent. Inflorescence axillary, sessile or on peduncles up to 1mm long,
rarely auxotelic with growth extending apically, mostly 2- or 3-flowered. Flowers
pedicellate, the pedicels up to 3 mm long, densely clothed with appressed to slightly
spreading hairs; bracteoles narrow-ovate or oblong, 1-1.75 mm long, much shorter
than the calyx-tube, tips often recurved, densely pubescent like the pedicel and bract;
bract inserted 0.8-1. 5 mm below the bracteoles, 0.8-1.75 mm long. Calyx densely
clothed externally with predominantly long appressed or slightly spreading antrorse
hairs: 2 upper lobes 4. 8-5. 8 mm long including the tube 1.8-3 mm long, 3 lower lobes
1.8-3 mm long, acute apically. Standard 7-9 mm long, 7.4-10 mm wide, pale mauve
(rarely white); wings 6.4-8. 5 mm long, 2.4-3. 7 mm wide; keel petals 4. 5-5. 4 mm long,
2. 2-2. 7 mm wide. Stamen-filaments 3-5.5 mm long. Ovary sessile, 1.3-1. 8 mm long,
2-ovulate, usually pubescent basally, apically and along the sutures but sometimes
pubescent throughout. Pods sessile, obliquely globular, ovoid or ellipsoid or sometimes
transversely elliptic, 0.75-1.2 cm long, 0.7-1.05 cm wide, 0.55-0.65 cm thick, external
surface of valves with appressed usually ferruginous hairs throughout, on the sutures
only, or sometimes glabrous, internal surface glabrous or with few scattered weak hairs.
Seeds elliptic, plump, 3. 4-4. 5 mm long, 2. 2-3. 4 mm wide, 2. 4-3. 4 mm thick, black,
hilum linear, the aril extending for less than 1/2 to 2/3 the length of the seed. (Fig. 1 )

DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY

The most widely distributed species in the genus extending from southern Queensland
southwards to Tasmania and westwards through Victoria into south-eastern South
Australia (Fig. 2). Occurs usually in open forest or woodland or in heathland where it
favours sandstone, granite and limestone formations, shallow stony soils and sandy
soils.

TYPIFICATION

It is clear from the protologue that when J.E. Smith described Poiretia linearis he had
available specimens sent from New South Wales and material from a plant which
flowered in Hibbert’s garden in Clapham in 1798. In response to a request, Mr N.S.
Lander photographed the type material of P. linearis housed in LINN (sheet 1190.1).
The photographs confinned that two different collections are present on this sheet: five
twigs numbered 1 collected by White at Port Jackson in 1791 and one twig numbered 2
from Hibbert’s garden at Clapham in 1798. The photographs suggested that, although
superficially similar, the two collections mounted on the sheet of 1190.1 represented
discordant elements. This was confirmed subsequently by Mr Lander who matched
specimens sent on loan from MEL against the type material at LINN.

The material collected by White consists of flowering and fruiting specimens
whereas the twig from Hibbert’s garden is in young bud. It is clear from the protologue
that the description of P. linearis was based largely, if perhaps not entirely, on the
material collected by White. All of the information on pods, and it should he
remembered that Smith erected the genus Poir-etia principally upon the nature of the
pod, and seeds must have come from White’s specimens and, as the flowers on the
Hibbert specimen are in bud, it is likely that the description of the flowers was taken
from the White specimens too. The description of the stipules is also from the White
material as the stipules are not evident on the Hibbert specimen. The description of the
leaves and stem could have come from either the White or the Hibbert material.

The material collected by White is selected here as the lectotype of P. linearis, a
choice which preserves the traditional and current usage of the nane. The specimen
from Hibbert’s garden is a twig of H. longifolia which is interesting as it reveals that
this species was in cultivation in England at least seven years earlier than it was
thought to have been introduced by R. Brown.

Hovea (Fabaceae): 6

17

Fig. 1. Hovea linearis, a - flowering twig, xl. b - section of young stem showing the appressed antrorse
hairs, xl2. c - calyx open out (upper lobes on right), x4. d - standard, x4. e - wing petal, x6. f - keel
petal, x6. g - gynoecium, x6. h - fruiting twig, xl. i - seed, side view, x5. j - seed, hilar view x5. a
and b from Muir 4835 (MEL), c-g from Muir SOI (MEL), h-j from Muir 2011 (MEL).

18

J.H. Ross

Fig. 2. Distribution of Hovea linearis.

Hooker ( 1856) adopted Cunningham’s manuscript name and based his description
of H. heterophylla, at least in part, on Tasmanian material collected by Gunn numbered
139 although he also cited in the protologue material from Tasmania collected by
‘Lawrence, Gunn, etc.’ and noted that the species occurred in New South Wales and in
south-east Australia. The numbers accompanying Gunn’s specimens are not collecting
numbers but species numbers as it was his custom to give the same number to
collections of what he took to be one taxonomic entity even if the specimens were
collected on different dates or from different localities (Burns & Skemp, 1961; Haegi,
1982; Buchanan, 1990).

In Herbarium Hookerianum at K there are three sheets of material associated with
Gunn. One sheet of flowering and fruiting material is labelled ‘V.D.L. 1833 Gunn 139’
in two different hands, neither of them Gunn’s. A second sheet bears a label in the top
right hand corner in Gunn’s hand which reads ‘139/1842 Hobart 15/9/40’ with ‘R. Gunn
Esq.’ in another hand. However, the specimen immediately to the left of this label has
written on the sheet next to it and beneath Gunn’s label ‘V.D.L. Scott’ indicating that it
was collected by Scott. The major portion of this sheet is taken up with material
collected by Lawrence at Forest Formosa. It is not clear, therefore, to which specimen
the Gunn label applies or whether in fact any of the material was actually collected by
Gunn. A third sheet bears two fruiting and three flowering specimens and two labels,
neither bearing a number, which read ‘Stringy bark hill Hobartown Nov. 1840’ and
‘Grass tree hill Aug. 29 1840 Prostrate’. Written on this sheet below the label near the
top left hand corner is ‘R. Gunn Esq. V.D.Land’. Attached to this sheet are pencil
drawings of details of the flowers and fruits. A fourth sheet at K, not stamped as having

Hovea (Fabaccae): 6

19

been part of Herbarium Hookerianum, contains three different collections, namely, a
specimen collected by R. Gunn in Tasmania and numbered 139, Milligan 522
from Tasmania, and A. Cunningham 269 collected in Aug. 1817 from Macquarie River,
New South Wales. As Hooker appears to have attached special significance to the
material labelled Gunn 139, the sheet in Herbarium Hookerianum clearly labelled 139
collected by Gunn in 1 833 is selected here from among the syntypes as the lectotype of
H. heterophylla.

Several collections housed in other herbaria labelled Gunn 139/1842 or 139, many
in Gunn’s hand, have been examined, the details of which are as follows:

• Hobarton, 12/9/1839, Gunn 139/1842 (BM)

• Hobart, 15/9/1840. Gunn 139/1842 (BM, MEL 106351 ex Herb. Sonder). BRl
242484 and NSW 166758 each consist of material distributed from BM and bear a
label which reads ‘Hobarton, 12/9/1839 and Hobart, 15/9/1840’. It is not clear
whether or not each of these sheets contains a mixture of the two collections in BM
numbered 139/1842 but collected on different dates.

• Degraves, Hobart, 14/12/1840, Gunn 139/1842 (NSW 166753)

• Penquite, 19/9/1841, Gunn 139/1842 (NSW 166757)

• Penquite, 18/9/1842, Gunn 139/1842 (NSW 166754)

• Penquite, 16/12/1844, Gunn 139 (HO 10724, NSW 166756)

• no data, Gunn 139 (CGE, NSW 166755, W)

• no data, Gunn s.n.(CGE ex Herb. Hook., E, W ex Herb. Hook. (3 sheets))

• Hobart, Gunn 139/1842 (CGE)

With the possible exception of the material in BM, that which was subsequently
distributed from the BM to BRI and NSW, and sheets in CGE and W from Herbarium
Hookerianum but bearing no data, none of the other collections would have been seen
by Hooker. It would seem reasonable to regard these Gunn specimens mentioned in the
previous sentence and housed in BM, BRI, CGE, and NSW (166758) as possible
syntypes of H. heterophylla. However, in view of the uncertainty suiTounding Gunn’s
collections, none of the remaining specimens is considered to represent type material.

Domin based his description of H. heterophylla fornia decipiens on the following
specimens from Queensland: ‘Brisbane River, A. Dietrich s.n. (mehere exemplare);
sandstone hills towards Brisbane, Leichhardt; Stradbroke Island, Fraser 1829’. Several
specimens collected by Dietrich from near Brisbane are in HBG and specimens
distributed from HBG have been located in BM, BRI, NSW, PR, PRC and W. Some of
the specimens bear collecting numbers, for example Dietrich 36, 46, and 77 (HBG),
Dietrich 45 (BM), Dietrich 37 (W), which presumably indicates that they are not to be
regarded as syntypes as the Dietrich specimens to which Domin referred in the
protologue were unnumbered. The following unnumbered specimens have been seem
Dietrich s.n. (BRI 345555, HBG (4 sheets), NSW 166774, PR 527083, 527084, PRC,
W). None of the unnumbered sheets is annotated by Domin but the two sheets’ in PR
bear a label on which is typed ‘Hovea heterophylla A. Cunn. var. decipiens Domin’.
Although the unnumbered Dietrich specimens are relatively uniform in appearance (all
of the specimens are in flower except for one twig on one of the sheets in HBG which
bears pods), there is no means of knowing whether or not they were collected at the
same time and place and they are here treated as syntypes. The Leichhardt and Fraser
specimens from ‘towards Brisbane’ and ‘Stradbroke Island’ respectively are in K. It is
probable that Domin examined the Dietrich material that he cited in the protologue
while visiting HBG. It is known that Domin requested and received some Dietrich
duplicates from HBG (Sumner, 1988), but which actual specimens were received is not
known. There is no evidence that Domin had in his possession at PR the two sheets of
unnumbered Dietrich material collected from near the Brisbane River prior to the
publication of his forma decipiens. The plain white label on each sheet, which has
printed at the foot on the right hand side ‘Rev. Dr. K. Domin’ and serves in effect as a
determmavit label, has typed on it ‘Hovea heterophylla A. CUNN. var decipiens
DOMIN’. Each label bears in the bottom left hand comer a stamped ‘akc. no. 23/1960’
which suggests that the specimens were received or processed in 1960 rather than prior

20

J.H. Ross

to 1925. As a consequence, neither sheet of the PR material is selected as the lectotype.
One of the sheets of unnumbered Dietrich material in HBG collected from near the
Brisbane River is selected here from among the syntypes as the lectotype of H.
heterophylla forma decipiens Domin.

NOTES

Given the difficulty often experienced in identifying Hovea species in eastern Australia,
it seems somewhat incongmous that the most widely distributed species is also one of
the easiest to recognize. H. linearis is characterised by the long antrorse usually
appressed to slightly spreading hairs on the branchlets and the lower surface of the
leaves and by the glabrous and usually minutely bullate upper leaf surfaces. The low
stature of the plants and the usually reflexed stipules, which often persist for some time,
further help to distinguish the species. The leaves in H. linearis are not always
dimorphic, and this, coupled with the occurrence of dimorphic leaves in some of the
other species, renders this character less useful in differentiating H. linearis than
indicated by some other workers. An unnamed taxon from the North Kennedy District
in northern Queensland with dimorphic leaves and low stature {Conn & Clarkson 1146,
EntM’isle 2429, Foreman 1771) is superficially similar to H. linearis but has a quite
different indumentum.

Apart from the variation in leaf size and shape encountered on individual plants
because of the usual presence of dimorphic leaves, a considerable amount of variation
in leaf shape is present within the species. The extremes of variation encountered are
exemplified by material of typical H. linearis from the central coastal areas of New
South Wales on the one hand and material of typical H. heterophylla from Tasmania on
the other. In the former the leaves are nearly all linear-oblong and very much longer
than wide (usually at least 12 times longer than wide), the stems are often erect, and the
pod valves are usually glabrous externally or the hairs are confined to the sutures and
base. In typical H. heterophylla the leaves are more variable in shape varying from
ovate or elliptic to linear-oblong or narrow ovate-oblong (usually less than 12 times
longer than wide), the stems are often procumbent or prostrate, and the pod valves are
usually pubescent throughout externally at least when young. Although material of
typical H. linearis and typical H. heterophylla looks different, the extremes are linked
and the two cannot be maintained as distinct species. Initial studies suggested that it
would be possible to accord each variant formal infraspecific rank within H. linearis on
the basis of a combination of the ratio of leaf length to leaf width and the degree of
pubescence of the external surface of the pod valves. However, subsequent studies
revealed the nature of the variation to be more complex and consequently the extremes
are not recognized formally.

Typical H. linearis from the central coastal areas of New South Wales occurs with-
in the distributional range of H. longifolia and some specimens of the two species are
superficially similar. H. longifolia differs in having a different indumentum on the
young stems and lower surfaces of the leaves, flowers on pedicels 4-6 mm long, the
bract on the pedicel usually inserted 2.5-4 mm below the bracteoles, and grows as a
large shrub.

Some specimens of H. linearis are superficially similar to the Western Australian
H. trisperma. The latter differs in the nature of the indumentum on the young stems and
lower surfaces of the leaves, in having larger flowers with an intense purplish-blue
corolla, and glabrous pods.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (total number examined 271)

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Lowcr South East, 3.2 km S of Comaum Forest HQ, 3 Aug. 1966, I.B. Wilson 497

(AD).

QUEENSLAND: Lcichhardt Distr., Blackdown Tableland, ca 35 km SE of Blackwater, 3 Sep. 1971, RJ.
Henderson, L. Durrington & P. Sharpe 935 (BRI, MEL, NSW).

NEW SOUTH wales: Port Jackson, 1 836, Sieher 375 (MEL, PRC, W).

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY: 3 km ENE of Canberra City, NW slopes of Mt Ainslie, 2 Sep. 1983,
M.D. Crisp 7163 (CBG, MEL).

Hovea (Fabaceae): 6

21

victoria: beside Femtree Gully railway line, 0.8 km E of Ringwood, II Dec. 1960, T.B. Muir 2011
(MEL).

TASMANIA: SE of Epping Forest, 6 Sep. 1967,///. Hemsiey 6174 (HO, MEL, NSW).

2. Hovea longifolia R.Br. in W.T.Aiton, Hortus Kew. edn 2, 4:275 (1812); Edwards,
Bot. Reg. 8: t. 614 (1822); DC., Prodr. 2: 1 15 (1825); Thompson & Lee in Lee &
Thompson, FI. New South Wales 101(2): 139 (1984). Phusicarpos longifolia (R.Br.)
Poir. in Lamarck & Poiret, Encycl. meth. Bot. siippl. 4: 400 (1816). type: New South
Wales, Port Jackson, R. Brown, lectotype (here selected): BM; isolectotypes:
E, MEL 1520374. Hovea racemiilosa Benth. in Bindley, Edwards Bot. Reg. 28: 39,
misc. no. 36 (1842); Bindley, Edwards Bot. Reg. 29: t.4 (1843). type: raised from seed
from New South Wales (the alleged Swan River origin is incorrect), lectotype (here
selected): K. Hovea longifolia R.Br. var. normalis Benth., FI. Austral. 2: 173 (1864)
pro parte quoad specim. ‘Port Jackson, R. Brown, Sieber n. 376’. Hovea longifolia
R.Br. forma albiflora Domin, Biblioth. Bot. 22 (89^): 729 (1925) nom. nud.

Shrub to 3 m high; branchlets densely clothed with a short understorey of curled or
crinkled hairs and longer projecting hairs or sometimes the long hairs appressed and
concealing any understorey. Leaves: lamina usually arched up on either side of the
midrib and recurved so as to appear linear-oblong or oblong, (B2-)2-8.5(-l 1.2) cm
long, 0.18-0.85 cm wide, upper surface glabrous, glossy, tbe venation not raised and
unduly prominent, lower surface densely clothed with an understorey of coiled or curled
hairs from which scattered longer hairs project or the hairs exclusively curled or coiled
and discontinuous, the hairs usually ferruginous at least on the midrib; petiole 2.5-4
mm long, densely pubescent like the branchlet. Stipules subulate, 1-1.5 mm long,
densely pubescent, soon deciduous. Inflorescences axillary, subsessile or on peduncles
up to 3 mm long, usually 2- or 3-flowered or sometimes the axis growing on to form a
leaf-bearing shoot. Flowers pedicellate, the pedicels 4-6 mm long, densely clothed with
long hairs which project beyond shorter curled or crinkled hairs; bracteoles ovate to
oblong, 1-2 mm long, shorter than the calyx-tube, sometimes inserted a short distance
below the calyx, densely pubescent like tbe pedicel and bract; bract 1-2 mm long,
inserted (B5-) 2.5-4 mm below the bracteoles. Calyx densely clothed with short coiled
or curled often ferruginous hairs and longer straighter hairs: 2 upper lobes 4-5 mm
long including the tube 2-2.5 mm long; the 3 lower lobes 1.3-2 mm long, the central
one often somewhat reflexed. Standard 6. 8-8. 5 mm long including a claw 1.8-2. 5 mm
long, 8. 5-9. 5 mm wide, usually broader than long, slightly emarginate apically, pale
mauve; wings 6-7.5 mm long including a claw 1.5-2 mm long, 2. 6-3. 2 mm wide; keel
petals 4. 5-5. 2 mm long including a claw 1.5-2 mm long, 2-2.4 mm wide. Stamen-
filaments 3. 7-5. 2 mm long. Ovary subsessile, 1.2-1. 5 mm long, 2-ovulate. Pods sessile,
obliquely globular, ovoid or ellipsoid or sometimes transversely elliptic, 0.8- 1.7 cm
long, 1-1.3 cm wide, densely clothed with curled ferruginous hairs externally when
young and with weak white hairs internally. Seeds elliptic, plump, 5.5-6 mm long,
3.25-3.5 mm wide, 3-3.5 mm thick, black, hilum linear, the aril extending for almost
the length of the seed. (Tig. 3)

DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY

Occurs in coastal areas of New South Wales from Port Stephens in the north
southwards to the foothills of the Southern Tablelands SW of Mt Walimma, just north
of the Victoria border (Fig. 4). One specimen (NSW 166488) with a label bearing the
locality ‘Stanthorpe, Queensland’ is a mixed gathering consisting of 5 twigs of
H. linearis and one of H. longifolia. This is the only record of H. longifolia from
Queensland and as it is so far removed from the nearest known population of the
species the most likely explanation is that the label belongs with the specimens of
H. linearis and that the specimen of H. longifolia was inadvertently mixed in with them.
This suggestion is supported by the presence in other herbaria of apparent duplicates,
collections distributed from NSW which consist entirely of specimens of H. linearis.

Recorded from sandy soil in dry and in wet sclerophyll forest, dry sclerophyll forest
on sandstone, rocky sandstone outcrops and moist alluvial deposits along creeks and in
shaded gullies.

22

J.H. Ross

TYPIFICATION

It is not clear whether R. Brown based his description of H. longifolia on a plant raised
at Kew Gardens from seed introduced by himself in 1805 from New South Wales,
whether the description was based on his specimens collected in Australia, or whether it
was based on both. There is in BM a specimen of H. longifolia with the name ‘Poiretia
ferruginea’ in pencil at the foot of the sheet from a plant cultivated at Kew but, as the
specimen is undated and there is no means of establishing when it was collected and by
whom, it is not considered for the purpose of typification.

There are in BM two sheets collected by R. Brown labelled as type collections of
H. longifolia. One has a typed label in the upper left hand comer indicating that it was
collected at Port Jackson and a printed blue label headed ‘R. Brown, Iter Australiense
1802-5’ in the bottom right hand corner bearing the number 5082 and in Bentham’s
hand ‘Hovea longifolia R. Br.’. The second sheet has a typed label almost midway
down the left hand side of the sheet bearing the locality ‘Queensland; Port Clinton (Port
II)’ and the date ‘Aug. 22nd. 1802’, and in the bottom left hand corner in R. Brown’s
hand a label the verso of which reads ‘Port II Shoal water bay passage’ and a third small
label with the name ‘Hovea longifolia R. Br.’ in Bentham’s hand.

The two sheets in BM represent different taxa. As Brown stated in the protologue
that H. longifolia was a native of New South Wales this eliminates the specimen
collected at Port Clinton in Queensland as a type. However, the possibility exists that
the seeds introduced into cultivation at Kew Gardens by Brown came from either or
both New South Wales and Queensland plants. In order to obviate any confusion, the
specimen numbered 5082 from Port Jackson referred to above is here selected as the
lectotype of H. longifolia. The Port Clinton specimen represents an unnamed taxon that
occurs in the Port Curtis District.

The MEL specimen (1520374) labelled as having been collected by R. Brown at
Lane Cove is a good match of the lectotype in BM and is regarded as an isolectotype.

NOTES

Bentham, FI. Austral. 2:172 (1864), treated H. longifolia as an ‘omnibus species’ by
including in it several species that had been regarded fonnerly as specifically distinct.
Because of this broad concept of H. longifolia adopted by Bentham, the name has been
used widely since for plants from South Australia, Queensland, New South Wales,
Victoria and Tasmania. However, it is clear now that H. longifolia is confined to New
South Wales where it has a fairly restricted distribution.

Hovea longifolia is a relatively uniform species which is characterised by long
linear-oblong or oblong narrow leaves and flowers on long pedicels with the bract
usually inserted 2.5-4 mm below the paired bracteoles.

The northern limit of distribution of H. longifolia is a little south of the southern
limit of distribution of H. acutifolia. Occasional specimens, for example Burgess NSW
168360, MEL 1558625, occur near the southern limit of distribution of H. acutifolia
which, in the absence of flowers and fruits, bear a strong superficial resemblance to
H. longifolia and are difficult to place with certainty. Burgess NSW 168360 from the
Manning River National Forest is sterile; all that remains are the long pedicels and the
persistent bases of the calyces following the fall of the pods. Burgess NSW 168360 bears
a strong resemblance to Burgess NSW 166424 in a similar stage of development from
Glenbrook west of Sydney. There appears to be little doubt that Burgess NSW 166424 is
referrable to H. longifolia. Despite the similarities between the two specimens, Burgess
NSW 168360 is referi'ed with some doubt to H. acutifolia. Examination of the plants in
the field would undoubtedly clarify the matter but these specimens illustrate the
difficulty of naming incomplete atypical herbarium specimens in this genus.

The differences between H. longifolia and H. linearis are discussed under the latter.

Hovea (Fabaceae): 6

23

Fig. 3. Hovea longifolia. a - flowering twig, xl. b - section of stem showing a dense understorey of curled
hairs and longer projecting hairs, x5. c - pedicel showing insertion of the bracteoles and the basal
bract, x4. d - calyx opened out (upper lobes on right), x4. e - standard, x4. f - wing petal, x6. g - keel
petal, x6. h - gynoecium x6. i - fruiting twig, xl. J - seed, side view, x5. k - seed, hilar view, x5. a-c
from Adams 658 (MEL), d-h from Albrecht 3294 (MEL), i-k from Salasoo 2664 (NSW).

24

J.H. Ross

Fig. 4. Distribution of Hovea longifolia.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (total number examined 82)

NEW SOUTH wales: 8 km SE of Clyde Mountain, near Batemans Bay, 1 1 Sep. 1963, LG. Adams 658
(CANB, MEL, NSW). Tahlee, Port Stephens, 23 Oct. 1956, E.F. Constable (NSW 166446). Cumberland State
Forest, West Pennant Hills, 29 Oct. 1976, R. Coveny 8526 (MEL, NSW). Bent’s Basin, 8.1 km S of Wallacia,
9 Sep. 1971, B. Stevenson & R. Coveny 3642 (AD, HO, MEL, NSW). 5 km SE of Wingello, 12 Nov. 1973,
I.R. Telford 3638 (CBG, NSW). 0.5 km SW of Mt Walimma trig, 30 Aug. 1987, D.E. Albrecht 3294 (CBG
MEL, NSW).

3. Hovea acutifoUa A.Cunn. ex G.Don, Gen. Hist. 2: 126 (1832); Benth., FI. Austral.
2: 174 (1864); Stanley & E. Ross, FI. South-eastern Queensland 1; 270 (1983);
Thompson & Lee in Lee & Thompson, FI. New South Wales 101(2); 137 (1984). type:
New South Wales, W of Mt Warning, 1827, A. Cunningham 160. lectotype (here
selected): BM; isolectotype; NSW.

Shrub or slender tree to 4 m high; branchlets densely clothed with curled, crinkled or
straightish hairs, sometimes with longer almost straight hairs projecting beyond a
shorter understorey, occasionally the majority of hairs spreading and villous, hairs
usually ferruginous or grey. Leaves: lamina more or less flat on upper surface on either
side of a depressed midrib or raised on either side of the midrib and broadly V-shaped
in section, sometimes the margins slightly recurved, usually broadest at or near the
middle and tapering evenly towards the apex and base but sometimes obtuse apically,
elliptic or sometimes elliptic-oblong or occasionally obovate, 2.5-8(-10) cm long,
0.4-2. 7 cm wide, upper surface finely reticulate, the primary lateral veins not obviously

Hovea (Fabaceae): 6

25

distinct from the smaller veins, glabrous, lower surface densely clothed with curled or
Skied or whh an understorey of curled or cnnk ed hairs beyond

which longer ^crinkled or straight hairs project, the hairs .. j

venation or the primary lateral veins and smaller ones conspicuously raised and visible
ZS the hai?sSZetimes the hairs confined to the veins and forming a pattern
through which gkbrous patches of lamina visible; petiole lo"g’

nubescent like the branchlet. Stipules subulate, (l-)1.5-2(-3) mm long, aenseiy
pubescent soon deciduous. Inflorescences axillary, subsessile or on peduncles up to

4 mm long and usually 1-3-flowered or sometimes growth extending from apex of
peduncle and inflorescence many-flowered, rarely pseudoracemose. F/ovvers
pedicellate, the pedicels 1.5-4 mm long, densely Pubescent like the

narrow-ovate 1 5-4 mm long, subacute or occasionally obtuse apically, much shorter
™ almSt as long as the &lyx-tube, inserted at the base of or a short distance below
L base of the calyx, pubescent throughout like the pedicel; 1-3 ^

1-2 5 mm below the bracteoles, the apex usually overlapping the base of the bracteo .
Caivx densely clothed with coiled or crinkled ferruginous hairs and scattered longer
often paler crinkled or straightish hairs; upper lip 4.2-5.5 mm long including the tube

5 3 mm iZg; the 3 lower lobes 1. 8-2.5 mm long, 1.5-2 mm wide, deltoid. Standard

9-10 5 mm long including a claw 2-2.8 mm long, 9-13 mm wide, V ^ ^

wider than long mauve with a greenish-yellow basal flare; wings 7 5-9 mm long
including a claw 2-2.5 mm long, 3-4.4 mm wide, keel

a claw 1 8-2 4 mm long, 2-2.6 mm wide, auricled. Stamen-filaments 3.2-5. 8 mm ong.
ota^ sessit or subsesfile, 1 .5-2 mm long, 2-ovulate. Pods on a stipe up to 1 mm ong,
nbliauelv ellipsoid ovoid or globular, sometimes transversely so, 0.9-1. 6 cm long,
0 9-1 2 cm wide, densely clothed with curled ferruginous hairs externally when young

but glabrescent, sparingly to densely clothed with curled or ZPm

Seed^ blackish plump, 4.5-6. 5 mm long, 3-3.6 mm wide, 2. 9-3. 3 mm thick niium
linear, the aril extending for almost the length of the seed or for the entire length of e
seed. (Fig. 5)

Sis inToZhTrnZueS and northern New South Wales from Fraser Island m the
north to the Manning River in the south. ( Fig. 6). Mainly a coastal species which
favours rainforest margins, edges of swampforest or similar favourable conditions such
as stream banks and fertile soil but also recorded from sandy heath and coastal wallum,
wet sclerophyll forest, open Eucalyptus forest and stony hillsides.

Ze'ZsZpbon of//, acutifolia was based in part at least, entirely on ^

collected by Cunningham. There are at K two specimens labelled as haying been
collected by Cunningham at Mt Lindsay (Mt Barney, Telford, 1990),

Wales in 1828. Both specimens came via R. Reward; the specimen numbered 160
mountk in the top left hand corner of the sheet was presented to K by Reward m 1862
and the other, also mounted on the left hand side of a sheet but lacking a collecting
number was presented to K in 1915 by the Lmnean Society of London which had
earlier acquired it from Reward. Two sheets collected by Cunningham are present m
BM. Both are numbered 160 and are labelled as having been collected in 1827 W ot

Mt Warning. A duplicate from BM is present in NSW.

The two specimens at K were collected a year later and from a different locality to
the two specimens at BM, but the four specimens and the duplicate m NSW from BM
are regarded as syntypes of//, acutifolia. I here select the specimen in BM mounted on
the left hand side of the sheet (the right hand side of the sheet is occupied by a specimen
collected by G. Podenzana from Brisbane in Oct. 1891) from among the syntypes as the
lectotype of H. acutifolia.

26

J.H. Ross

NOTES

In its typical foiTn, H. acutifolia is distinguished readily from other eastern state species
by its distinctive broad (usually 1-2.4 cm wide) elliptic leaves which are broadest at or
near the middle and taper evenly to each end. Occasionally, and especially on Fraser
Island, the leaves are narrow (0.4-0. 6 cm wide), for example Walsh 1386 (MEL), but,
as many are still distinctly elliptic the specimens are referrable to H. acutifolia without
difficulty. In New South Wales, and often near the southern range of distribution of the
species, the leaves are namow (less than 0.8 cm wide) linear-oblong, oblong or slightly
obovate-oblong, for example Burgess NSW 168361 from the Manning River National
Forest, Covenv NSW 168358 from Bird Lime Tree, c. 9.6km W of the Pacific Highway,
Maiden & Boorman NSW 168362 from Ellenborough Falls, and such specimens are
reminiscent of H. longifolia. When in flower the specimens are distinguished readily
from H. longifolia as the flowers are on shorter pedicels, the bracts and bracteoles are
longer and the distance between the points of insertion of the bracteoles and bract on
the pedicel is less. Some sterile specimens are more difficult to place with certainty and
reference to them is made under H. longifolia.

Of greater concern are specimens, for example Constable 7046 (NSW) from Old
Man Gibber Mountain, Blaxell NSW 168370 from Little Styx River near Ebor, Blakely
& Shiress NSW 168354 from the Orara River, 16 km S of Ramornie, which are
reminiscent of H. pannosa. Typical H. pannosa is readily distinguishable from typical
H. acutifolia but the range of morphological variation encountered within each species,
and especially within H. pannosa, tends to obscure the limits of each species and makes
it exceedingly difficult to place some specimens with certainty. Fortunately the number
of specimens in question is quite small (less than 2.5% of specimens examined in
H. acutifolia and H. pannosa). It is likely that examination of the plants in the field
would enable these difficult specimens to be placed quite readily. My inclination is to
refer Constable 7046 and Blakely & Shiress NSW 168354 to H. acutifolia as some of the
flowers in each specimen are on distinct peduncles, a feature common in H. acutifolia
but infrequent in H. pannosa. The placement of Blaxell NSW 168370 is more
problematical and it is referred with some doubt to H. acutifolia. The relationship of
H. acutifolia to H. pannosa and to some other taxa in southern Queensland requires
clarification.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (total number examined 221)

QUEENSLAND: Morcton District, Oxenford, S of Brisbane, 17 Aug. 1930, C.E. Hubbard 3691 (BRl).
Moreton District, 4.7 km W of Beerwah on road to Peachester, 25 Aug. 1986, J.H. Ross 3150 (BRl, CBG,
MEL). Wide Bay District, Fraser Island, western shore of Lake Garawongera, Aug. 1984, N.G. Walsh 1386
(BRl, MEL).

NEW SOUTH WALES: Pimlico, 8 km SW of Ballina, 23 Oct. 1961, E.F. Constable 1401 (BRl, MEL,
NSW). Broken Head, 8 km S of Byron Bay, 24 May 1962, E.F. Constable 3013 (BRL MEL, NSW).
Brunswick Heads, 28 Aug. 1 972, R. Coveny 4302 & J. Armstrong (CANB, C BG, MEL, NSW).

Acknowledgements

I am most grateful to a succession of Australian Botanical Liaison Officers (N.S.
Lander, C.R. Dunlop, G. Leach, K.L. Wilson, and P.S. Short) who, when based at the
Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, responded to queries concerning the above
species, compared specimens or arranged for types to be photographed; to the Directors
of BM, BRl, CGE, E, HBG K, NSW, PR, PRC, W for the loan of specimens; and to
Anita Barley (nee Podwyszynski) for executing the illustrations that accompany this
paper.

Hovea (Fabaceae): 6

27

Fig. 5. Hovea acutifolia. a - flowering twig, xl. b - lower surface of leaf showing venation and disposition of
indumentum, x2.5. c - pedicel showing insertion of bracteole and basal bract, x4. d - calyx opened out
(upper lobes on right), x4. c - standard, x4. f - wing petal, x6. g - keel petal, x6. h - gynoecium, x6. i
- fruiting twig, xl. j - seed, side view, x5. k - seed, hilar view, x5. a-d from Hubbard SOHfi (MEL),
e-h from Ross 3150 (MEL), i-k from Constable 65I6A (NSW).

28

J.H. Ross

Fig. 6. Distribution of Hovea acutifoHa.

References

Bcntham, G. (1864). Flora Australieii.sis. Vol. 2. (Lovell Reeve & Co.: London.)

Buchanan, A.M. (1990). Ronald Campbell Gunn (1808-1881). In P.S. Short (ed.). History of Systematic
Botany in Australasia. (Australian Systematic Botany Society Inc.: Melbourne.) pp. 179-192.

Burns, T.E. & Skemp, J.R. (1961). Van Diemen's Land correspondents. Records of the Queen Victoria
Museum Launceston \A.

Haegi, L. (1982). Some observations on Gunn's herbarium of Tasmanian plants. Australian Systematic Botany
Society Newsletter 32: 8-9.

Hooker, J.D. (1856), Flora Tasmaniae. Vol. 1. (Lovell Reeve & Co.: London.)

Sumner. R. (1988). Amalie Dietrich's Australian Botanical Collections. In U. Luttge (ed.). .Amalie Dietrich
H82I-IS9I) German Biologist in .Australia. Studies in international Cultural Relations. 29 (Institute for
Foreign Cultural Relations: Stuttgart, Germany.) pp. 13-50.

Telford. l.R.H. (1990). Moving Mountains - Allan Cunningham and the mountains of southern Queensland.
In P.S. Short (ed.). History of Systematic Botany in Australasia. (Australian Systematic Botany Society
Inc.: Melbourne. ) p. 157.

Paper received 22 June 1995.

Muelleria 9: 29-33 (1996)

Ectocarpiis siliculosus (Dillwyn) Lyngb. from Hopkins River Falls,
Victoria - the first record of a freshwater brown alga in Australia

John A. West & Gerry T. Kraft

School of Botany, University of Melbourne, Parkville, 3052, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Ectocarpiis siliculosus was collected on 24 March 1995 at Hopkins River Falls,
Victoria. (38°20’S, 142°37’E) This site is about 25 km from the river mouth at
Warnambool and about 40 m above sea-level. It grows well and reproduces by
plurilocular sporangia in laboratory culture at 5, 15 and 30% salinity, 15, 20 and 25°C
and 10-30 pmol m-2 s‘* irradiance. This is a first record of a brown alga occurring in
freshwater in the southern hemisphere.

Introduction

The brown marine algae are frequently associated with salt marshes and mangroves in
Australia (Womersley 1987, King 1981). These are subjected to extensive salinity
variation from freshwater to full seawater (0-40%). However no phaeophytes have been
observed in a fully freshwater habitat in Australia (Entwisle 1994) or anywhere else in
the southern hemisphere although several genera are known in the northern hemisphere
(Bourrelly 1968). The crustose species Heribaudiella fluviatilis (Areschoug) Svedelius
of the Lithodermataceae is widely distributed in freshwater streams of the northern
hemisphere (Yoshiaki et a/. 1984, Wehr and Stein 1985, West 1990). Among the
filamentous genera of the Ectocarpaceae Bodanella is recorded from Lake Constance,
Switzerland and Pleurocladia is known from several localities in Scandinavia,
Germany and France. Thus far Ectocarpiis is unknown in truly freshwater habitats
although it sometimes occurs in the saltwater intrusions of rivers in Germany
(D. Muller, personal communication).

Materials and methods

The collection data are as follows: 24 March 1995. Hopkins River Falls, (38°20’S,
142°37’E) Victoria (Fig. 1) . This is a 15 meter high water fall about 25 km from the
river mouth at Warnambool and about 40 m above sea level. Ectocarpiis was growing
with the red alga Caloglossa leprieurii (Montagne) J.Agardh and various green algae
including Mougeotia and Cladophora between the cracks in the basalt rock river bed
at the top of the falls. The few filaments of Ectocarpus available in the collection
were non-reproductive. Water temperature was 16°C. Irradiance at 6:00 p.m. was
1500-1600 pmol mr^ s“* as measured by a Li-Cor Radiometer (Model LI- 189) equipped
with a flathead quantum sensor. Salinity was 1.0 ppt as measured by a Reichert
Automatic Temperature Compensated Hand Refractometer (Model 10419).
Conductivity was 3.0 mS s"' as measured by a Hanna Portable Conductivity Meter
(Model HI 8733).

Living material was placed in a 120 ml screw cap polyethylene sample cup in a
cool chest for two days before transport to the university and then held in a plant growth
cabinet (Percival 1-30 LL) at 15°C, 12:12 LD photoperiod in 10 pmol m“2 s~'
coolwhite fluorescent lighting for several days. During this time plurilocular sporangia
developed and released many spores which germinated to form small thalli that were
then isolated into separate containers. Stocks were maintained in stationary (not aerated

29

30

John A. West & Gerry T. Kraft

Fig. 1 . ftabitat of Ectocarpiis siliculosiis at Hopkins River Falls, Victoria.

or agitated) cultures of 5 ppt seawater [Provasoli Enriched Seawater-(PES/2 with 10 ml
enrichment per liter) - see Starr and Zeikus 1993] in 300 ml Pyrex No. 3250 deep
storage dishes at 15”C, 12:12 LD photoperiod in 15 pmol m"2 s”'. Experimental
cultures were placed in 100 ml Pyrex No. 3140 dishes with 5, 15 and 30 ppt seawater
(PES/2) in 15‘’C on a 75 rpm New Bmnswick Gyrotory Model G-2 shaker at 15pmol
m'2 s"’ coolwhite fluorescent lighting, 12:12 LD photoperiod for 15 days to determine
the growth and reproduction. Additional experiments were undertaken in 20 and 25“C
at 15pmol m-2 s'*’ in stationary culture to determine any changes in growth and
reproduction.

Cultured specimens are available from the first author. Voucher herbarium
specimens of cultured thalli are deposited with the National Herbarium of Victoria
(MEL 2025930).

Eclocarpiis siliculosus

31

Fig. 2. Sporangia of Ectocarpus siliculosus growing in culture.

Results

Growth and reproduction in culture (Fig. 2) were satisfactory in all the water motion,
irradiance, temperature and salinity conditions tested indicating that the population
from Hopkins Falls is still adapted to a wide range of conditions comparable to those in
different field conditions where fully marine populations occur. Spores from the
plurilocular sporangia germinated readily in all conditions giving rise to new
sporophyte plants that also formed plurilocular mitosporangia. Unilocular
meiosporangia were not observed under any conditions tested here. The development
from the initial spore germination to fully mature reproductive sporophyte requires only
3-4 weeks in all conditions used here.

The general characters of the thallus appear to change little in culture as indicated
in Table 1.

Discussion

Although many other Ectocarpus species are known elsewhere only two, viz.
E.siliculosus (Dillwyn) Lyngbye and E.fasciculatiis Harvey, are recognized from
Southern Australia (Womersley 1987). The primary character used in distinguishing the
two species is the scattered elongate plurilocular sporangia of E.siliculosus and the

32

John A. West & Gerry T. Kraft

clustered ovoid plurilocular sporangia of E.fasciculatus. Muller (personal
communication) cautions that the sporophyte morphology is not always reliable in
separating the two species and he ‘gives species assignment only in cases where he has
the full life history in culture’. Muller and Eichenberger (1994) also rely on the presence
of the betaine lipid DGTA (diacyldiglycerylhydroxymethyl-trimethyl-6-alanine)
in E.fasciculatus and its absence in E.siliculosus. Crossing experiments between the two
species were also not successful (Muller and Eichenberger 1995) indicating that the two
species are genetically incompatible.

As indicated in Table 1 there are minor differences in the morphology between
field-collected and laboratory-cultured specimens but these are not sufficient to question
the species identification because these characters, particularly filament diameter and
sporangial shape and size do change somewhat in laboratory culture because of the
changes in water motion, irradiance and salinity levels. It is possible that a lower
temperature of 10“C may be sufficient to stimulate unilocular meiosporangial
development as is needed for the marine populations of Ectocarpus siliculosus from
Europe (Muller 1967).

Acknowledgements

We appreciate the helpful comments of Prof Robert King (UNSW) on the occurence of
Ectocarpus siliculosus in mangroves and estuaries throughout Australia

TABLE 1 . COMPARISON OF CHARACTERS OF ECTOCARPUS SILICULOSUS IN FIELD AND CULTURE .

Character

Field (Womersley 1987)

Culture

habitat

epiphytic, epilithic

not applicable

thallus length

1 - 1 5 cm

1-12 cm

meristem

intercalary, diffuse

intercalary, diffuse

branching

irregular throughout

sparse to irregular

filament diameter (|im)

20-40

15-24

terminal false hairs

present

present

diameter (|im)

8-12

9-10

plurilocular sporangia
shape

length (pm)
diameter (pm)
terminal false hair

elongate-conical to narrow linear

70-160

20-35

5-10 cells

narrow linear
190-570
15-21
5-8 cells

chloroplasts

several elongate, lobed
and parietal, each with
several pyrenoids

several elongate, lobed
and parietal, each with
several pyrenoids

References

Bourrelly. Pierre. (1968). Les Algues d'Eau Douce. Tome II. Les Algues jaimes el brimes. Chrysopkycees.
Pheophvcees, Xanthophvcees el Dialomees. Editions (N. Boubee & (Tie.: Paris.)

Entwislc, T.J. (1994). Macroalgac. In T. J. Entwisle (ed.), Aqualic Ciyplogams ofAusiralia. Austral. Society
of Limnology Special Publication No. 10. pp. 29-105.

King. R.J. (1981). Mangroves and saltmarsh plants. In M. Clayton. & R. King, (cds.). Marine Botany, An
Ausiralasian Perspeclive. (Longman Cheshire; Sydney.) pp. 308-328.

Muller. D.G. (1967). Gencrationswechsel, Kernphasenwechscl und Sexualitiit der Braunalge Ectocarpus
siliculosus im Kulturversuch. Planta 75: 39-54.

Muller, D.G. and W. Eichenberger. (1994). Betaine lipid content and species delimitation in Ectocarpus,
Feldmannia and Hincksia (Ectocarpalcs, Phaeophyceae). European Journal of Phycology
29:219-225.

Muller, D.G. and W. Eichenberger. (1995). Note. Crossing experiments, lipid composition, and the species
concept in Ectocarpus siliculosus and E. Jdsciculatus . (Phaeophyceae, Ectocarpalcs). Journal of
P/ivco/ogt’ 3 1 : 173-176. . . .

Starr, R.C. and J’. Zeikus. (1993). UTEX - The culture collection of algae at the University of Texas at Austin.
1993 list of cultures. Journal of Phycology 29 (Suppl. to No. 2): 1-106.

Ectocarpus siliculosiis

33

Wehr, J D. and J R. Stein. (1985). Studies on the biogeography and ecology of the freshwater phaeophycean
alga Henhaudiella fluviatilis. Journal ofPhvcology 2 1 : 8 1 -92.

West, J (1990). Noteworthy Collections. Washington. Herihaudiella fluvialilis (Areschoug) Svedelius
Maaro±o 31: \44.

Womersley, H.B.S. (1987). The marine benthic flora of southern Australia. Part II. (South Australian
Government Printing Division: Adelaide.) 484 pp.

Yoshizaki, M., K.. Miyaji, and H. Kasaki. (1984). A morphological study of Herihaudiella fluviatilis
(Areschoug) Svedelius (Phaeophyceae) from central Japan. Nankiseihutu 26: 19-23. (in Japanese).

Paper received 22 June 1995.

Muelleria 9 : 35-36 ( 1996 )

New combination in Viola (Violaceae)

T.A. James

Royal Botanic Gardens, Sydney, Mrs Macquaries Road, Sydney, 2000, New South
Wales, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Viola hederacea fiiscoviolacea is recognised as a distinct species; an illustration

and a new combination are provided.

Introduction

Adams (1982) recognised eight subspecies within the Viola hederacea complex in
Australia, including V. hederacea subsp. sieberiana, a taxon previously recognised as a
distinct species (Sprengel 1827). Both earlier and subsequent treatments (Willis 1973;
Curtis 1975; Seppelt 1986; James 1990) have retained V. sieberiana at specific rank,
despite a varietal combination available under V. hederacea (Domin 1928), and in keep-
ing with cytological, morphological and biochemical evidence (Seppelt 1986).
Morphologically at least, three of the other subspecies recognised by Adams, show
closer affmites to V. sieberiana than to V. hederacea. The leaves are consistently ovate
to rhombic in shape, as wide as long or longer and the base cuneate and tapering into the
petiole. The flowers are concolorous and the petals <7 mm long. In comparison the
leaves of V. hederacea are reniform to almost circular, often broader than long and
mostly truncate or cordate at the base; the flowers are mostly discolorous with petals
7-10 mm long. Despite the uniformity of characters within the V. sieberiana alliance,
taxa can be readily distinguished on the basis of flower colour and size and the length of
the flower scape. Viola hederacea subsp. cleistogamoides (Adams 1982) has been
formally raised to specific rank (Seppelt 1986). Viola hederacea subs’p. fuscoviolacea is
recognised as a distinct species (V. sp. A) in the Flora of New South Wales (James 1990)
but requires a new combination.

Taxonomy

Viola fuscoviolacea (L.G. Adams) T.A. James, comb. & slat. nov.

Viola sp. A sensii T.A. James, FI. New South Wales 1 : 438 (1990).

Viola hederacea subsp. /M5Cov/o/acea L.G. Adams, FI. Australia 8;386 (1982) basionym.
type: Victoria: Buckety Plain, Bogong High Plains, 36°56'S, 147°2TE, 6 Jan. 1972, L.G.
Adams 2641 (holotype: CANB; isotypes: K, MEL)

Perennial herb, usually glabrous; stems short; stolons well-developed. Leaves tufted;
lamina broad-ovate to ovate-rhombic, 5-15 mm long, 4-10 mm wide, base cuneate (or
rarely almost truncate), tapering to petiole, margins scalloped to coarsely toothed, apex
obtuse; petioles narrowly winged, 1-3 cm long; stipules free, linear-lanceolate, 1-5 mm
long, glandular-denticulate. Flower-scapes 2-25 mm long, shorter than or just exceeding
leaves; bracteoles mostly below middle. Sepals lanceolate, 1.5-3 mm long, acute, basal
appendages small. Petals 2-3 mm long, blackish-violet (rarely paler); lower petal
obovate-elliptic, c. 2 mm wide, without spur; lateral petals entire, bearded. Capsule
ovoid, 4-7 mm long. (Fig. 1 )

35

36

T.A James

Fig. 1. Habit study of Viola fuscoviolacea. Reproduced from G.J. Harden (ed) (1990).

FLOWERING PERIOD

Mostly November to January.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Occurs in damp sites at edge of montane peatland or in alpine herbfields, often along
creeks. Tablelands of New South Wales; Victoria and Tasmania.

ETYMOLOGY

The name is derived from Latin /i/sc«5 = dark, violaceus = violet, refeiring to the colour
of the corolla (Adams 1982).

Acknowledgements

The author is indebted to Dr. Tim Entwistle for initiating this paper and 1 thank Dr.
Peter Wilson for comments. The illustration is reproduced with kind penuission from
Harden 1990.

References

Adams, L.G. (1982). Violaceac: appendix. Flora of Australia. Vol. 8. (Australian Government Publishing
Service: Canberra.) pp. 386-387.

Curtis, W.M. & Morris D.L. (1975). The Student's Flora of Tasmania. Vol. 1. (Government Printer:
Tasmania.) p. 54.

James, T.A. (1990) Violaceae. In: G.J. Harden (ed.) Flora of New South Wales. Vol. 1. (New South Wales

University Press: Kensington.) pp. 435-441.

Seppelt, R.D. (1986) Violaceae. In: J.P. Jessop & H.R. Toelken (eds) Flora oj South Australia. Vol. 2.
(Government Printer: Adelaide.) pp. 865-871.

Willis, J H. (1973). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol 2. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.) p. 398.

Paper received 28 June 1995.

Muelleria 9: 37-40

A new species of Asplenium L. section Thamnopteris C.Presl
(Aspleniaceae) from Lord Howe Island

David L. Jones

Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O. Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Territory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Asplenium goudeyi, from Lord Howe Island and related to Asplenium australasicum
(J.Sm.) Hook., is described and illustrated.

Introduction

The opportunity is taken here to formally describe a fern, related to Asplenium australa-
sicum (J.Sm.) Hook., that has become a popular horticultural subject in Victoria and
New South Wales. The distinctiveness of the new species was recognised by Chris
Goudey from Lara, Victoria, after he grew for a number of years plants that were
originally collected on Lord Howe Island. Cultivated plants of A. australasicum and the
new species contrast strikingly in growth habit as well as frond features including size,
colour and texture. Holttum (1974) has drawn attention to the importance of growth
habit in the taxonomic delimitation in this group of ferns and this was supported by the
recognition of A. harmanii (Jones 1988). Green (1994) noted that the Lord Howe Island
plants have ‘a narrower, more erect habit, with thicker, more obtuse, glaucous fronds
than those elsewhere’, but concluded that more comparative observations were required.

Methods

Cultivated plants of Asplenium australasicum from various locations in eastern
Australia and the new species from Lord Howe Island have been grown in close
proximity for five years in the glasshouses at the Australian National Botanic Gardens
(ANBG), Canberra. Sporelings of both taxa, raised through two generations by Chris
Goudey, have been found to maintain their individual characteristics. Samples of these
progeny have been grown at the ANBG. Measurements given in descriptions are from
living plants or from herbarium specimens. Notes on habitat were derived from my own
field studies and those of Chris Goudey.

Taxonomy

Asplenium goudeyi D.L. Jones, sp. nov.

affinis Asplenium australasico (J.Sm.) Hook., sed frondibus brevioribus magis coriaceis
obscure viridibus aliquantum glaucis in rosula magis erecta; costis cinereo-viridibus; et
stipite cum porca dorsali obscura, differt.

37

38

David L. Jones

Fig 1 Asplenium mudeyi D.L. Jones, a - abaxial view of leaf, scale-bar =1 cm. b - section of fertile frond
' scale-bar = 2 cm. c - T.S. through frond near base, scale-bar = 1 cm. d - rhizome scale, scale-bar - I
cm. All drawn from Jones 5901 (CBG)

Asplenium goudeyi

39

type: cultivated at Australian National Botanic Gardens, Australian Capital Territory,
Canberra, 22 Apr. 1990, D.L. Jones 5901 (holotype: CBG; isotype: AD, BRI, K, MEL,
NSW, K). provenance: plant originally collected on the Goathouse Traek, Mt Lidgbird,
Lord Howe Island, 1985, CJ. Goudey.

Lithophytic or epiphytic fern with a very condensed spiral of steeply ascending fronds
forming an erect, litter-collecting rosette. Rhizome erect, not branching, stout, woody,
with a large mass of roots bearing copious, persistent, brown root hairs. Scales linear-
lanceolate, c. 30 mm long, c. 2 mm wide, clothing apex of rhizome and base of stipes,
thin-textured, clathrate, dark brown, margins with sparse, hair-like appendages. Fronds
simple, more or less oblanceolate, 50-75 cm long, 12-18 cm wide, dull green with a
glaucous bloom, coriaceous. Stipes short, stout, curved, greenish grey, somewhat shiny,
adaxial surface nearly flat, hardly raised above the lamina, abaxial surface a broad,
shallow vee, the ridge rounded. Lamina tapered to each end, margins entire or undulate,
suddenly incurved in proximal quarter and forming a section c. 3 cm wide with nearly
parallel margins before tapering into a short narrow wing which ends just above the
stipe, apex obtusely apiculate. Costa of similar colour to stipe in proximal half to two
thirds then becoming pale green, flat or shallowly raised adaxially, bluntly keeled
abaxially. Veins forked once or twice near the costa or above the middle, a few of those
on the basal section anastomosing, at an angle of c. 45° to costa, uniting to form a
continuous vein c. 0.5 mm from margins. Sori narrow, linear, present on nearly every
vein or vein branch in the distal half of a fertile frond, extending from near the costa
for three-quarters of the distance to the margin. Indusia c. 0.3 mm wide, reflexed at
maturity. Spores monolete, light brown, wing thickened or folded. (Fig. 1 )

DISTRIBUTION

Endemic on Lord Howe Island where locally common.

HABITAT

Grows as an epiphyte on trees in closed forest and as a lithophyte on basalt rocks,
boulders and cliff faces, sometimes in very exposed situations.

NOTES

Asplenium goudeyi has obvious affinities with A. australasicum but can be distinguished
readily from this species by the much more leathery, dull green, thicker-textured fronds
which have a glaucous appearance (yellow-green in A. australasicum). The fronds are
much shorter than those of A. australasicum, (to 75 cm long compared with over 2 m
long in A. australasicum), and arise at a steeper angle to the rhizome, so that the rosette
is more erect than the widely radiating rosette of A. australasicum. In addition, the stipe
and costa are grey-green (blackish in A. australasicum) and the obtuse ridge on
the abaxial surface of the costa is in marked contrast to the strongly acute ridge of
A. australasicum. These characteristics are retained in cultivation and sporelings of each
species can be distinguished from an early age, the leaf colouration and the erect frond
habit of A. goudeyi being distinctive. Asplenium goudeyi also has some similarities to
A. nidus L. but that species has larger fronds (to 1.5 m long), the midrib on the adaxial
surface is prominently raised and rounded (level with the lamina and fiat in A. goudeyi)
and the sori extend about halfway from the midrib to the lamina margin (about
three-quarters the distance in A. goudeyi).

CONSERVATION STATUS

This species is common and conserved.

etymology

It gives me much pleasure to name this species after Christopher John Goudey, ardent
fern enthusiast and nurseryman from Lara, Victoria. Mr Goudey introduced the species
into cultivation and later recognised its distinctiveness.

40

David L. Jones

SPECIMENS EXAMINED

LORD HOWE island: Smoking Tree Ridge, 22 Oct. 1978, Telford 7063 (CANB); track to Mt Gower, 14
Mar. 1990, Harman s.n. (D.L.Jones 5750) (CANB); E. side of North Hummock, Beauglehole 5589 (MEL).

Acknowledgements

I thank Chris Goudey for bringing this species to my attention and supplying living
plants for study, Colin Harman for discussion about the species, Alex George for the
Latin diagnosis and Bob Chinnock, Mark Clements, Lyn Craven and Jim Croft for
commenting on the manuscript.

References

Green. P.S. (1994). Aspleniaceae, Flora of Australia. Vol. 49. (Australian Government Printing Service:
Canberra.) pp. 591-597.

Holttum, R.E. (1974). Asplenium Linn., sect. Thamnopteris C.Presl. Garderns' Bulletin Straits Settlements 27:
143-154.

Jones, D.L. (1988). New Fern Species from Northern Australia. Austrobaileya 2(5): 475-476.

Revised paper received 25 September 1995.

Mtielleiia 9: 41-50 ( 1996)

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina R.S. Rogers (Orchidaceae) as dis-
tinct from Caladenia lyallii Hook.f. and the description of Caladenia
cracens, a related new species from southern Tasmania

David L. Jones

Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O. Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Territory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Caladenia alpina R.S. Rogers, from mainland south-eastern Australia and Tasmania, is
found to be distinct from C. lyallii Hook.f. which is endemic to New Zealand.
Descriptions are provided for both of these species and a related species, C. cracens,
from southern Tasmania is described as new. All species are illustrated and a key to the
complex is provided.

Introduction

Caladenia lyallii Hook.f was described in 1853 from material collected in Otago, New
Zealand. A common Australian taxon which is widespread in subalpine regions, C.
alpina R.S. Rogers, was described in 1927 from material collected in north-eastern
Victoria (Mts Bogong, Hotham and the Baw Baws) and Mt Kosciusko in south-eastern
New South Wales (Rogers 1927). Caladenia alpina was reduced to synonymy under C.
lycdlii by Rupp & Hatch (1945) and this decision has gained general acceptance (Firth
1965, Gray 1966, Rupp 1969, Nicholls 1969, Willis 1970, Burbidge & Gray 1970,
Curtis 1979, Jones 1988, Clements 1989). Rupp and Hatch did not detail their methods
of investigation nor did they provide evidence to support their conclusion which was
that the two species were ‘entirely identical except for such slight and unimportant
variation as occurs in all plant species’ (Rupp & Hatch 1945). This conclusion is investi-
gated in the light of new observations on these orchids.

Methods

This study is based on the morphological examination of fresh flowers collected from
localities in Australia, a comparison of living plants of all taxa cultivated in the collec-
tion of the Australian National Botanic Gardens, examination of dissected flowers
mounted on cards, also dried and spirit-preserved herbarium specimens and photographs
of living flowers of all of the taxa involved. Herbarium collections (spirit and dried)
were examined from AD, AK, CANB, HO, MEL and WELT. Type specimens of
Caladenia alpina and photographs of the type of C. lyallii (fide M. Clements) have
been examined. Measurements given in descriptions are from living plants or dissected
flowers on cards. Notes on distribution, habitat (particularly soil and plant association)
and conservation status of the Australian species were derived from my own field
studies; those of C. lyallii from discussion with Brian Molloy, references and herbarium
labels.

Discussion

During field studies in mainland south-eastern Australia and Tasmania, the author
became well acquainted with the habit and morphology of the common montane and
subalpine orchid known in Australia as Caladenia lyallii. When an unidentified slender
taxon was discovered in lowland areas of southern Tasmania, it became necessary to
compare specimens of this species with C. lyallii sensu stricto and C. alpina (see

41

42

David L. Jones

Methods section for details). This study showed that the species from southern
Tasmania was undescribed. It also revealed morphological differences (obvious in fresh
flowers) in the labellum and column between C. lyallii and C. alpina.Thus it became
apparent to the author that C. alpina is distinct from C. lyallii and needs to be reinstated.
Also C. lyallii is endemic to New Zealand. Because the identity of these latter two taxa
has been confused, both are here provided with fuller descriptions. The slender species
from lowland areas of southern Tasmania is described as new.

Characters that link all three taxa and distinguish them from superficially similar
taxa such as C. gracilis R.Br. are:
an obovate dorsal sepal;

a broad distinctly trilobate labellum which is usually heavily barred with red;

the lamina calli in 2 to 6 irregular rows extending nearly to the apex of the

labellum;

the calli in the proximal two-thirds prominently stalked, uniformly shaped and
regularly arranged whereas those on the mid-lobe are sessile, very irregularly
arranged and variously shaped.

Taxonomic treatment

KEY TO SPECIES OF THE CALADENIA LYALLII COMPLEX

1 Marginal calli on labellum mid-lobe sessile 1 . Caladenia lyallii

1: Marginal calli on labellum mid-lobe stalked 2

2 Leaf narrowly linear, 3 mm wide or less, scape single-flowered, lamina calli with

small heads and very narrow stalks 3 . Caladenia cracens

2: Leaf linear-oblong to linear-lanceolate, 7 mm wide or more, scape 1 -4-flowered,
lamina calli with large heads and thick stalks 2 . Caladenia alpina

1. Caladenia lyallii Hook.f, FI. nov-zel. 1:247 (1853). type: on grassy hills, Otago,
New Zealand, Dec. 1850, Lyall s.n. (holotype: K photo, fide M. Clements; isotypes: K,
K-L microfiche).

Illustrations: Moore and Edgar, Flora of New Zealand, _wo\. 2, fig. 22 (1970); Mark &
Adams, New Zealand Alpine Plants, plate 228 (1973); Johns and Molloy, Native
Orchids of New Zealand, plate 10 (1983); St George, Wild Orchids in the far South of
New Zealand, \8-\9 (1992)

Tuberous, terrestrial herb growing singly or in loose groups. Tea/' linear-lanceolate, 6-
20 cm long, 1-6 mm wide, dark green, green or reddish at the base, hirsute with patent
glandular and eglandular trichomes, 0.5-1 mm long. Inflorescence 5-25 cm tall, slender
to moderately stout, green or reddish at the base, with patent glandular and eglandular
trichomes as on the leaf Sterile bracts ovate-lanceolate, 12-16 mm long, 5-7 mm wide,
closely sheathing, externally hirsute with short, glandular hairs. Fertile bracts ovate-
lanceolate, 9-17 mm long, 5-6 mm wide, closely sheathing, externally hirsute with short,
glandular hairs. Flowers l-2(-3), 2. 2-2. 8 cm across, white, pale yellow or pink inside,
externally white or pale brownish-pink, sparsely glandular, with a sweet odour; dorsal
sepal incurved and cucullate over the column and labellum, lateral sepals porrect or
deflexed, divergent, petals spreading widely, curving forwards in distal half Dorsal
sepal broadly ovate-elliptical to obovate, 9-15 mm long, 4-6 mm wide, internally
glabrous, externally hirsute with sessile and stalked glandular trichomes, apex obtuse.
Lateral sepals asymmetrically lanceolate, 10-16 mm long, 4-6 mm wide, slightly fal-
cate, internally glabrous, externally as for the dorsal sepal, apex acute to acuminate.
Petals asymmetrically lanceolate, 9-15 mm long, 3-5 mm wide, falcate, internally
glabrous, externally sparsely glandular, apex acuminate. Labellum hinged at the base,
white, usually with prominent, narrow, red transverse bars, sometimes wholly white,
apex white or pale yellow, distinctly trilobate. Lamina broadly oblong-elliptical in out-

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina and the description of Caladenia cracens

43

line when flattened, 7-9 mm long, 5-7 mm wide, porrect or slightly erect in proximal
quarter, then shallowly curved forwards, apex recurved; lateral lobes c. 2.5 mm wide,
erect and column-embracing, anterior margins hardly rounded, slightly irregular, distal
margins with several, irregular, short teeth; mid-lobe c. 3.2 mm long, narrowly debate,
margins yellow with 4-7 pairs of sessile, irregular marginal calli near the base (rarely
one pair stalked) decrescent to the apex of the mid-lobe. Lamina calli in 2-4 (rarely 6)
irregular rows, pale-yellow-headed, extending nearly to the apex of the mid-lobe; calli
stalks becoming shorter towards labellum apex, those on the mid-lobe sessile; basal calli
2 or 4, c. 1.2 mm long, head irregularly ovoid, stalk c. 0.4 mm long, much narrower than
the head; longest lamina calli c. 1.1 mm long, golf-stick-shaped, stalk c. 0.4 mm long,
white. Column 7-8 mm long, c. 2 mm wide, slightly recurved near the base, curved
forwards in distal third, whitish with irregular red, transverse bars, narrowly winged,
central ridge c. 0.7 mm wide. Anther c. 1.6 mm long, c. 1.2 mm wide, white to pinkish,
densely papillate, with a short rostrum. Pollinia 4, c. 1 .3 mm long, roughly boomerang-
shaped, cream, flat, mealy. Stigma c. 1 mm wide, irregularly circular, sunken, green.
Capsules obovoid, 10-14 mm long, 3-4.5 mm wide, with glandular trichomes. (Fig. 1 )

FLOWERING PERIOD
November to February.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Endemic to New Zealand where widely distributed in the North and South Islands,
Auckland Island and Stewart Island; extending from near sea-level in the south to
montane and subalpine regions in the north. It grows in beech forests, subalpine herb-
field, Dracophyllum bog, manuka scrub and tussock grassland.

NOTES

Caladenia lyalli has a generally more slender habit than C. alpina with a narrower leaf
( 1-6 mm wide) and 1 or 2 (rarely 3) generally smaller flowers (2.2-2. 8 cm across). Many
herbarium specimens of C. lyallii from WELT and AK are 8 cm tall or less and have
leaves about 1 mm wide. By contrast even the smallest specimens of C. Ivallii from
Australian herbaria are much more robust than this and with a minimum leaf width of 7
mm. Florally C. lyallii can be distinguished from C. alpina by its squarer or more
angular nearly oblong lateral lobes on the labellum, narrower sharply tapered labellum
mid-lobe, sessile marginal calli and narrower (c. 2 mm wide), non-tapered column.
Caladenia lyallii can be distinguished from C. cracens by its broader lamina calli on
thicker stalks and sessile marginal calli on the labellum mid-lobe.

TYPIFICATION

This species will be lectotypified in a forthcoming publication (Molloy, Clements and
Jones in prep.).

CONSERVATION STATUS
Widespread, common and conserved.

SELECTED SPECIMENS (67 examined):

New Zealand: Lake Manapouri, Jan. 1940, Simpson (AK.); Mt Cook, \89S, Adams (AK)- Mt Peel above
Cobb Valley, Nelson, 12 Jan. 1961, Hvnes (AK); Nelson: Tinline, ATNB, 4 Nov. 1990 Jenks (CHR)-’ Silver
Peaks, Dunedin, Otago, 2 Dec. 1990, Si George (CHR); Burnt Hill, Canterbury Plains, 14 Nov. 1990, Mo/tov
(CHR); Taupo, 29 Nov. 1990, Gibbs (CHR); Mt Stalker, near Herbert, Otago, 9 Dec 1990 St George (CUR)-
Arthurs Pass, Canterbury, 4 Jan. 1991, Molloy (CHR); Sealey Range, 1890, Suter (WELT); Opepe 14 Nov’
1978, Oliver (WELT); Pelukit Bay, 25 Nov. 1892, Kirk (WELT); Kirwan Hill, near Reefton 23 Nov 1950
Ardley (WELT).

2 . Caladenia alpina R.S. Rogers, Trans. & Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia 51: 12
(1927). SYNTYPES: Victoria: Mount Hotham and Mount Bogong, Dec. 1921, Jan. 1924,
A.J. Tadgell; Baw Baws, 3 Jan. 1925, W.H. Nicholls; New South Wa’les' Mount
Kosciusko, Jan. 1924, G. V. Scammell (AD).

44

David L. Jones

Fig. 1 . Caladenia lyallii Hook.f. a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side, d - labellum from
above, flattened oiit. c - longitudinal section of labellum. f - column from side, g - column from front. All
drawn from Molloy (CBG).

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina and the description of Caladenia cracens

45

Illustrations: (all as C. lyallii) W.H. Nicholls, Orchids of Australia, complete ed., plate
226 (1969); C.E. Gray, Victorian Native Orchids, vol. 1,12 (1966); E.R. Rotherham et
ai. Flowers & Plants of New south Wales & Southern Queensland, plate 363 (1975);
A.B.Costin et ai, Kosciusko Alpine Flora, plate 144 (1979); P. Bernhardt, In Hardin,
Flora of New South Wales vol. 4, 205 (1993); T.J. Entwisle, In Walsh and Entwisle,
Flora of Victoria vol. 2, fig. 152j-k (1994).

Tuberous terrestrial herb growing singly or in loose groups. Leu/ linear-oblong to
linear-lanceolate, erect, 12-22 cm long, 1-\S mm wide, dark green, red at the base,
densely hirsute with patent glandular and eglandular trichomes 05-1 mm long.
Inflorescence 15-30 cm tall, stout, reddish at the base, with patent glandular and
eglandular trichomes as on the leaf. Sterile bracts ovate-lanceolate, 18-40 mm long,
8-12 mm wide, closely sheathing to spreading, externally hirsute with short, glandular
hairs. Fertile bracts ovate-lanceolate, 5-15 mm long, 6-8 mm wide, closely sheathing,
externally hirsute with short, glandular hairs. Flowers 1-4, 3-3.5 cm across, white inside,
externally pinkish or sometimes dark red, sparsely to densely glandular, with a faint
musky odour; dorsal sepal incurved and broadly cucullate over the column and
labellum, lateral sepals porrect or slightly erect, parallel or slightly divergent, petals
spreading widely, curving forwards in distal half Dorsal sepal broadly obovate, 9-13
mm long, 5-8 mm wide, internally glabrous, externally hirsute with sessile and stalked
glandular trichomes, apex obtuse to slightly apiculate. Lateral sepals asymmetrically
oblanceolate, 9-15 mm long, 4-6 mm wide, slightly falcate, internally glabrous, exter-
nally as for the dorsal sepal, apex subacute. Petals asymmetrically lanceolate, 9-13 mm
long, 3-5 mm wide, falcate, internally glabrous, externally sparsely glandular, apex
acuminate. Labellum hinged at the base, white with prominent, narrow, red transverse
bars, apex yellow, distinctly trilobate. Lamina broadly ovate-elliptical in outline when
flattened, 5-8 mm long, 4-6.5 mm wide, erect in proximal third then curved forwards,
apex recurved; lateral lobes c. 2.3 mm wide, erect and column-embracing, anterior
margins rounded, slightly irregular, distal margins with 1-4 short, linear, somewhat
irregular calli; mid-lobe c. 2.6 mm long, deflate, margins yellow, apex recurved with c.
3-5 pairs of stalked, linear, marginal calli near the base, decrescent, sessile and irregular
to the apex of the mid-lobe. Lamina calli in 4-6 irregular rows, yellow-headed, extend-
ing nearly to the apex of the mid-lobe; calli stalks becoming shorter towards labellum
apex, those on mid-lobe sessile; basal calli 4, c. 1.3 mm long, head irregularly ovoid,
stalk c. 0.4 mm long, much narrower than head; longest lamina calli c. 1.2 mm long,
golf-stick-shaped, stalk c. 0.5 mm long, white. Column 7-8 mm long, c. 2.8 mm wide,
slightly recurved near the base, curved forwards in distal third, whitish with irregular,
red transverse bars, narrowly winged, central ridge c. 1.5 mm wide. Anther c. 2 mm
long, c. 1.6 mm wide, white to pink, densely papillate with a prominent rostrum.
Pollinia 4, c. 1.2 mm long, roughly boomerang-shaped, cream, flat, mealy. Stigma c. 1 .5
mm wide, more or less circular, sunken, green. Capsules ovoid to obovoid, 15-17 mm
long, 6-7 mm wide, glandular. (Fig. 2)

FLOWERING PERIOD
November to February.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

South-eastern Australia, south from the Brindabella Ranges (A.C.T.) and Snowy
Mountains in south-eastern New South Wales, eastern Victoria, south-western Victoria
(isolated, disjunct western occurrences on high peaks in the Grampians) and Tasmania.
It grows in higher montane and subalpine zones, particularly in snowgum woodland but
also in subalpine herbfield and on the margins of small streams and bogs.

TYPIFICATION

Clements (1989) chose the following specimen in AD as a lectotype: Mt Feathertop,
Dec. 1921, A. J. Tadgell in herb. R. Rogers 2106. This collection was not listed in the
protologue by Rogers and a new lectotype is chosen here. Victoria. Mount Hotham and
Mount Bogong, Dec. 1921, Jan. 1924, A.J. Tadgell (lectotype: here chosen, AD).

46

David L. Jones

NOTES

Caladenia alpina has been included with C. lyallii since the treatment by Rupp and
Hatch (1945). Caladenia alpina has a generally more robust habit than C. lyallii with
broader leaves (7-15 mm wide) and 1-4 larger flowers (3-3.5 cm across). Florally
Caladenia alpina can be distinguished from C. lyallii by its distinctly rounded lateral
lobes on the labellum, broader less-tapered labellum mid-lobe, prominently stalked
marginal calli on the mid-lobe and broader (c. 2.8 mm wide) distinctly tapered column.
Caladenia cracens is much less robust than C. alpina and has leaves less than 3 mm
wide, a single-flowered scape and lamina calli with small heads and very narrow stalks.

Specimens of C. alpina from mountain peaks in southern Tasmania commonly have
a dense vestiture of dark red glands on the exterior of the perianth segments, but are
otherwise similar to plants from northern Tasmania and mainland south-eastern
Australia.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widespread, locally common and well conserved in National Parks and reserves.
SELECTED COLLECTIONS (81 examined)

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY: Mt Ginini, 30 Nov. 1990, Jones 724 7 (CBG); junction of Moonlight
Hollow and Bendora Dam Roads, 24 Nov. \99\, Jones 8558 (CBG).

NEW SOUTH wales: northern slopes of Mt Clarke, Kosciusko National Park, summer 1957, Costin (NSW,
CANB); near Cabramurra, 20 Dec. 1960, Moore 3200 (CANB).

victoria: summit of Mt Stirling, 18 Nov. 1961, Filson 3993 (MEL); Mt Rosea, Grampians, Nov. 1931,
Nicholls (MEL); Razorback, Mt Feathertop, Dec. 1921, Tadgell (MEL).

TASMANIA: Meetus Falls, Eastern Tiers, 22 Nov. 1986, Collier 1933 (HO); near Mt Arrowsmith, 2 Dec.
1989, Collier 4468 (HO); Mt St John, 13 Dec. 1988, Collier 3784 (HO); Ben Lomond, 28 Dec. 1978, Noble
28043 (HO); White Rock, Mt Wellington, Dec. 1929, Rodwav (HO); Franklin River, 15 Dec. 1986, Collier
1874 {HO).

3 . Caladenia cracens D.L. Jones sp. nov.

affinis Caladenia alpinae R.S. Rogers a qua foliis minoribus angustioribus, scapis
tenuioribus, floribus solitaris minoribus roseis usque rubris et segmentis glandulosus
valde et callis laminae pertenuioribus et columna solida relative lata differt.

type: Tasmania, Lenah Valley, near Hobart, 29 Oct. 1990, D. L. Jones 6833 c& C. H.
Broers (holotype: CBG; isotypes: CBG, HO, MEL, NSW).

Tuberous terrestrial herb growing singly or in loose groups. Ten/' narrowly linear, 5-12
cm long, 1-3 mm wide, dark green, purplish-red at the base, sparsely hirsute with patent,
eglandular trichomes c. 2 mm long. Inflorescence 8-15 cm tall, slender, wiry, dark
purplish-red at the base, sparsely hirsute with patent glandular and eglandular trichomes.
Sterile bracts narrowly obovate, 12-16 mm long, 2-3 mm wide, closely sheathing,
externally hirsute with short, glandular hairs. Fertile bracts elliptical-obovate, 7-1 1 mm
long, 3-4.5 mm wide, closely sheathing, externally hirsute with short, glandular hairs.
Flower solitary, 2-2.5 cm across, pale pink to dark pink, densely glandular, with a sweet
odour; dorsal sepal incurved and cucullate over the column and labellum, lateral sepals
porrect, divergent, petals spreading widely, curving forwards in distal half. Dorsal sepal
obovate-spathulate, 8-12 mm long, 3-6 mm wide, internally glabrous, externally densely
glandular with sessile, ovoid, red trichomes, apex broadly obtuse. Lateral sepals
asymmetrically oblanceolate, 8-13 mm long, 3-5 mm wide, slightly falcate, internally
glabrous, externally as for the dorsal sepal, apex subacute to obtuse. Petals asymmetri-
cally lanceolate, 8-12 mm long, 3-5 mm wide, falcate, internally glabrous, externally as
for the dorsal sepal, apex acuminate. Labellum hinged at the base, heavily suffused
and barred with red, apex with cream margins, distinctly trilobate. Lamina broadly
ovate-elliptical in outline when flattened, 7-8 mm long, 4.5-6 mm wide, erect in
proximal third, then shallowly curved forwards, apex recurved; lateral lobes c. 2.2 mm
wide, erect and column-embracing, anterior margins rounded, distal margins irregular,
with’l or 2 pairs of linear, stalked calli towards the sinus with the mid-lobe; mid-lobe c.

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina and the description of Caladenia cracens

47

g

Fig. 2. Caladenia alpina R.S. Rogers, a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side, d - labellum
from above, flattened out. e - longitudinal section of labellum. f - column from side, g - column from front.
All drawn irom Jones 724 7 (CBG).

48

David L. Jones

2.7 mm long, broadly debate, margins cream, with 5-8 pairs of linear marginal calli,
decrescent to the apex of the mid-lobe. Lamina calli in 2-4 irregular rows, very slender,
cream or yellow-headed, extending nearly to the apex of the mid-lobe; calli stalks
becoming shorter towards the labellum apex, those on the mid-lobe sessile; basal calli 2,
c. 0.9 mm long, head irregularly ovoid, stalk c. 0.4 mm long, much narrower than head;
longest lamina calli c. 1 mm long, clavoid, stalk 0.6 mm long, white. Column 6-6.5 mm
long, c. 2.5 mm wide, recurved near the base, curved forwards in distal third, green to
whitish with red suffusions and irregular red transverse bars, narrowly winged, central
ridge c. 1.2 mm wide. Anther c. 1.8 mm long, c. 1.2 mm wide, cream to pinkish, papil-
late, with a short rostrum. Pollinia 4, c. 1.2 mm 16ng, roughly boomerang-shaped,
cream, flat, mealy. Stigma c. 1 .3 mm wide, irregularly circular, sunken, green. Capsules
obovoid, 10-12 mm long, 4-5 mm wide, with glandular trichomes. (Fig. 3)

FLOWERING PERIOD
October and November.

ETYMOLOGY

Derived from the Latin, cracens, neat, graceful, thin, all of which apply to this elegant
species.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Endemic to southern Tasmania where distributed from near sea level to the foothills at
low altitudes. It grows in open forest which has a sparse to densely shrubby understorey,
less commonly in heath. Soils are clay loams, skeletal loams developed on mudstone
and sandy loam.

NOTES

Caladenia cracens has gone unrecognised within the C. lyallii complex. It can be
distinguished from C. lyallii by the stalked marginal glands on the labellum mid-lobe
and smaller lamina calli on narrower stalks. From C. alpina it differs by its much more
slender habit, narrower leaves (1-3 mm wide) and generally smaller (2-2.5 cm across),
pink to reddish flowers with heavily glandular segments, much thinner lamina calli and
a short, relatively broad (2.5 mm wide) column. Caladenia cracens occupies different
habitats, grows at lower altitudes and flowers earlier than C. alpina in Tasmania.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Relatively widespread, common and conserved.

SELECTED COLLECTIONS (23 examined)

TASMANIA: Mountain Park Reserve, near Hobart, 29 Oct. 1990, Jones 6796 & Broers (CBG); south of
Ferntree, 29 Oet. 1990, Jones 6844 & Broers (CBG); Lighthouse Rd, Bruny Island, 22 Oet. 1993, Wapstra
(Jones 12521) (CBG); Huon Rd, Ferntree, 24 Oet. 1993, Wapstra (Jones 12525) (CBG); Little Lagoon Beach,
Southport, 1 Dec. 1986, Collier 1781 (HO); Huon Highway, Hobart, 2 Dec. 1986, Collier 1805 (HO); Safety
Cove, south of Port Arthur, 5 Dec. 1986, Collier 1706 (HO); Longley, 13 Oct. 1984, Moscal 8626 (HO);
Badgers Range, Sheffield, 30 Oct. 1988, Collier 3697 (HO); Snug, Oct. 1928, Giblin 932 (HO); Blackmans
Bay, Oct. \927, Rodway (HO).

Acknowledgements

I thank Brian Molloy, Landcare Research, New Zealand for useful discussions and
supplying material of Caladenia lyallii. Les Rubenach, Flans and Annie Wapstra, Mark
Wapstra, Ross Smith, Ron Williamson, Peter Branwhite, Everett Foster and David
Ziegeler are thanked for supplying specimens. 1 also thank the Directors of the
Australian Orchid Foundation for their support of field operatives and thank the
directors of the herbaria AD, CANB, CFIR, HO, MEL for allowing me access to speci-
mens. Mark Clements and Chris Puttock are thanked for commenting on the manuscript
and Alex George for preparing the Latin diagnosis. Corinna Broers and Barbara Jones

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina and the description of CaUidenia cracens

49

Fig. 3. Caladenia cracens D.L. Jones, a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side, d - labellum
from above, flattened out. e - longitudinal section of labellum. f - column from side, g - column from front.
All drawn from Ziegeler (CBG).

50

David L. Jones

provided valuable technical assistance throughout the project. Marion Garratt prepared
the illustrations from my sketches.

References

Burbidge, N.T. & Gray, M. (1970). Flora of the Australian Capital Territory. (Australian National University
Press: Canberra.) p. 123.

Clements, M.A. (1989). Catalogue of Australian Orchidaceae. Australian Orchid Research 1 : 1-160.

Curtis, W.M. (1979). The Student’s Flora of Tasmania, part 4A. (Government Printer: Hobart, Tasmania.) p.
111 .

Firth, M.J. ( 1965). Native Orchids of Tasmania. (C.L. Richmond & Sons: Devonport, Tasmania.) p. 63.

Gray, C.E. (1966) Victorian Native Orchids. Vol, 1. (Longmans: Australia.) p. 12.

Jones, D.L. ( 1988). Native Orchids of Australia. (Reed Books Pty Ltd: Sydney.) p. 101.

Moore, L.B. & Edgar, E. ( 1970). Flora of New Zealand. Vol. 2. (Government Printer: Wellington.) p. 109.
Nicholls, W.H. (1969). Orchids of Australia. Complete edition. (Thomas Nelson: Melbourne.) p. 61.

Rogers, R. (1927). Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia. Transactions & Proceedings of the Royal
Society of. South Australia 51: 12.

Rupp, H.M.R. (1969), The Orchids of New South Wales facsimile reprint with supplement by D.J.McGillivray
(Australian Medical Publishing Coy.: Sydney.) p. 63.

Rupp, H.M.R. & E. Hatch (1945). Relation of the Orchid Flora of Australia to that of New Zealand.

Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 70: 57,

Willis. J.H. (1970). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. I. 2nd ed. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)
p. 394,

Revised paper received 13 July 1995.

Miielleria 9: 51-62 (1996)

Resolution of the Prasophyllum alpinum R.Br. (Orchidaceae) complex
in mainland south-eastern Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand

David L. Jones

Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O. Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Territory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

An account is presented of the Prasophyllum alpinum complex in subalpine regions of
south-eastern Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand. Four species are recognised;
Prasophyllum sphacelatum is described as new, P. tadgellianum, found to be the
common species from south-eastern Australia, is reinstated from synonymy, P. alpinum
sensu stricto, is a narrow endemic restricted to central and southern Tasmania and P.
colensoi is endemic to New Zealand. All species are illustrated and a key to the complex
is provided.

Introduction

The moist, grassy woodlands and herbfields of subalpine areas in mainland south-
eastern Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand provide suitable growing conditions for
species of Prasophyllum. Two groups are prominent, the species of one group having a
conspicuous white labellum with an inconspicuous callus (represented by P. suttonii
R.S. Rogers & B.Rees), those of the other group having flowers which are dull greenish
or brownish and have a prominent, raised labellum callus. For the latter group the name
Prasophyllum alpinum R.Br. has been commonly interpreted as applicaWe to all speci-
mens/entities in south-eastern Australia and Tasmania (Rupp 1943, Firth 1965, Gray
1966, Nicholls 1969, Burbidge & Gray 1970, Willis 1970, Clements 1989, Curtis 1979,
Jones 1988, Bernhardt & Rowe 1993), with P. tadgellianum R.S. Rogers being treated as
its synonym. Bates (1994) noted that mainland populations differed from P. alpinum in
being outcrossing and having larger flowers and ‘if these are considered distinct at
species level, the name P. tadgellianum applies to them’. Prasophyllum colensoi
J.D.Hook. from similar subalpine areas in New Zealand (Moore & Edgar 1970, Johns &
Molloy 1983) has long been recognised as a New Zealand counterpart of P. alpinum.

Field collections over several years by the author in subalpine regions of south-
eastern New South Wales and north-eastern Victoria have established the existence of
two separate taxa in mainland Australia. Examination of photographs of the types of
P . alpinum {fide M. Clements) and P. colensoi {fide B. Molloy), has clearly shown that
neither of these taxa is present on the Australian mainland. Dissection of fresh material
from Mount Wellington, Tasmania (the type locality of P. alpinum) and of spirit materi-
al of P. colensoi from New Zealand has confirmed these findings. Examination of the
type specimens of P. tadgellianum shows it to be the widespread mainland taxon.
Accordingly the Prasophyllum alpinum complex consists of four taxa, viz. P. alpinum
(here reinterpreted sensu stricto), P. tadgellianum (here reinstated), P. colensoi and P.
sphacelatum, here described as new.

Methods

This study is based on the morphological examination of fresh flowers collected from
localities in south-eastern mainland Australia and Tasmania and field observations and
herbarium collections (spirit and dried) from the following herbaria (AD, CHR, CANB,
HO and MEL.). Type specimens or photographs of types of all pertinent described taxa
have been examined including those in overseas herbaria (BM, K, K-L). Measurements

51

52

David L. Jones

given in descriptions are from living plants or spirit-preserved specimens. Notes on
distribution, habitat (particularly soil and plant associations) and conservation status of
the Australian species were derived from my own field studies; those of P. colemoi
from discussion with Brian Molloy, references and herbarium labels.

Taxonomic history

The first species recognised within the complex was P. alpiniim described by Brown in
1810. Brown’s specimens were collected from the top of Table Mountain (now Mount
Wellington), Hobart, Tasmania (Brown 1810, Clements 1989). Prasophvlhm colemoi
was described by Hooker in 1853 from material collected in New Zealand. The next
taxon to be described was P. frenchii var. tadgellianum by Rogers in 1 922 from speci-
mens collected on Mount Hotham in north-eastern Victoria at an altitude of 5,100 ft. He
redescribed this taxon at specific rank about one year later based on specimens collected
on Mount Bogong, north-eastern Victoria at an altitude of 6,500 ft. Almost from the
time of its description, this latter taxon has been treated as a synonym of P. alpiniim
(Nicholls 1934, Rupp 1943), although some authors have regarded P. tadgellianum as a
valid species (Pescott 1928, Ewart 1930).

Taxonomic treatment

KEY TO SPECIES OF THE PRASOPHYLLUM ALPINUM COMPLEX

1 Flowers 5.5-7 mm long, labellum ovate, erect in distal quarter, column wings about

half as long as the anther 1. Prasophyllum alpiniim

1: Flowers 10 mm or more long, labellum ovate-lanceolate, erect in distal half,
column wings as long as or longer than the anther 2

2 Flowers 14-18 mm long 4. Prasophyllum sphacelatum

2; Flowers 10-12 mm long 3

3 Labellum conspicuously stalked at the base, lateral sepals free throughout or

connate at the very base 2. Prasophyllum colensoi

3: Labellum shortly stalked or subsessile at the base, lateral sepals connate except at
the tip 3. Prasophyllum tadgellianum

1. Prasophyllum alpiniim R.Br., Prodr. 318 (1810). P. fuscum R.Br. var. alpiniim
(R. Br.) C. Moore & Betche, Plandh. FI. NSW 396 (1893). type: Top of Table Mountain
near Derwent River, Tasmania, R. Brown s.n. (lectotype: BM photo; fide M. Clements
1989).

Solitaiy terrestrial tuberous herb 6-20 cm tall. Tubers not seen. Leaf 8-20 cm long, 2-5
mm across at the widest, dark green, base white, free lamina 8-12 cm long, erect,
slender, moderately stiff, longer than inflorescence. Raceme 3-10 cm long, bearing 5-14
subsessile, well-spaced flowers. Floral bracts ovate, c. 1.6 mm long, c. 2 mm wide,
closely sheathing, subacute to obtuse or emarginate. Ovary obpyriform to obovoid, c. 5
mm long, c. 2.5 mm wide, set at about 35° to the rachis. Flowers 5. 5-7. 5 mm long,
green to greenish brown, no scent apparent, some flowers opening freely, often others
remaining closed. Dorsal sepal ovate to elliptical, 4-5 mm long, 2-2.2 mm wide,
decurved, subacute to obtuse, distal margins involute. Lateral sepals connate, straight or
slightly recurved in distal half, involute near the apex. Petals linear-lanceolate, 3.5-4
mm long, c. 1 mm wide, obliquely erect, often overlapped by the margins of the lateral
sepals. Labellum more or less ovate to broadly ovate-lanceolate in outline when
flattened, 3-4 mm long, 2-2.3 mm wide, distinctly clawed, whitish to greenish, proximal
third erect, the margins entire to slightly folded; callus occupying about two-thirds of
the ventral surface of the lamina and of similar shape, raised, very thick, green, shiny,
smooth, extending nearly to the labellum apex. Column porrect from the end of the
ovary, c. 2 mm long, c. 1.5 mm wide; appendages narrowly linear, much shorter than the

Resolution of the Prasophyllum alpinum

53

Fig. 1. Prasophyllum alpinum R.Br. a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side, d - labellum
from above, flattened out. e - labellum from side, f - dorsal sepal flattened out. g - conjoined lateral sepals, h
- petal, i - column from rear, j - column from side, k - column from front. All drawn from H. Wapstra (Jones
///77,CBG).

54

David L. Jones

anther, obtuse, c. 1 .4 mm long, 0.3 mm wide, with connate basal lobes c. 0.4 mm long.
Anther ovate, c. 1.3 mm long, 1.1 mm wide, green to greenish brown, smooth to
rugulose; rostrum short, obtuse. Pollinarium c. 1 mm long, degenerate; viscidium absent
or vestigial; hamulus absent or vestigial; pollinia c. 1 mm long, pale yellow, sectile.
Stigma reniform, c. 1 mm long, c. 0.7 mm wide, the rostellum about as high as the
appendages. Capsules obovoid, c. 6 mm long, 3 mm wide, green, shiny. (Fig. 1)

FLOWERING PERIOD
December to February.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Endemic to Tasmania where common on southern peaks above 650 m. altitude, extend-
ing north to about Cradle Mountain. Grows in subalpine herbfield, sedgeland and in
moist grassy areas among Eucalyptus coccifera J.D.Hook.; occasionally in feldmark.
Sometimes plants are found growing in the cushions of Abrotanella forsterioides
(J.D.Hook.) Benth.

NOTES

Prasophyllum alpinum is a very distinctive species which can be distinguished from
all other species in the complex by its small (5. 5-7. 5 mm long), green to greenish
brown, apparently scentless flowers. In addition the labellum is ovate rather than ovate-
lanceolate as in the other subalpine taxa, with the distal third erect (distal half in other
taxa). The column is very distinctive, being dominated by the anther and with very short
column wings. The flowers of this species generally open freely but in some localities
cleistogamous variants occur, these plants having excessively swollen ovaries at anthe-
sis. Occasional plants may also have racemes of cleistogamous flowers mixed with open
flowers.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widely distributed, locally common and conserved in National Parks.

SELECTED SPECIMENS (24 examined)

TASMANIA: south ridge of Dome Hill, Eldon Range, 6 Feb. 1987, Buchanan (HO); slopes of Mt
Wellington, no date, Chisholm, Herb. W.H.NicholIs (MEL); track to Lake Belcher, Mt Field National Park, 2
Feb. 1969, Canning 2294 (CBG); Mt Barrow, 13 Feb. 1969, Canning 2646 (CBG); Ben Nevis, 18 Feb. 1986,
Collier 1294 (HO); Mt Sedgewick, 27 Dec. 1987, Collier 3055 (HO); Collinsvale Track, Mt Wellington, 7
Feb. 1947, Curtis (HO); Lake Thor, Walls of Jerusalem, 21 Jan. 1983, Moscal 1457 (HO); Cradle Mtn, no
date, Sutton, Herb W.H.NicholIs (MEL).

2 . Prasophyllum colensoi J.D.Hook., FI. N.Z. 1:241-2 (1853). type: Northern and
Middle Islands, common. East coast and interior, W. Colenso; Canterbury, D. Lyall.
(syntypes: K, photo;/it/c M. Clements).

Prasophyllum pauciflorum Colenso, Trans. & Proc. New Zealand Inst. 18: (1886).

type: Hills, country west of Napier; 1883, W. Colenso (holotype: not found) - P.
colensoi is common in this locality (B. Molloy pers. comm.).

Illustrations: T.F. Cheeseman (ed.). Illustrations of the New Zealand Flora, vol. 2. fig.
193 (1914); J.T. Salmon, New Zealand Flowers and Plants in Colour, plate 479 ( 1963);
L.B. Moore and E. Edgar, Flora of New Zealand^ vol. 2, fig. 30 (1970); L.B. Moore &
J.B. Irwin, The Oxford Book of New Zealand Plants 194, fig. 2 (1978); J. Johns and B.
Molloy, Native Orchids of New Zealand, plate 78 (1983).

Solitary terrestrial tuberous herb 10-30 cm tall. Tubers not seen. Leaf \2-25 cm long,
2-5 mm across at the widest, dark green, base white, free lamina 8-12 cm long, erect,
slender, moderately stiff, longer than inflorescence, often partially withered at anthesis.
Raceme 3-12 cm long, bearing 5-20 (rarely more), subsessile, moderately crowded
flowers. Floral bracts ovate c. 1.6 mm long, c. 2 mm wide, closely sheathing, subacute

Resolution of the Prasophyllum alpinum

55

to obtuse or emarginate. Ovary obpyriform to obovoid, c. 4 mm long, 2.3 mm wide, set
at about 40° to the rachis. Flowers 10-11 mm long, yellowish-green to reddish-brown,
lightly scented, opening freely. Dorsal sepal ovate to elliptic-ovate, 6-7 mm long, 2-2.4
mm wide, decurved, obtuse to apiculate, distal margins involute. Lateral sepals linear-
lanceolate, 6-7 mm long, 1.7-2 mm wide, free or connate at the base, recurved in distal
half, parallel to slightly divergent, involute near the apex, bidentate. Petals oblong-
lanceolate to linear-lanceolate, 6-7 mm long, c. 1.5 mm wide, porrect, decurved.
Labellum ovate-lanceolate in outline when flattened, 6-7.5 mm long, 4-4.5 mm wide,
conspicuously stalked, greenish to reddish-brown, prdximal half erect or recurved, the
tip often protruding between the lateral sepals, the margins entire or slightly undulate;
callus occupying about two-thirds of the ventral surface of the lamina and of similar
shape, raised, very thick and fleshy, green to red, shiny, wrinkled near the apex, extend-
ing nearly to the labellum apex. Column porrect from the end of the ovary, c. 2 mm
long, c. 2 mm wide; appendages narrowly linear, falcate, longer than the anther, obtuse,
c. 1 .5 mm long, 0.4 mm wide, with connate basal lobes c. 0.4 mm long. Anther ovate, c.
1.5 mm long, 1.3 mm wide, brown, smooth to rugulose, much shorter than the rostel-
lum; rostrum short, obtuse. Pollinarium c. 1 mm long; viscidium c. 0.2 mm long, ovate,
white; hamulus c. 0.3 mm long, ligulate; pollinia c. 0.9 mm long, linear-clavoid, yellow,
sectile. Stigma reniform, c. 1.3 mm x 1 mm, the rostellum about as high as the
appendages. Capsule obovoid, c. 6 mm long, 3 mm wide, green to red-brown, shiny.
(Fig. 2)

FLOWERING PERIOD
November to January

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Endemic to New Zealand where widely distributed over the North and the South Island;
in the North Island mainly occurring in mountainous regions south of the Central
Volcanic Plateau, but distributed sporadically as far north as Towai (Moore & Edgar
1970); in the South Island occurring from sea level to about 1200 m. altitude. Grows in
subalpine herbfield in tussock grassland and in moist areas around the margins of bogs.

NOTES

Prasophyllum colensoi sensu stricto is similar morphologically to P. tadgellianum but
can be distinguished by the more slender leaf, broader, lanceolate petals, the conspicu-
ously stalked labellum, the lateral sepals being free throughout or connate only at the
very base and the much more angular stigmatic plate which is longer than the anther.
Bates (pers. comm.) maintains that detailed research into the great variation exhibited by
P. colensoi may result in the recognition of further taxa. This notion may be supported
by Hatch (1947), who records this species as having up to forty flowers when fewer than
twenty are consistently reported in the literature.

TYPIFICATION

This species will be lectotypified in a forthcoming publication (Molloy, Clements and
Jones in prep.).

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widely distributed, common and well conserved.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED

NEW ZEALAND: Canterbury, no date, Haas! (MEL); Roto Itu, no date, Kirk (MEL); New Zealand, no date,
Travers (MEL); Bryant Ra., Nelson, 27 Dec. 1990, Jenks (CHR); Puffer Tk, Wellington, 13 Dec. 1990,
Mollov (CHR); Windy Point, Canterbury, 13 Nov. 1990, Molloy (CHR); Ahuriri, Pont Hills, Canterbury, 17
Dec. 1990, Molloy (CHR); Dunedin, Otago, 24 Dec. 1990, St.George (CHR); Mt Herbert, Canterbury, 3 Jan.
1991, /V/o//ov_(CHR); Lake Lyndon, Canterbury, 4 Jan. 1991, Mo//ov (CHR).

3 . Prasophyllum tadgellianum R.S. Rogers, Trans. & Proc. Roy. Soc. South Australia
47:338-339 (1923). type: Victoria, Mount Bogong, 7 Feb. 1923, A.J. Tadgell in herb.

56

David L. Jones

Fig. 2, Prasophyllum colensoi J.D.Hook. a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side, d -
labellum from above, flattened out. e - labellum from side, f - dorsal sepal flattened out. g - conjoined lateral
sepals, h - petal, i - column from rear, j - column from side, k - column from front. All drawn from Lvnden
s.n. (CBG).

Resolution of the PrasophyUum alpinum

57

R.S. Rogers 2954a (lectotype; AD', fide Clements 1989; isolectotype: BM, K, MEL).

Prasophvllum frenchii F.Muell. var. tadgellianiim R.S. Rogers, Trans. & Proc. Roy. Soc.
South Australia 46: 153-154 (1922). type: Victoria, Mount Hotham, 4 Dec. 1914, A.J.
Tadgell in herb. R.S. Rogers (lecto: AD', fide Clements 1989).

Illustrations: (all as PrasophyUum alpinum) W.H. Nicholls, Orchids of Australia,
complete ed., plate 138 (1969); C.E. Gray, Victorian Native Orchids, vol. 1, 78 (1966);
N.T. Burbidge and M. Gray, Flora of the A.C.T., fig. 11 lA (1970); A.B. Costin, M.
Gray, C.J. Toterdell and D.J. Wimbush, Kosciusko Alpine Flora, plates 145 & 146
(1979).

Solitary or tufting terrestrial tuberous herb 10-22 cm tall. Tubers 6-8 mm across, ovoid,
irregular. Lea/' 10-20 cm long, 4-8 mm across at the widest point, dark green and shiny,
base white to green, free lamina 4-8 cm long, moderately stiff, turgid erect or shallowly
incurved or recurved. Raceme 5-8 cm long, the peduncle often enclosed by the leaf at
anthesis, bearing 8-20 subsessile, crowded flowers. Floral bracts broadly ovate, c. 3 mm
long, c. 3 mm wide, closely sheathing, subacute to apiculate. Ovary obpyriform, c. 4
mm long, c. 3 mm wide, set at about 35° to the rachis, the ribs darker. Flowers 10-12
mm long, dark greenish brown to dark reddish brown, lightly scented, the tepals spread-
ing widely. Dorsal sepal ovate-lanceolate, 5. 5-6. 5 mm long, 2. 3-2. 6 mm long, with 3
brown striae, decurved, subacute. Lateral sepals connate except near the apex, obliquely
erect, recurved in distal half, involute near the apex. Petals narrowly linear-lanceolate,
5-5.5 mm long, c. 1 mm wide, porrect or slightly decurved, usually incurved near the
apex. Labellum more or less ovate-lanceolate in outline when flattened, margins sudden-
ly incurved near the middle, 4. 3-4. 6 mm long, 2. 5-2. 8 mm wide, shortly stalked to
subsessile, greenish, whitish or pinkish, proximal half erect to slightly recurved,
the margins entire or slightly undulate; callus occupying most of the ventral surface of
the lamina and of similar shape, raised, green, shiny, fleshy, smooth, extending nearly to
the labellum apex. Column porrect from the end of the ovary, c. 1.5 mm long, c. 2 mm
wide; appendages narrowly oblong, as high as the anther, obtuse, whitish, c. 1.5 mm
long, 0.5 mm wide, with connate basal lobes c. 0.6 mm long. Anther ovate, c. 1 .3 mm
long, 1.5 mm wide, brownish to purplish, rugulose; rostrum short, obtuse. Pollinarium
c. 1 mm long; viscidium c. 0.2 mm long, oblong, white; hamulus c. 0.2 mm long,
ligulate; pollinia c. 0.9 mm long, linear-clavoid, yellow, sectile. Stigma reniform, c. 1.3
mm long, 0.8 mm wide, the rostellum about as high as the appendages. Capsule obovoid
c. 6.5 mm long, c. 4.5 mm wide, green with purplish ribs. (Fig. 3)

FLOWERING PERIOD
January to March

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

South-easten Australia, south from the Brindabella Ranges (A.C.T.) and Snowy
Mountains in south-eastern New South Wales, Victoria (north-east and eastern high-
lands) and Tasmania (Cradle Mountain). Grows in subalpine herbfield, commonly in
tussock grassland but also in seepage areas and around the margins of bogs and streams;
occasionally among snow gums; rarely in feldmark.

NOTES

PrasophyUum tadgellianiim has been commonly treated as a synonym of P. alpinum in
the literature, but the the two are morphologically distinct (see P. alpinum entry) and
their ranges rarely overlap. PrasophyUum tadgellianiim is more likely to be confused
with P. sphacelatum since they are commonly sympatric. PrasophyUum tadgellianiim
can be distinguished from the latter species by its shorter, stouter habit (plants 10-22 cm
tall), a moderately stout, stiff, turgid leaf lamina (hardly withered at anthesis), shorter
racemes (5-8 cm long) with the flowers usually crowded and the perianth segments
overlapping, smaller flowers (10-12 mm long), a smaller, nearly sessile labellum

58

David L. Jones

Fig. 3. Pmsophvllum tadgellianum R.S. Rogers, a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side, d
- labellum from above, flattened out. e - labellum from side, f - dorsal sepal flattened out. g - conjoined lat-
eral sepals, h - petal, i - column from rear, j - column from side, k - column from front. All drawn from
Jones 3464 (CBG).

Resolution of the Prasophyllum alpinum

59

(4. 3-4. 6 mm x 2. 5-2. 8 mm), a thinner, more tapered lamina callus and a proportionately
broader column (1.5 mm x 2 mm) with narrower column wings (0.5 mm wide).
Prasophyllum tadgellianiim tends to favour higher altitudes than P. sphacelatum
(c. 1700 m to c. 2000 m alt.), growing mainly in subalpine and alpine meadows (rarely
feldmark) and reaching its peak of flowering 2-3 weeks later than that species in areas
where both grow sympatrically.

Prasophyllum tadgellianiim is similar morphologically to P. colensoi but can
be distinguished by the moderately stout, stiff, turgid leaf lamina (hardly withered
at anthesis), narrower, linear-lanceolate petals, the nearly sessile labellum, the lateral
sepals being connate throughout and the rounded stigmatic plate which is about as long
as the anther.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widespread, common and conserved in National Parks.

SELECTED SPECIMENS (84 examined)

NEW SOUTH WALES: Lake Albina, Kosciusko National Park, 10 Mar, 1969, Pickard & Covenv 2725
(NSW. MEL); Mt Kosciusko, 16 Jan. 1953, Gauba (CANB); Mt Carruthers. Kosciusko National Park, 7 Feb.
1972. Whitehead & Clemesha (CBG).

victoria: Wombargo Range, 11 Jan. 1971, Beauglehole 35993 (MEL): Diggers Hole Ck, NW of Mt
Nunniong, 22 Jan. 1971, Beauglehole 36436 d E. W. Finch (MEL); Cobberas No.l. 25 Jan. 1971, Beauglehole
36487 & E.W.Finck (MEL); summit of Mt Baw Baw, 12 Feb. 1965, Jones (MEL); Harrietville. Jan. 1932,
Mathews (MEL): near Wilkinson's Memorial Hut, Bogong High Plains. 18 Jan. 1959. Muir 662 (MEL); Mt
Howitt. Dec. 1934. Nicholls, (MEL): Mt Buffalo. Dec. 1939. Stewart (MEL); Lankeys Plain. Dargo High
Plains. 1 Jan. 1982. Walsh 721. (MEL).

T.ASM.ANI.A: Fury Plains, c. 6 km before Waldheim. 24 Jan. 1974, Allen (HO); February Plains, 28 Jan.
\m,.Moscal 1547 (HO).

4. Prasophyllum sphacelatum D.L. Jones, sp. nov.

affinis Prasophyllum tadgelliano R.S. Rogers a qua altiore, plerumque exiliore, lamina
flaccida plerumque marcida, racemo floribus sparsioribus majoribusque, labello majore
distincte unguiculato, callo crasso obtusiore, et columna alls latioribus proportione
perangustiore differt.

type: New South Wales; Southern Tablelands; c. 7 km along Tantangara Dam Rd, 3 Jan
1993, D.L. Jones 11102 and B.E. Jones (holotype: CANB; isot'i'PE: CANB, NSW,
MEL, AD)

Illustrations: (all as Prasophyllum alpinum) E.R. Rotherham et al.. Flowers and Plants
of New South Wales and Southern Queensland, plate 343 (1975); D.L. Jones, Native
Orchids of Australia, 248 (1988).

Solitary or tufting terrestrial tuberous herb 20-38 cm tall. Tubers 8-12 mm across,
ovoid, irregular. Tea/' 28-38 cm long, 2-4 mm across at the widest, dull green, base
white to reddish purple, free lamina 8-14 cm long, erect to flaccid, usually withered
towards the apex. Raceme 8-14 cm long, bearing 6-18 subsessile, well-spaced to moder-
ately crowded flowers. Floral bracts broadly ovate, c. 3 mm long, c. 3 mm wide, closely
sheathing, subacute. Ovary obpyriform, c. 4 mm long, 3 mm wide, set at about 40° to
the rachis. Flowers 14-18 mm long, green to reddish brown, strongly scented, the tepals
spreading widely. Dorsal sepal ovate-lanceolate, 6.5-8 mm long, 3-4 mm wide,
decurved. subacute, often with pale marginal bands. Lateral sepals ranging from com-
pletely free to completely connate, obliquely erect, straight or recurv'ed in distal half,
involute near the apex. Petals linear to narrowly linear-lanceolate, 6. 5-7. 5 mm long,
1-1.2 mm wide, obliquely erect to porrect, sometimes incur\'ed near the apex. Labellum
more or less ovate-lanceolate in outline when flattened, margins gradually incurved near
the middle, 6-7.5 mm long, 3-3.5 mm wide, distinctly clawed, greenish to pinkish,
proximal half erect to recurved, the margins undulate to slightly crisped; callus occupy-
ing most of the ventral surface of the lamina and of similar shape, raised, green, shiny.

60

David L. Jones

smooth to wrinkled, extending nearly to the labellum apex. Column porrect from the end
of the ovary, c. 2 mm long, c. 2 mm wide; appendages broadly obovate, as high as the
anther, broadly obtuse to emarginate, c. 2 mm long, 0.7 mm wide, with connate basal
lobes c. 1 mm long. Anther ovate, c. 1.7 mm long, 1.5 mm wide, brownish to purplish,
rugulose; rostrum short, obtuse. Pollinarium c. 1.5 mm long; viscidium c. 0.25 mm
long, oblong, white; hamulus c. 0.15 mm long, ligulate; pollinia c. 1.2 mm long, linear-
clavoid, yellow, sectile. Stigma ± reniform, c. 1.2 mm long, c. 1 mm wide, the rostellum
about as high as the appendages. Capsule obovoid, c. 8 mm long, c. 5 mm wide, green,
shiny. (Fig. 4)

FLOWERING PERIOD
December to early February.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

South-eastern Australia, south from the Brindabella Ranges (A.C.T.) and Snowy
Mountains in south-eastern New South Wales and eastern Victoria (north-east and
eastern highlands). It grows in subalpine herbfield, often in tussock grassland, and in
seepage areas as well as among grass and shrubs in snow gum {Eucalyptus pauciflora
Sieber ex Sprengel) forest.

NOTES

Prasophyllum sphacelatum has been commonly confused in the literature with P.
alpinum but the two species are morphologically distinct (see P. alpinum entry for its
distinguishing features). The geographic ranges of the two do not overlap and P. sphace-
latum is more likely to be confused in the field with P. tadgellianum, with which it is
often sympatric. Prasophyllum sphacelatum can be distinguished from the latter species
by its taller, more slender habit (plants 22-38 cm tall), an erect to flaccid leaf lamina
which is usually withered towards the apex at flowering time, longer racemes (8-14 cm
long) with the flowers sparse and the perianth segments hardly overlapping, larger flow-
ers (14-18 mm long), a larger, distinctly stalked labellum (6-7.5 mm x 3-3.5 mm), a
thicker, hardly tapered lamina callus and a proportionately narrower column (2 mm x 2
mm) with broader column wings (0.7 mm wide). Prasophyllum sphacelatum tends to
favour lower elevations than P. tadgellianum (c. 1400 m to c. 1700 m alt.), grows
among snow gums and in subalpine meadows and reaches its peak of flowering 2-3
weeks earlier than P. tadgellianum where the two species grow sympatrically.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widespread, common and conserved in National Parks.

ETYMOLOGY

Derived from the Greek, sphakelos, necrosis, mortification, describing the withered leaf
tip at anthesis.

SELECTED SPECIMENS (44 examined)

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY: Murray’s Gap, Bimberi Ra., 3 Jan. 1962, Burbidge & Gray s.n.
(CANB); Mt Gingera, 10 Jan. 1963, Gray s.n. (CANB).

NEW SOUTH wales: Rocky Gully Plains, Kiandra-Adaminaby Rd, 21 Dec. 1985, Clements 3931 (CBG);
Rules Point, 5 Jan. 1986, Clements 3939 (CBG).

victoria: source of Murray River, N of Cobberas, 5 Jan. 1992, Bates (AD, MEL); Rocky Plain, 6 Jan.
1971, Beauglehole 35869 & Rogers (MEL); Lake Hill, SW of Nunniong Plain, 20 Jan. 1971, Beauglehole
36341 & Finch (MEL); Bryces Plain, 10 miles [16 km] SE of Mt Hotham, 18 Jan. 1967, Muir 4548 (MEL);
upper western slopes of Mt Cobberas No. I, 25 Jan. 1970, Muir 4819 (MEL): near Howitt Hut, Dec. 1934,
NichoUs s.n. (MEL).

Resolution of the Pmsophylliim atpinum

61

Fig 4 Prasophyllum sphacelatum D.L.Jones. a - plant habit, b - flower from front, c - flower from side d -
labellum from above, flattened out. e - labellum from side, f - dorsal sepal flattened

sepals, h - petal, i - column from rear, j - column from side, k - column from front. All drawn from Jones

3441 (CBG).

•\rntt'

62

David L. Jones

Acknowledgements

I thank David Ziegeler and Hans and Annie Wapstra for collecting specimens of
Prasophyllum alpinum from Mount Wellington and Brian Molloy for supplying material
of P. colensoi. Specimens were also supplied by Les Rubenach, Ross Smith, Peter
Branwhite, Paul Barnett and Geoff Beilby. Corinna Broers and Barbara Jones provided
valuable technical assistance throughout the project. Marion Garratt is thanked for her
assistance in preparing the illustrations from my sketches. Lyn Craven prepared
the Latin diagnosis and Mark Clements, Mike Crisp and Bob Bates commented on the
manuscript. The Directors of the Australian Orchid Foundation are thanked for their
support of field operatives. 1 also express my thanks to the directors of the herbaria AD,
CHR, HO, MEL for the loan of specimens.

References

Bates, R.J. (1994). In N.G. Walsh & T.J.Entwisle (eds). Flora Qf Victoria. Vol. 2: (Inkata Press: Melbourne.)

p. 881.

Bernhardt, P. & Rowe, R.R. (1993). In G.J. Harden ed. Flora of New South Wales. Vol. 4: 160.

Brown. R. (1810). Prodromus florae Novae Hollandiae et Insulae van-Diemen. (J. Johnson & Co.: London.)
Burbidge, N.T. & Gray, M. (1970). Flora of the Australian Capital Territory. (Australian National University
Press: Canberra.) p. 1 14.

Clements, M.A. (1989). Catalogue of Australian Orchidaceae. Australian Orchid Research 1: 1-160.

Curtis, W.M. (1979). The Student's Flora of Tasmania. Part 4A. (Government Printer: Hobart.) p. 75.

Ewart, A.J. (1930). Flora of Victoria, 314, Government Printer, Victoria, Australia.

Firth, M.J. (1965). Native Orchids of Tasmania. (C.L. Richmond & Sons: Devonport.) p. 21.

Gray, C.E. (1966). Victorian Native Orchids. Vol. 1. (Longmans: Australia.) p. 78.

Hatch, E.D. (1947). The New Zealand fonns of Prasophyllum R.Br., Transactions of the Royal Society of New
Zealand 16: 2i9-9i.

Johns, J. & Molloy, B. ( 1983). Native Orchids of New Zealand. (A.H. & A.W. Reed: Wellington.) p. 54.

Jones, D.L. (1988). Native Orchids of Australia. (Reed Books Pty Ltd: Sydney.) p. 248.

Moore, L.B. & Edgar, E. (1970). Flora of New Zealand. Vol. 2. (Government Printer, Wellington.) p. 148.
Nicholls, W.H. (1934). Three species of the genus Prasophyllum R.Br. Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Victoria, new series 46: 3 1 .

Nicholls, W.H. (1969). Orchids of Australia. (Thomas Nelson: Melbourne.) p. 35.

Pescott, E.E. (1928). The Orchids of Victoria. (Horticultural Press: Melbourne.) p. 32.

Rupp, H.M.R. (1943). The Orchids of New South Wales. (Australian Medical Publishing Coy.: Sydney.) p. 28.
Willis, J.H. (1970). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 1 (2nd edition). (Melbourne University Press:
Carlton.)

Revised paper received 13 July 1995.

Muelleria 9 : 63-66 ( 1996 )

Two new endemic species oi Sagina L, (Caryophyllaceae) from
Australia

L.G. Adams

Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O. Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Territory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Sagina namadgi and S. diemensis from SE Australia are newly described and illustrated,
and their ecology briefly discussed. A key to all Sagina spp. recorded from Australia is
provided.

Introduction

Prior to about 1 960, all Australian specimens of Sagina, apart from the predominantly
coastal S. maritima G.Don (possibly native here) had been equated with the cosmopoli-
tan adventives S. apetala Ard. or S. procumbens L., in the case of perennials mostly the
latter. In 1962 M. Gray (in sched.) and other taxonomists at CANB noticed that a form
of ‘5. procumbens’ collected from the Brindabella Range, A.C.T. had some anomalous
features. For example, seed of this taxon was quite unlike that of S. procumbens, being
larger and much more rounded, lacking a dorsal groove, and with a glossy (not dull),
colliculate (not tuberculate) testa. Following examination of further material of ‘S.
procumbens ', it became apparent that a long-overlooked, undescribed, indigenous taxon
exists, and furthermore is quite widespread in cool-temperate SE Australia. It is here
described as S. namadgi.

In the early 1980s another indigenous species was found, collected on and near Mt
Anne, in southwestern Tasmania. This taxon has the same seed type as S. namadgi
(although not nearly as glossy), but differs in other aspects, mainly its habit, the indu-
mentum of its foliage, and its relatively conspicuous white flowers. It is here described
as S. diemensis.

Taxonomy

Sagina namadgi L.G. Adams, sp. nov. (‘sp. A’ in sched.)

Sagina sp., N.T. Burb. & M. Gray, Flora of the Australian Capital Territory, p. 162
(1979).

[Sagina procumbens sensu J.Thomps. & M.Gray, Telopea 2(3); 318 (1981), /?ro parte
min., non L.]

Simulans S. prociimbenti, sed sepalis c. 1.5 mm longis, et seminibus atrofuscis vel
nigribus reniformibus ad subglobosis sine sulco dorsali, differ!; et ab S. diemensi sepalis
ad basim leviter rotundatis, et seminibus splendentibus, 0.4-0. 5 mm longis, differ!.

HOLOTYPUS: Australian Capital Territory: c. 10 miles [16 km] N of Boboyan homestead,
35°43’S 149°00’E, alt. c. 1000 m, 17 Feb. \962, L.G. Adams 539 (CASiQ 152061).

Perennial, entirely glabrous, with fibrous roots often adventitious from nodes. Stems
lax, diffusely branching and often stoloniferous, 2-15 cm long; basal leaf-rosette absent
at anthesis. Leaves sessile, linear, the apex acute or mucronulate, not aristate, 4-10 mm
long, 0.3-0. 5 mm wide. Flowers 4-merous. Pedicels 4-15 mm long, in fruit at first
deflexed immediately below capsule, later erect. Sepals broad-ovate to suborbicular, ±
1.5 mm long, with narrow scarious margins, becoming appressed to ripe fruit. Petals

63

64

L.G. Adams

broad-obovate, entire, white, ± half length of sepals. Stamens 4 or 8. Styles 3 or 4.
Capsule broad-ovoid to subglobose, 2-3 mm long, up to twice length of sepals. Seeds
iglossy, dark grey or black, tumid-reniform to subglobose, not grooved dorsally, bluntly
colliculate, 0.4-0. 5 mm long. (Fig. 1 a-e)

DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY

Sagina namadgi is indigenous to cool-temperate eastern Australia, occurring in sub-
alpine flushes, sphagnum bogs and on creek margins, often in Eucalyptus pauciflora
woodland. Recorded associated species are: Callistemon ?pityoides, Leptospermiim sp..
Ranunculus pimpinellifolius, Plantago antarctica, Carex spp., Cyperus sp., Schoenus
sp., Epilohium sp., Spiranthes sinensis and Utricidaria dichotoma. Like the adventive
Sagina spp. it is an inconspicuous plant, no doubt often overlooked (or passed over in
mistake for the naturalised perennial S. procumhens L., to which it bears a superficial
resemblance), and thus probably more common than current records indicate.

NOTES

The new species is most readily distinguished from all others occurring in Australia by
the combination of its glabrous, perennial habit, awnless leaves, the basal rosette absent
at flowering, non-spreading sepals in fruit, and significantly different seeds.

Etymology

The epithet commemorates Namadgi National Park, A.C.T., whence came the first col-
lections to be recognised as a taxon new to science.

ADDITIONAL SPECIMENS EXAMINED

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY: entrance gate, Gudgenby Station, 23 Dec. 1958, N.T. Bwbidge 6215 &
M. Gray (CANB); Murrays Gap, Bimberi Range, 12 Feb. 1961, A. T. Burhidge 6955 (CANB).

NEW SOUTH wales: Tia River, near Walcha., Nov. 1897, J.H. Maiden s.n (NSW); Jindabyne., Jan. 1899,
J.H. Maiden & W. Forsyth s.n (NSW); Ben Lomond, Dec. 1899, J.H. Maiden s.n. (NSW); Happy Jacks Plain,
headwaters of Happy Jacks River, e. 24 km S of Kiandra, 18 Jan. 1958, J. Thompson s.n. (NSW); Sherlock
Creek, 16 km S of Captains Flat, 25 Dec. 1965, B.G. Briggs s.n. (NSW); Cave Creek, 29 km NNE of Kiandra,
alt. 1200 m, 12 Dec. 1969, R. Coveny 2675a & A. Rodd (NSW); Dead Horse Gap on Jindabyne-Khancoban
road, 8 km S of Mt Kosciusko summit, 26 Feb. 1974, B.G. Briggs 4780 (NSW).

victoria: Rocky Plain, c. 24 km W of Wulgulmerang, 3 Feb. 1968, K. Rogers s.n. (MEL),

TASMANIA: King’s Island [= King Island, 39°55’S 144°00’E], Nov. 1887, C. Walter s.n. (NSW); Pegg
Creek, Hartwell Cove, A. Moscal 10020 (HO, AD).

2. Sagina diemensis L.G. Adams, sp. nov. (‘sp. B’ in sched.)

Simulans S. procumhenti, sed planta plerumque glandulo-hirta ubique, petalis con-
spicuis quam sepalis longioribus, et seminibus sine sulco dorsali, differt; et ab S. namad-
gi sepalis ad basim saccatis porcatis, et seminibus impolitis, 0.5-0. 7 mm longis, differt.

HOLOTYPUS: Tasmania: crevices in dolomite outcrops, NE ridge of Mt Anne, 42°56’S
146°26’E, alt. 980 m, 31 Dec. 1984, 4.M. Buchanan 5115 (HO 88950).

Cushion-forming perennial, glandular-hairy throughout (rarely glabrous), with fibrous
roots often adventitious from nodes. Stems lax, stoloniferous, up to 10 cm long, diffuse-
ly branching laterally from short caudex that bears a non-flowering leaf-rosette. Leaves
sessile, linear, the apex acute or shortly mucronulate, usually glandular-ciliate, 2-10(-14)
X 0.2-0. 5 mm, usually with narrow scarious margins. Flowers 4-merous. Pedicels erect,
at no time deflexed, 6-12 mm long. Sepals oblong-elliptic with saccate, ± ridged base, 2-
2.5 mm long, the scarious margins often purple-tinged, ± appressed to ripe fruit. Petals
ovate to suborbicular, entire, white, 2. 5-3. 5 mm long, rarely absent. Stamens 4 or 8.
Styles 4. Capsule ovoid, 2.5-2.75 mm long, slightly longer than sepals. Seeds matt or
scarcely glossy, dark reddish brown, oblique-reniform, not grooved dorsally, bluntly
tuberculate, 0.5-0. 7 mm long. (Fig. 1 f-j)

New species of Sagina

65

1995

Fig, 1 . a-e Sagina diemensis. a - habit xl . b - flower x6. c - dehisced capsule and sepals x8. d - seed x30. e -
leafxS. f-j Sagina namadgi. f- habit (lax plant) xl. g - habit (small plant) xl. h - flower, with sepal drawn
back to show internal organs xl5. i - dehisced capsule and sepals xlO. j - seed x30. k - leaf and node x5.

66

L.G. Adams

DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY

Sagina diemensis is known only from the immediate vicinity of Mt Anne and headwa-
ters of the Weld River, southwestern Tasmania, occurring on dolomite outcrops.
Recorded associated species are Danthonia diemenica, Isolepis sp., Oreonryrrhis gunnii
and Oreoporanthera petalifera.

NOTES

Sagina diemensis is readily distinguished from other Sagina species by its persistent
basal leaf-rosette, usually strongly glandularly-hairy foliage and inflorescence, and
when in flower, by the saccate base of the sepals and the relatively conspicuous white
corolla. A single collection {J. Davies 30) from the same area as the type is entirely
glabrous and lacks petals; it is otherwise closely similar to typical S. diemensis (particu-
larly in the size, shape and ornamentation of the seeds) and seems to be an aberrant form
of it.

ETYMOLOGY

The epithet refers to Van Diemen’s Land, the early name for Tasmania, where the taxon
seems to be endemic.

ADDITIONAL SPECIMENS EXAMINED

Tasmania: Mt Anne, J.B. Davies DN 547465 (HO); Weld Arch, Weld River, alt. 360 m, 17 Jan. 1988, D.
Ziegeler s.n. (HO); Mt Anne, NE ridge, alt. 980 m, 30 Dec. 1984, J. Davies SO (HO); ibid., alt. 980 m, 31 Dec
1984, A.M. Buchanan 5104 (HO); ibid., alt. 850 m, 20 Jan. 1990, L. Gilfedder ANBG 2228 (CBG).

KEY TO SPECIES IN AUSTRALIA

1 Seeds with dorsal margin flattened or grooved 2

1 : Seeds with dorsal margin rounded, never flattened or grooved 4

2 Perennial with fibrous roots, often adventitious from nodes; stems diffusely

branching with sterile axillary shoots common, often mat-forming; sepals in
mature fruit broad-ovate to suborbicular *Sagina prociimbens

2: Annual with slender branching tap-root; stems erect or ascending, lacking sterile
axillary shoots and rarely mat-forming; sepals in mature fruit
ovate 3

3 Leaves (at least the upper) often basally ciliate, the apex subulate, aristate;

inflorescence often glandular; sepals in fruit spreading, usually distinctly shorter
than capsule Sagina apetala

3; Leaves never ciliate, the apex obtuse or acute, often mucronulate but not aristate;
inflorescence never glandular; sepals in fruit erect, ± equalling capsule
i?*)Sagina maritima

4 Plant glandular-hairy throughout (rarely glabrous); basal leaf-rosette persistent;

sepals 2-2.5 mm long with saccate, ± ridged base, a little shorter than mature
capsule; petals distinctly longer than sepals; seeds ± matt, dark reddish brown,
0.5-0. 7 mm long Sagina diemensis

4: Plant always glabrous; basal leaf-rosette absent at flowering; sepals ± 1.5 mm long
with smoothly rounded base, much shorter than mature capsule; petals much shorter
than sepals; seeds glossy, dark grey or black, 0.4-0. 5 mm long Sagina namadgi

Acknowledgements

Thanks are due to Alex Buchanan (HO) and Max Gray (CANB) for useful comments
during early draft preparation, to Kevin Thiele for the line illustrations, and to the
Directors of HO and NSW herbaria for loans of specimens.

Paper received 13 July 1995

Muelleria9: 67-73 (1996)

Miscellaneous notes on Genoplesium ciliatum (Ewart & B.Rees)
D.L.Jones & M.A.Clem. (Orchidaceae)

David L. Jones' & Jeffrey A. Jeanes"

' Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O. Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Territory, Australia.

^ National Herbarium of Victoria, Royal Botanic Gardens, Melbourne, Birdwood
Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

The identity of Genoplesium ciliatum (Ewart & B.Rees) D.L.Jones & M.A.Clem. is
established and a full description provided. Its relationship with other members of the
Genoplesium archeri (Hook.f.) D.L.Jones & M.A.Clem. complex is discussed and a
preliminary key provided.

Introduction

Genoplesium ciliatum (Ewart & B.Rees) D.L.Jones & M.A.Clem. has had a rather inter-
esting taxonomic history and remains poorly known today. The main reasons for this
appear to be the minimal information supplied in the type description, both taxonomic
and ecological, and the lack of any subsequent attempt by botanists to resolve the identi-
ty of the taxon. This paper clarifies various aspects of the species.

Methods

This study is based on the moiphological examination of fresh flowers collected from
localities in Victoria and South Australia, dried and spirit-preserved herbarium speci-
mens from AD, CANB, CBG and MEL and photographs of living flowers of the taxa
involved. Type specimens of all pertinent taxa have been examined. Measurements
given in the description are from living plants. Notes on Victorian distribution, habitat
(particularly soil and plant association) and conservation status were derived from our
own field studies; those from South Australia were from R. Bates and D. Murfet.

Taxonomic history

Following the description of Prasophyllum ciliatum by Ewart & Rees (1912), the
species was discussed at various depth in three publications, Pescott (1928), Dickens
(1929) and Ewart (1931). Nicholls (1931) reduced it to synonymy under Prasophyllum
archeri Hook.f (= Genoplesium archeri) and this approach was followed by others:
Willis (1962), Nicholls (1969), Woolcock & Woolcock (1984) and Clements (1989).
Jones and Clements (1989) restored the species when reinterpreting the genus
Genoplesium and made the new combination for the species. Recently, descriptions of
the species have been given in Walsh and Entwisle (1994) and in Backhouse and Jeanes
(1995). The description by Jones in Walsh and Entwisle (1994) is erroneous being based
on a small, few-floweied variant of G. archeri which occurs in some coastal districts of
Victoria.

Taxonomy

Genoplesium ciliatum (Ewart & B.Rees) D.L.Jones & M.A.Clem., Lindleyana 4(3):
142 (1989). Prasophyllum ciliatum Ewart & B.Rees, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (new ser.)

67

68

David L. Jones & Jeffrey A. Jeanes

25: 1 1 1, t. 6, fig. d-g (1912), basionym. type: Green Valley, County of Talbot, Victoria,
19 June 1910, F.M. Reader, herb. C.W. Sutton (holotype.- MEL). Prasophylhim archeri
Hook.f. var. deirdrae Nicholls, Viet. Nat. 49: 114 (1932). type: Maryborough, Victoria,
April 1932, A. Chisholm (holotype: MEL), syn nov.

Illustrations: R.J. Bates & J.Z. Weber, Orchids of South Australia, plate 143 (as
Genoplesium archeri) (1990); N.G. Walsh & T.J. Entwisle, Flora of Victoria, vol. 2, fig
188a-c, plate 16a-c (as Genoplesium archeri) (1994); G.N. Backhouse & J.A. Jeanes,
The Orchids of Victoria, p. 194 (1995).

Terrestrial tuberous herb. Leaf 5-\3 cm long, 1-1.5 mm wide, terete, reddish at the
base; lamina 6-13 mm long, 2-2.5 mm wide, subulate, sheathing the scape, ending 10-15
mm below the lowest flower. Inflorescence 6-15 cm tall, bearing (l-)5-8(- 15) flowers in
a crowded spike 0.5-2(-3) cm long. Flowers 4-5 mm across, green or yellowish green
with pale purple striae, nodding to porrect, with porrect to obliquely erect lateral sepals.
Ovaiy linear-ovoid, 3-3.5 mm long, curved. Dorsal sepal c. 4 mm long, c. 2.4 mm wide,
broadly ovate, cucullate, glabrous, green to yellow-green, margins with a pale purple
narrow band, three similar longitudinal bands often also present. Lateral sepals linear-
lanceolate, c. 5 mm long, c. 1 .2 mm wide, slightly gibbous at the base, green to yellow-
green, parallel or slightly divergent, distal margins incurved, apex eglandular or with a
vestigial gland. Petals narrow-ovate, c. 3.7 mm long, c. 1.5 mm wide, acuminate,
deflexed, greenish with pale purple stripes and marginal bands, glabrous. Labellum
broadly elliptical to obovate-elliptical, 3-3.5 mm long, c. 2 mm wide, light reddish to
reddish purple, thick and fleshy, distal margins with a few coarse spreading purple cilia
c. 0.6 mm long, apex apiculate to subacuminate; callus narrowly ovate-oblong, occupy-
ing about one third of the ventral surface of the lamina, extending to the labellum apex,
purplish black, thickest and broadest near the base then gradually tapered. Column c. 2
mm long, deflexed; foot c. 0.4 mm long, ligulate, curved. Column wings very shallowly
notched, the lobes strongly dimorphic, hardly divergent; posterior lobe linear-oblong, c.
0.2 mm wide, pale, entire, obtuse; anterior lobe ovate-lanceolate, c. 0.5 mm wide,
acuminate, mauve, coarsely denticulate-papillose. Anther c. 0.9 mm long, with a filifonn
rostrum c. 0.3 mm long. Stigma naiTowly ovate-elliptical, c. 0.8 mm long, c. 0.6 mm
wide. Pollinarium c. 1 mm long; pollinia c. 0.8 mm long, yellow, coarsely granular;
caudicle c. 0.15 mm long; viscidium c. 0.15 mm across. Capsule obovoid, 5-6 mm long,
2-3 mm long, green. (Figs. 1 & 2)

FLOWERING PERIOD

February to June, depending upon quantity and timing of rainfall.

DISTRIBUTION

Widespread in central and western Victoria with an isolated eastern record from
Wilsons Promontory National Park. Apart from localities in the specimens list below,
plants of G. ciliatum have been located recently in the Victorian goldfields at Barfold,
Sandon, Stawell and Deep Lead. They have also been observed in more mesic habitats
near Bannockburn and on the Momington Peninsula. In South Australia it is restricted to
areas near Mt Compass and Mount Gambier (D. Murfet, pers. comm.. Bates and Weber
1990). (Fig. 3)

Habitat

In inland areas it grows in grassy woodlands often favouring moist depressions, while
nearer the coast it usually grows in heathlands and heathy woodlands, especially where
the habitat has been opened up by regular slashing or mowing. Soils are usually well-
drained sandy loams that may also be gravelly. In South Australia it grows on small
hummocks in perched swamps (D. Murfet, comm.).

TYPIFICATION

The holotype (labelled type no. 2000) consists of 2 specimens, that on the LHS (marked
‘broad labella’) with one flower and the one on the RHS (marked ‘acuminate labella’)

Miscellaneous notes on Genoplesiiim ciliatum

69

Fig. 1. Genoplesium ciliatum (Ewart & B.Rees) D.L.Jones & M.A.Clem. a & b - plant habit, c & e - flower
from front, d - flower from side, f - labellum froi.i above, flattened out. g - labellum from side, h - column
from side, i - column from front, j - pollinarium. a, c, d, f-j, drawn from Foster s.n. (CBG); b & e, drawn
from Bates 27912 (CBG).

70

David L. Jones & Jeffrey A. Jeanes

with 2 flowers. Originally more flowers would have been present as Nicholls (1931)
records that flowers from these specimens were removed and softened for drawing. The
type collection was obviously made from plants in the later stages of flowering as
evidenced by the swollen ovaries and nearly closed perianth segments on the specimens.
Another collection at MEL (no. 1418, herb. C.S. Sutton) made on 11 May 1910 appar-
ently by Reader at the type locality, is of interest because the specimen has 4 flowers
and appears to have been pressed while these were in good condition. This is not part of
the type collection (although it has been annotated as holotype) because the date is earli-
er than when the type collection was made. It is tempting to speculate that the specimens
used as the type were collected subsequent to this earlier collection being received and
perceived to be of interest.

Limited information about the species can be gained from the type description and
illustrations because of the very brief nature of the description and rather poor quality of
the accompanying line drawings which appear to have been drawn from material past its
prime. The fringe of short cilia along the distal labellum margin, the papillate anterior
lobes of the column appendages and glabrous petals show it to be a member of the
Genoplesium archeri complex. No information is given as to the number of flowers.

Fig. 2. Genoplesium cilialum in-sitii, Brisbane Ranges National Park.

Miscellaneous notes on Genoplesium ciliatum

71

Fig. 3. Distribution of Genoplesium ciliatum.

their colour or tepal orientation. The species is likened by Ewart and Rees to
Prasophyllum woollsii F.Muell. (= Genoplesium woollsii) a predominantly dark reddish
brown flowered species from the central coast and ranges of New South Wales. The two
species have little in common and Ewart and Rees appear to have followed Bentham
(1873) in his placement of Prasophyllum woollsii close to P. archeri and P. intricatiim
Benth., both members of the Genoplesium archeri complex.

The County of Talbot is in the central goldfields of Victoria. It is a roughly circular
region bounded by Eddington in the north, Creswick in the south, Lexton in the west
and Taradale in the east. The location of Green Valley however is somewhat uncertain.
A notation on the holotype sheet in J.H. Willis’s handwriting says ‘Green Valley, NE of
Newstead’. Green Valley may be a corruption of the modem locality of Green Gully
which is approximately 4 km. east of Newstead.

NOTES

Genoplesium ciliatum has as its closest congener G. sagittiferum (Rupp) D.L. Jones &
M.A. Clem. Both species have a similar flower colouration but plants of G. sagittiferum
are much more robust and have larger perianth segments (dorsal sepal to 6.2 x 2.6 mm,
lateral sepals to 7.2 x 1.2 mm, petals to 5 x 1.4 mm, labellum to 4.5 x 2.3 mm) and
the labellum cilia are more numerous and longer. Jones (in Walsh & Entwisle, 1994)
recorded G. sagittiferum for Victoria based on specimens to the south-east and
south-west of Melbourne. Subsequent research by the first author has shown that these
specimens are of G. ciliatum and consequently G. sagittiferum should be deleted from
the Victorian flora.

Nicholls (1932) described Prasophyllum archeri var. deirdrae, from a single
specimen which is illustrated in colour in Nicholls 1969, plate 159, figs c, j & m. The
collection was apparently made when the plant was immature and the buds were
allowed to develop to the flowering stage by the stem being placed in water. This may
account to some extent for the unusual pale yellowish colour of the flowers and their
pronounced drooping habit. This taxon is conspecific with G. ciliatum, having most of
its morphological features (differing only in the colouration and drooping flowers) and
originating within the distribution of the species.

72

David L. Jones & Jeffrey A, Jeanes

CONSERVATION STATUS

Recorded for a number of biological reserves and probably secure in Victoria;
endangered in S.A. due to habitat alienation. Recommend Briggs and Leigh coding of
3RCa.

SELECTED SPECIMENS (25 examined)

victoria: Cheltenham, Mar. 1928, Nicholls (MEL); Aireys Inlet, 1929, Sutherland (MEL); Green Gully,
July 1932, Nicholls & Bishop (MEL); Green Gully, near Newstead, Apr. 1933, Nicholls (MEL); Ararat, 1 June
1933, Nicholls (MEL); Muckleford, Mar. 1935, Nicholls (MEL); Maryborough, 11 June 1939, Chisholm
(MEL)- Brisbane Ranges, 29 Mar. 1990, Foster (CBG); Langwarrin, 19 Mar. 1992, Glare (CBG); Anglesea,
19 Mar. 1992. Foster (CBG); Crib Point, 5 Mar. 1992, Glare (CBG); Port Campbell, May 1995, Rowney
iC'TKCW

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Mt Conipass, 3 May 1914, Rogers (AD, MEL); Nangkita Gravel Reserve, 2 Apr.
1992, Bates 27912 (AD, CBG); ibid, 25 Mar. 1995, Murfet 2172 (CBG).

PRELIMINARY KEY TO THE GENOPLESIUM ARCHERI COMPLEX

1 Petals ciliate Genoplesium morinum

1 : Petals usually glabrous 2

2 Flo-wers predominantly green or yelloivish green -with a contrasting pale reddish

labellum p •••.• ^

2; Flowers predominantly reddish or purple, sometimes with a few green marking^

3 Sepals 4-5 mm long; SA and Victoria Genoplesium ciliatiim

3: Sepals 6-7 mm long, central tablelands of NSW Genoplesium sagittiferum

4 Anterior lobe of column wings denticulate or papillose but not with elongated

trichomes ^

4; Anterior lobe of column wings with conspicuous elongated trichomes 6

5 Plant 20-40 cm tall; flowers in an open spike, light reddish with acontrasting

reddish black labellum; lowland north Queensland only purplish red; sub-alpme
N.S.W. and A.C.T. only Genoplesium turfosum

6 Flowers manifestly nodding; lateral sepals porrect or deflexed

Genoplesium arcneri

6: Flowers semi-nodding or porrect; lateral sepals usually erect 7

7 Plant 13-21 cm tall; flowers in a dense spike; cilia on labellum margins mostly
>0 5 mm long; montane to sub-alpine north-eastern Victoria only

Genoplesium arrectum

7- Plant 25-40 cm tall; flowers in a moderately crowded spike; cilia on labellum
margins mostly <0.5 mm long; central Queensland tablelands only

Genoplesium validum

Acknowledgements

We thank the followdng people for information and m some cases specimens; Paul
Barnett, Bob Bates, Geoff Beilby, Tim Entwisle, Everett Foster, Denzel Murfet, Andrew
Paget, Kaye Rowney and Merle and Clive Trigg. We are grateful to the Directors of the
Australian Orchid Foundation for their support of field operatives and Mark C enients
for commenting on the manuscript. The directors of AD and MEL are thanked tor
allowing us access to specimens.

Backhouse, G.N. & Jeanes, J.A. ( 1995). The Orchids of Victoria. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)

Miscellaneous notes on Genoplesium ciliutum

73

Bates, RJ. &. Weber, J.Z. (1990). Orchids of South Australia. (Government Printer: South Australia.)

Bcntham, G. (1873). Flora Australiensis. Vol. 6. (Lovell Reeve: London.)

Brummitt. R.K. & Powell, C.E eds (1992). Authors of Plant Names. (Royal Botanic Gardens: Kcw.)

Clements, M.A. (1989). Catalogue of Australian Orciiidaccac. Australian Orchid Research 1: 1-160.

Dickens, H.P. (1929). Victorian Orchids. (Sands & McDougall: Melbourne.)

Ewart. A.J. (1931). Flora of Victoria. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)

Ewart, A.J. & Rees, B. (1912) Contributions to the Flora of Australia, No. 19, Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Victoria 1 : 1 1 1 , plate 6.

Jones D.L. (1991). New Taxa of Australian Orchidaceae. Australian Orchid Research 2: 1-208.

Jones D.L. & Clements M.A. (1989). Reinterpretation of the genus Genoplesium R. Br. (Orchidaceae;
Prasophyllinae). Lindleyana 4(3): 139-145.

Nicholls, W.H. (1931). A Revision of certain species of the genus Prasophyllum R. Br., The Victorian
Naturalist 1 1: 105-1 12.

Nicholls, W.H. (1932). Orchid Notes and New Records, The Victorian Naturalist 49: 1 14.

Nicholls, W.H. (1969). Orchids of Australia, Complete Edition, D.L. Jones & T.B. Muir (eds.). (Thomas
Nelson: Melbourne.)

Pescott, E.E. (1928). The Orchids of Victoria. (The Horticultural Press Pty Ltd: Melbourne.)

Walsh, N.G. & Entwisle, T.J. (1994). Flora of Victoria. Vol. 2. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.)

Willis, J.H. (1962). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 1. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)
Wooleock, C.E. & Woolcock, D.T. (1984). Australian Terrestrial Orchids. (Thomas Nelson: Melbourne.)

Paper received 21 July 1995.

Muelleria 9: 75-85 (1996)

New taxa and some new nomenclature in Eucalyptus

M.I.H. Brooker & A. V. Slee

Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O. Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Territory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

The coastal form of manna gum is established in the new combination. Eucalyptus
viminalis subsp. pryoriana. The mallee box. Eucalyptus wimmerensis from western
Victoria, is changed in rank to a subspecies of E. viridis and a recently discovered red
box from far eastern Victoria, E. polyanthemos subsp. longior, is described. The mallee
from north-western Victoria, incorrectly known as E. anceps (type = E. rugosa), which
occurs chiefly in South and Western Australia is published as E. phenax. Notes on E.
willisii subsp. falciformis and its extended distribution are given. Problems resulting
from the inadequately documented distribution and variation in E. aromaphloia Pryor &
Willis are discussed. Illustrations of buds, fruits and leaves and a distribution map are
provided for E. polyanthemos subsp. longior and E. phenax.

Introduction

In the course of our field and herbarium studies in preparation of the Flora of Victoria
treatment of the genus Eucalyptus, we have found that existing classifications are not
always adequate to accommodate various species. Hence we erect eight new series and
one new subseries.

We have found some taxonomic groups particularly intractable. These include the
peppermints, boxes and the so-called scent barks (E. aromaphloia group) which are
discussed at length. In addition, we publish a new red box, E. polyanthemos subsp.
longior, revise the status of E. wimmerensis and E. prywiana and provide a valid name,
E. phenax, for the widespread mallee, formerly and incomectly known as E. anceps (R.
Br. ex Maiden) Blakely. The order of presentation begins with notes on the peppermints
and the E. aromaphloia group followed by the various formal taxonomic treatments in
the order they appear in the forthcoming Flora of Victoria.

Taxonomy

1. Eucalyptus ser. Radiatae Chippendale

Eucalyptus willisii Ladiges, Humphries & Brooker subsp. falciformis Newnham,
Ladiges & Whiffm, Austr. J. Bot. 31: 583 (1986). type: Intersection of Taylor Rd and
Burrong Shortcut, W of Mt. Victory, Grampian Ranges, 37°10’4”S, 142°14’40”E, 12
June 1985, M. Newnham 64 (holotype: MEL 673439; isotypes: CANB, NSW).

The identities of the peppermint eucalypts of Victoria have long been in contention.
Blakely (1934) recognised three species, viz., E. lindleyana DC (syn. E. data Dehnh.),
E. robertsonii (syn. E. radiata Sieber ex Spreng. subsp. rohertsonii (Blakely) Johnson &
Blaxell), and E. dives Schauer. Blakely listed only New South Wales localities for
typical E. radiata.

Willis (1973) considered that E. radiata was so polymorphic that division of the
species was not warranted. Hence he referred the narrow-leaved peppermints to E.
radiata, apart from the distinctive E. data and the ‘near coastal’ peppermints occurring
from ?Orbost (‘W’ in the distribution data) west presumably to South Australia (‘DE’
in the distribution data). He attributed this southern taxon to E. nitida, a Tasmanian
peppermint as to type. Willis distinguished radiata from nitida in his key by the angle of

75

76

M.I.H. Brooker & A.V. Slee

divergence of the side veins, i.e. >20° compared with almost longitudinal respectively.
We do not suport this distinction. He did not state under his treatment ofE. nitida if the
distribution ‘E’ was intended to include the Grampian Ranges.

Ladiges, Humphries & Brooker (1983) investigated the southern Victorian pepper-
mints and concluded that they were a taxon distinct from E. nitida. Consequently, they
erected a new species, E. willisii (type from Near Mt Oberon, Wilson’s Promontory).
Later, Newnham, Ladiges & Whiffm (1986) distinguished the Grampians populations of
E. willisii as a separate but related taxon, falciformis.

Our own investigations and those of T. Whiffin and D. Rankin of La Trobe
University (pens, comm.) indicate that the coastal peppermints west of Melbourne,
extending into the south-east of South Australia, and those of the Grampian Ranges are
the same taxon, i.e. subsp. falciformis. They have larger, coarser juvenile and adult
leaves and larger buds and fruit than the typical subspecies. There are no sudden mor-
phological and geographical distinctions between the subspecies. Populations west of
Gisborne may be interpreted as intergrades between the two subspecies and possibly
influenced genetically by the contiguous E. radiata.

Johnson & Hill (1990) segregated a further peppennint species, the glaucous E.
croajingolensis. This occurs mostly in far eastern Victoria but extends as far west as Mt.
Useful and possibly near Lake Mountain, from subcoastal hills north and east to far
south-eastern New South Wales. North and west of this distribution, i.e. inland from the
Great Dividing Range in eastern Victoria but widespread in the central highlands and
extending to the Wombat State Forest north-west of Melbourne and Otway Range is a
non-glaucous, narrow, thin-leaved peppermint species that appears to be conspecific
with the species that occurs widely on the eastern side of the tableland of south-eastern
New South Wales.

From field examination, we consider this latter taxon to be typical E. radiata. The
populations in Victoria are not conspicuously variable although the adult leaves may be
dull or slightly glossy. There is a ‘central’ area from Mt Buffalo east to Benambra where
the seedling leaves are narrower than elsewhere. E. radiata subsp. rohertsonii, which is
relatively abundant in New South Wales from the Snowy Mountains northwards in the
high country, is a tall, narrow-leaved forest tree with glaucous buds and fruits. We have
not found this subspecies in Victoria after extensive field and herbarium studies.

We conclude that the peppermints have not undergone distinctive speciation and
accept that many specimens will not be ascribable to any of the above names.

2. Eucalyptus sen Acadiformes L.A.S. Johnson ex Brooker & Slee, ser. nov.
Extracodical E. ser. Acadiformes Johnson (unpubl.)

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Macrantheras pertinens, habitu arboreo, cortice aspero, inflo-
rescentiis 7-floribus, folds plantularum subsessilibus vel petiolatis, et fructibus disco
leviter ascendenti distinguitur.

TYPUS: Eucalyptus acaciiformis Deane & Maiden

Eucalyptus aromaphloia Pryor and Willis, Vic. Nat., 71; 125 (1954). type: At 1 13 mile
post on the Great Western Highway, Victoria (between Buangor and Mt Langi-Ghiran
in Ararat district), and approximately at the centre of the species’ range, 20 August
1954, L.D. Pryor & J.& J.H. Willis (MEL, Herb. Dept. Interior, NSW, BRI, K);
paratype; from Eastern Hill, Creswick, January 1, 1946, J.H. Willis (MEL).

In the protologue of E. aromaphloia the authors discussed the problem in relating the
name E. hiiberiana Naudin (type: Cap d’ Antibes, France, published 1891) to natural
populations. It was concluded that some Victorian populations ascribed to hiiberiana
were hybrids of E. viminalis with an un-named species. This other parent of the
so-called hybrid was published as E. aromaphloia Pryor & Willis in 1954. The new
species was considered to have an extensive distribution in western Victoria and to cross
into South Australia. The southern, more coastal forms of hiiberiana were later (1980)

New taxa and nomenclature in Eucalyptus

11

included in E. viminalis subsp. cygnetensis by C.D.Boomsma (type: Cygnet River,
Kangaroo Island, South Australia).

Willis (1973) and Costermans (1981) extended the distribution of E. aromaphloia
to East Gippsland. Chappill (1986) made a comprehensive study of the major
aromaphloia forms across Victoria plus E. corticosa L. A. S. Johnson from the Rylstone
area of central western New South Wales. Chappill concluded that there were four
taxonomic entities involved, viz. E. corticosa s.s., Little Desert and western Grampians
populations of E. aromaphloia, the typical form occurring from the Mt. William Range
in the Grampians east to the Brisbane Ranges, and another wide-ranging form east of
Melbourne.

Populations ‘in the broader concept of E. aromaphloia' from east of Erica to the
Eden area of far south-eastern New South Wales were segregated as a new species, E.
ignorabilis, by Johnson & Hill (1991). The western limit for this species which, has dull
green adult leaves, according to the protologue and our own observations, was given as
‘around Morwell’. There is a problem in the distribution for the species as the map
shows two sites clearly west of the cited area. These western populations, which we
interpret to occur from Woori Yallock south-east to Driffield, have conspicuously
glossy green adult leaves, ovate Juvenile leaves and cannot be E. ignorabilis. They have
been published as E. fulgens by Rule (1996 see page 136 of this volume). Other prob-
lems in the overall aromaphloia taxonomy have been brought to our attention by this
author

Recent fieldwork by ourselves indicates that typical E. aromaphloia is scattered
and relatively widespread compared with other taxa in the group. It may be diagnosed
by:

• bark - rough to small branches, thick, hard, becoming deeply furrowed like
ironbark;

• juvenile leaves - elliptical to narrowly oblong, slightly crenulate, dull, bluish
green; sessile to very shortly petiolate, opposite for many pairs;

• adult leaves - slightly glossy, green to bluish green;

• inflorescences - 7-flowered.

It occurs in central and western Victoria from the Mt. William Range in the eastern
Grampians north-east to the Fryers Range State Forest, south-east to Anglesea and south
to Moonlight Head. West of this area, including part of the Grampian Ranges and Little
Desert and south to near Cavendish, the juvenile leaves are ± linear. This fonn, worthy
of recognition as a subspecies of E. aromaphloia and treated elsewhere in this volume as
E. sabulosa K.RuIe, (see page 138), is never coastal. E. viminalis subsp. cygnetensis
maybe confused with it in the south-west of the State but differs in the typical viminalis
juvenile leaves, i.e. sessile usually amplexicaul, green, lanceolate, and remaining
opposite for many leaf pairs. The fmit of viminalis are larger, with a more prominent
ascending disc which varies from flattish to slightly ascending in both taxa of E.
aromaphloia.

A further form, restricted to the Mt Richmond area in the far south-west of the
State, was rejected by Chappill in her study which was specifically on E. aromaphloia
and closely related taxa. This form was considered by her to be E. viminalis subsp.
cygnetensis. It is notable for the rough bark, yellow branchlets, and very glossy, green,
adult and juvenile leaves. It is published elsewhere in this volume as E. splendens
K.Rule (see page 140) and differs most conspicuously from the viminalis group in the
seedling leaves which are soon very shortly petiolate and taper to the base and are not
amplexicaul.

Pryor & Willis’s (1954) surmise that E. aromaphloia occurs in South Australia has
not been proved. Unsubstantiated sitings are probably E. viminalis subsp. cygnetemsis.

3. Eucalyptus ser. Rufispermae Maiden
Eucalyptus phenax Brooker & Slee, sp. nov.

Eucalyptus anceps auct. pi. non (R.Br. ex Maiden) Blakely (1934).

Eucalypto conglobatae (R.Br. ex Benth.) Maiden affinis a qua constanter habitu fruti-

78

M.I.H. Brooker& A.V. Slee

COSO, foliis lanceolatis, praesentia pedunculorum, basi alabastrorum decrescentibus et
fructibus angustioribus longioribus quam latioribus differt.

type: South Australia, 12.7 kiu from Duke’s Highway towards Pinnaroo, 35°17’27”S,
139°37’30”E, 26 Jan. 1995, D. Nicolle 1212, R. Nicolle & M.I.H. Brooker (holotypus;
AD; isotypes: CANS, MEL, NSW, PERTH).

With affinity to Eucalyptus conglobata from which it differs by the consistent mallee
habit, lanceolate leaves, presence of peduncles, the tapering base of the buds, and the
narrower fruit which are longer than wide. (Fig. 1 )

DISTRIBUTION

Western Australia from near Bolgart, north-east of Perth eastwards and southwards
although largely subcoastal, but not known for certain along the southern Nullarbor
Plain; South Australia on Eyre Peninsula, Yorke Peninsula and south-east of Adelaide
except the southern part of Fleurieu Peninsula, extending into Victoria in the Sunset
Country and Big and Little Deserts. (Fig. 2)

ETYMOLOGY

From the Greek noun phenax, impostor, in reference to the species’ long and misleading
tenancy of the name anceps.

NOTES

Eucalyptus phenax has been incorrectly known as E. anceps until the last few years
when it was recognised that the type of E. anceps. collected by Robert Brown on
Kangaroo Island in 1802, was E. nigosa (the senior author and P. Lang, pens. comm.).
The name rugosa (E. ser. Torquatae) has been correctly applied by most collectors and

New taxa and nomenclature in Eucalyptus

79

120* ixr 'SO'

Fig. 2. Distribution of Eucalyptus phenax.

taxonomists.

The type of E. anceps (BM, CANB, E, K, MEL, NSW) is a sprig with adult leaves
and apparently mature flower buds. The peduncles are flat, wide and stout and the buds
have opercula narrower than the hypanthium. It is unmistakeably E. rugosa (also publ.
1934), yet the name anceps has invariably been applied to a comparatively unrelated
mallee.

Eucalyptus phenax belongs to the large series Rufispermae in which speciation is
often not distinct. It is closely related to E. conglobata, E. pileata and E. dumosa, but its
long time acceptance as a taxon, albeit sometimes tentatively, suggests that it should
have the same rank along with the three species above.

One of the eonfusing issues concerning E. ‘anceps' (now E. phenax) is that its
common name is Kangaroo Island Mallee. However, its aetual occurrence on the island
has been in contention, and in recent literature, ‘anceps' has been somewhat arbitrarily
treated.

Boomsma (1981) included Kangaroo Island in his distribution for the species.
Jessop and Tolkien (1986), on the other hand, subsumed ‘anceps' in E. conglobata on
the advice of P. Lang whose concepts (then) of taxonomic rank were at odds with fellow
workers. Populations which Jessop and Tolkein attributed to E. conglobata oceur at the
eastern end of the island, although there is no indication as to whether they considered
these populations to be E conglobata s.s. only, or whether they consisted of E. conglo-
bata s.s. plus E. ‘anceps' . Brooker & Kleinig (1983) included ‘E. anceps' on the island
according to the distribution map and the common name, but excluded it later (1990)
when they devoted a key specifieally to the island’s eucalypts.

In the most recent study of the eucalypts of Kangaroo Island, D. Nicolle (unpubl.
1994) considered that the mallees on the island most commonly attributed to ‘anceps'
were a separate, unrecognised taxon which he referred to as ‘E. affinity conglobata' . He
does not recognise the oceurrence of E. conglobata s.s. on the island. The distribution of
this un-named taxon is given as ‘north-eastern Kangaroo Island and Waitpinga to

80

M.I.H. Brooker & A.V. Slee

Goolwa’, these latter, fairly restricted sites being on the mainland opposite. Nicolle
distinguishes the widespread mainland species, E. phenax, from both of the related taxa,
viz. E. conglohata and E. affinity conglobata.

SELECTION OF SPECIMENS EXAMINED

WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 30 km from Tammin on York road, 15 Sep. 1982, M.I.H. Brooker 7630 (CANB);
opposite Stennet’s Lake, 26 Feb. 1985, M.I.H. Brooker 9120 (CANB); Mosquito Hill, Bolgart East Road, 3
Sep. 1987, M.I.H. Brooker 9753 (CANB); 21.8 km south of Lake Grace town on Pingrup road, 23 Oct. 1983,
K. Hill 329 (CANB, NSW, PERTH); 22.4 km NW of Parmango Road on Clyde Rock Track, Margaret
Johnston 8 (CANB).

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Gum Flat near Cleve, 16 May 1973, D. Boland 1521 (CANB); south-east of Mt. Hope,
Eyre Peninsula, 6 Dec. 1972, M.I.H. Brooker 3865 (AD, CANB, MEL, NSW, PERTH); Between Waikerie
and Blanchetown, 3 Apr. 1975, M.I.H. Brooker 4906 (AD, CANB); Murray Bridge, 6 Jan. 1907, R.H.
Cambage & J.H. Maiden s.n. (CANB 6474); south-east corner of section 1 10, Hd. of Wiltunga, 4 Feb. 1966,
B. Copley 8 (AD, CANB); about 10 km WSW of Coomandook, 20 May 1973, M.D. Crisp 476 (AD, CANB);
15 km south-west of Kapunda, 1 Jul. 1973, M.D. Crisp 494 (AD, CANB); 25 km east of Tailem Bend on
Pinnaroo road, 3 Sep. 1985, N.N. Donner 10635 (AD, CANB); Willaston, 5 Sep. 1967, D.N. Kraehenbuhl
2749 (AD, CANB); Koppio, Eyre Peninsula, 28 Dec. 1977, L.D. Williams 9718 (CANB); Yorkc Peninsula, ca.
‘/2 km south of Bluff, 13 Sep. 1974, J.Z. Weber 41 1 1 (AD, CANB).

VICTORIA.- Wyperfeld National Park. Extreme E end of Ginap Track S.E. of Yallum Dune, 12 Nov. 1968,
A.C. Beauglehole 29537 (MEL, CANB); 20.9 km S of Mildura on Ouyen road, 5 Sep. 1989, M.I.H. Brooker
10264 (CANB); 14.6 km E of junction of WeiTimul road and north boundary track of Sunset Country, 1 1 Oct.
1989, M.I.H. Brooker 10321 (CANB); 7.3 km south of Murray Valley Hwy, S of L. Kramer, II Oct. 1989,
M.I.H. Brooker 10325 (CANB); Littie Desert National Park. Junction of Kiata South Road-Campground
Road, 26 Sep. 1990, G. Cornwall. Ref L.D. 1/90 (CANB. MEL).

4. Eucalyptus ser. Orbiculares Brooker & Siee, ser. nov.

Eucalyptus subser. Perfoliatae Biakeiy, Key Eucs i50 (i934).

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Macrantheras pertinens, foiiis juveniiibus sessiiis oppositis
per nodos muitos orbicuiaribus giaucis, foiiis aduitis hebetibus et infiorescentiis
3-fioribus distinguitur.

type: Eucalyptus perriniana F.Mueil. ex Rodway

5. Eucalyptus ser. Bridgesianae Brooker & Siee, ser. nov.

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Macrantheras pertinens foiiis juveniiibus sessiiis oppositis
vei suboppositis per nodos muitos ovatis crenuiatis et infiorescentiis 7-floribus distin-
guitur.

typus: Eucalyptus bridgesiana R. Baker

6. Eucalyptus ser. Viminales Blakely

Eucalyptus viminalis subsp. pryoriana (L.A.S.Johnson) Brooker & Siee, comb, et stat.
nov.

Eucalyptus pryoriana L.A.S.Johnson, Contr. New’ South Wales Natl Herb. 3; 115
(1962), basionym. E. viminalis var. racemosa F.Mueil. ex Blakely, Kev Eucalvpts 162
(1934). Type: Port Phillip, Vic., Feb. 1880, ?F. Mueller (lectotype.- NSW //We L.A.S.
Johnson, loc. cit.).

The manna gums, E. viminalis sens, lat., are widely distributed in well-watered parts of
south-eastern Australia. The typical mainland fomr is notable for its occurrence along
valley bottoms and riversides in hilly or mountainous country where it is an erect, often
tall tree with smooth bark except at the very base. There are usually prominent ribbons
of imperfectly decorticated bark hanging in the crowns. Buds of the inflorescences are
in 3s. The Juvenile leaves are green and remain sessile and opposite for many pairs.

There are two currently recognised, non-typical infraspecific taxa, both of coastal
and subcoastal plains in Victoria, apart from an extension into the southern Grampians.
One is E. viminalis subsp. cygnetensis which is a completely rough-barked woodland

New taxa and nomenclature in Eucalyptus

81

tree with buds mostly in 7s. It occurs from west of Melbourne to Kangaroo island and
southern Eyre Peninsula in South Australia. Subspecies pryoriana occupies infertile
coastal sandy soils from Bellarine Peninsula east as far as Lake Tyers. It is a small tree
with rough bark and buds in 3s. It occurs commonly with Banksia marginata and
Leptospermum laevigatiiny also with E. willisii, E. hosistoana, E. baueriana and E.
glohoidea. Neither of these subspecies of E. viminalis is completely distinctive and
cygnetensis, in particular, may occur in populations in which the number of buds per
inflorescence is variable.

7. Eucalyptus ser. Neglectae Johnson ex Brooker & Slee, ser. nov.

Extracodical Eucalyptus ser. Neglectae L. A. S. Johnson (unpubl.)

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Macrantheras pertinens habitu arboreo, cortice aspero, folds
arboris summae juvenilibus adultisque, inflorescentiis 7-15-floribus, pedunculis brevis-
simis et alabastris fructibusque sessilibus, congestis et glaucis distinguitur.

TYPUs: Eucalyptus neglecta Maiden

A monotypic series.

8. Eucalyptus ser. Crenulatae Brooker & Slee, ser. nov.

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Macrantheras pertinens, habitu arboreo, cortice aspero, foliis
arboris summae omnino juvenilibus ovatis, primo glaucis postremo viridibus, inflores-
centiis 7-1 1-floribus, alabastris pedicellatis glaucis et operculo rostrato distinguitur.

type: Eucalyptus crenulata Blakely & Debeuzeville

A monotypic series.

9. Eucalyptus ser. Kitsonianae L. A. S. Johnson ex Brooker & Slee, ser. nov.

Extracodical E. ser. Kitsonianae L. A. S. Johnson (unpubl.)

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Macrantheras pertinens, habitu arboreo vel fruticoso, cortice
laevi, foliis juvenilibus sessilibus oppositis per nodos multos latis, foliis adultis magnis,
inflorescentiis 7-floribus, prominenter bracteatis distinguitur.

TYPE.’ Eucalyptus kitsoniana Maiden

A monotypic series.

10. Eucalyptus ser. Suhhuxeales Blakely

Eucalyptus viridis R. Baker subsp. wimmerensis (Rule) Brooker & Slee, comb, et stat.
nov. Eucalyptus wimmerensis Rule, Muelleria 7: 193 (1990), basionym. type: Victoria,
Lawloit Range on the Western Highway between Nhill and Kaniva, 36°24’S, 141°31’E
27 Dec. 1964, J./7. Willis s.n. (MEL).

The box eucalypts are a vexing problem taxonomically. Occurring widely in all
mainland States, they has never been a satisfactory comprehensive treatment.
Simplistically, not they may be considered to consist of desert species, e.g. E. intertexta,
tropical species, e.g. E. tectifica, floodplain species, e.g. E. microtheca, and eastern
species which comprise a very large array of taxonomic series. These may be divided
into two major groups, one in which the outer operculum is shed during bud develop-
ment and a second in which the outer operculum is held until flowering. In this latter
group are the mallee boxes which consist of about six species ranging from Eyre
Peninsula through Victoria and New South Wales to south-eastern Queensland.

82

M.I.H. Brooker & A.V. Slee

Fig 3. Buds, fruits, shed androecium and leaves of Eucalyptus polyanthemos subsp. longior.

Eucalyptus, viridis is the most widespread of these mallee boxes, occurring in the
Flinders Range of South Australia, across western and central Victoria, the western
plains and slopes of New South Wales and scattered in south-eastern Queensland. Willis
(1973) considered a population in the Lawloit Range between Nhill and Kaniva, and
which he retained in this species, to be aberrant because of its broader leaves and larger
fruit.

Rule (1990), in a study that included both forms of E. viridis plus E. odorata and E.
polybractea, concluded that the Lawloit Range form was more extensive in distribution
than indicated by Willis and constituted a new species. The grounds for his decision
were varied but were largely differences in degree, e.g. among these four taxa, the sides
of the fruit were given as varying from slightly angled to faintly ribbed to smooth. The
bark character for wimmerensis is given as ‘smooth or rarely basal, fibrous’ and for
viridis as ‘fibrous stocking, confined to lower stem’. It is easy though scarcely of much
scientific merit to dwell on selected comparisons like these, but we believe that stronger,
discrete differences should be the criteria for species. Hence we have decided on
subspecies rank for wimmerensis.

11. Eucalyptus ser. Heterophloiae Blakely

Eucalyptus polyanthemos subsp. longior Brooker & Slee, subsp. nov.
a subspecie typica foliis adultis longioribus lanceolatis differt.

TYPE- Victoria. 4.6 km along Ostler’s Gap Road from Waygara Track Junction; N of
Waygara, 37°42’S, 148°20’E, 17 Nov. 1993, M.I.H. Brooker 11637 & A. Slee
(holotype: CANB; isotypes: AD, MEL, NSW).

New taxa and nomenclature in Eucalyptus

83

t42° 144” 144)” 148“ ISO”

Fig. 4. Distribution of Eucalyptus polyanthemos subsp. longior.

It differs from the typical subspecies by the lanceolate adult leaves (to 14x3 cm) of the
mature crown. (Fig. 3)

DISTRIBUTION

This subspecies occurs in low hills of far eastern Victoria from south of Omeo east to
Wangarabell and north to Nungatta in far south-eastern New South Wales (Fig. 4).

ETYMOLOGY

From the Latin, longior, longer, in reference to the leaves of the new subspecies.

NOTES

Distinctive variants in E. polyanthemos have long been recognised. Johnson & Hill
(1990) treated the form in southern New South Wales and parts of Victoria in their
publication of E. polyanthemos subsp. vestita which they distinguished from the typical
subspecies by the amount of persistent rough bark. Our recent field work revealed the
existence of a further form of red box in far eastern Victoria and which extends into far
south-eastern New South Wales. It is fully rough-barked like subsp. vestita but has
lanceolate leaves.

The region in which the new subspecies occurs appears to have been poorly
collected for eucalypts as few specimens of this taxon are in herbaria, apart from the
early collection of the senior author cited below and some by J.D. Briggs in CANB.

Populations of subsp. longior are found within close proximity to those of subsp.
vestita. They appear to diverge most conspicuously in the shape of the adult leaves,
hence the specific epithet. Both subspecies are distinguished from the related E. baueri-
ana by their dull, not glossy, leaves.

A further character which will be interesting to investigate is the nature of the
androecium. At the type locality at the time of collection (November), the trees were in
full flower. The spent androecium was shed intact as a ring comprising the ste-
monophore and the stamens. These yellowish rings were conspicuous as they were
strewn in large numbers under the trees. This phenomenon has also been seen in the typ-
ical subspecies although it does not seem to have been reported before in this or any

84

M.I.H. Brooker& A.V. Slee

Other eastern species. Shedding of the whole androecium is very rare in Eucalyptus but
may be seen in the entirely unrelated, E. macrandm, a Western Australian endemic
(Brooker& Kleinig 1990).

OTHER SPECIMENS EXAMINED

Victoria: Reeve Road, west of Orbost, 16 Jan. 1980, M.I.H. Brooker 6813 (CANB, NSW, PERTH);
Mottle Range road, north end, WNW of Orbost, .16 Jan. 1980, M.I.H. Brooker 6821 (CANB, MEL, NSW);
type locality (coppice), 17 Nov. 1993, M.I.H. Brooker 1 1638 & A. Slee, (AD, CANB, BRl, MEL, NSW);
Marimingo Hill, north of Genoa, 4 Mar. 1994, M.I.H. Brooker 1 1720 (BRl, CANB, MEL, NSW); ca. 60 km
SE of Omeo on the Omeo Highway, 10 Feb. 1978, J.D. Briggs III (CANB); 15.6 miles from Buchan towards
Orbost. 17 Sep. 1975. M.I.H. Brooker 4956 (AD, BRl, CANB. MEL, NSW).

New South Wales: Nungatta North Station, 2.8 km south of Blackbird Creek on track to Nungatta
South, 23 Jan. 1989, J.D. Briggs 2515 (CANB); 0.3 km west of Pericoe, II Nov. 1989, K. Hill 3644 & R.
Makinson (CANB, MEL, NSW).

12. Eucalyptus ser. Contiguae Brooker & Slee, ser. nov.

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Renantheras pertinens, habitu fruticoso vel rare arbuscula,
cortice pro parte maxima laevi, foliis viridibus numquam glaucis, inflorescentiis 7-11
floribus, pedunculis brevissimis, alabastris brevibus verrucosis, fructibus sessilibus con-
gestis distinguitur.

TYPUS; Eucalyptus kyheanensis Maiden & Cambage
A monotypic series.

13. Eucalyptus ser. Pauciflorae L.A.S.Johnson ex Brooker & Slee, ser. nov.
Extracodical Eucalyptus ser. Pauciflorae L.A.S. Johnson (unpubl.)

Ad Eucalyptum sectionem Renantheras pertinens, cortice laevi, foliis plantularum
oppositis paucis, juvenilibus non oppositis petiolatis pendulis, adultis nitentibus venis
principalibus longitudinalibus distinguitur.

TYPUS: Eucalyptus pauciflora Sieber ex Spreng.

This series comprises the snow gums.

14. Eucalyptus ser. Psathyroxyla Blakely

Eucalyptus subser. Considenianae Brooker & Slee, suhser. nov.

A subserie typica cortice qui asper est differt.

TYPUs: Eucalyptus consideniana Maiden

The erection of this subseries recognises fonually the natural affinity of the scribbly
gums (subser. Psathyroxyla) and the silver-top ashes (subser. Considenianae) foreshad-
owed in the study of the ash group of eucalypts by Brooker (1977).

Acknowledgement

We are grateful to Kevin Thiele for the drawings of the new taxa.

References

Blakely, W.F. (1934). A Key to the Euealvpts. (The Worker Trustees: Sydney.)

Boomsma, C.D. (1980). One new species and two new subspecies of Eucalyptus from southern Australia.
Journal of Adelaide Botanic Gardens 2: 293-298.

New taxa and nomenclature in Eucalyptus

85

Boomsma, C.D. (1981). Native Trees of South Australia. (Woods & Forests Department: Adelaide.)

Brooker, M.I.H. (1977). Internal bud morphology, seedling characters and classification in the ash group of
eucalypts. Australian Forest Research 7; 197-207.

Brooker, M.I.H. & Kleinig, D.A. (1983). Field Guide to Eucalypts. Vol. 1 . (Inkata Press: Melbourne.)

Brooker! M.I.H. & Kleinig, D.A. (1990). Field Guide to Eucalypts. Vol 2. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.)

Chappili, Jennifer (1986). Eucalyptus aromaphloia Pryor & Willis - a redefinition of geographical and
morphological boundaries. Australian Journal of Botany 34: 395-4 1 2.

Costennans, L. (1981). Native Trees and Shrubs of South-eastern Australia. (Rigby: Adelaide.)

Jessop, J. & Tolkein, H. (1986). Flora of South Australia. Vol 2: 922. (Government Printer: Adelaide.)

Johnson, L.A.S. & Hill, K.D. (1990). New taxa and combinations in Eucalyptus and Angophora. Telopea
4:37-108.

Johnson, L.A.S. & Hill, K.D. (1991). Systematic studies in the eucalypts - 3. New taxa and combinations in
Eucalyptus (Myrtaceae). Telopea 4: 223-268.

Ladiges, P.y!, Humphries, C.J. and Brooker, M.I.H. (1983). Cladistic relationships and biogeographic patterns
in the peppermint group of Eucalyptus (informal subseries Amygdalininae, subgenus Monocalyptus)
and the description of a new species. Australian Journal of Botany 3 1 : 565-584.

Newnham, M.R., Ladiges, P.Y. and Whiffin, T. (1986). Origin of the Grampians shining peppermint - a new
subspecies of Eucalyptus willisii Ladiges, Humphries & Brooker. Australian Journal of Botany 34:
331-348. ' ,

Nicolle, D. (1994). The taxonomy and phytogeography of Kangaroo Island’s Eucalyptus L'Herit. (Individual
study.)

Pryor, L.D. & Willis, J.H. (1954). A new Victorian (and South Australian) eucalypt. The Victorian Naturalist
’ 71: 125-130.

Rule, K. (1990). Eucalyptus wimmerensis, a new species of Eucalyptus (Myrtaceae) from Victoria and South
Australia. A/wc/Zena 7:193-202.

Rule. K. ( 1996). Three new Victorian species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia L.D.Pryor & J.H. Willis and
notes on the polymorphic nature of that species. Muelleria. 9: 133-143.

Willis, J.H. (1973). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria. Vol. 2. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)

Revised paper received 21 July 1995.

Miielleria 9: 87-92 (1996)

Notes on Tetratheca procumbens Gunn ex Hook.f. (Tremandraceae)

Jeffrey A. Jeanes

National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Ave, South Yarra, 3141, Victoria, Australia

ABSTRACT

A case is made for the recognition of Tetratheca procumbens Gunn ex Hook.f. as a
species distinct from Tetratheca pilosa LabilL. A description of T. procumbens is pro-
vided, its affinities to T. pilosa subsp. pilosa and T. pilosa subsp. latifolia Joy Thomps.
are discussed and a key to distinguish the three taxa is supplied. Tetratheca procumbens
is apparently widespread in Tasmania, but known from only two high altitude locations
in Victoria.

Introduction

This study was undertaken to facilitate the preparation of the account of Tremandraceae
for the forthcoming Flora of Victoria Volume 4. Problems arose in assigning a name to
three specimens from the Snowy Plains area of the Eastern Highlands of Victoria. They
were clearly very similar to a number of specimens at MEL from both highland and
lowland areas of Tasmania. These collections had all been filed as Tetratheca pilosa
subsp. pilosa, following the revision of Tetratheca by Thompson (1976). Although T.
pilosa shows great variation across its range, these small procumbent plants are remark-
ably distinctive and worthy of re-examination.

Methods

This study is based mostly on the morphological examination of dried herbarium speci-
mens from MEL, CBG, HO and NSW, but additional information has been gained by
the observation of living plants growing in-situ in Victoria. Measurements given in the
description are derived from herbarium material so allowance must be made for possible
shrinkage on drying. The relevant type specimens have been examined.

Taxonomic history

The taxon herein referred to as Tetratheca procumbens first appeared in the literature as
Tetratheca calva F.Muell. ex Schuch. var. pitlchella F.Muell. ex Schuch. (Schuchardt
1853), from high mountainous areas of Tasmania. Tetratheca procumbens
was described by Hooker in his Flora Tasmaniae (Hooker 1855); there he made the
statement ‘Mr Gunn [collector of the type] considers this a most distinct species’. It was
subsequently reduced by Bentham (1863) to T. pilosa var. procumbens (Hook.f) Benth.
with the comment ‘I have considerable doubts whether this elegant Tasmanian variety
may not prove permanently distinct’. Bentham (1863) also reduced T. calva var. calva
to synonymy under T. pilosa and T. calva var. pulchella and T. gunnii Hook.f to
synonymy under T. pilosa var. procumbens. Rodway (1903) treated Tetratheca procum-
bens as synonymous with T. pilosa var. calva Rodway (including T. gunnii), this being a
new varietal epithet coined by Rodway rather than a new combination reducing T. calva
to varietal status under T. pilosa. Synonymy under T. pilosa was ascribed in the first
edition of The Student’s Flora of Tasmania (Curtis 1956) but in the second edition
(Curtis & Morris 1975) the taxon was again recognised as a distinct species. Although
in her revision of Tetratheca, Thompson (1976) reduced T. procumbens to synonymy
under T. pilosa without affording it any formal rank, it is still treated as a distinct
species ir\A Census of the Vascular Plants of Tasmania (Buchanan 1995).

87

88

Jeffrey A. Jeanes

Taxonomy

Tetratheca procumbens Gunn ex Hook.f., FI. Tasman. 1 : 35, t- 7A ( 1 855).

Tetratheca pilosa Labill. vav. procumbens (Gunn ex Hook.f.) Benth., FI. Austral. 1: 132
(1863), nom. illeg., the earlier T. calva var. pulchella was placed in synonymy, type;
‘(Gunn, 217, 309, 649)’ and ‘Summit of the Western Mountains, elev. 3800 feet; also
near the sea, on heathy plains, at Circular Head etc, Gunn.’ syntypes: Gunn 217 (NSW
119678, NSW 119679).

Tetratheca calva F.Muell. ex Schuch. var. pulchella F.Muell. ex Schuch., Syn.
Tremandr. 27 (1853). type: ‘In insul. Van Diemen legerunt Gunn et in montibus altis
Tasmanniae cl. Muller in Herb. Sonder.’ syntypes: MEL 1008363, MEL 1008381,
MEL 1008382. Tetratheca pilosa Labill. var. calva Rodway, Tasman, fl. 10 (1903) p.p.,
as to T. procumbens but excluding T. gunnii, both cited in synonymy by Rodway.

Procumbent to weakly ascending sub-shruh; taproot sturdy; branches usually many,
5-20(-30) cm long, most emanating from near base of plant; stems terete, often
irregularly ridged and appearing quadrangular near nodes, scabrous, virtually glabrous,
sometimes with a few short, tubercle-based hairs and glandular hairs, particularly near
nodes or on young growth. Leaves alternate, subopposite or in irregular whorls of 3,
linear to linear-lanceolate, 2-8 mm long, 0.5-1.5(-2) mm wide, straight to arcuate, apex
usually acute, mucronate, base truncate, margins mostly revolute to mid-vein, both
surfaces usually scabrous, lower surface with dense short, stiff hairs along mid-vein and
near margins; petiole to c. 0.5 mm long. Flowers solitary in leaf axils; peduncles 1-3
mm long, elongating to c. 4 mm in fruit, glabrous; bracts linear, c. 0.5 mm long, pubes-
cent; sepals ovate, c. 1 mm long, glabrous outside, haiiy on inner surface particularly on
and near margins, attached inside top of receptacle, deciduous; petals obovate, ovate or
elliptical, 3-4.5(-5) mm long, 1-2.5 mm wide, usually widest beyond middle, lilac-pink
or white, often with darker longitudinal veins, deciduous; stamens 8, 2-2.5 mm long;
fdament 0.5-1 mm long; body of anther 1-1.5 mm long, glabrescent; orifice c. 0.2 mm
wide; ovary 2-(less often 4-) celled, with a mixture of scattered short fine hairs and
glandular hairs; ovules 1 per cell; style slender, to c. 1.5 mm long. Fruit obovate to
obcordate, 2-4 mm long, 1.5-3 mm wide, with a sparse mixture of simple and glandular-
hairs particularly near apex; seeds more or less oblong, 1.5-2. 5 mm long, pubescent;
appendage with several twists, cream. (Figs. 1 & 2)

FLOWERING PERIOD

October to January depending upon altitude.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

In Tasmania found mostly at high altitudes but also occun'ing at lower elevations almost
to sea level. In Victoria it is known from only two sites, at about 1 100 m and 1420 m
above sea level respectively (Fig. 3). The high altitude habitat is generally low heath
on moist peaty soils or on Sphagnum moss near streams or in rock crevices. At lower
altitudes in Tasmania, plants grow in grassy woodlands and shrubby heathlands.

NOTES

Thompson (1976) recognized two subspecies of Tetratheca pilosa based mostly on
leaf arrangement, leaf shape and ovary indumentum (see key). The type subspecies is
widespread in Tasmania, scattered in western Victoria and localised in South Australia
mainly in the Mount Lofty Ranges. Tetratheca pilosa subsp. latifolia is found in northern
Tasmania, mainly eastern Victoria and south-eastern New South Wales. The two sub-
species are very closely related and occasional specimens, particularly some from
Tasmania, are difficult to assign to one or the other subspecies. Tetratheca procumbens is
relegated by Thompson to synonymy under the type subspecies with a very cursory
explanation.

Notes on Tetratheca procumhens

89

Fig. 1. Tetratheca procumbens'. a - plant habit xO.5. b - flowering branch x2. c - leaf from above x5. d - leaf
from below x5. e - section through leaf xlO. f - flower x4. g - stamen x5. h - capsule x4. i - seed x4. a-g
drawn from Beauglehole 43478 (MEL); h, i drawn from iV.H. Archer (MEL).

90

Jeffrey A. Jeanes

Fig. 2. Tetralheca procumhens: P\an{ in-sihi. Snowy Plains, Victoria.

Notes on Telratheca procumbens

91

The distinctiveness of T. procumbens has been recognised by its various collectors
over the past 140 years. A combination of features readily distinguish most specimens
even in the dried and pressed state. Plants are small and procumbent with much branch-
ing near the base and stems that seldom extend for more than about 20 cm. They are
quite scabrous and often have occasional tubercle-based hairs on the stems and leaf
undersides and margins. The leaves are small and usually subopposite, alternate or
arranged in irregular whorls of three. The flowers are small and produced singly in the
leaf axils on short, glabrous peduncles. The petals are usually pale lilac-pink with darker
longitudinal veins, sometimes apparently fading to white.

Some fragmentary material, particularly from low altitude areas of Tasmania
(including the type of T. pilosa), is difficult to identify with any confidence. Extensive
field study is required to determine the morphological limits of the taxa in the T. pilosa
complex growing in lowland habitats of Tasmania. Pending the outcome of such a study
it would seem prudent to retain T. procumbens as a distinct entity particularly in view of
the isolated Victorian populations and their possible threatened status.

In Victoria the three taxa occupy distinct geographical areas with little overlap in
their ranges and no reports of any two being sympatric. All three are generally identified
easily in the field in Victoria and from herbarium material collected in that State.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widespread and apparently well conserved in Tasmania; occurs within the Alpine
National Park in Victoria but so few colonies are known that it is probably best regarded
as vulnerable.

SELECTED SPECIMENS (41 specimens examined)

Victoria: Moroka Range, 2 Nov. 1973, Beauglehole 43483 & 43478 (MEL 1518271, MEL 1518270,
NSW 368296); Eastern Ranges; South Bryce Plain, Snowy Range, 24 Nov. 1980, Walsh 984 (MEL 641258).

Tasmania: St. George’s Bay, 1892, W. Fitzgerald (MEL 1008242); Southport, Stuart (MEL 10077949,
MEL 659452); Charlotte Cove, 14 Oct. 1984. A. Moscul 8661 (MEL 1620760); Near Lake Dobson, Mt. Field
National Park, 14 Dec. 1952, R. Melville 2368 (MEL 521058, NSW 368286); Mt. Ironstone, Dec. 1900, F.A.
Rodwuv (NSW 119682); Circular Head, 8 Nov. 1837, R.C. Gunn 217 (NSW 119678, NSW 119679);

92

Jeffrey A. Jeanes

Ironstone, Dec. 1899, F.A. Rodway (NSW 114023); Cradle Mountain, Dec. 1915, F.A. Rodway (NSW
119677); Between Bronte & Derwent Bridge, 18 Nov. 1960 & 24 Nov. 1965, M.E. Phillips 729 (CBG
002996, CBG 013807); Cradle Mountain, 16 Dec. 1990, M.M. Richardson 395 (CBG 9012276)- 7 miles down
from Butler’s Gorge towards Tarraleah, 4 Dec. 1965, M.E. Phillips 1049 (CBG 031298)- Mt Field National
Park, 15 Dec. 1929, H.F. Comber 1848 (HO 23320, HO 23318, HO 23323); Lake St Clair, 21 Dec. 1937,
H.D. Got don (HO 23360); Snow Hill, 12 Nov. 1988, P. Collier 3756 (HO 1 18672); Lyal! Highway near Lake
St Clair, 30 Nov. 1971, W.M. Curtis (HO 29421, HO 29425); Gravel pits, Southport, 7 Dec. 1958, W.M.
Curtis (HO 23345); Mountain Creek, north of Lake Sorell, 22 Nov. 1987, P. Collier 3010 (HO 120336)-
Wombat Moor, Mt Field National Park, Dec. 1944, W.M. Curtis (HO 29423); Kelly Range adjacent to Kelly
Basin, Macquarie Harbour, Mar. 1979, S.J. Berrigan 216 (HO 30618).

Key to the Tetratheca Pilosa Complex in Victoria.

1 Plant procumbent or weakly ascending; stems much-branched basally; branches to

c. 20 (rarely to 30) cm long; petals <5 mm long; peduncles <4 mm long in mature
flower Tetratheca procumbens

1 : Plant erect or spreading; stems not much-brapched basally; branches mostly 20-60
cm long; petals >5 mm long; peduncles 4-9 mm long in mature flower 2

2 Leaves mostly alternate, linear to narrow-ovate, usually <1.5 mm wide, margins
tightly revolute; ovary glabrous or pubescent, hairs usually short and gland-tipped
Tetratheca pilosa ssp. pilosa

2: Leaves alternate, opposite or whorled, narrow- to broad-elliptic or suborbicular,
usually >1.5 mm wide, margins flat, recurved or loosely revolute, particularly near
apex; ovary usually with long, hollow, shining hairs

Tetratheca pilosa ssp. latifolia

Acknowledgements

I thank John Eichler for location infonnation, Tim Entwisle and Philip Short for check-
ing and commenting on the manuscript, Enid Mayfield for executing the line drawing
and the directors and curatorial staff at CBG, HO and NSW for access to specimens.

References

Bentham, G. (1863). Flora Australiensis. Vol. I. (Lovell Reeve: London.)

Brummitt, R.K. & Powell, C.E. (1992). Authors of Plant Names. (The Royal Botanic Gardens: Kew.)
Buchanan, A.M. (ed.) (1995). A Census of the Vascular Plants of Tasmania & Index to The Student's Flora of
Tasmania. (Tasmanian Herbarium Occasional Publication no. 5: Hobart.)

Curtis, W.M. (1956). The Student’s Flora of Tasmania. Part 1. (Government Printer: Tasmania.)

Curtis, W.M. & Morris, D.I. (1975). The Student's Flora of Tasmania. Part I. 2nd edn (Government Printer:
Tasmania.)

Hooker, J.D. (1860). The botany of the Antarctic voyage of H.M. discovery ships Erebus and Terror in the
years 1839-1843, Part III. Flora Tasmaniae. Vol. 1. Dicotyledons. (Lovell Reeve: London.)

Rodway, L. (1903). The Tasmanian Flora. (Government Printer: Hobart.)

Schuchardt, T. (1853), Synopsis Tremandrearum: dissertatio inauguralis botanica. (Acad. Dieterichiana:
Gottingen.)

Thompson, J. (1976). A Revision of the Genus Tetratheca (Tremandraceae). Telopea 1(3): 139-215.

Paper received 2 August 1995.

Muelleria 9 : 93- 1 04 ( 1 996 )

New species of Pronectria, Vouauxiomyces, Wentiomyces and
Zwackhiomyces from Australasia

Sergey Y. Kondratyuk

N.G.Kholodny Institute of Botany, Tereshchenkivska 2, 252601 Kiev, Ukraine.

ABSTRACT

Four new lichenicolous fungi {Pronectria streimannii from Sticta cyphellulata from
Australasia, Vouauxiomyces brattii from Pseudocyphellaria faveolata from Tasmania,
Wentiomyces tatjanae from Pseudocyphellaria coronata from Tasmania, New Zealand
and Papua New Guinea, and Zwackhiomyces kantvilasii from Parmotrema chinense
from Tasmania) are described and illustrated, and their differences from related taxa are
discussed.

Introduction

During the study of lichenicolous fungi associated with Pseudocyphellaria, Sticta and
Lobaria (Kondratyuk et al., 1994; Kondratyuk & Galloway, 1995; Coppins &
Kondratyuk, 1995), a number of new taxa have been found, four of which are described
here. Further studies are in progress and will be reported elsewhere.

Taxonomy

1. Pronectria streimannii Kondratyuk, Coppins & D.J. Galloway sp.nov.

Fungus lichenicola. Perithecia immersa sed erumpescentia, dispersa, obpyriformia vel
papillata, aurantiaco-rubra, 270-300(-350) x 300-350 pm. Asci cylindrici, 80-100 x 0-12
pm, 8-spori. Ascosporae cylindriceae, hyalinae vel brunneae, 1-septatae, omamentatae
tuberculis hyalinis 1. 0-2.0 pm latis, (10. 0-)12. 7-16.2 x (7. 0-)8. 1-10.1 pm.

TYPUS; Queensland: Barron State Forest, Flerberton Range, 1 1 km SSW of Atherton.
7°22’S, 145°36’E, 1050 m, rain forest, logged in the past. On treelet stem. On Sticta
cyphellulata (MillLArg.) Hue, 2 Mar. 1983, H. Streimann 27294 (CBG 830 4195).

Lichenicolous fungus, parasymbiotic on the thallus of Sticta cyphellulata, producing
pale pinkish, rosaceous, orangish to slightly orange-brownish and reddish-violet asco-
mata. Ascomata perithecioid, immersed, developed in medium layer of the host thallus
and very characteristically damaged upper cortex of the thallus of the host, single or
appearing aggregated, obpyriform and conspicuously ostiolate, 270-300(-350) pm diam.
and up to 300-350 pm high, near ostiole about 80 pm thick and 100-130 pm high; wall
equal in thickness or somewhat broader in the vicinity of ostiole, prosenchymatous,
composed of 3-6 layers of polyangular cells; outer layers of cells reddish-brown, cells
6.7- 10.5(- 12.2) X 2. 2-7. 8 (-8.9) pm, with more or less thickened walls; inner layers less
intensely pigmented to hyaline and thin-walled cells, 7.8-13 x 1. 1-2.2 pm. Paraphyses
absent. Asci arising from the base of the ascomatal cavity, cylindrical, 80-100 x 10-12
pm, 8-spored. Ascospores monostichously arranged in the asci, remaining in these lines
after release from the asci, ellipsoid with rounded apices when young, soon becoming
more or less cylindrical, olivaceous brown before release from the asci, walls rather
thick, well developed (and easily visible in the light microscope), verruculose (with
warts 1. 0-2.0 pm diam.), (10-)12.7-16.2 x (7. 0-)8. 1-10.1 pm. (Fig. 1 a-d, 2 a-d, 6 c)

93

94

Sergey Y. Kondratyuk

NOTES

With its large perithecia and rather wide and verruculosely omamentated ascospores, P.
streimannii resembles the Icelandic species P. ornamentata (D.Hawksw.) Lowen,
known from Peltigera thalli (Hawksworth, 1982), and the Tasmanian species
Polycoccum jamesii D.Hawksw., known from Psoromidium versicolor (J.D. Hooker &
Taylor) D.J. Galloway (Hawksworth & Diederich 1988). Pronectria ornamentata differs
from the new species by its non-papillate perithecia, 4-spored asci, and by its ascospores
which are elongate-ellipsoid, rounded at the apices, and much longer {19-)25-31(-33) x
7-9(10) pm. P. streimannii differs from Polycoccum jamesii by its pale pinkish, rosa-
ceous, orangish to slightly orange-brownish and reddish-violet ascomata which do not

Fig. 1. Pronectria streimannii. a - ascomata on the host thalli, xl40. b - section of pcrithccium. x220. c -
wall of perithecium, xl420. d - ascospore, x5000.

New species of Pronectria, Voutiiixjomyces, Wentiomyces and Zwackhiomyces

95

arise in convex galls; by the lack of persistent branched and anastomosing cellular
pseiidoparaphyses, and by the strongly cylindrical asci with monostichously arranged
ascospores, which remain in these lines after release from the asci. In contrast, the asci
of P. jamesii are elongate, with more or less distichously arranged ascospores^

Another somewhat similar species is Polycoccum hiyonthae (Arnold) Vezda which
differs in having ascomata which are erumpent from the apothecia of the host (rather
than from the host thallus), much smaller perithecia [70-100(-150) pm], and in having
persistent, branched and anastomosing cellular pseudoparaphyses. The ascospores of P.
hiyonthae also differ, being only slightly vermculose and naiTower [(lO-)l 1-13(-15) x
(4-)4.5-6 pm] than those of Pronectria streimannii. The substrate of the two taxa also
differs, with Polvcoccwn bn’onthae occuring on Caloplaca and Pertusaria species.

Fig. 2. Pronectria streimannii. a - section of perithecium, scale 70 mm. b - ascus and ascospores after release
from the asci, scale 7 mm. c - asci, scale 7 mm. d - ascospores, scale 7 mm.

96

Sergey Y. Kondratyuk

2 . Vouauxiomyces brattii Kondratyuk sp. nov.

Fungus lichenicola. Conidiomata pycnidifonuia, semi-immersa vel erumpia, aggregata,
56-330 pm in diam., in gallis immersa, muris textura angulari. Cellulae conidiogenae
ampuliformes vel lageniformes, hyalinae, 8.0-10.0(-14.5) x 3. 0-4.0 pm. Conidia
holoblastica, clavata vel pyrifonnia, hyalina, simplicia, apicibus rotundatis et basi trun-
catis, {12-)13.5-!6.5(-17.5) x (4.0-)4.5-5.5 pm.

TYPUS; Tasmania: ‘Fern Bower’ Sth of Maydena. On Pseudocyphellaria faveolata
(Delise) Malme. [no date], G.C. Bratt, M.H. Bratt & WST (FIO 34317).

Lichenicolous fungus, parasymbiotic on the thallus of Pseudocyphellaria faveolata,
producing black conidiomata occuring on wart- or gall-like deformations of the host
thalli. Conidiomata pycnidial, immersed at first but becoming erumpent through the sur-
face of the host, mainly aggregated in groups in blackish stromatic tissues of warts or
gall-like deformations (0. 6-1.0 mm diam. and 0.4-0. 5 mm high) of the host thalli, black,
56-330 pm diam. and 28-111 pm high; wall of mainly 6-8 cell layers, 11.2-16.8 pm
thick, dark brown, pseudoparenchymatous (textura angularis), cells thick-walled, 3-4 pm
diam. Conidiogenoits cells holoblastic, ampulliform to lageniform, lining the pycnidial
cavity, percurrently proliferating, annellate with to 3-(4?) annellations, hyaline, smooth-
walled, 8.0- 10.0(- 14.5) X 3. 0-4.0 pm. Conidia arising singly, obpyriform, often rather
iiTegular in shape, hyaline, collecting in a macilaginous mass in the pycnidial cavity,
simple, apex rounded, the base conspicuously truncated, thin-walled, smooth-walled
(12-)13.5-16.5(-17.5) x(4.0-)4.5-5 pm. (Fig. 3 a-b)

NOTES

Vouauxiomyces brattii differs from the other species of Vouauxiomyces in having much
bigger conidia; in contrast, these are 3-5(-6) x 2-3.5(-4) pm in V. ramalinae (Nordin)
D.Hawksw. and (7-)7. 5-10. 5(-l 1.5) x (5-)5.5-7(-7.5) pm in V. santessonii D.Hawksw.
(all data according to Flawksworth 1981), and 4.5-5.5(-6) x 2. 5-3. 5 pm in V. granulatae
Wedin (Wedin 1994) occuring on Pseudocyphellaria granulata from Argentina.
Vouauxiomyces species are anamorphs of Abrothallus, but no such anamorph was pre-
sent among the material of V. brattii.

3 . Wentiomyces tatjanae Kondratyuk sp. nov.

Fungus lichenicola. Ascomata superficialia, uniloculata, dispersa, singularia, nigra, glo-
bosa, ostiolata, setosa, (80-) 120-280 pm diam; setae atrobrunneae, simplices, rectae vel
leviter arcuatae, leaves, 18-36 x 2. 5-5. 5 pm; muris 6-12 pm crassis, e 3-4 stratis cellu-
larum et pseudoparenchymaticarum constantes. Paraphyses desunt. Asci cylindrici, bitu-
nicati, (40-)54-63 x 5.5-6.5(-7.0) pm, 8-spori. Ascosporae ellipsoideae, 1-septatae,
hyalinae, laeves, 6.0-1 1.0(-12.0) x (1.5-)2. 0-3. 5(4.0) pm.

TYPUS: Tasmania: Florentine Valley, by track 7, about 55 miles [88 km] WNW of
Flobart, in high forest of Nothofagus cunninghamii in moderate shade with numerous
mosses, growing on fallen logs, on Pseudocyphellaria coronata (Miill. Arg.) Malme
thalli, 13 Dec. 1952, R .Melville with J.H. Willis, W.M. Curtis & D. Paton 2339
(HOLOTYPUS: BM).

Lichenicolous fungus, parasymbiotic on Pseudocyphellaria and Lobaria thalli and
apothecia, forming black setose ascomata. Ascomata superficial, uniloculate, perithe-
cioid, scattered, arising singly or rarely in groups of 2-3(-7), black, globose and very
often collapsed, ostiolate, setose mainly on whole surface of peritecia or particularly
around the ostiole, (80-) 120-280 pm diameter. Setae numerous (20 and more), dark
brown, simple, straight or slightly arcuate, smooth-walled, thick-walled, 18-36 x
2. 5-5. 5; walls 6-12 pm thick, pseudoparenchymatous, composed of 3-4 layers of cells,
brown-blackish, K+ greenish. Paraphvses absent. Asci very numerous, arising in a

New species of Pronectria, Vonauxjomyces, Wentiomyces and Zwackhiomyces

97

a

b

Fig. 3 Vouaiixiomyces brattii. a - conidiogenous cells, scale 7 mm. b - conidia, scale 7 mm.

98

Sergey Y. Kondratyuk

fascicle from the base of the perithecial cavity, narrowly cylindrical to cylindrical with
8 ascospores aiTanged in l(-2) lines, (40-)54-63 x 5.5-6.5(-7) pm. Ascospores ellipsoid,
1 -septate, slightly constricted at the septa, the cells sometimes rather unequale in size
hyaline, smooth- walled, 0-4 guttulate, 6.0-1 1 ,0(- 12.0) x ( 1.5-)2.0-3.5(-4.0) pm. (Fig 4
a-d, 5 a-c, 6 a-b)

NOTES

The new species differs from Wentiomyces peltigericola D.Hawksw. (Hawksworth
1980) in having much larger perithecia (80-125 pm in W. peltigericola), smaller
ascospores (12-16 x 3. 5-4. 5 pm in W. peltigericola), and in having different hosts, W.
peltigericola occurring on species of Peltigera aphthosa group.

Both Wentiomyces tatjane and W. peltigericola show some superficial similarity to
Niesslia cladoniicola D.Hawksw. & W.Gams (Hawksworth 1975), a species which
grows on aged Cladonia rangiformis Hoffm. podetia. However, N. cladoniicola differs
from the new species by having a much thicker perithecium wall consisting 4-6(-8)
layers of cells, having persistent paraphyses and unitunicate asci, and much narrower
ascospores (4.5-8 x 1.5-2 pm).

ADDITIONAL SPECIMENS EXAMINED

NEW ZEALAND: On Pseiidocvplwllaria coronata (Miill.Arg.) Malme thalli, 1843-1844 W. Stephenson 40
(BM ex Herb. R.J. Shuttleworth).

PAPUA NEW guinea: Southern Highlands: Munia Logging Area, 14 km NW of Jalibu, 2300 m alt ,
Nothqfagus and Podocarpaceae dominated forest, on fallen, dead tree branch, on Sticta cf boschiana thalli
and apothecia, 8 Sep. 1982, H. Streimann 23329 (CBG).

4 . Zwackhiomyces kantvilasii Kondratyuk sp. nov.

Fungus lichenicola. Ascomata globosa vel irregulariter globosa, 140-180 pm in diam.,
dispersa, thallo vegetativo hospitis insidentia, semiimmersa vel superficialia, atra.
Peridium in sectione longitudinali c. 1 8-27(-36) pm crassum, castaneum. Hamathecium
paraphysoideis, 1.0- 1.5 pm diam. Asci cylindrici (40-)54-72(-80) x -lO(-ll) pm, 4-
spori. Ascosporae hyaline, parietibus distincte verrucose punctatis, 14.5-18.0 x 3.5-4.0(-
5.5) pm, 1 -septate, 4 -guttulatae.

TYPus: Tasmania: Tinderbox (near Hobart), alt. sea level, on Parmotrema chinense
(Osbeck) Hale & Ahti on dolerite in open dry sclerophyll forest, 20 July 1980, G.
Kantvilas 277/80 (holotypus: BM).

Fungus lichenicolous, parasymbiotic on Parmotrema chinense thalli fonuing scattered,
globose, black ascomata. Ascomata pseudoperithecia, globosa or irregular globosa, scat-
tered, semi-immersed in the beginning, then superficial or immersed in host thallus only
at the base, black, 140-180(-200) pm in diam. Walls in longitudinal section 18-27(-36)
pm thick, blackish brown or dark brown at the base. Hamathecium paraphysoids persis-
tent, branched, hyaline, 1.0- 1.5 pm diam. Asci cylindrical to narrowly cylindrical,
(40)54-72(-80) x 8-10(-l 1) pm, 4-spored. Ascospores hyaline, smooth or distinctly ver-
rucose at maturity, 1-septate, 4-guttulate, 14.5-18.0 x 3.5-4.0(-5.5) pm. (Fig. 6 d, 7 a-d,

8 a-b)

NOTES

The new species is most closely related to Zwackhiomyces euplocinus Haf., Grube &
R.S.Egan and to Z. sphinctrinoides (Zwackh) Grube & Haf (see Grube & Hafellner
1990 for descriptions). Z. euplocinus differs in having 6-8-spored asci, 46-60(-65) x 12-
14 pm, much wider ascospores (14-18 x 4-6 pm), and by occurring on Speerschneidera
eiiploca.

Z. sphinctrinoides differs from Z. kantvilasii by its larger perithecia (200-240 pm
in diam.), 8-spored asci, 75-85 x 12-14 pm, much longer and wider ascospores [(15-)
15.5-23 X (4-)4.5-6.5(-8.5) pm], and by occurring on Hecidea ’ lurida.

New species of Pronectriu, Vouaiixjomyces, Wentiomyces and Zwuckhioniyces

99

Fig. 4. Wentiomyces tatjcmae. a - ascomata on the host thalli. x85. b and c - setose pcritheciiini. x355. d -
setae, xl420.

ADDITIONAL SPECIMEN EXAMINED

TASMANIA: Notlcy Gorge, on shaded myrtle at 086 C8/1, 250 feet [c. 76 in], alt., on Parmotremu
chenense, 2 Jun. 1963, G.C. Bratt 110 (BM).

Acknowledgements

I am grateful to the curators and keepers of the cited herbaria for assistance with loan of
specimens, to Chris Jones, Louisa Jones, Sue Barnes (BM, EM Unit), and to Vanessa
Seaforth (BM) for expert EM and photographic assistance. My thanks to Dr David J.
Galloway for the opportunity to work at the BM, as well as to him and Patricia

Fig. 5. Wentiomyces latjanae. a - setae, scale 7 mm. b - asci, scale 7 mm. c - ascosporcs, scale 7mm.

New species of Pronectriu, Voiiau.xJomyces, Wentiomyces and Zwackhiomyces

101

Fig. 6. Wentiomyces tatjanae. a - ascospores, x3550. b. - ascospores, x7100. Pronectria streimuimii. c -
ascospores x7IOO. Zwackhiomyces kantvilasii. d - ascospores xSOOO.

102

Sergey Y. Kondratyuk

Galloway for their hospitality during my stay in London. I am also thankful to Ms
A. M. O’Dare and to Dr B.J.Coppins for their hospitality and generous help with accomo-
dation during my stay in Edinburgh. I acknowledge the invaluable help given me by
staff of Dept of Botany (BM) during my stay there in 1994, especially the help and hos-
pitality 1 received from William Purvis, Pat Wolseley, Peter James as well as from
Gmtaras Kantvilas (HO) and Prof. Per Magnus Jorgensen (Bergen). I thank Dr
G.Kantvilas for assistance with English and the Royal Society for financial support.

Fig. 7. Zwackhiomyces kimtvihsii. a - ascomata on the host thalli, x35. b - ascomata on the host talli, x500. c
- pcrithccium. x5()0. d - ascosporcs, x5000.

New species of Pronectiia, Vouauxjomyces, Wentiomyces and Zwackhiomyces

103

Fig, 8. Zwackhiomyces kantvilasii. a - asci, scale = 7 mm. b - ascospores, scale 7mm.

104

Sergey Y. Kondratyuk

Rererences

Coppins, B.J. & Kondratyuk S.Y. (1995). Stigiomyces and Pseudonitschkia: two new genera of lichenicolous
fungi. Edinburgh Journal of Botany 52 (2): 229-236.

Grube, M. & Hafellner, J. (1990). Studien an flechtenbewohnenden Pilzen der Sammelgattung Didymella
(Ascomycetes, Dothideales). Nova Hedwigia 51 (3-4): 283-360.

Hawksworth. D.L. (1975). Notes on British lichenicolous fungi, I. Kew Bulletin. 30: 183-203.

Hawksworth, D.L. (1980). Notes on some fungi occuring on Peltigera, with a key to accepted species.
Transactions of the British Mycological Society 74 (2): 363-386.

Hawksworth. D.L. (1981). The lichenicolous Coelomycetes. Bulletin British Museum (Natural History)
Botany series 9\ \-9%.

Hawksworth. D.L. (1982 [1983]). A new species of Nectriella with ornamented spores from Iceland, with a
key to the lichenicolous species. Nova Hedwigia 35: 755-762.

Hawksworth, D.L. & Diederich. P. (1988). A synopsis of the genus Polycoccum [Dothideales), with a key to
accepted species. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 90: 293-3 1 2.

Kondratyuk, S.J. & Galloway, D.J. (1995). Lichenicolous flingi and chemical patterns in Pseudocyphellaria.
Bibliotheca Lichenologica 57:327-345.

Kondratyuk, S.Y., Galloway, D.J. & Hawksworth, D.L. (1994). Unguiculariopsis ahtii, and some other new
lichenicolous fungi from Pseudocyphellaria. Acta Botanica Fennica 150: 93-97.

Wedin, M. (1994). New and noteworthy lichenicolous fungi from southermost South America. Lichenologist
26: 301-310.

Revised paper received 3 1 August 1995.

Muelleria9: 105 - 109 ( 1996 )

Dipodium pardalinum (Orchidaceae), a new species from Victoria and
South Australia

David L. Jones

Centre for Plant Biodiversity Research, G.P.O Box 1600, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital TeiTitory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Dipodium pardalinum from Victoria and South Australia, related to Dipodium roseum
D.L. Jones & M. A. Clem., is described and illustrated.

Introduction

Continuing studies into the genus Dipodium R.Br. (Jones & Clements 1987, Jones 1991 )
have revealed the presence of a taxon in western Victoria and south-eastern South
Australia which is described here as a new species. This species was first brought to my
attention from the Heathmere area by Dorothy and the late Collin Woolcock in 1991,
and then by others from different localities in subsequent years. It is mentioned in the
notes under D. roseum in volume 2 of Flora of Victoria (Entwisle 1994). Morphological
observations during a field trip in 1994 confirmed its distinctiveness from D. roseum
and it is here described as new.

Methods

This study is based on the morphological examination of fresh flowers collected from
localities in southern Australia, examination of dissected flowers mounted on cards, also
dried and spirit-preserved herbarium specimens and photographs of living flowers of the
taxa involved. Herbarium collections (spirit and dried) were examined from AD,
CANB, HO and MEL. Photographs of types of all pertinent described taxa have been
examined including those in overseas herbaria (LINN, LIV). Measurements given in the
description are from living plants or dissected flowers on cards. Notes on distribution,
habitat (particularly soil and plant association) and conservation status were derived
from field studies.

Taxonomy

Dipodium pardalinum D. L. Jones .syr. nov.

affinis Dipodium roseo D.L. Jones & M. A. Clem, a qua floribus perdilutibus roseis aperi-
entibus cito albidis decolorantibus, tepalis grosse maculatis, et medilobo labelli anguste
usque late elliptico et grosse punctato differt.

TYPUs: c. 4.2 km W along Jarrets Rd, Heathmere, Victoria, 38°12’S, 141°34’E, 10 Feb.
1994, D.L. Jones 12836 & B.E. Jones (holotype: CBG; isotype: AD, MEL, NSW)

Glabrous terrestrial herb. Stem bracts ovate-deltate, to 1 5 mm long and 20 mm wide,
dark brown, fleshy, acute. Inflorescence 40-90 cm tall, fleshy, green to dark reddish
black, bearing 10-c. 40 flowers in a loose open raceme, the peduncle much longer than
the rachis. Fertile bracts narrowly ovate-deltate, 5-10 mm long, 2-3 mm wide, scarious,
brown, acute to obtuse, closely sheathing to spreading. Pedicels 5-10 mm long, slender,
slightly twisted, straight or curved, green to reddish brown. Ovary narrowly ovoid to
narrowly obovoid, 4-7 mm long, 2-3 mm wide, not gibbous, smooth or sparsely verru-

105

106

David L. Jones

cose, green or dark reddish brown. Flowers 20-30 mm across, opening very pale pink
and quickly fading to white, with numerous irregularly shaped, coarse (mostly 0.9- 1.3
mm across), dark red spots and blotches, sometimes also with red stainings; tepals
strongly recurved in the distal third. Dorsal sepal narrowly ovate-lanceolate to narrowly
elliptical, 12-20 mm long, 3-5 mm wide, obtuse to subacute. Lateral sepals narrowly
ovate-lanceolate to narrowly elliptical, 12-20 mm long, 4-6 mm wide, asymmetrical,
widely divergent, obtuse to sub-obtuse. Petals narrowly ovate-lanceolate, 10-20 mm
long, 4-6 mm wide, asymmetrical, obliquely erect, divergent, obtuse to subacute.
Lahelliim 11-17 mm long, 4.5-6 mm wide, white with coarse red spots and blotches and
white hairs on the callus; lateral lobes narrowly spathulate, 3-4 mm long, 0.8-1 mm
wide, obliquely erect, column-embracing, inner base sparsely puberulous, apex obtuse,
often irregular; mid-lobe narrowly elliptical, 8-12 mm long, 4.5-6 mm wide, apex
upcurved, obtuse when flattened, lateral margins recurved. Lahellum hairs c. 0.5 mm
long, white, erect, extending from the apex of the callus to the apex of the mid-lohe, the
longest hairs near the middle, overall forming a broad patch which occupies most of the
ventral surface of the mid-lobe. Callus consisting of two, linear-tapered, convergent,
pubescent keels c. 3 mm long, 0.6 mm wide. Column poiTect from the end of the ovary,
6-7 mm long, c. 3 mm wide, white, fleshy, with a yellow patch below the stigma on the
anterior surface, pubescent below this, saccate at the base. Anther cap c. 1.5 mm long, c.
1 .2 mm wide, with a shortly beaked rostrum. Stigma elliptical, c. 1 mm across, deeply
sunken. Pollinarium c. 1.3 mm long; retinaculum ovate, c. 0.6 mm long; caudicles c. 0.3
mm long; pollinia c. 0.6 mm long, ellipsoid, waxy, dark yellow. Capsules obovoid, 14-
18 mm long, 8-10 mm wide, pendant, green to dark red, smooth or sparingly verrucose.
(Fig. 1)

ETYMOLOGY

From the Greek pardos, pardalis, leopard; in reference to the prominent spots on the
tepals and labellum.

FLOWERING PERIOD
December to March

DISTRIBUTION

Widespread in the wetter parts of western Victoria and extending into south-eastern
South Australia. The new species is abundant in the forests to the north of Portland
(grids E4, E5, E12, E13) and in the vicinity of Ballarat (grids J35, J44, J26, J27, N19,
N20, Nil). There is also a disjunct easterly record from The Basin in the Dandenong
Ranges (photo; J.Jeanes pers. comm.)-

HABITAT

Open forest, usually with an understorey dominated by bracken, sometimes shrubby.
Soils include tertiary sands, sandy clay loams, auriferous quartz-bearing loams and
brown clay loams.

NOTES

It is remarkable that such a widespread common taxon has remained unnamed for so
long. The new species usually grows with D. roseum, often in very close proximity, and
has more than likely been passed over as a variant of that species. Hybrids between the
two are unknown despite several searches. Both species have recurved perianth seg-
ments but D. pardalinum has much paler flowers, which open pale pink and quickly
fade to white, with prominent coarse (mostly 0.9- 1.3 mm across) reddish spots on the
tepals (bright rose pink flowers in D. roseum with fine spots and speckles [mostly 0.3-
0.6 mm across] on the tepals. Whereas the labellum of D. roseum is pink with prominent
darker stripes and dark pink hairs, that of D. pardalinum is white with coarse reddish
spots and white hairs. The overall pale appearance of the new species makes it readily
discernible from a distance and identifiable in mixed populations with D. roseum.
Comparable floral cards of both species are shown in Fig. 2.

Dipodium purdulimim

107

Fig. 1. Dipodium pardalinum, D.L. Jones, a - flower from front, scale-bar = I cm. b - flower from side, scale-
bar = I cm. c - labellum from above, scale bar = 4 mm. d - labellum from side, scale-bar = 4 mm. e - column
from front, scale-bar = 4 mm. f - column from side, scale-bar = 4 mm. g - anther cap from side, scale-bar = 1
mm. h - anther cap from above, scale-bar = 1 mm. i - pollinarium, scale-bar = 1 mm. All drawn from Jones
1 2837 (CBG)

108

David L. Jones

Fig. 2. Dissected floral cards of specimens of Dipodium roseum from Jones 12S35 (CBG) and D. pardalinum
from Jones 12S34 (CBG).

Dipodium pardalinum

109

CONSERVATION STATUS

Widely distributed, locally common and conserved in National Parks.

SELECTED COLLECTIONS (17 examined)

victoria: Cobbobonee State Forest, Heathmere, 18 Mar. 1992, Beecham (CBG); Bells Reef Rd, c. 5 km
W of Daylesford, 21 Feb. 1993, Entwisle 2IS! (MEL); c. 7.7 km along Fish Holes Rd, near junction with
Boiling Swamp Rd, Heathmere, 10 Feb. 1994, Jones 12841 (CBG); Meaghers Rd, c. 15 km N of Portland, 10
Feb. 1994, Jones 12830 (CBG, MEL); c. 8.6 km N of Heywood, 1 1 Feb. 1 994, Jones 12842 (CBG); between
Smythesdale and Smythes Ck, c. 12 km W of Ballarat, 1 1 Feb. 1994. Jones 12845 (CBG); c. 2.4 km SW of
Creswick towards Sulky, 1 1 Feb. 1994, Jones 12846 (CBG, MEL); Bells Reef Rd. Wombat State Forest, 1 1
Feb. 1994, Jones 72547 (CBG); c. 1.3 km SW of Denver, 11 Feb. 1994, Jones 12849 {CBG, MEL).

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: just N of Naracoorte, 30 Dec. 1994, Murfet 2146 (CBG).

Acknowledgements

I thank the following people for useful discussions about this species and in some cases
for supplying specimens and information on localities; Tim Entwisle, Jeff Jeanes, Paul
Barnett, Geoff Beilby, Everett Foster, Peter Branwhite, Bob Bates, Denzel Murfet, Kath
Alcock, Dorothy Woolcock and the late Collin Woolcock. The Directors of the
Australian Orchid Foundation are thanked for their support of field operatives and I
thank the Directors of AD, CANB, HO, MEL for allowing me access to specimens. I am
also grateful to my wife Barbara for assistance and companionship while in the field,
Lyn Craven for the Latin diagnosis and Mark Clements, Andrew Young, Jo Palmer and
Ben Wallace for commenting on the manuscript. Marion Garratt prepared the illustra-
tion from my sketches.

References

Entwisle, T.J. (1994). Dipodium In N.G. Walsh & T.J. Entwisle (eds). Flora of Victoria. Vol. 2. (Inkata Press:
Melbourne.) pp. 899-901.

Jones, D.L. & Clements. M.A. (1987). New orchid taxa from south-eastern Queensland. Proceedings of the
Royal Society of Queensland 98: 123-32.

Jones. D.L. (1991). New Taxa of Australian Orchidaceae. Australian Orchid Research 2: 48-5 1 .

Revised paper received 18 September 1995.

Muelleria9: 111-114(19%)

The consequences of a footnote: typifications and place of first valid
publication of two Australian Abutilon (Malvaceae) species published
by Mueller

R.M. Barker

c/-State Herbarium of South Australia, Botanic Gardens and State Herbarium, North
Terrace, 5000, Adelaide, South Australia.

ABSTRACT

With the addition of a footnote, Mueller invalidated his first publication of two
Australian species of Abutilon, A. diplotrichum and A. halophilum. The place of first
valid publication is discussed and A. diplotrichum is reduced to a subspecies of A.
fraseri.

Introduction

Mueller published the names Abutilon halophilum and Abutilon diplotrichum in Linnaea
in 1853. However the status of Abutilon at that time was questionable and he added a
footnote (see Fig. 1 ) to the effect that Abutilon was to be considered a subgenus of Sida.
In doing so it is concluded that he invalidated the combinations in Abutilon and further-
more did not make the combinations in Sida. .

Under Article 33.1 (Greuter et ai. International Code of Botanical Nomenclature,
1994), a combination is not validly published unless the author definitely associates the
final epithet with the name of the genus. Clearly Mueller did not definitely associate the
epithets with Sida by his footnote since nowhere does he mention the precise combina-
tions Sida halophila or Sida diplotricha in this publication. In a later publication, an
account of the plants indigenous to the colony of Victoria (Mueller 1860-2), he does
refer to them by these names. However there is no evidence that anybody has ever
considered that these were the names being published in the original Linnaea article (see
for example Australian Plant Name Index, Chapman 1991 ).

A similar argument cannot be used against combinations in Abutilon since the
headings above the descriptions are clearly Abutilon halophilum and Abutilon
diplotrichum. As a result this paper in Linnaea has always been cited as the first place of
publication of these names. However, the footnote is sufficient to suggest that Mueller
did not accept his own name and thereby contravened Article 34. 1 where a name is not
validly published when it is not accepted by the author in the original publication.

Sida or Abutilon?

To understand why Mueller was equivocal about the recognition of the two new species
as belonging in Sida or Abutilon requires some understanding of the argument which
then existed about the taxonomy of this group.

Prior to Linnaeus’s work, Tournefort recognised genera of first rank based on
flower and fruit morphology and genera of second rank based on vegetative characters.
He was the first to describe Abutilon in 1700 on the basis of its fmits and this name was
adopted by Miller in his many editions of the Gardeners dictionaiy published between
1721 and 1768. Linnaeus’s concept of a genus, based primarily on floral characters,
differed from that of Tournefort, and he considered Abutilon species to belong under
Sida. Steam (1974) gives a very good account of Tournefort and Miller’s work in
relation to Linnaeus. Linnaeus’s concept was followed by Cavanilles (1785) and by de
Candolle (1824) in their monographs of the family, but many other authors (e.g.

Ill

112

R.M. Barker

20. Al>ii<iloii*) ilij>lo<i-(cUum, fniliciilnsiim , diiriisiim
imdiquc toiucuto Incvi stcllari arlinilalo Acsiiliim, i)ilis loii-
gioribiis sparse inlcniiixlis , foliis Airidiilis ovalo- vcl orldcii-
lalo-cordalis olitiisis, serraliiris siilidiipllcalo - creiialis^ pciiolo
acqiiiloiigis aiit brcviorilins , sdpiilis liiirari - liliroi iiiiljiis dcci-
diiis, pcdiinciilis IcniiilMis axillariliiis sniilariis iiiiilloris apieem
versus arfieiilads dcniqiie hni izniilaliliiis petioliim panim siipc-
ranlilms, caijris qiiiiiqiiefidi loin’s siilidelloideis aj>ieiilalis, rar-
pidiis circa dceem uiargiiicin versus puberuiis cuiupressis acii-
tis veuosis dispermis cal 3 cciu arqnaiilibus , sciuiniljiis albo-
puberiilis.

la plauiliebiis seaiisalsis sferilibiis propler Ciidiiaba.

-1=) Sidac subgciius.

Fig. 1. The footnote published by Mueller in Linnea in 1853.

Gaertner (1791), Kunth (1822) and Walpers (1842, 1851)) treated Abutilon as distinct
from Sida because of its pluriovulate rather than uniovulate carpels. Thus there were
two schools of thought that persisted for a century without resolution.

Within Australia, the only species now referred to Abutilon to be published before
those of Mueller were Abutilon geranioides (de Candolle 1824) and Abutilon fraseri
(Hooker 1848); both were published as species of Sida belonging to Sect. Abutilon.

Thus Mueller’s 1853 publication, his first on this group, came at a time when the
taxonomic community was divided as to the status of Abutilon.. It is interesting there-
fore that in this same paper he described a new genus Abutilaea with a single species, A.
cryptantha, and two years later (Mueller 1855) described a further two species within
Abutilon. A. beluianum and A. otocarpum, but this time without reference to Sida.

By the 1860’s, however, Mueller had changed his mind again. He described three
new species within Sect. Abutilon of Sida, S. oxycarpa. S. leucopetala, and S.
cryptopetala (Mueller 1860) and in a discussion including other Australian Malvaceous
genera (Mueller 1862) reduced Abutilon, Lawrencia, Hoheria, Fleischeria and
Abutilaea to Sida because the ‘carpological characters become confluent by many
intermediate forms ‘.

Bentham’s two accounts of Malvaceae (Bentham 1862, 1863), in which he recog-
nised Abutilon as distinct from Sida on the basis of its 2 or more ovules per cell rather
than 1 ovule, seem to have convinced Mueller as to the validity of Abutilon as a genus.
He described a further three new species (Mueller 1875, 1879) as Abutilon. There were
problems only with Abutilon lepidum, which he placed in Sida because of the single
seed (Mueller 1868), but he clearly recognised its affinities to Abutilon since he distrib-
uted and annotated specimens under the manuscript name Abutilon lepidum.

FIRST PLACE OF VALID PUBLICATION

Accepting that the names Abutilon diplotrichum and A. halophilwn were not validly
published in Linnaea, where was their first place of publication? It was originally
thought by the author that the next mention of A. halophilum with a clear reference back
to the description in Linnaea was by Mueller in 1854 in the Transactions of the
Philosophical Society of Victoria whereas for A. diplotrichum the earliest reference was
a listing by Karl Mueller (1857) in Walpers Annales, a compilation of new species pub-

Abutifon

113

lished at that time from around the world. Fortunately, the referee consulted Dr Paul
Wilson of PERTH, and he was able to point out that the index or ‘Register’ to Linnaea
in which the species are clearly listed as species of Ahutilon would constitute the first
place of valid publication of tire names A. diplotrichum and A. halophiliim. Since the
editor of Linnaea at this time was Schlechtendal, the authorship of the name becomes
‘F.Muell. ex Schldl.’.

STATUS OF ABUTILON DIPLOTRICHUM AND ABUTILON HALOPHILUM

In my almost completed revision of Abutilon for Australia, it has been found that A.
diplotrichum cannot be maintained at the specific level since it differs from A. fraseri
(Lindl.) Walp. only in the lack of pubescence on the mericarps. It has consequently been
reduced to a subspecies and since the combination is required for the Flora of Victoria,
this combination is formalised here.

Some doubt has also existed in the past as to the status of A. halophilum, since
Bentham treated it as a variety of A. fraseri. However there is no doubt of its specific
status since it differs from that species by its transversely elliptic or very broadly
obovate leaves and very much larger fruit. By the structure of its fruit, it is possibly
more closely related to the A. lepidum complex than to A. fraseri.

SYNONYMY AND TYPIFICATION

Abutilon fraseri (Hook.)Walp. subsp. diplotrichum (F.Muell.) R.M. Barker, comb, et
stat. nov.

Abutilon diplotrichum F. Muell. ex Schldl., Linnaea 25: 751 (Dec. 1853); Sida
diplotricha (F.Muell. ex Schldl.) F.Muell., Fragm. 2: 11(1860); F.Muell., PI. Indig.
Colony Viet. 165(1860-2); Previously published description: Sida (Abutilon) diplotricha
F.Muell., Linnaea 25:380 (1853) nom. invalid (since the epithet was not clearly associ-
ated with one of the genera), lectotype (here designated): In planitiebus semisalsis
sterilibus prope Cudnaka [Kanyaka], Oct. 1847[1851], F. Mueller s.n., MEL5 16338;
iSOLECTOTYPE: MELS 16348. - Both sheets have been annotated as' Abutilon
diplotrichum Ferd. Mueller ‘ and the lectotype sheet was seen by Bentham. The lecto-
type sheet also bears the annotation "Sida diplotricha" but this is probably not in
Mueller’s hand. The date 1847 is clearly erroneous as Mueller’s collections from
Cudnaka all date from his visit to the Flinders Ranges in 1851 (Grandison 1990). An
undated specimen of A. fraseri from the Melbourne Botanic Gardens (MELl 1 1380) has
been labelled as Sida diplotricha by Mueller; it has no type status but demonstrates
Mueller ‘s changeable concepts concerning the rank of Abutilon.

Abutilon fraseri \ar. parvi flora Benth., FI. Austral. 1: 205 (1863) p.p. only with respect
to Beckler s.n., 30 Dec. 1860, Mt Goningberri proper; syntype: MELl 11389, K
(Herb. Hooker); isosyntype: MELl 1 1388. - Although not from South Australia as cited
in the protologue, the syntypes are annotated as A. diplotrichum by Mueller and the K
specimen has the red pencil determination so characteristic of many of the specimen
sheets studied by Bentham.

Abutilon fraseri var. diplotrichum (F.Muell. )Domin., Biblioth. Bot. 89: 400 (1928) nom.
illeg. (var. parviflora Benth. cited in synonymy).

Abutilon halophilum F.Muell. ex Schldl., Linnaea 25: 751(Dec. 1853); Trans. Phil.
Soc. Viet. 1: 13 (1854); F. Muell. in Hook., J. Bot. & Kew Card. Misc. 8: 10 (1856);
Muell. Berol. in Walp., Ann. Bot. Syst. 4: 315 (1857); Baker f, J. Bot. 31: 268 (1893);
A. S. Mitchell, FI. Central Australia 214 (1981); J.G.Reid, FI. S.Australia 2: 824 (1986);
A.S. Mitchell & E.H. Norris, FI. New South Wales 1: 332-335 (1990). Sida halophila
(F.Muell ex Schldl.) F.Muell., PL Indig. Colony Viet. 165 (1860-2). A. fraseri
(Hook.)Walp. var. halophilum (F.Muell.) Benth., FI. Austral. 1: 205 (1863). Previously
published description: Sida (Abutilon) halophilum F.Muell., Linnaea 25: 381 (1853);
nom. invalid (since the epithet was not clearly associated with one of the genera), lecto-

114,

R.M. Barker

TYPE (here designated): Flinders Range, montem Brown, Nov. 1851, F. Mueller s.n.
(MEL594392); syntype: between Flinders Ranges and top of Spencers Gulf, Oct. 1851,
F. Mueller s.n (MEL594393); possible syntype or isolectotype: Spencers Gulf, s.
dat.. Anon. s.n. (MELl 12217 p.p., middle specimen only).

Acknowledgements

Thanks to Paul Wilson, Philip Short and Bill Barker for their comments on this manu-
script. This work fonus a minor part of a revision of Abutilon being carried out under
funding from the Australian Biological Resources Survey.

Bibliography

Bentham, G. (1862). Notes on Malvaceae and Sterciiliaeeae. Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean
Society. Botany 6: 97-123 ,

Bentham. G. ( 1 863). Malvaeeae In F/ora .TicstraZ/ens/s. Vol. 1 (L. Reeve & Co.: London.) pp. 184-225.

Candolle de, A.P. (1824). Malvaceae. In Prodronius systematis naturalis regni vegetabilis. 1. (Treuttel &
Wurtz: Paris.) pp. 429-474.

Cavanilles, J (1785). Monadelphiac classis dissertationes deeem. Diss. I. Dissertatio hotanica de Sida.
(F. A. Didot: Paris.)

Chapman. A.D. ( 1991 ). Australian Plant Name Index. Australian Flora and Fauna Series. No. 12. (Australian
Government Printing Service: Canberra.)

Gaertner. J. ( 1 79 1 ). Dc fructihus et seminihus plantarum 2: 249-25 1 . tab. 134, 135.

Grandison. R. (1990). The 1851 botanical excursion of Ferdinand Mueller to the Flinders Ranges, South
Australia. In P.S. Short (cd.) History of systematic botany in Australasia. (Australian Systematie
Botany Society Inc.: Melbourne.)

Greater, W. (ed.) (1994). International Code of Botanical Nomenclature. (Tokyo Code). (Koeltz: Germany.)

Hooker, W.D. (1848). In T.L. Mitchell, Journal of an expedition into the interior of tropica! Australia.
(Longman, Brown, Green & Longman: London.) p. 368.

Kunth, C.S. (1822). Malvaceae. In F.W.H.A. von Humboldt & A.J.A.Bonpland, Novae Genera et Species
plantarum. 5: 253-308.

Mueller, F..I.H. (1853). Linnaea 25: 381-383.

Mueller, F.J.H. ( 1 855). Malvaceae In Transactions of the Philosophical Society of Victoria. 1:12-13.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1860). Sida cryptopetala. Fragmenta pliytographiae AustraUae. Vol. 2 (Government Printer:
Melbourne.) p. 1 1 .

Mueller, F.J.H. (1862). Sida In Plants indigenous to the colony of Victoria. Vol. 1. (Government Printer:
Melbourne.) pp. 160-165.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1868). Sida lepida. Fragmenta phytographiae AustraUae Vol. 6. (Government Printer:
Melbourne.) pp. 168-169.

Mueller, F.J.H. (1875). Abutilon macrum mA AbutUon longilobum. Fragmenta phytographiae AustraUae. Vol.
9 (Government Printer: Melbourne.) pp. 59, 130.

Mueller F.J.H. (1879). Malvaceae In Fragmenta phytographiae AustraUae. Vol. 11 (Government Printer:
Melbourne.) pp. 62-63.

Steam. W.T. (1974). Miller ‘s Gardeners dictionary and its abridgement. Journal of the Society for the
Bibliography of Natural History!'. 125-141.

Walpers, W.G. (1842). Abutilon In Repertorium botanices systematicae. I: 322-327.

Walpcrs, W.G. (1851 ). Abutilon In Annales botanices systematicae 2: 157-158.

Revised paper received 16 October 1995.

Australian alpine Senecio

Australian alpine scapose radiate taxa of Senecio (Asteraceae)

Robert O. Belcher

Emeritus Professor. Department of Biology, Eastern Michigan University, Ypsilanti,
Ml 48197, United States of America.

ABSTRACT

Alpine Australia has a distinctive group of scapose radiate taxa of Senecio (Asteraceae).
Senecio papiUosiis F.Muell. and S. primulaefolius F.Muell. are easily distinguished but
need clarification of publication date and typification. Two varieties of S. pectinatus
DC. occur only in Tasmania, var. pectinatus and var. ochroleiicus. The latter, incorrectly
attributed to L. Rodway (1903), was validly published by Mueller in 1871. Senecio
pectinatus var. major, found only on the mainland, is described as new. Senecio lepto-
carpus DC is maintained as a species, rather than as S. pectinatus var. pleiocephalus
Benth. A distinct montane pseudolautusoid taxon, described in 1903 as S. pectinatus
var. pleiocephalus Rodway (non Benth.) and in 1969 as S. [aff.) lautus subsp. alpinus
AH. is here placed as var. pleiocephalus of S. pinnatifolius A. Rich. Scapose and
SLibscapose forms of it occur both on the mainland and in Tasmania, along with the
more common bushy state. A key to all of these taxa is provided.

Introduction

Candolle in 1838 described Senecio pectinatus and S. leptocarpus from scapose
specimens collected in 'van Diemen’s Land’ by R.L. Gunn and conveyed to Candolle by
Lindley in 1834. These differed in size and inflorescence, the former small and with
only one capitulum per scape, the latter larger and with a few heads (oligoccphalus).
Ferdinand Mueller in 1857 added two more scapose alpine species, 5". papillosus and S.
primulifolius, based on collections by C. Stuart in Tasmania. These two taxa have been
but rarely collected, are readily distinguishable (as shown in the key below), and have
never been in confusion. There are, however, some difficulties with their dates of publi-
cation and typification. The spelling of the latter epithet is corrected to primulaefolius.
The Candollean species have been somewhat controversial. J.D. Hooker maintained
both, adding further differences and illustrating a very robust specimen, collected by
himself, as S', leptocarpus. Bentham reduced this species to S. pectinatus var. pleio-
cephalus Benth., meaning ‘more than the usual [number of] heads’. Both of these
authors included in S. pectinatus, in addition to the typical material from Tasmania,
certain larger specimens collected by Mueller in the Victorian Alps (which I recognise
as var. major) and disregarded the varietal epithet included on his labels.

The above-named scapose taxa share a number of traits not seen combined in any
other taxon of Senecio in Australia. These include consistently scapose habit, strongly
reduced number of and large capitula, elongate phyllaries, and unusually long calycular
bracteoles inserted on long tapering receptacles. A further search would probably reveal
still other distinctive features held in common. Whether this phenetic grouping is also
phylogenetic, or not, should be the focus of a thorough cladistic review which I have not
been able to undertake. An appropriate outgroup for that review could well be the
pseudolautusoid alpine taxon treated at the end of this paper.

Confusion over the Candollean taxa was compounded by L. Rodway, who began
with a good original description of 5. pectinatus [var. pectinatus]. He then wrote:

‘This species is most variable. The following arc marked varieties: var. ochroleiica
....var. leptocarpus [i.c. var. pleiocephalus Benth.] ....var. pleiocephalus [non
Benth., based on pseudolautusoid specimens from Ironstone Mountain] ....’

He did not cite authorities for these, so ‘var. ochroleiica' has incorrectly been attributed
to him; it actually was validly published by Mueller in 1871 (see below).

115

116

Robert O. Belcher

Curtis (1963) followed Hooker in maintaining both ‘S. pectinatus i Inch S. pectina-
tiis var. ochroleuca Rodway..’ ant/ "S. leptocarpus DC. / S. pectinatus var. pleiocephalus
Benth.’. Rodway ’s var. pleiocephalus was not mentioned, and its identity has remained
obscure until now.

Finally in this context, Ali (1969) described S. lautus subsp. alpinus, with a very
brief diagnosis, and cited specimens from Tasmania as well as from New South Wales
and Victoria, some of them clearly scapose. Understandably, he did not connect his new
taxon to the pseudolautusoid S. pectinatus var. pleiocephalus of Rodway, perhaps
because of Rodway’s puzzling disclaimer about its bracts (see below).

My own observations in numerous herbaria (including all type specimens), plus my
experience with some of these taxa in the field, have convinced me that S. leptocarpus is
a valid species and should be maintained separate from S. pectinatus, that var. ochroleu-
cus is readily distinguishable in the field and in the herbarium by characters other than
just the color of its rays, and that the mainland specimens of S. pectinatus are varietally
distinct from those of Tasmania. 1 refer 5. pectinatus var. pleiocephalus L. Rodway (non
Benth.) to the S. pinnatifolius complex as var. pleiocephalus.

K.EY TO RADIATE ALPINE TAXA OF SENECIO

1 Leaves usually well-distributed up the stem and more or less deeply pinnatipartite; on
scapose or subscapose specimens less dissected and rapidly reduced to bracts;
capitula 3-4 per unit inflorescence, to 50 or more, cylindrical; phyllaries 13,
bi-ribbed, (3.5-)4-5 mm long; calycular bracteoles 1-2.5 mm long in a whorl near
apex of peduncle, below but partially enclosing the receptacle
Seiiecio pinnatifolius var. pleiocephalus

1 ; Most leaves crowded near the base, reduced to bracts on the scape; leaves entire or
shallowly toothed or lobed; capitula few (2-6) or solitary, broadly campanulate;
phyllaries 13-16(-22), not strongly bi-ribbed but flat, 7-8(-12) mm long; calycular
bracteoles 4-6(-10) mm long, inserted on the receptacle 2

2 Width of leaf less than 1/4 of its length, blades narrowly elliptic or spathulate or

oblanceolate, or long-subpetiolate with short tenninal blades 3

2: Width of leaf about 1/3 or more of its length, leaf blades broad, ovate to elliptic to
obovate 4

3 Basal leaves narrowly elliptic to obovate or long- subpetiolate, narrowly or broadly
lobate or merely serrulate, green beneath, scape with 1 capitulum (rarely 2 capitula)
Senecio pectinatus and vars.

3: Basal leaves spathulate, often briefly subpetiolate, coarsely serrate, silvery beneath;
scape with (2-)3-6(-8) capitula (rarely 1 ) Senecio leptocarpus

4 Leaves petiolate, glabrate above; scape with 1-4 capitula Senecio printulaefolius

4: Leaves sessile or very briefly petiolate, clothed above with short stiff multicellular

hairs from tuberculate bases; capitulum 1 Senecio papillosus

Taxonomy

Senecio pectinatus DC., Prodr. 6: 372 (1838); Hook.f, FI. Tasm. 1: 222 (1856), sensu
lat.\ Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 664-665 (1867) pro parte (excl. var. pleiocephalus Benth.).

HOLOTYPUS: Tasmania, 1832, Gunn 107 (G-DC). isotypi: Gunn 107 (CGE; K; OXF;
probably others, n.v.). Note: Hooker gives ‘Hab. Mount Wellington, Gunn’.

Perennial scapose herbs. Scapes decumbent or erect, terminating in a single large
capitulum (rarely 2 capitula, on short peduncles); moderately to densely hairy, hairs red-
dish, short, multicellular, more or less curled. Leaves narrow, green beneath. Capitulum
pressed to l-3(-4) cm across, exclusive of spreading rays. Involucre broadly campanu-
late. Phvllaries elongate, flat, 1-2 nerved, margins scarious; calycular bracteoles linear-

117

Australian alpine Senecio

lanceolate, inserted on the long-tapered receptacle, almost as long as the phyllaries. Rays
yellow or white to ivory.

DISTRIBUTION

Alpine areas of the Australian Capital Territory, New South Wales, Victoria, and
Tasmania.

DISCUSSION

This taxon occurs in three clearly marked varieties: two that are endemic to Tasmania,
the other confined to high elevations on the mainland. The following descriptions of the
well-known Tasmanian varieties are briefer than that of the new mainland var. major.

KEY TO VARIETIES OF SENECIO PECTIN ATUS

1 Plants 10-45 (or more) cm tall; basal leaves usually long-subpetiolate, blades with

lobes about as broad as long; pressed capitulum 2-3(-4) cm across (exclusive of
rays); scapes 2-4 mm in diameter var. major

1: Plants 5-12 cm tall, or slightly more; leaves sessile, crowded; pressed capitulum
1-1.5 cm across (exclusive of rays), scapes c. 1 mm in diameter 2

2 Basal leaves pectinately lobed, lobes about twice as long as broad; lower bracts of

scape more or less, pectinately dissected; rays yellow var. pectinatus

2: Basal leaves linear or oblanceolate, serrulate; lower bracts of scape entire or minutely
serrulate; rays white to ivory var. ochroleucus

Senecio pectinatus DC. var. pectinatus

TYPiFiCATiON: as above {Gunn 107, G-DC).

Scape (8-)10-15 cm tail, 0.8-1 mm in diameter. Basal leaves in a compact rosette, some
subpetiolate, lanceolate, 2.5-3(-5) cm long, 3-7 mm broad, imparipinnately lobed. Lobes
pectinate, 4-5 on either side and 1 tenninal, lateral ones c. 1/2 as broad as long, callose-
apiculate, inclined 30-45° from the broad rachis. Bracts reduced, scattered on the scape;
lower ones briefly pectinate with lobes c. 1/4 as broad as long, long-acuminate; upper
ones entire, almost linear. Capitulum pressed to 1.5-2 cm across, exclusive of rays, c. 1
cm long. Phyllaries 13-18, 7-8 mm long, 1-1.5 mm broad, dark-tipped; calycular
bracteoles 5-6, linear, 6-7 mm long, 1 mm broad. Rays c. 13, spreading, 8-9 mm long,
3-3.5 mm broad, yellow to golden yellow. Disc florets c. 30. (Fig. la)

DISTRIBUTION

Restricted to Tasmania, on the mountains and plateaux; said by Curtis (1963: 364) to
descend to sea-level in the southwest, but I have not yet seen an herbarium specimen
labelled as collected below 780 metres.

DISCUSSION

This, the first taxon of this complex to be described, is readily recognisable by its basal
rosette of pectinately lobed leaves, the lobes about 1/2 as broad as long. It occurs on
many of the same mountains of Tasmania as does var. ochroleucus, but the two do not
seem to hybridize. A possible reason for this is discussed below in connection with the
latter variety.

SELECTED OTHER SPECIMENS EXAMINED

TASMANIA: Mt de la Perouse, I Mar. 1857, C. Stuart 1869 (MEL, initialed ‘B’, seen by Bcntliam); Eldon
Bluff, Mar. 1873, Gulliver 24 (MEL); Mt Darwin, 1890, Moore s.n. (MEL, P); Hartz Mtn., Dec. 1894, L.
Rociway s.n. (HO 81449); Mt Ironstone, Dec. 1899, F.A. Rodway 5102 (NSW 1 17877); Brcona, Great Lake, c.
55 km SW of Launceston, 20 Jan. 1949, J.B. Clelund s.n. (AD 97306100); Great Lake, 3300 ft, roadside, 20
Jan. 1949, L.B. Moore (CHR 66809); Mt Field National Park, Lake Dobson, wet peaty soil, 22 Jan. 1949, N T
Burbidge 32 73 (CANB 19598); Near Pine Lake, 1 188 m, Feb. 1957. LJ. Webb 3374 (BRI 270947); Mt Field
National Park, Lake Belcher, track beyond saddle, 2 Feb. 1969, E.M. Canning 2209 (CBG 030969); Cradle

118

Robert O. Belcher

Fig. 1. Varieties of Senecio pectinatus DC., contrasted by showing an unmounted specimen of each
Tasmanian variety superimposed on a portion of the holotype sheet of var. major from Victoria, a - var. pecii-
iiatus- from R. & R. Belcher 1558, Cradle Mt (EMC), b - var. ochroleucus\ from R. Belcher 2681. Mt
Wellington (EMC), c - var. major, from portion of holotype sheet, F. MtielL, Cobboras mountains (MEL
666920). c - 1 . upper portion of scape, c - 2. lower portion of same scape, c - 3. short portion of a separate rhi-
zome with clustered petiolate leaves (rhizome for 1 and 2 present on right side of sheet, not shown).

Australian alpine Senecio

119

Mtn c 50 ft below summit, in crevice in basaltic scree, 23 Feb. 1968, R.& R. Belcher 1558 (EMC, K);
ProjMt'ion Bluff, 4000 ft, 29 Jan. 1973, D.A. & A. V. Ratkowsky 66 (MO 2414011, CHR 258334; other dupli-
cates to numerous herbaria, n.v.).

Senecio pectinatus var. ochroleuciis F. MuelL, in Papers & Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm. for
1870: 16 (1871) [as var. ochroleuca]; var. ochroleiica s. auth., L. Rodway, Tasm. FI. 93
(1903); var. ochroleuca L. Rodway, Curtis, Student’s FI. Tasm. 2: 364 (1963); var.
ochroleuciis L. Rodway, Curtis, Endemic Flora of Tasmania Pt. 4: 238 (1973).

Illus. M. Stones, PI. 74, No. 123, in Endemic Flora of Tasmania, Pt. 4: 237 (1973).

TYPUS; Tasmania, Mt Wellington, 4600 ft [1420 m], Jan. 1869, F. Muell. s. n. lectoty-
pus (here chosen): MEL 666924; remaining syntypes: MEL 666922, MEL 666923. Of
the three sheets, MEL 666924 is here chosen as lectotype because it alone has the
diagnostic phrase, Tigulis fere albis’. Labels on the other two sheets carry only the
epithet, locality, and date.

Scape (5-)9-15(-33) cm tall, 1-1.2 mm in diameter. Basal leaves in compact rosette,
l-2(-2.5) cm long, 1-1.2 mm broad, linear to linear-oblanceolate, serrulate. Bracts few,
scattered along the scape, linear, subentire, 0.5-1. 5 cm long, 1-1.5 mm broad, lower with
1-2 callose teeth near apex. Capitiilum pressed to l-1.5(-2) cm across, excluding rays, c.
1 cm long. Phyllaries 13-20, 7-9 mm long, 1-1.5 mm broad; calyciilar bracteoles 5-6,
linear-lanceolate, 4-6 mm long, 1 mm broad. Rays 9-15, 8-9 mm long, (3-)4-5 mm
broad, white to ivory. Disc florets c. 20-25. (Fig. lb.)

DISTRIBUTION

In Tasmania where it is common on mountains and plateaux, especially in the south-
west. Not known from mainland Australia.

DISCUSSION

Senecio pectinatus var. ochroleuca has been attributed to Rodway, even though he
himself did not cite an authority. But in seaching unsuccessfully for a Rodway collec-
tion made prior to 1903 as a possible type, I came upon three (then unmounted) sets of
specimens at MEL, each set with a label reading: ‘Senecio pectinatus DC. / var.
ochroleuca / Mt Wellington, Tasm. / 4000 ft. Jan 69’. These clearly predated Rodway’s
account.

Doris Sinkora confirmed that Mueller had indeed spent the first week of 1869 in
Tasmania, botanising on both Mt Wellington and Mt Field. A check of citations in the
catalogue of Mueller’s publications (Churchill et al., 1978: 83 et seq.) led to a series of
‘Contributions to the Phytography of Tasmania’. No. II, as cited above, contains this
entry: ‘Senecio pectinatus Cand. prodr. VI. 372; var. ochroleuca [s-;c!]. This variety is
frequent on the alpine plateau of Mt Wellington, but 1 did not observe it on Mt Field
East. It produces short-toothed leaves, single flower heads and ligules almost white
[italics mine]. Although S. pectinatus is widely spread over the Australian Alps, I never
noticed it with cream-colored rays.’ I regard this as valid publication.

This variety was not listed among the taxa of Senecio published by Mueller (Muir,
1979: 134). His authorship is here acknowledged, apparently for the first time. Rodway
must have obtained the epithet from Mueller’s article but failed to credit the source.

The feminine termination of the varietal epithet as given by Mueller and main-
tained by Rodway and by Curtis (until 1973: 238) has been here modified to masculine
in accordance with Articles 24.2 and 32.6 of the International Rules of Nomeclature
(‘Tokyo Code’, Greuter, 1994: 36, 43).

Recognition of var. ochroleucus in dried material is easy because of the distinctive
leaves and bracts. The rays usually undergo discoloration during drying and are not then
reliably different in color from dried material of the typical variety. Gunn surely distin-
guished between the fresh plants of his 107 and his 1147, at least in ray color if not in
leaf, but (typically) made no comment on it in his labels. 1 saw no material of var.

120

Robert O. Belcher

ochroleucus at Geneva, either in the Prodromus herbarium or in the general herbarium;
Lindley apparently did not forward any of the latter number to Candolle.

The specimens cited below were selected from a much larger number which I have seen,
to show the early records and something of the geographical distribution, omitting many
from Mt Wellington. It has not to my knowledge been collected from the mainland alps;
Mueller’s statement, above, remains true.

1 have had no opportunity to explore the basis for the differences in leaf, bract, and
ray between these two Tasmanian varieties. Even though both have been collected
repeatedly from the same mountains, I have seen no specimens that would suggest
introgression between the two. There must be some effective barrier to cross-breeding.
It may well be that ecological preferences provide the isolating mechanism.

1 am indebted to David Ziegler of the Tasmanian Herbarium for this note on the
setting for var. ochroleucus’. ‘From personal observation this variety favors sheltered
locations amongst large summit boulders on the mountains of South West Tasmania.
The sites tend to be at least partially shaded, sheltered from wind and possibly covered
with small snow patches well into spring. The mountains are mainly of quartzite rock
such as Mt Maconochie but I have seen it on Pindar’s Peak which is dolerite. The plant
forms loosely matted colonies up to c. 1 m square. On the north-east ridge of Mt Anne it
occurs amongst cushion plants in boulster bog surrounded by subalpine shrubbery. This
area is possibly subject to heavy and prolonged snow. It also occurs in wet shaded
gullies on the southern side of quartzite peaks in the Western Arthur range.’

In contrast, Ziegler stated that var. pectinatus is more likely to occur on drier and
more open sites, such as the basaltic scree near the top of Cradle Mountain where I
found it in 1968. It is true, however, that habitat notes on labels of this variety often
mention wet sites. These relationships are in need of further investigation.

SELECTED OTHER SPECIMENS EXAMINED

TASMANIA.' ‘Tabic Mountain, Derwent River’ [now Mt Wellington], 18-19 Feb. 1804, R. Brown {CANu
279182. ex BM); Mt Wellington, 7 Jan. 1841 (?), Gunn 1147 (K, 4 specimens on sheet with 5 specimens of
Gunn i07 [isotypcs of var. peclinulii.s]: CGE in herb. Lindley, 4 upper specimens on sheet with 3 specimens ot
Gunn 107: CGE in herb. Lehman). S. loc., 3 Feb. 1849, Milligan 1055 (OXF); Mt La Perouse, Stuart (MEL
667732); 'L.Rodwav [.?.».] 1892, Tasm.’ on blue Phytological Museum label, det. S. pectinatus (MEL);
Summit of Mt Wellington, Jan. 1913, L. Rodway (HO 14863); Mt Wellington, 6 Jan. 1987, R. Belcher 2681,
(EMC); Cradle Mtn, between rocks on west side, 8 Jan. 1960, Hj. Eichler 16507 (AD 96107070); Hartz Mtn.
National Park 15 Feb. 1968, A. Hiinson s.n. (K, used by M. Stones for her PI. 74); Lake Esperance, subalpine
herb field 6 Jan 1969, l.R. Telford 2404 (CBG 828942, NE 024226); 3350 ft, 4 Feb. 1973, D.A &
A.V.Ratkowski 112 (MO 2317166, CHR 257691); Slope of Frenchman’s Cap, forming loose mats, 8 Jan.
1981, Buchanan 458 (CHR 394618).

Senecio pectinatus var. major F.Muell. ex Belcher var. nov.

differ! a varietate typica foliis majoribus, petiolis longioribus, paginis spathulatis vel
oblanceolatis, lobis fere quadratis; bracteis inferioribus minus reductis; scapis
longioribus; capitulis majoribus. (Fig. 1 c.l, c.2, c.3.)

Perennial herbs, sometimes stoloniferous with stolons to 30 cm long. Scapes often
purplish, glabrate to hairy; (8-)15-30(-50) cm tall. Lower leaves not densely crowded
but somewhat scattered along base of scape, leaf base slightly flared to 4 mm broad,
semi-clasping the node, abruptly reduced to 2 mm as a narrowly winged subpetiole to 4
cm long, expanding into an obovate to oblong-lanceolate tenuinal blade 1.5-2(-4) cm
long and 1-1.5 cm broad, blade coarsely lobed with lobes quadrate (about as long as
broad). Intermediate leaves reduced in length and breadth, more briefly subpetiolate,
with lobes quadrate or reduced to sharp almost linear teeth. Bracts on upper part of
scape numerous, linear-lanceolate, entire, c. 1 cm long, 1-2 mm broad. Capitulum termi-
nal, usually single but rarely a second smaller (less mature?) capitulum arises 3-4 cm
below the terminal receptacle and on a peduncle c. 3 cm long; pressed to (2-)2.5-3(-4)
cm across, excluding rays; 1.5-1. 8 cm long. Phvllaries (13-)16-22, 7-12 mm long, 1.5-3
mm broad. Calycular hracteoles (6-)8-10, 8-10 mm long, 1.2- 1.6 mm broad. Rays

Australian alpine Senecio

121

(12-)16-20(-22), yellow, 9-13 mm long, 3 mm broad; disc florets very numerous (to 90),
golden-yellow.

(Fig. 1, cl, c2, c3; holotype.)

TYPUS: Victoria, Cobboras Mountains, [1854], F. Muell. holotypus; MEL 666920;
ISOTYPI: Cobboras Mountains, 6000 ft, F. Muell., MEL 666921 ex Flerb. Sender; K (two
specimens and two labels on one sheet, ex Herb. [W.J.] Hook.). The varietal epithet,
major, means greater [than the Tasmanian varieties].

The holotype (MEL 666920) is annotated: ‘Senecio pectinatus DC. / major ferd.
Mueller / Weicht von DC Beschreibung / ein wenig in grossern Blumen / u. gezahnten
Blattlappen ab / Cobboras Mountains’, in Mueller’s script. [This label is not shown in
Fig. 1.] I am indebted to Doris Sinkora at MEL for this translation: ‘differs slightly from
de Candolle’s description in larger flowers [capitula] and dentate leaf lobes’. This label
(and therefore the specimen) is initialed as seen by Bentham. The isotypes at Kew were
also annotated by Bentham and cited [as ‘Mount Cobberas’] in Flora Australiensis, but
without varietal recognition. The year for the type collection is from Gillbank (1992:
477): ‘In January 1854 .... Mueller turned east toward the rugged Cobberas mountains
and the adjacent plateaux’.

DISTRIBUTION

Australian Alps and higher subalpine areas, in the Australian Capital Territory, south
eastern New South Wales, and north eastern Victoria. Not known from Tasmania.

DISCUSSION

1 have yet to observe or collect this variety in the field. The herbarium specimens of var.
major which 1 have examined exceed those of var. pectinatus and of var. ochroleucus in
almost every dimension, as can be seen in Fig. 1, which shows my specimens of the
latter two varieties superimposed on the holotype sheet. Furthermore, the lower leaves
of var. major are usually long-subpetiolate, a feature not seen on the Tasmanian
varieties.

Costin et al. (1979: 379) gave an excellent descrirption of var. major as ‘5.

pectinatus DC Alpine Groundsel’. Their description is not applicable to Tasmanian

specimens, although they included Tasmania in the distribution. They then add:
‘Common in tall alpine herb fields and sod tussock grasslands; a small, apparently
distinct ecotype occurs in Epacris-Chionohebe feldmark.’ This comment is echoed in an
annotation on the Costin collection from near Mt Townsend (CANB 46770), cited
above. It reads: ‘also occurs as an ecotype on windswept alpine ridges’.

These comments appear to raise the possibility that var. pectinatus does indeed
occur in the mainland alps. I did not find such a small specimen collected by Costin or
by any of the other authors, either at CANB, at CBG, or elsewhere. The nearest
approach was Telford 3607A (CBG 055449, cited below). This collection consisted of
two small plants, one very small and not flowering but vegetatively consistent with the
larger one, which is 8 cm long overall including a fragment of root. This latter specimen
had one head on a scape 3 cm tall from rosette to receptacle. The capitulum had phyllar-
ies 9 mm long, calycular bracteoles to 5 mm long, and was pressed to 1.3 cm broad and
1.1 cm high, exclusive of the 10 rays. This plant is the closest in size to var. pectinatus
of any mainland material I have seen, but the scape lacks pectinate bracts. Its leaves, to

2 cm long and 6 mm broad, have 5 pairs of squarish lobes, as in var. major, not pecti-
nate. This collection may represent the ecotype mentioned, but whether it does or not, it
is of var. major despite its stunted size and not a mainland occurence of var. pectinatus.

At the other extreme in size are the specimens of FI. van Rees 314 (CANB, HO,
below) from the Bogong High Plains in Victoria. It is probably significant that the ele-
vation of only 1640 metres for these van Rees specimens is the lowest of all those cited
for var. major. Both plants are unusually robust, to 50 cm tall, with the lowest leaf 15
cm long and 2.7 cm broad, and the leaves more scattered up the stem. In this it mimics
the behavior of pseudolautusoid alpine S. pinnatifolius var. pleiocephalus (see below).

122

Robert O. Belcher

That latter taxon usually has fairly well-developed cauline leaves. But there are some
high alpine collections which have cauline leaves strongly reduced on decumbent scapes
from a basal rosette (but with the typically small numerous heads of that variety), hence
my inclusion of it in the group of scapose alpine radiate taxa in this paper.

The larger size of specimens of var. major suggests the possibility that they are
polyploids of var. pectinatus. This is supported by the chromosome count of «=40,
2»=80 reported by Lawrence (1980: 154) for ‘5. pectinatus". She made her count from
the specimen from ‘Spencer Creek, Mt Kosciusko National Park, N.S.W.’ [Lawrence
1397 (AD 98131070), below]. This specimen is clearly var. major. This could imply
that var. pectinatus (and Yax.ocimoleucus?) might have counts of «=20 and 2n=40, but
this of course requires investigation.

J.D. Hooker (1856: 222) cited three collections under S. pectinatus', namely, "Gunn
(107, 1047)’ from Mt Wellington, and ‘Cobboras [sic!] Mountains, elev. 6000 feet,
Mueller’. If ‘Gunn 1047’ is accepted as an error for the Gunn 1147 specimens mounted
with Gunn 107 at Kew as cited above for var. ochroteucus, Hooker had in hand material
of all three varieties. His comprehensive description gives their distinguishing character-
istics, hence sensu latiore. It is surprising that he did not describe varieties, as he often
did in complex taxa.

Bentham’s description (1867: 664-665) likewise applied to all three varieties but
also incorporated S. leptocarpus DC. (as his var. pleiocephalus), a position which 1
challenge (below).

The brief description by Willis (1973: 748), with leaves ‘crenately toothed oblance-
olate’, the Victorian distribution and at least some of the illustrations cited apply only to
var. major and not to the Tasmanian varieties.

SELECTED OTHER SPECIMENS EXAMINED

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY.' Namagi National Park, about 1/2 km NW of Bimbcri trig tower. 1830
m, wet heath, 5 Feb. 1985, C. Hetman 252 & P. Gilmour (CBG 8601625).

NEW SOUTH WALES (all from within what is now Kosciusko National Park): Snowy Mtns, Feb. 1890. W.
Baiierlen 66 (MEL 1533870). Mt Kosciusko, Feb. 1901, R. Helms (MO 831331, ex NSW). Summit of Mt
Kosciusko, 15 Jan. 1951, ,/.S. C/e/am/(AD 9731 1 132). Above Lake Albini. 1740 m, 20 Jan. \9S\. Johnson &
Constable (NSW 15808, CHR 72739, K). Alpine herb field near Mt Townsend, c. 7000 ft, 18 Jan. 1958, .4.B.
Costin 0018 (CANB 46700). Lake Cootapatamba, granite rock area near small stream, 28 Feb. 1960, M. Gray
4788 (CANB 1 14494). Mt Northcote-Mt Lee SadtTlc, fjcldmark at c. 2100 m in bog area, 1 1 Mar. 1974, l.R.
Telford 3706A (CBG 055449), small (see below). Kosciusko, where Mt Koscuisko Summit Road crosses
Spencer Creek, 2050 m, 3 1 Mar. 1978, M.E. Lawrence 1397 (AD 98131070, voucher for chromosome count).
victori.a: Australian Alps, s.d., F. Mueller (MEL); Mt Baw Baw, 5000 ft, s.d., F. Mueller (MEL): both were
initialed and cited by Bentham. Baw Baw, Mt Erica, 2 Jan. 1905. H.B. Williamson (MEL. Reference
Collection, without varietal distinction). Mt Buffalo, 1350 m, H.C. Stewart (BRI 270950); valley E of the
Honi, 27 Dec. 1951, R. Melville 2659 (K). Bogong High Plains, Baker Spur Falls, 2 Feb. 1980, R.J. Adair (HO
59082); Watchbed Creek, 1640 m. near edge of fast-flowing creek, 10 Feb. 1982. H. van Rees 314 (CANB
343121, HO 64361; both unusually robust, sec above); c. I km E of Mt McKay, 1700-1750 m, 5 Jan. 1983, A.
Strid 22684 (CHR 397716, duplicates at B, C, M, MO, S, n.v.).

Senecio leptocarpus DC., Prodr. 6: 372 (1838); Hook.f., FI. Tasm. 1: 222, PI. 64-B
(1856); Curtis, Student’s FI. Tasm. 2: 364 (1963); Harden, FI. N.S.W. 3; 307 (1992). S.
pectinatus DC. var. pleiocephalus Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 665 (1867); non L. Rodway,
Tasm. FI. 93 (1903). S. pectinatus DC. var. leptocarpus, in L. Rodway, Tasm. FI. 93
(1903).

TYPUS: Tasmania, Mt Wellington, Gunn 268. holotypus: G-DC, on slip-tag: ‘268 [in
pencil, rest in ink] / van Diemen / m*'. Gunn / cnv. par Bindley / 1834’; isotypi seen: K
ex Herb. Hook., ‘Mt Wellington’ [type of var. pleiocephalus Benth.]; K ex Herb.
Benth.; NSW 153194; NSW s.n.; CGE in Herb. Bindley; CGE ex Herb. Lemann; OXF;
others probably exist.

Perennial herb, scape somewhat decumbent or erect from a creeping rhizome, 8 to 45
cm tall. Leaves more or less crowded toward the base but continuing part way up the
scapes, eventually reduced to bracts well below the inflorescence; bases narrowed,
rarely subpetiolate; blades obovate to oblanceolatc, coarsely toothed to (rarely) lobate;

Australian alpine Senecio

123

upper surfaces glabrous, dark green, often appearing brownish and as if varnished when
dried, lower surfaces glabrate to sparsely hairy, silvery, with veins very distinct; lower
bracts of scape with exserted teeth, distal bracts denticulate to entire. Capitula pressed
to 1-1.5 cm across, excluding rays; usually in flattened cymes of (2-)3-6(-8) heads on
peduncles l-3(-6) cm long, rarely a solitary capitulum at apex of scape; peduncles with
short reddish multicellular hairs. Phyllaries 13-16, 6-8 mm long; calycular hracteoles
7 - 8 ^ ( 3 -) 4 - 4.5 mm long, linear-lanceolate. Rays 12-13, yellow, to 9 mm long, 2-2.7 mm
broad; disc florets numerous (40-50). Cypselae 2.5-4(-5) mm long, glabrate, pappus
hairs shiny straw-colored, 5-7 mm long, very slender.

DISTRIBUTION

Widely distributed in the mountains and plateaux of Tasmania and frequently collected.
Said by Curtis (1963: 364) to descend to sea-level in the southwest, but I have not yet
seen a specimen so labelled. Also said by her to be in Victoria, and by Harden to be in
New South Wales. I have seen very few authentic collections from the mainland. Most
specimens so identified have proven to be of tbe alpine variety of S. pinnatifblius, readi-
ly distinguished by their smaller, more numerous, capitula and very different leaves
(below).

DISCUSSION

To me, Senecio leptocarpus is a very distinct species, and I have great difficulty with
Bentham’s reduction of it to a variety of S. pectinatus. Specimens, even the rare [imma-
ture?] individuals with only one developed capitulum are readily recognisable by the
distinctive two-tone leaf of unique shape. A careful search of such specimens will often
reveal one or more tiny axillary capitular buds.

Candolle contrasted his S. leptocarpus with his S. pectinatus, with the former in all
parts larger. The achene of the fonner he gave as ‘2-2 1/2 lin.’ (4.5 mm) long and there-
fore twice longer than that of S. pectinatus, hence ‘leptocarpus’ or slender fruit. That
measurement is at variance with my note about the holotype of S. leptocarpus, which
gives the [immature remaining?] achenes as ‘2.2 mm long, velutinous’, versus ‘achenes
all very immature, 2 mm long’ for S. pectinatus. Other specimens I have seen which
agree in all other particulars with S. leptocarpus, however, have cypselae 4 mm long or
longer and slightly fusiform.

Bentham reduced Senecio leptocarpus DC. to a variety of Senecio pectinatus DC.,
thereby creating (under modern practice, at least) the autonym, S. pectinatus var.
pectinatus. The new var. pleiocephalus was typified by citation of ‘Mt Wellington,
Gunn', based on a sheet with six specimens in the ‘type’ folder at Kew, ex Hb. (W. J.)
Hook., so determined by Bentham. Interestingly, in open spaces near the bottom of the
sheet are several careful drawings of six floral details which were included in Plate 64-B
by J.D. Hooker. The righthand drawing, of a ligulate floret [shown as Fig. 1 on the
plate], has the cypsela extending onto the upper part of the field label. Evidently the son
used this sheet in his father’s herbarium in preparing the Flora Tasmaniae before
Bentham annotated it.

The point is that Bentham’s variety was based on an isotype of Gunn 268, the
holotype of S. leptocarpus DC.

It would have been better had Bentham used the basionym for his new combina-
tion. But this was only accomplished, incidentally and perhaps unintentionally, by
Leonard Rodway in 1903, under S. pectinatus as ‘var. leptocarpus' , followed by
‘Leaves 2-3 inches long, broadly spathulate, coarsely obtusely toothed. Flowers [capitu-
la] 3-6 in a loosely terminal panicle.’ This belated citation of the autonym seems to have
been universally disregarded in the swing back to recognition of S. leptocarpus as a dis-
tinct species.

The confusion of S. pectinatus var. pleiocephalus Benth. with the very distinct
pseudolautusoid taxon described as S. pectinatus var. pleiocephalus L. Rodway (non
Benth.) is discussed below under S. pinnatifolius var. pleiocephalus (L. Rodway)
Belcher.

124

Robert O. Belcher

SELECTED OTHER SPECIMENS EXAMINED

TASMANIA: Antarct. Exped. 1839-1843, J. D. Hooker s. n., s. loc. (K., P, UPS); McQuarrie Harbour, Mt
Sorell, 3000 ft., 31 Dec. 1846, J. Milligan 759 (K, cited by Bentham as Mt Sorrel; MEL, 2 sheets); Mt La
Perouse, 5. d., C. Stuart s. n. (K; MEL, MEL ex herb. Sender, both with material of S. pectinatus also); Mt de
la Perouse, Mar. 1857, [C. Stuart] 1867, 1868, 1869 (all MEL, unmounted); Mt Field East, 4000 ft, Jan. 1869,
F. Mueller (MEL); Hartz Mtn., Jan. 1901, Lucas 1901 (NSW 153195, 153196); Mt Wellington, 2. Feb. 1932,
C.T. White 5377 (BRl 270948). Cradle Mt, 10 Feb. 1947, K. Helms (HO 14683); National Park, 7 Jan. 1949,
L.B. Moore (CHR 66851); Mt Field National Park, slopes of Mt Mawson, 23 Jan. 1949, N.T. Burbidge 3294
(CANB 19594); St. Valentine’s Peak, 26 Jan. 1962, M.E. Phillips (CBG 017855); King William, 4000 ft, 10
Feb. 1973, D.A. & A.V. Ratkowski 153 (CHR 258284, MO); Moonlight Ridge, 840 m, under subalpine
shrubbery, 20 Mar. 1984, A.M. Buchanan 2962 (HO 88425).

NEW SOUTH WALES.- Carruthers Peak, Mt Kosciusko area, 6500 ft, 16 Feb. 1972, P.A. Keane 2 (NSW),
dctennincd originally as S. lautus subsp. alpinus Ali at NSW but redetermined by me in 1986 as S. leptocar-
pus.

Senecio papillosiis F.Muell., in Trans. Philos. Ins). Victoria 2: 69 (by 30 Sept. 1857,
non 1858; see below), in J. Bot. Kew Card. Misc. 9: 301 (Oct. 1857); Hook, f., FI.
Tasman. 2: 365 (1859) [citation to Muell., Trans. Phil. Soc. Viet. 1855, p. 69 is in error];
Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 664 (1867); L. Rodway, FI. Tasm. 93 (1903); W. Curtis, Student's
FI. Tasm. 2: 364 ( 1 963 ), Endemic FI. Tasm. 4: 244 ( 1 973). Ulus. M. Stones, Endemic FI.
Tasm.A-.n. 77, No. 128 (1973).

TYPUS: Tasmania, Mount de Perouse. 1 Mar. 1857, Stuart 1870 [number on paeket],
LECTOTYPUS (here chosen) MEL 40319; isolectotypus K ex Hb. Hook.; remaining
SYNTYP i: ‘Senecio papillosus / ferd. Muell. / Mount La Peyrouse / V. D. L. Stuart [scrip-
sit C. Willhelmi, teste D. Sinkora] / B [in pencil, ‘seen by Bentham’]’ (K, MEL 40318).

Perennial herb with horizontal or vertical rhizome bearing each year a terminal whorl of
leaves and a solitary inflorescenee. Scape 10-15 cm tall, with 4-6 linear-lanceolate short
acute bracts, lowest one toothed. Leaves 15-20 in cmpact rosette, to 2 cm long, 0.9 cm
broad, subpetiolate, thick, ovate to elliptical with revolute entire margins; upper leaf
surfaces densely studded with clear short straight or curved multicellular hairs from
tuberculate bases; lower surfaces slightly cobwebby, with raised venation. Capitulum
solitary, 3-4 cm in diameter including rays; phyllaries 13, 9-10 mm long, slender;
calycular bracteoles 5-8, (6-)8-9 ml long. Rays 15-20, spreading, 10-15 mm long, bright
yellow. Cypselae not seen.

DISTRIBUTION

Curtis (1973: 244) gave the distribution as ‘Recorded only near the summits of
Adamson’s Peak and Mount La Perouse.’ The two more recent collections cited below
extend the range slightly, but this is still a very localised taxon, even more so than S.
primulaefolius (below).

DISCUSSION

Certain difficulties with dates of publication and typifications of this species and
Senecio primulaefolius are discussed below, following the treatment of the latter taxon.

Bentham (1867: 664) commented that this species ‘may possibly prove to be a
variety of the New Zealand S. bellidioides. Hook, f ’. In as much as Nordenstam (1978:
30) has transferred the latter species to Brachyglottis because of its cacalioid features, 1
raised this point in an inquiry to Kew. C. Jeffrey responded as follows (pers. comm.): ‘5.
primulifolius and S. papillosus show no ‘cacalioid’ features whatsoever and are typically
senecionoid (balusterform collars, anticlinal not polarized endothecial thickenings, cleft
stigmatic surface).’ 1 therefore reject Bentham’s suggestion. From the standpoint of
gross morphology, a New Zealand species coming closer to S. papillosus is S. lagopus,
but Nordenstam has also transferred that species to Brachyglottis.

OTHER specimens EXAMINED

Tasmania: Adamson’s Peak: saddle bet-ween Max and Adamson, 3850 ft, frequent on saddle skeletal
soil, 21 Jan. 1961, Whuite 228 (NSW); c. 3600 ft, alpine herb field on upper slope, 7 Feb. 1969, LR. Telford
24 74 (CBG 027894); 2500 ft, 22 Jan. 1972, D.A. & A. V. Ratkowsky 3 (K, cited for PI. 128, Endemic Flora of

Australian alpine Senecio

125

Tasmania)', peaty flat, alt. c. 1050 m, between rocks. 23 Jan. 1972, D.A. & A.V. Ratkowsky fHO 52777). Mt
Babs, summit plateau, 31 Jan. 1984, R.G. Williams (Herb. D.l. Morris, Hobart). Pindar's Peak, alt. c. 920 m,
alpine heath and sedge land, 1 7 Feb. 1986, D. Zigler (HO 97419).

Senecio primulaefolius F. MuelL, in Trans. Philos. Inst. Victoria 2: 69 (by 30 Sept.
1857, teste H.I. Aston), in J. Bot. Kew Card. Misc. 9: 300-1 (Oct. 1857) [both as S.
primulifoliiis]', Flook. f., FI. Tasm. 2: 365 (1859). Senecio primulifolms F. Muell. in
Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 664 (1867); L. Rodway, FI. Tasm. 93 (1903); Curtis, Student’s FI.
Tasm. 2: 364 (1963); Curtis, Endemic FI. Tasm. 4: 244 (1973). Illustration: M. Stones,
Endemic FI. Tasm. 4: PI. 77, No. 129 (1973).

LECTOTYPUS (here chosen): Tasmania, Mt La Perouse, 1 Mar. 1857, C. Stuart 1871, K
ex Hb. W. J. Flook., upper right specimen, ruled off from rest of sheet by pencilled line;
isoLECTOTYPi: MEL 40321 & 40322.

Note: 1 prefer a specimen retained by Mueller at MEL as representing his type, but
this case presents special difficulties. Neither of the Stuart specimens of this taxon
at MEL now has a capitulum, nor is there a packet on either sheet, as there is for
the specimen at Kew. There can be no question that these MEL specimens agree vegeta-
tively with the lectotype and are indeed ‘5. primulifolius / F. M.’ as penciled in Stuart’s
script (teste D. Sinkora in litt.). Both are initialed ‘B’, seen by Bentham.

Perennial herb with horizontal rhizome, bearing each year an apical whorl of a few
leaves and l-2(-3) inflorescences. Scapes erect, 10-15(-30) cm. Basal leaves short- to
long-petiolate, blades ovate-cordate and irregularly crenate or sinuate; upper surfaces
glabrate or sparsely hairy, with sunken reticulate venation, lower surfaces purplish and
glabrous or sparsely cobwebby; bracts 4-5, sessile and clasping, variable in size and
shape, the lowest oblanceolate. Capitula (l-)2-4 per scape, 2.5-4 cm in diamter (includ-
ing rays), peduncles 4.5-5. 5 cm long. Phyllaries 13-21, 7-8(-10) mm long, acuminate.
Calycular bracteoles numerous, to 6 mm long; phyllaries and bracteoles densely
cottony-hairy. Rays 13-15 or more, golden yellow, to 2 cm long, 5 mm broad. Cypsela
(immature) 2. 5-3. 5 mm long, glabrous, cylindrical with prominent basal annulus.

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Tasmania, southwestern District, Huon District [?]. Curtis (1973: 224) stated: ‘Recorded
only from Mt La. Perouse at an altitude of about 3000 feet’. Recent field work has
slightly expanded the known distribution of this very localized and rarely collected
endemic, represented in very few of all the herbaria which 1 have examined. In Leigh et
al. (1981 : 52) both it and S. papillosus are listed as risk code ‘3RC’ [defined, p. 10]; i.e.,
‘[3] range over 100 km, [R] rare, [C] known in a park or reserve’. Of the two, S. primii-
laefolius appears to be a little less restricted, but the ranges of both seem not be as great
as indicated by Leigh et al. Further field work should clarify this.

COMMENT ON SPELLING OF SPECIFIC EPITHET

Mueller published this species as Senecio primulifolius, and this spelling has been fol-
lowed in every publication in which it occurs that 1 have seen, except for J.D. Hooker’s
Addendum to his Flora of Tasmania. A careful consideration of the ‘Tokyo Code’
(Greuther, 1994) supports Hooker’s spelling. Art. 60.8 (p. 74) [Art. 73.8 in the Berlin
Code of 1988] states: ‘The use of a compounding form contrary to Rec. 60G in an
adjectival epithet is treated as an error to be corrected.’ Rec. 60G1 (p. 78) distinguishes
between (a) a true compound and (b) a pseudocompound, defined as a phrase treated as
if it were a single compound word. In such a pseudocompound, a noun or adjective in a
non-final position appears as a word with a case ending, not a modified stem. An
example cited is cannaefolius (leaf of Canna). By analogy, ‘leaf of Primula" [also a
feminine generic name] should be frimulaefolius" , as adopted here.

OTHER SPECIMENS EXAMINED

TASMANIA: ‘Foot of Mount De La Perouse’, s.d., s.n., eoll.?, Hb. Oldfield (K ex Hb. W.J. Hook., on same
sheet as the lectotype); Mt La Perouse, Dec. 1897, L. Rodway s.n. (NSW 153197, HO 14844); Mt La Perouse.

126

Robert O. Belcher

Dec. . 5 . anno. Lucas s.n. (NSW 153198): Reservoir Lake [La Perouse], Dec. 1898, F. A. Rodway 5105 (NSW
153199): Mt Counsel [N of Cox Bight], alt. 2400’, 19 Dec. 1954, M. Davis 1449 (MEL 40320, without capitu-
lum but unmistakable: most southwesterly specimen seen by me): Moonlight Flats, La Perouse, [1972], Dr. &
Mrs. Ratkowski s.n. (K, basis for M. Stones' PI. 77, No. 129, l.c.); ‘Hill 1 (Huon [District?])', 15 Feb. 1977,
M. Allen s.n. (Herb. D.l. Morris, Hobart). Southwest District, Moonlight Ridge, alt. 850 m, under subalpine
shrubbery, 20 Mar. 1984, A.M. Buchanan 2961 (HO 88424): ibid.. Reservoir Lake, under ... subalpine
shrubbery, 21 Mar. 1984, A.M. Buchanan 29S7 (HO 88357).

Problems peculiar to Senecio primulaefolius and Senecio papillosus

The first problem concerns the dates of publication of these two taxa. The conven-
tional date for Vol. 2 of the Transactions of the Philosophical Institute of Victoria is
given as 1858, but Aston tl984: Table 1, entry F [p. 283] & p. 286) has shown that this
is not entirely true. According to her findings. Part I of Vol. 2, pp. 1-92, was published
between the 23''^ and 30*^ of September, 1857. This thus antedates the issuance in
October, 1857 (Staffleu & Cowan, 1979: 299), of that part of Vol. 9 of Hooker’s
Journal containing pp. 289-320, including Muejler’s descriptions of four new species
from Tasmania.

Was Bentham aware of this earlier date for the first part of Vol. 2 of the
Transactions! That a copy may have been sent to Kew is suggested by the fact that
Bentham cited ‘F. Muell. in Trans. Phil. Inst. Viet. ii. 69’ as the first reference under S.
papillosus, and the only one for S. primulifolius . This is contrail to the later entries in
Index Kewensis (Jackson, 1895, 2: 378 & 379) for both of these species as ‘Hook. Kew
Journ. IX (1857)’. These matters could perhaps be clarified by a diligent search in the
libraiy at Kew, which 1 have not been able to make.

A second question, about the typification of both of these taxa, is raised by this
reversal of the sequence of publication. In his article in the Proceedings, Muller gave,
for the former: ‘On Mount Laperouse, south-western Tasmania. C. Stuart, A. Oldfield.’,
and for the latter: On Mount Laperouse, Van Diemen’s Land. C. Stuart, A. Oldfield.’
Are there specimens collected by Oldfield that should be included as syntypes?

That Augustus Frederick Oldfield collected in Tasmania and elsewhere in Australia
is not in question. Just when he did is not so clear. Vegter (1983: 619) gives:
"Herbarium'. K (plants from Tasmania, New South Wales, & Western Australia, coll.
1858-59p and ‘Tasmania (coll. ± 1858)’. There are some specimens of other species of
Senecio [such as the type specimen of S. leucoglossus F. Muell. from Harvey River,
W.A., (MEL, PERTH)], clearly collected by Oldfield but without date. But I have found
no specimens of either of these two alpine species clearly laid in with his name.

The only clue I have found is a label on the lower left comer of the lectotype sheet
of S. primulaefolius at Kew, applied to the four specimens ruled off from the Stuart
type. This reads: "Hb. [italic mine] Oldfield / Foot (sic!) of Mt De La Perouse,
Tasmania’. It is not explicit that the specimens were collected by Oldfield; they may
have been given to him by Stuart. On the other hand, they may have actually been
collected by Oldfield subsequent to the publication of this taxon, perhaps in 1858, and
forwarded to W.J. Hooker. None of these alternatives, however, would account for
Mueller’s inclusion of Oldfield in the earlier paper.

In the absence of any specimen at either K or MEL of S. papillosus or of S. primu-
laefoliiis clearly identifiable as actually collected by Oldfield, 1 have to conclude that no
Oldfield syntype of either taxon now exists. Mueller’s inclusion of Oldfield’s name in
the Proceedings remains unexplained.

Even more puzzling is the fact that Bentham cited ‘Mount Lapeyrouse, Oldfield' as
his only specimens for S. papillosus and 5. primulifolius, and as one of three cited from
Tasmania for S. pectinatus [typical var.], and as one of three cited for var.
pleiocephalus. I find it very strange that he made no mention of any Stuart specimen in
connection with these scapose alpine taxa, despite having initialled Stuart specimens
from both W. J. Hooker’s and Mueller’s herbaria as seen by himself

The peculiar spelling of ‘Mount Lapeyrouse’ can be traced, as suggested by Helen
Aston (in litt.), to two Stuart specimens from Mueller’s herbarium [now MEL 40318
and 40322]. These are respectively labelled, in Carl Wilhelmi’s handwriting, as from
‘Mount la Peyrouse’ and from ‘Mount Lapeyrouse’, with the ‘y’ [later?] struck through

Australian alpine Senecio

127

on both. Both are initialled as seen by Bentham. Why he would attribute them to
Oldfield rather than to Stuart is unclear.

In the Proceedings of the Philosophical Institute both taxa were described only in
English, a part of a lengthy contribution [pp. 62-77] entitled ‘New Australian Plants’
from various parts of Australia including Tasmania. In the very slightly later brief paper
in Hooker’s Journal all the text is in Latin. After the description of the fornier species
he gave: ‘Hab. In monte La Perouse Tasmaniae austro-occidentalis alpinae detexit
Stuart:, followed by a lengthy paragraph of additional information not in the English
version. Similarly, for the latter taxon he gave: ‘Hab. In monte La Perouse Tasmaniae,
Stuart:, again followed by additional details. In both cases, obviously, only the one
collector is cited.

It is my belief that Mueller intended this much more scholarly and sharply focused
paper to be the place of original publication and shipped it off to W.J. Hooker in that
expectation, little dreaming that it would be delayed past the premature issue of the
more general article in the Procedings. This latter article also included on the same page
the description, only in English, of 5. drymophiliis F. Muell., a Gynura from SE
Queensland [cf Belcher 1989: 533, erroneously as 1858]. Indeed, as 1 look over my
copies of Mueller’s descriptions of new taxa of Senecio, I find (in addition to that of S.
pectinatus var. ochroleucus) just one other instance of a description only in English, that
of 5. gregorii [Othonna gregorii (F. Muell.) C. Jeffrey in Kew Bulletin 41 : 876 (1986)].

Alpine state of Senecio pinnatifolius A. Rich. s. lat.

Senecio pinnatifolius A. Rich. vax. pleiocephaliis (L. Rodway) Belcher comb. nov.
Senecio pectinatus DC. var. pleiocephalus L. Rodway, Tasm. Flora 93 (1903); non
Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 665 (1867). ‘■[Senecio] pectinatus DC. l.c. 372 / var.
pleiocephalus [non] Benth. FI. iii 665’, Maiden & Betche, Census N.S.W. Plants 204
(1916), nom. nud., per specimens so determined. Senecio lautus G. Forst. ex Willd.
subsp. alpinus Ali, Aust. J. Bot. 17: 167 & Fig. 3 (1969); Willis, Handbook PI. Victoria
2: 751 (1972).

HOLOTYPUS: Victoria, Mt Buffalo National Park, on SW margin of Lake Catani, c. 4500
ft, 21 Feb. 1963, J. H. Willis s.n. (MEL 666007).

LECTOTYPUS (here chosen): Tasmania, Mt Ironstone, ‘De[c.] of [18] 99’, L. Rodway s.n.
(HO 14689, excluding specimen on extreme right, which is S. pectinatus var.
pectinatus).

Perennial herb or subshrub, typically much branched both below and in the inflores-
cence, occasionally ascendant and subscapose or scapose; lowest leaves oblanceolate
and dentate, sometimes petiolate; mid-cauline leaves pinnatifid to pinnatisect, lobes
2-4(-5) on either side and alternate to subopposite and lobulate or toothed, sometimes
reduced to lobulate bracts, all divisions with enlarged callose apices. Inflorescence of
several to numerous elongate or short branches each ending in 3-5 capitula, rarely
fewer; peduncles with multicellular hairs terminating in wisps; involucres cylindrical;
phvllaries 13, (3-)3. 5-4.5 mm long and strongly bi-ribbcd; calycular bracteoles whorled
at apex of peduncle Just below the receptacle, numerous, ciliolate, lanceolate to broadly
triangular, 2-2.5 mm long, the tips atropurpureous. Denuded receptacles 3.5-4 mm in
diameter. Marginal florets 11-13, ligules yellow, 5-6(-7.5) mm long, 1.5-2 mm broad;
disc florets yellow, c. 40; cypselas c. 3 mm long, hairy or not. Fig. 2 illustrates a scapose
specimen, R. & R. Belcher 996. Note: This description is greatly expanded from the
very cryptic one given by Ali and the brief one by Rodway (below). Features confined
to subscapose and scapose specimens are in boldface type.

DISTRIBUTION

Alpine and subalpine mountains and plateaux of Australian Capital Territory, SE New
South Wales, NE Victoria, and Tasmania; subscapose and scapose specimens more rare
than bushy ones.

128

Robert O. Belcher

Kti txn.L.li%

Collected' by
HOSERT AND RUBY BELCHBR
(Emim Mkkigan Vnivasity, Ypslknll, V.S.A )
m7-6S

aaB„io tff.
tet»rao«ae

^•Sfcl slope, m. Franklin,

Gaaliej-ra, A. C, f.

No.: 996

H. wmia

Duplicates in:

Oateiii ili/1967

Fig 2 Scapose specimen of 5enecio pinnatifolius A. Rich. var. pleiocephalus (L. Rodway) Belcher. Apex of
rhizome with subpctiolate leaves and scapes with reduced pinnatilobate bracts; from R. & R. Belcher 996. Mt
Franklin. A.C.T. (EMC).

Australian alpine Senecio

129

DISCUSSION

Rodway described his var. pleiocephalus as: ‘Tufted, stems numerous. Leaves
spathulate and lobed, as in the type, but more dispersed on the stems, about 1 inch long.
Stems 6-9 inches. Flowers [capitula] smaller than in the type [of S. pectinatus], in loose
terminal panicle. Ironstone Mountain and western mountains. But for the peculiar outer
bracts of the involucre, it would pass for a fonri of S. lautus.'

The lectotype specimen, HO 14689, I found at Hobart in a folder labelled "Senecio
leptocarpus" and containing five other collections all clearly of that taxon. The sixth was
labelled ‘L. Rodway [s.n.] De of 99 Ironstone Mt / Senecio lautua var. pectinatus var. [in
pencil]’. It also had an unsigned determinavit slip: ‘Senecio leptocarpus / March 1976’.
Although this sheet does not carry the varietal epithet ‘pleiocephalus’, the left and center
specimens agree fully with Rodway’s description of that variety. The deletion of ‘lautus
var.’ on the label is undoubtedly reflected in his comment, above, concerning the ‘pecu-
liar outer bracts of the involucre’.

Actually, these bracteoles are in fact typical of the Australian pseudolatusoid
material formerly included in Senecio lautusl I have been unable to establish why he
made this comment. Had he been comparing the Ironstone Mt specimens (L & C) with
authentic material of S. lautus from New Zealand, that comment would have been fully
justified. But the only specimen of S. lautus that I logged at HO was collected in 1967.
His description of these features under S. lautus (pp. 93-4) reads: ‘The inner bracts
[phyllaries] all equal, the outer al[l] short and / clothing [undefined] the base of the
involucre.’ This seems to fit those two specimens.

It has taken me nearly a decade to realise that Rodway was actually the first to
name and describe this alpine taxon, with leaves so different in detail from the other
pseudolautusoid material, and that his name has clear priority at the varietal rank
(Greuter et al, 1994: 16, Art. 1 1.4). If this taxon were retained at the subspecies rank,
alpinus would have priority.

Although the Rodway description and specimens are of the scapose state, this state
grades without any discontinuity through the subscapose states to the more common
non-scapose material reresented by the holotype of subsp. alpinus Ali. Thus I expanded
the above description to include all these phases.

I have (Belcher, 1993) contended that specimens of the pseudolautusoid complex
so common in Australia are specifically distinct from Senecio lautus G. Forst. ex Willd.
of New Zealand. I later (Belcher, 1994) analysed and illustrated the several names
applied to these Australian plants by Richard and by Candolle. Further study has led me
to consolidate these classical names as varieties of Senecio pinnatifolius A. Rich. s. lat.,
and also to reduce all the other Australian subspecies of Senecio lautus described by Ali
to varietal status (Belcher in preparation).

SELECTED SCAPOSE AND SUBSCAPOSE SPECIMENS EXAMINED

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY: Brindabclla Range, Mt Franklin ski slope, 17 Dec. 1967, R. & R.
Belcher 996, (EMC, 3 specimens, all scapose); ibid. 997 (EMC, 5 specimens, all scapose).

NEW SOUTH wales: Pretty Point, Mt Kosciusko, Jan. 1899, J.H. Maiden & W. Forsyth s.n. (AK 77541 ex
NSW; K; NSW 55512; all scapose); Mount Kosciusko National Park, c. 4 1/2 miles [7.2 km] below Kosciusko
Peak along main road, 14 Jan. 1962, T.C. Chambers & S I. Ali s.n. (MEL 1552932, 5 pieces, very pubescent,
subscapose).

victoria: Bogong High Plains just E of Rocky Valley storage, 1620-1700 m, grazed subalpine meadows,
partly swampy, 15 Jan. 1983, A. Strid 22076 (G 245696, subscapose; duplicates to B, C, CHR, M, MO, S,
n.v.).

Tasmania.- Mt Barrow, talus slope below summit, 6 Feb. 1968, R. & R. Belcher 1353 (EMC, 6
specimens, all scapose, retaining stumps of previuous inflorescences); Mt Field National Park, 2.5 miles [4
km] from Lake Dobson, spreading clump I ft [30 cm] in diameter, height to 15 in [38 cm], 17 Feb. 1968, R. &
R. Belcher 1502 (EMC, scapose whole plants); Ouse River S of Prince Albert’s Throne, alt. 1200 m, 16 Mar.
1984, A. Moscal 7011 (HO 83962, scapose); Lake Ada, Cent. Highlands Dist., alt. 1 150 m, 20 Jan. 1985,
W.M. Curtis s.n. (HO 95285, subscapose); Mt Wellington, Just below the Organ Pipes, 6 Jan. 1987, R.O.
Belcher 2680 (EMC, subscapose).

Confusion over "Senecio pectinatus var. pleiocephalus Benth.’

Collections of mainland alpine taxa of Senecio became more numerous around 1 890;
some of these were of scapose pseudolautusoid radiates with multiple capitula. An

130

Robert O. Belcher

example is ‘Ml Kosiusko, Pretty Point, Jan. 1899, J.H. Maiden & W. Forsyth s.n. (AK
77541, K, NSW 55512). This collection was identified [by Maiden?] as ‘Senecio
pectinatus var. pleiocephalus Benth.’ [non. L. Rodway], as were several other scapose
and some non-scapose specimens. This eventually led to the listing of Bentham’s name,
without description, in A Census of New South Wales Plants (Maiden & Betche, 1916:
204), and later to the inclusion of S. leptocarpus in the mainland flora by some. Yet
most mainland specimens thus identified under either name which 1 have examined are
not S. leptocarpus but S. pinnatifolius var. pleiocephalus L. Rodway (non Benth.)!
Indeed, Ali correctly cited NSW 55512 among his specimens of S. lautus subsp. alpinus
(1969: 168).

I believe this confusion came about as a result of the discovery of these scapose
radiates such as the Pretty Point specimens cited above. Mainland scapose radiates with
a single large capitulum had already been included by J.D. Hooker and by Bentham in S.
pectinatus (my var. major). Scapose radiates with multiple but smaller capitula must
have semed to Maiden to fit Bentham’s decription of S. pectinatus yar. pleiocephalus as
‘Flower heads rather smaller, 3 to 5 together in a loose terminal corymb.’ The dificulty
was in the lack of precision in ‘rather smaller’. The mainland scapose specimens with
multiple capitula had heads much smaller than the large ones of var. major and those of
S. leptocarpus.

Acknowledgements

The unstinting assistance of curatorial staffs of all the herbaria I visited in 1 984 and in
1986-7 in connection with this study is greatly appreciated, as is the patience of the
herbaria from which I have obtained loans of specimens, the return of which is long
overdue! Special thanks are due to Helen Aston, Don Foreman, and Doris Sinkora
(MEL); A.T. Orchard (then at HO, now ABRS); and C. Jeffrey (K). Margaret Lawrence
as referee made many helpful suggestions for improving and shortening this still over-
long treatment. Once again I thank Lynn Lesko for assistance with the illustrations.

References

Ali, S.I. (1964). Senecio lautus complex in Australia. II. Cultural studies. Australian Journal Botany 12:
293-316.

Ali, S.I. (1969). Senecio lautus complex in Australia. V. Taxonomic interpretations. Australian Journal
Botany 17: 161-76.

Aston. H. I. (1984). Publication dates of early scientific journals in Victoria. Muelleria. 5: 281-88.

Belcher. R.O. (1989), Gvnura (Compositac) in Australia and Malesia, emended. Kew Bulletin 44: 533-42.

Belcher. R.O. (1993). The 'Senecio aff. lautus’ complex (Astcraceae) in Australia. 1. Criteria for exclusion of
lautusoid Senecio of Australia from S. lautus sensu stricto of New Zealand. Australian Systematic
Botany 6: 359-63.

Belcher. R.O’. (1994). ‘The Senecio aff lautus’ complex (Asteraccae) in Australia. II. Clarification of names
given to pseudolautusoid Australian specimens of Senecio by Richard and by Candolle. Australian
Systematic Botany 1: 71-85.

Bentham, G. ( 1 867). Flora .4ustraliensis. Vol. 3. (Lovell Reeve & Co.: London.)

Churchill, D.M., Muir, T.B., & Sinkora, D.M. (1978). The published works of Ferdinand J. H. Mueller
(1825-1896). Muelleria. 4: 1-120.

Costin, A.B., Gray, M., Tottcndcll, C. J., & Wimbush, D.J. (1979). Koscuisko Alpine Flora. (C. S. 1. R. O.
/Collins: E. Melbourne & Sydney.)

Curtis, W.M. (1963). The Students’ Flora oj' Tasmania. \o\. 2. (L. G. Shea, Goverment Printer: Hobart.)

Curtis! W.M. (1973). Endemic Flora ofTasmania. Part 4 [p. 227 ff ]. (The Ariel Press: London.)

Gillbank, L. (1992), Alpine Botanical Expeditions of Ferdinand Mueller, Muelleria. 7: 473-89.

Greuter, W. (Ed.) (1994). International Code of Botanical Nomenclature (Tokyo Code)'. (Kocltz Scientific
Books: Kdnigstcin: Germany.)

Harden, G.J. (1992). Senecio, in G. J. Harden, Ed., Flora of New South Wales. (New South Wales University
Press: Kensington.)

Hooker, J.D. (1856). The Botany of the Antarctic Forage. III. Flora Tasmaniae. (Reeve & Co.: London.)

Jackson, B.D. (1895). Index Kewensis. Vol. 2 (Oxford.)

Lawrence, M.E. (1980). Senecio L. (Asteraccae) in Australia: Chromosome numbers and the occurence of
po\yp\oidy. Australia Journal Botany 2S: \5l-65.

Leigh, J.H., Briggs, J.D. & Hartley, W.M. (1981 ). Rare or threatened Australian Plants. Special Publication 7.
(Australian Parks and Wildlife Service: Canberra.)

Australian alpine Senecio

131

Maiden, J.H., & Betche, E. ( 1916). ,4 Census of New South Wales Plants. (W.A. Gudlick, Government Printer:
Sydney.)

Mueller, F. (Sept. 1857a). Account of some new Australian Plants. Transactions of the Philosophical Institute
of Victoria 2; 62-77, 2 PI.

Mueller, F. (Oct. 1857b). Descriptions of four new Tasmanian Plants. Hooker's Journal of Botany and Kew
Garden Miscellany 9:300-302.

Mueller, F. (1871). Contributions to the phytography of Tasmania. II. Papers & Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Tasmania 1870. 11-20.

Muir. T.M. (1979). An index to the new Taxa, newcombinations and new names published by Ferdinand J. H.
Mueller. Afue/Zeria 4: 123-68.

Nordenstam, B. (1978). Taxonomic studies in the tribe Senecioneae (Compositae). Opera Botanica a
Societate Botanica Lundensi 44: 1-84.

Rodway, L. (1903). The Tasmanian Flora. (John Vail, Government Printer: Hobart.)

Stafleu, F.A. & Cowan, R.S. (1979). Taxonomic Literature. Ed. 2, Vol. 2. (Bohn, Schcltems & Holkema:
Utrecht; W. Junk: The Hague.)

Vegter, H. (1983). Index Herhariorum. Pt. II (5). Collectors N-R. Reg. Veg. 109. (Bohn, Scheltema &
Holkema: Utrecht / Antwerp; W. Junk: The Hague.)

Willis, J.H. (1973). A handbook of the plants of Victoria. Vol. 11. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)

Revised paper received 1 November 1995.

•V

■r; »

. 11
-I ' *•

*» m.tJ^ ^ J

■»< ■-'.

, ;. 1,. ,. /T', ,a ■*i''3saj«a' ”■ ■•' , '■ *■’ -'I!,, «■•>’■».■

•• .i.- ., -vvt

'M. ■■■' -i-V*’'

^ % .a ?«*« I aS t f ■ Irti In k • ’ ■ ' ' '^

*« ii

♦ 4 . "*•

fi.'- 'i.->'':iJ &-’4

’■^'l® »lti». Va'V ,.
L-^' ■.,

■“'-••-rrtrf .:

V * ... I » -

, J/J '^*'^J ' .',J

■ >*^' ■ -SS

■■'.V-

? n*if ■^W/l < ^ “

'K. :./,«»:*Hl. *’’•♦*/•’ 7: , ' *' in .. -■■■I vVj

,.

■ -f *■■> * 4 *■

^ I

r

■ ■ . .■ -.’.;«J^.? : '....V 4^,V»4.jc

•i' • <!.*«-•

,# ■ay***^. .

. . -•-

» •« .'•t - 1 ■ i<A

f « ... • \ ' ■• ..^-.’fn •' •£» -fig

4 , .. -V. . *

i . ."• ,

4 * 4 ^. i»'N. ■• ;?-v /

/*.' *-, 4 ^i*i' (•■ Vl ’ '.

ifc ' ' 4 . ' <.-■ ■ti'^^.

i^A I

7 '

■ 4 - *

'. ? L

' '' - ■'■ •••r‘''rivi'' : 4 V It ' 4ifii»a

■■' . -. ■ .' •V'lv .t vrrc )

■ .'W , .'. '■ '*:

j ■ ■- . t -' ’#' - r -1 ^

■/'^ . »4 _ --i '^'

,V 1

Muelleria9: 133-143 ( 1996)

Three new Victorian species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia
L.D.Pryor & J.H.Willis and notes on the polymorphic nature of that
species

K. Rule

6 Regal Court, Vermont South, 3133, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Eucalyptus fulgens from West Gippsland, Eucalyptus sabulosa from the Wimmera
region (including the Grampian Ranges) and Eucalyptus splendens from the Portland
area in south-western Victoria are described and comments regarding the affinities,
distribution and conservation status of each are given. Of the new taxa Eucalyptus
splendens has a very restricted distribution and has been assigned a specific code regard-
ing its conservation status. The polymorphic nature of Eucalyptus aromaphloia is also
discussed in the accompanying notes and several morphological forms within that
species are identified.

Introduction

Populations of smallish, rough-barked trees with seven-flowered inflorescences, scarred
buds (the outer operculum is shed early in bud development) and smallish, sub-globular
fruits, namely forms of Eucalyptus viminalis Labill., E. cephalocarpa Blakely and E.
aromaphloia L.D.Pryor & J.H.Willis, are common in south-eastern Australia, particular-
ly throughout southern Victoria. These have been sources of considerable confusion to
observers of Eucalyptus at many levels. Despite such adult convergence, each group is
markedly distinctive in its seedling characters. The juvenile leaves of E. viminalis are
characteristically green, lanceolate, sessile, amplexicaul and opposite for numerous
pairs, those of E. cephalocarpa are greyish and copiously waxy, orbicular, sessile,
amplexicaul and opposite and the Juvenile leaves of E. aromaphloia are elliptical, blue-
green or grey-green, disjunct and usually shortly petiolate.

Even more confusing, however, is the level of diversity of forms traditionally
included under E. aromaphloia. Such diversity, in most cases, is subtle to the extent that
the segregation of the many different entities depends largely on differences in pre-adult
characters. This study has been concerned with resolving taxonomic problems within
the complex through the use of seedling trials. The value of such investigations cannot
be underestimated as, too often, differences in seedlings are not always apparent in the
field. Most certainly, such differences are rarely available in herbaria specimens due to
the lack of seedling materials (see Table 1).

The description of£. aromaphloia by Pryor and Willis (1954) was the first attempt
to resolve the problem of these smallish, rough-barked trees. Its distinctive features were
given as alternate, glaucous, elliptical or ovate, sessile or sub-sessile juvenile leaves and
a markedly aromatic bark. The distribution was given as central and western Victoria
and lower south-east South Australia. The authors also suggested that populations
occurring in central Gippsland were probably of the new species.

Furthermore, particular note was given to a gradation in juvenile leaf width with broad-
est widths occurring in the east, for example at Creswick, to narrowest in the west, for
example at Stawell.

In 1962 E. corticosa L. A. S. Johnson was erected to accommodate populations of a
form of E. aromaphloia occurring in three markedly disjunct localities on sandy soils
rather than heavy, poorly-drained soils, in the case of E. aromaphloia. The selected type
population was in the vicinity of Rylstone near Sydney and the others were given as
occurring near the New South Wales-Victorian border to the south of Eden and

133

TAIiLK 1. C OMPARISONS OP SEEDLING MORPHOl.OGIES OP EUCALYPTUS AROMAPHLO U AND ITS RELATIVES

Character Eucalyptus a romaphloia Eucalyptus fulgens Eucalyptus sahulosa Eucalyptus splendens Eucalyptus ignorahilis Eucalyptus corticosa

moderately crowded to relatively sparse relatively crowded moderately erowded moderately crowded imtdei^ately erowded

relatively sparse

134

Xi C
3 O

c/5 O

o ,
t 5

Q. bi)
00

o — -
cx I S

D-fN _c

OjD

.S xj

C D

c o

O

« 3 ■

P “ “ Sr

O “O '

c/5 C/5
(U (L>

O

— 3

I 3
00 00

o ^ c
a,.i= o

D. C3

o a. 3

o

3

o

3 •-

^ O ^

- .-S i

c 2 2

-- 3 O (U

•■s ^ fc g: E

g-3
Cl

O j— I

9rX O-^

0.0 ^ 3

sz ^ ,o

O c/5

g

g

: O.

5

3 c/5

<u

0) 0)
3 eg

00 3

H O E

.=

s|;

o o o

O 3 >

o o

3

^ O 3
00 =S "5

_o o ^

_J-J= o
— 00 o

"O c/5 _0

“ R

C

3 <U

> P
^ 2

O (U ■
_3 "eg
O O

3 eg o •“ •'
‘ "T O :
^ -H > 3

c.

■a .

<u

E.b

0) 3
O O.

«o
t: 1

i3 OO

?P.

0>

2 o

3 .3

• ^ C C L. —
— C -O 3-3

3

3 "O

uv -03

O o C
3 O C O b
> -O . «2
9 » > o g

"g E « S;?

2 .g I .£ •I' §

^ .£-3 o '3 ^ o

p O $4 c5 o £ 3

3

'V 2 O > -

-3

C

3

a c

Q. O

o -5

C/T c/5

E-S

, E

fj O

c/5 3 •
O i.

D. O

£■ fl »

d2 S-g

tu jA

t St

£ :2 c

'S C "3

o 512

c 3 O

O 4 ^

S-2

S

- §■
.2 9
O 0 /

a- *o

K. Rule

New species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia

135

in Victoria’s Grampian Ranges in the vicinity of Hall’s Gap. Such populations were
distinguished from E. aromaphloia by their relatively narrow, blue-green juvenile
leaves, dullish ‘ash-green’ or light green adult leaves and appreciably pedicellate fruits
(although it was noted by the author that the Grampians populations featured greener
foliage and relatively short pedicels). However, Pryor and Johnson (1971) and Willis
( 1973) recommended that the species be included with E. aromaphloia on the basis that
its morphology was not consistently separable from that species.

The identity of variable populations of seven-flowered, rough-barked trees in
south-west Victoria and south-east South Australia attributed, in part, to E. aromaphloia
by Pryor and Willis became the subject of considerable controversy. They, and Pryor
again in 1955, suggested extensive hybridism involving E. viminalis and E.
aromaphloia. Eventually, E. viminalis Labill. subsp. cygnetensis Boomsma was
described in 1980 and, to a large extent, its treatment eliminated the confusion. Later,
Boomsma (1981), in his account of South Australian eucalypts, noted that, despite a
thorough search for E. aromaphloia, it could not be located in either south-west Victoria
or lower south-east South Australia. Further, Chappill and Ladiges (1986), who studied
the species and who advanced our understanding of it considerably, supported
Boomsma when they found no evidence of intergradation with E. viminalis in western
Victoria. They too suggested that E. viminalis subsp. cygnetensis accounted for the
extensive occurrence of rough-barked, seven-flowered trees in the region.

In their study Chappill and Ladiges gave evidence to support the resurrection of
E. corticosa as a species, whose distinctive features were said to include markedly
glandular, relatively thin adult leaves (almost twice the density of oil glands found in
some Grampians populations that had been included under E. corticosa by Johnson),
relatively small fruits and non-glaucous, non-falcate, linear-lanceolate juvenile leaves.
However, they suggested that it was confined to the type locality near Rylstone. From
their evidence they also concluded that E. aromaphloia in its original sense contained
two additional taxa which could be segregated both morphologically and geographical-
ly. Although the distribution of the typical form was given as west-central Victoria, they
identified a western form (west of the Grampians Mt. William Range and extending to
the centre of the Little Desert) with linear, prominently falcate, sessile, non-glaucous
juvenile leaves and with moderately glandular adult leaves and an eastern form
(extending from west Gippsland to south-east New South Wales) with broad-lanceolate,
petiolate, non-glaucous juveniles. The western form incorporated, in part, the Grampian
Ranges segment of Johnson’s E. corticosa whereas the eastern form included the Eden
populations.

E. ignorabilis L.A.S. Johnson and K.D.Hill was described in 1991 to accommodate
dull-leaved populations occurring on sandy soils along water courses in central and
east Gippsland and in adjacent areas of south-east New South Wales. This new taxon
included segments of Chappill and Ladiges’ eastern taxon, but not west Gippsland
populations with a distinctive lustrous canopy. However, during the course of this study
it became apparent that the distribution of E. ignorabilis provided by the authors includ-
ed populations of a form of E. cephalocarpa with markedly similar adult features
and also with a preference for sandy soils. Despite this, the two are clearly separable in
their juvenile leaves with those of E. ignorabilis being lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate,
alternate and petiolate and those of the other being typical of E. cephalocarpa.
Differences between the two in bud morphology were also observed, those of E. ignora-
bilis being regularly pedicellate and non-waxy and those of the other taxon being sessile
and most often lightly waxy. This study further revealed that E. ignorabilis consists of
two relatively restricted, markedly disjunct fonns. The typical form occurs on extremely
elevated sites in shale derivatives in the vicinity of Walhalla, whilst eastern populations
occur on sandy soils near water courses in far east Gippsland and adjacent areas of New
South Wales.

In summary, the region of Gippsland and adjacent areas of south-east New South
Wales contains three species with similar adult features. In addition to the ecotypes of £.
ignorabilis, there is a form of E. cephalocarpa occupying the intervening regions but
overlaps with the eastern form of E. ignorabilis. Eucalyptus ignorabilis does not extend

136

K. Rule

into west Gippsland beyond the Latrobe Valley, as some Victorian observers have
assumed, but is replaced by the closely related, lustrous-leaved third species which
favours heavy soils on hilly terrain.

Two other relatives of E. aromaphloia are described as new species. The first,
which consists of numerous small populations occurring throughout the Wimmera
region, represents Chappill and Ladiges’ western taxon. The second, which has a very
restricted distribution, was overlooked by previous researchers. It occurs near Portland
in south-west Victoria and features seedlings with lustrous, juvenile leaves and squared,
finely ridged stems.

The study also examined the variable nature of E. aromaphloia and a mosaic of
subtly different forms has been identified. In the context of this study, all these forms
are considered to belong to a single, extremely polymorphic species. In the accompany-
ing notes aspects of their morphologies and their distributions are briefly discussed.

Taxonomy

1 . Eucalyptus fulgens K.Rule sp. nov.

Eucalypto ignorabili L. A. S. Johnson & K.D.Hill affinis, foliis juvenilibus majoribus
viridibus pallidis, foliis adultis nitido-viridibus, cortice crassa subfibrosa sulcata pro-
funde differt.

HOLOTYPUS; 0.9 km along Red Hill Road from the intersection of Albers and Manestar
roads. Upper Beaconsfield, Victoria, 38°02’S, 145°23’E, 20 June 1994, K. Rule 9464
(MEL).

Small, spreading trees to 15 m tall. Bark grey-brown, sub-fibrous, often deeply
furrowed on trunk and major branches with thick slabs and strips; basal bark with loose,
often crusty chunks; minor branches smooth, light brown, with old bark decorticating
in short, brownish ribbons. Seedling leaves ovate-elliptical, pale green, sub-sessile,
decussate. Juvenile leaves broad-lanceolate, ovate-lanceolate or ovate, sessile then
shortly petiolate by 8-10 nodes and becoming disjunct (sub-opposite for a few pairs then
regularly alternate) at the same stage, pale green or slightly blue-green, dull but may
become slightly lustrous in advanced juvenility, slightly discolorous, acuminate, glandu-
lar, 4-8 X 1.8-3. 5 cm; petioles to 10 mm long; venation visible but not conspicuous;
growth tips lustrous; nodes relatively sparse; seedling stems square or round in section
but non-ridged. Intermediate leaves lanceolate or broadly lanceolate, sometimes falcate,
longer than juvenile leaves, sub-lustrous or lustrous, green or slightly blue-green, pendu-
lous. Adult leaves lanceolate, falcate, lustrous, green, concolorous, glandular
with numerous island glands, acuminate, 12-25 x 1.5-3 cm; petioles 1.4-2. 5 cm long;
venation moderately reticulate; intramarginal veins 1.5-2. 5 mm from margin.
Inflorescences simple, axillary, 7-flowered; peduncles slender, terete, to 1.1 cm long.
Floral buds ovoid or clavate, scarred, pedicellate, to 6 x 3 mm; pedicels as long as buds;
opercula conical, as long as hypanthia; anthers irregularly inflexed, oblong, dehiscing
through longitudinal slits; filaments white. Fruits sub-globular, pedicellate, to 6 x 5 mm;
discs ascending; valves slightly exerted; locules 3 or 4; pedicels 2-4 mm long. Fertile
seeds black, irregular in shape, slightly flattened, lacunose.

FLOWERING PERIOD
Autumn.

DISTRIBUTION

The populations are sporadic and occur in west Gippsland from the Latrobe Valley to
the Yarra Valley (Fig. 1). The preferred habitat is heavy soils of sandstone origin on
ridges and slopes. The annual rainfall across the range exceeds 800 mm with a winter
maximum.

New species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia

137

CONSERVATION STATUS

The region in which E. fulgens occurs has been subjected to extensive clearing particu-
larly for dairy farming. Although reduced to sporadic populations, the species is still
abundant in some forested areas that have escaped clearing. It is not regarded as endan-
gered.

ASSOCIATED SPECIES

The species generally grows in pure stands may mix with several other species. Included
are E. radiata Sieber ex DC., E. consideniana Maiden, E. ovata LabilL, E. pry’oriana
L. A. S. Johnson, E. cephalocarpa E. conspicua L. A. S. Johnson & K.D.Hill, E. ohliqiia
L’Herit. and E. dives Schauer.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet is derived from Latin and alludes to the lustrous appearance of the
adult leaves.

DISCUSSION

Eucedyptus fidgens is a smallish, rough-barked tree with a lustrous, green canopy and
buds and fruits similar to other members of group. On the basis of juvenile morphology,
Chappill et al. (1986) suggested that populations of eastern Victoria, including E.
fulgens, shared common features with the swamp gums, that is E. ovata and others. This
position is strongly supported by the early development of distinctly petiolate, regularly
alternate, somewhat ovate-shaped juvenile leaves which are features closely resembling
those of swamp gums such as E. ovata. However, this is not the opinion held here. Its
ovoid buds, sub-globular fruits, spongy, sub-fibrous, strongly aromatic, often deeply
fuiTowed, persisting bark and strongly aromatic juvenile leaves are consistent with E.
aromaphloia and its relatives.

Fig. 1. Distribution of EucalyptiLS fidgens 111. , Eucalyptus sahutosa'-fiiciy'^, Eucah’ptus splendens
Eucalyptus aromaphloia Eucalyptus ignorahilis

138

K. Rule

The species most closely related to E. fidgens is E. ignorabilis, the two being
inseparable in bud and fruit morphology and occupying ranges adjacent to each
other. Even more important is that they possess similar seedling ontogenies and share
particular seedling features. Both exhibit relatively early development of alternate,
petiolate juvenile leaves and both possess non-glaucous seedling growth tips. In
contrast, however, the juveniles of E. fitlgens are usually larpr and are pale green or
slightly blue-green rather than grey-green in E. ignorabilis (Table 1). Also as the
seedlings reach intermediacy, the juvenile leaves of E. fulgens become sub-lustrous
rather than remaining dull as in E. ignorabilis. Eventually, the canopy of E. fulgens
becomes conspicuously lustrous and green which contrasts markedly with the dull,
greyish one of E. ignorabilis and, as in the juvenile stage, the adult leaves of E. fulgens
are usually longer (15-25 cm compared with 10-17 cm long). Lastly, the often deeply
furrowed, ragged bark of E. fulgens is a marked contrast to the bark of typical E.
ignorabilis which is thin with fine, longitudinal furrows and peppermint-like in
appearance.

There are appreciable differences between E. aromaphloia and E. fulgens with the
former featuring seedlings with waxy growth tips and juvenile leaves that are grey,
smaller and generally elliptical to ovate-shaped with shorter petioles throughout juvenil-
ity. Fuilhennore, the rate at which the seedlings of E. fulgens develop differs from that
of £. aromaphloia. Although the juveniles of both become disjunct at approximately the
same number of nodes, those of the latter are irregularly opposite, sub-opposite or
alternate for numerous pairs (as is the case with the other new species described here).
Other subtle differences exist in adult morphology, e.g. although the canopy of E.
aromaphloia is usually lustrous, it is appreciably blue and its fruits are most often
sessile or sub-sessile.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED

victoria; Yarra .lunction, 24 Oct. 1954, N.A. Wakepeld (MEL1608542); Quamby Road, Upper
Beaconsfield, 28 June 1964, J.H. Willis (MEL 1607349); Coranderk Reserve, Picaninny Swamp, Badger Creek
via Healcsville, 14 May 1973, .J.H. Willis (MELS 14983); Kinglake National Park, 28 July 1982, A.C.
Beauglehole 70837 (MEL 1609456); Warburton Highway, adjacent to the Woori Yallock Plant Nursery, east
of Woori Yallock, 20 Oct. 1989, K. Rule (MEL1593202); 14 km north of Yarra Glen on the Melba Highway,
2 Oct. 1990. K. Rule 9025 (MEL); adjacent to the Lang Lang Golf Course, 7 km from the intersection of the
South Gippsland and Bass Highways, 10 Nov. 1990, K. Rule 9075 (MEL); 500 m from the Nar Nar Goon
turnoff on the Prince’s Highway, 1 May 1991, K. Rule 9148 (MEL); 8.3 km north of Moe towards Erica, 24
Jan. 1992, K. Rule 9218 (MEL); 600 m west of Gumbuya Park on the Prince’s Highway, 7 Feb. 1992, M.I.H.
Brooker 10940 (MEL1616812).

2 . Eucalyptus sabulosa K.Rule sp. nov.

Eucalvpto aromaphloiae L.D. Pryor & J.H. Willis affinis, foliis juvenilibus
nitido-viridibus sessilibus linearibus falcatis, foliis adultis hebetibus vel sub-nitentibus,
pallido-viridibus vel caesio-viridibus differt.

HOLOTYPUs: 23 km south of Nhill, Victoria, 36°32’S, 141°40’E, 4 May 1981, G.C.
Cornwall 340 (MEL641778).

Small, spreading trees to 12 m tall. Bark sub-fibrous, somewhat scaly, irregularly
furrowed, grey, persisting on trunk and branches. Seedling leaves linear, decussate,
sessile, blue-green, crowded alongthe axis but not heath-like. Juvenile leaves linear,
falcate, sessile for 20 nodes or more then sub-sessile for numerous pairs there after,
opposite for a similar number of nodes then irregularly opposite, sub-opposite or
alternate for numerous pairs thereafter, acuminate, glandular, lustrous and green for
numerous pairs (with older leaves becoming sub-lustrous and blue-green), discolorous,
4-9 X 0.5- 1.0 cm; venation inconspicuous; growth tips lustrous, green; nodes often
crowded but not heath-like; petioles to 4 mm long. Intermediate leaves linear-lanceolate
or narrowly lanceolate, falcate, sub-lustrous blue-green, alternate, shortly petiolate,
larger than juvenile leaves. Adult leaves lanceolate, falcate, dull or sub-lustrous, light
green or slightly blue-green, glandular, acuminate, to 16x2 cm; intramarginal vein not

New species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloiu

139

remote, 1-2 mm from margin; minor venation moderately reticulate, inconspicuous with
relatively sparse island oil glands; petioles flattened, to 1.7 cm long. Inflorescences
simple, axillaiy, 7-flowered; peduncles slightly angled, to 1 .0 cm. Floral buds ovoid,
shortly pedicellate, scarred to 5 x 3 mm; opercula conical, approximately as long as
hypanthia; filaments white; anthers all fertile, irregularly inflexed, versatile, oblong,
dehiscing through longitudinal pores. Fruits ovoid or sub-globular, sub-sessile, 5-6 x
4-6 mm; valves 3 or 4, slightly exerted; disc ascending; locules 3-4; pedicels 1-3 mm
long. Fertile seeds black, irregularly shaped, slightly flattened, lacunose.

FLOWERING PERIOD
Autumn.

DISTRIBUTION

Eucalyptus sabulosa occurs throughout the Grampian Ranges, except along the Mt
William Range, and extends westwards into the centre of the Little Desert. Populations
are small and sporadic and always on sandy soils (Fig. 1 )

ASSOCIATED SPECIES

The new species and E. aromaphloia overlap on the eastern edge of the Grampians in
the Hall’s Gap-Pomonal area. In the Grampians and its surrounds, associated species
include E. alaticaulis Watson & Ladiges, E. baxteri (Benth.) Maiden & Blakely, E.
melliodora A.Cunn. ex Schauer, two forms of E. goniocalyx F.Muell. ex Miq. and E.
obliqita. In other areas such as the Little Desert, E. arenacea Marginson & Ladiges is a
common associate whilst E. leucoxylon F.Muell. subsp. stephaniae K.Rule and various
mallee species may occur nearby.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific name is derived from Latin and means ‘of the sand’ which describes the
new species habitat.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Even though E. sabulosa occurs in small, sporadic populations, it is a common species
and not in danger.

DISCUSSION

The original description of E. corticosa emphasised distinctive narrow, blue-green
juvenile leaves. Although this description, in part, can be applied to E. sabulosa, the two
are separable on the basis of other seedling differences. Juvenile leaves of the new
species, for example, are sessile for many more pairs and are linear and markedly falcate
rather than narrow-lanceolate and non-falcate. There are also differences in adult
characters, particularly in adult leaves and fniits, which have been discussed above.

Populations of E. sabulosa and E. aromaphloia overlap in the vicinity of Hall’s
Gap and Pomonal but are readily separable in the field on the basis of canopy lustre and
juvenile leaf colour. Field studies and seedling trials have indicated hybridism between
the two in this area. West of Hall’s Gap, starting in the Serra Range, populations of E.
sabulosa show no influence of E. aromaphloia.

Whereas the adult leaves of E. sabulosa are dull or sub-lustrous, light green or
slightly blue-green and sparse in oil glands, those of E. aromaphloia, in contrast, are
more lustrous, exhibit a strong bluish tinge and are appreciably glandular. Eucalyptus
sabulosa also differs from E. aromaphloia whose seedlings have waxy new growth and
juvenile leaves that dull and grey, always broader and non-falcate and are opposite and
sessile for fewer pairs (Table 1). Lastly, the two species have different habitats.
Eucalyptus aromaphloia is usually found in heavier, poorly drained soils, in contrast to
the preferred sandy soils of E. sabulosa. However, populations of E. aromaphloia occur
in the Black Range near Stawell occur on granite derived soils. In most respects these
are consistent with other populations of that species.

140

K. Rule

Although their respective seedling morphologies and ontogenies differ, E. sabulosa
and E. aromaphloia are considered to be closely related. Their adjacent geographical
positions and similarities in the adult features of bark, fruits and buds, support this
proposition.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED

victoria: Little Dc.sert. 3 miles [4.8 km] west of Dimboola, 20 Sep. 1948, J.//. Willis (MEL706601);
Little Desert at Huff s Swamp, 1 1 Sep. 1949. J.H. Willis, (MEL 1607347); Road between the Chimney Pots
and Billywing. Victoria Range, along the western foot of the range, 23 Feb. 1957, M. McCarvie. P.E. Finch
and A.C. Beauglehole 4082 (MEL); Teddy Bear’s Gap. Serra Range, Grampians, 19 Nov. 1961, N.A.
Wakefield, (MEL16I0753; 6 miles [9.6 km] south of Moora Reservoir between Serra and Victoria Ranges,
Grampians, 19 Nov. 1961, N.A. Wakefield (MEL 1 6 1 0749); Mt Rosea Summit, 16 Mar. 1968, .4.C.
Beauglehole 24952 (MEL); Lake Wartook, southern side, 30 June 1972, A.C. Beauglehole 38386 (MEL); 20
km south-east of Nhill. northern end of Little Desert National Park, 4 May 1981, G.C. Cornwall 365 (MEL);
Victoria Range, beside Old Billywing Track, on western side of range, 6 Apr. 1985, M.G. Corrick 9430,
(MEL); Adjacent to the Dunkeld Golf Course, 5 km NNW of Dunkeld, 6 Sep. 1988, D. Frood 022/88 (MEL).

3 . Eucalyptus splendens K.Rule sp. nov.

Eucalypto aromaphloiae L.D. Pryor & J.H. Willis affinis, foliis juvenilibus nitido-
viridibus lanceolatis vel ovato-lanceolatis, caulibus plantularum cristatis subtiliter,
valvis fructuum exsertis differ!.

HOLOTYPUS: On the eastern perimeter of the Mt Richmond settlement, Portland-Nelson
Rd, 38°12’S, 141°20’E, 29 Sep. 1992, K. Rule 9272 (MEL).

Small, spreading trees to 10 m tall. Bark sub-fibrous, grey-brown, irregularly fissured,
persistent throughout; light brown, smooth on branches, decorticating in short strips.
Seedling leaves narrow-elliptical, decussate, sessile, pale green. Juvenile leaves narrow-
lanceolate, lanceolate, becoming ovate-lanceolate in advanced juvenility, sessile then
shortly petiolate approximately after 15 nodes, discolorous, lustrous green above and
light green below, maturing to blue-green, glandular, acuminate, becoming disjunct
(irregularly opposite, sub-opposite or alternate) between 10 and 18 nodes, 4-7 x 1-2 cm;
growth tips lustrous; venation inconspicuous; stems square in section, finely ridged;
nodes usually moderately crowded. Intermediate leaves ovate-lanceolate or ovate,
shortly petiolate, lustrous, blue-green, concolorous. Adult leaves lanceolate, sub-lustrous
or lustrous, slightly blue-green, glandular, 12-20 x 1.5-2. 2 cm; oil glands separate from
veins; venation moderately reticulate; intramarginal veins 1-2 mm from margin; petioles
slightly flattened, 1.5-2 cm long. Inflorescences simple, axillary, 7-flowered. Peduncles
angled, slightly terete, 6-10 mm long. Floral buds ovoid, seamed, shortly petiolate, 4-6 x
3-4 mm; opercula conical or obtuse-conical, as long as hypanthia; stamens all fertile,
irregularly inflexed; filaments white; anthers versatile, oblong, dehiscing through longi-
tudinal pores. Fruits ovoid or sub-globular, sub-sessile, 5-6 x 4-6 mm; discs ascending;
valves often prominently exerted; locules 3 or 4; pedicels 1-2 mm long. Fertile seeds
black, irregularly shaped, slightly flattened, lacunose.

DISTRIBUTION

Eiicalvptus splendens is known only from a single locality to the north west of Portland
in Western Victoria between Mt Richmond settlement and Mt Richmond (Fig. 1). It
grows on heavy soils of volcanic origin. The distribution which covers a linear distance
of approximately 8 km and which contains several large remnants occurs along a narrow
sub-coastal, seasonally water-logged belt within a few kilometres of the ocean.

ASSOCIATED SPECIES

Eiicalvptus splendens, often an abundant species, occurs in pure stands or in association
with Eucalyptus willisii subsp. willisii Ladiges, Humphreys & Brooker, Eucalyptus
kitsoniana Maiden and a large-fruited form of Eucalyptus ovata. Eucalyptus baxteri.
Eucalyptus obliqua and Eucalyptus viminalis subsp. cygnetensis also occur in the vicini-
ty but have no contact with this new species.

New species related to Eucalyptus aromaphhia

141

CONSERVATION STATUS

Eucalyptus splendens is a species of restricted distribution. It occurs within protected
reserves, at the roadside along the Nelson-Portland Road and exists in remnants on
adjacent Vanns where .substantial numbers have been lost. In accordance with criteria of
Briggs and Leigh (1989) a code of 2E is suggested for this species.

ETYMOLOGY .

The specific name is derived from Latin and alludes to the lustrous Juvenile leaves.

Considerable credit for knowledge of Eucalyptus splendens must be given to Mr. Cliff
Beauglehole of Portland who had been aware of the species existence for many decades.
It was through his persistence that this treatment eventuated. In 1989 Mr. Beauglehole
sent me specimens, including seedlots, and seedling trials confirmed his assertion that
the Portland scent barks not only were true-breeding but represented an undescribed
taxon.

Known to local observers as ‘Apple Jack’, Eucalyptus splendens appears to have
been confused with E. viminalis subsp. cygnetensis, another seven-flowered, rough-
barked tree present in south-west Victoria. Both taxa are similar in adult morphology
but are readily separable in the seedling stage. Whereas E. viminalis and its subspecies
have persisting decussate juveniles, those of E. splendens become irregularly spiralled
along the axis and show considerably earlier disjunction. Further, the juveniles of the
new species have tapered rather than amplexicaul bases and approach an ovate shape in
advanced juvenility rather than remaining lanceolate. Further, as is evident in the field,
the fruits of E. splendens, with their raised discs and exserted valves, are inconsistent
with the manna gums.

Whilst the rate at which the juvenile leaves of E. splendens become disjunct and
petiolate corresponds with that of E. aromaphloia, it possesses a suite of seedling
features inconsistent with that species. For example, the lanceolate, lustrous and light
green juveniles, the non-waxy growth tips and the squared, ridged stems are distinctive.
Further, the fruits of E. splendens, as described above, are not consistent with E.
aromaphloia.

The affinities of E. splendens are unclear but it has been tentatively included with
E. aromaphloia and its relatives. Although the morphology of its seedling stems and its
fruit structure are unique within the group, on the basis of particular shared seedling and
adult features, those taxa are regarded as being somewhat distant relatives. With regard
to the manna gums, the fundamental differences in seedling development and morpholo-
gy suggest an even more distant relationship.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED

victoria: west of Mt Kincade, 29 km north-west of Portland, A.C. Beauglehole (MEL); 28.9 km from
Portland towards Nelson by road, 29 Sep. 1992, K. Ride 9273 (MEL); 22.2 km from Portland towards Nelson
by road, 29 Sep. 1992, K. Rule 9273 (MEL); 0.9 km west of Heath Road near Mt Kincade, 30 Sep. 1993, K.
Rule 9378 (MEL); The intersection of Heath Road and the Portland-Nelson Road, 2.4 km east of Mt
Richmond township, Sep. 1993, K. Rule 9379 (MEL); The intersection of Stephens Road and the Portland-
Nelson, north-west of Portland, 30 Sep. 1993, K. Rule 9382 (MEL).

KEY TO EUCALYPTUS AROMAPHLOIA AND ITS RELATIVES

1 . New growth of seedlings waxy Eucalyptus aromaphloia

1. New growth of seedlings non-waxy 2

2. Juvenile leaves lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate with upper surface lustrous and light

green; seedling stems square in section and finely ridged Eucalyptus splendens

2. Juvenile leaves without the above combination of shape, lustre and colour; seedling
stems round in section, rarely square, never finely ridged 3

3. Juvenile leaves sessile for numerous pairs, linear and markedly falcate; fruits sessile
or sub-sessile Eucalyptus sabulosa

142

K. Rule

3. Juvenile leaves petiolate, narrow-lanceolate or broader and non-falcate; fruits
distinctly pedicellate

4. Canopy lustrous and green Eucalyptus fulgens

4. Canopy dull, grey-green ^

5 Juvenile leaves lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, grey-green; fibrous bark finely
' furrowed and thin Eucalyptus ignorahilis

5. Juvenile leaves narrow-lanceolate, blue-green; fibrous _• 5

bark deeply furrowed, thick and spongy Eucalyptus corticosa

Notes on morphological variation within populations of Eucalyptus aromaphloia

Studies of populations of E. aromaphloia showed it to be a markedly polymorphic
species. Several morphological fonns have been identified, each of which exhibits a

subtle or not so subtle distinctiveness in a range of characters.

The type locality of Eucalyptus aromaphloia is at the 113 mile post on the Western
Highway near Buangor between Beaufort and Ararat. Here the trees are characterised by
their somewhat lustrous, blue-green canopies, by their seedlings with waxy growth tips
and juvenile leaves that are elliptical, grey-green, shortly petiolate and irregularly
opposite, sub-opposite or alternate and by their subsessile, relatively large fmits (5-7
mm wide). This form is the most common and, although being variable m the colour
and lustre of its canopy, in the width of its juvenile leaves and m its fruit morphology,
accounts for the bulk of the populations of scentbark in west-central Victoria, including
those along the Otway coast from Anglesea to near Port Campbell. In addition, there are
a number of regional and morphological forms:

A forest form occurs along the Great Dividing Range m the vicinity of Creswick. It
has broader juvenile leaves than typical (approaching sub-orbicular) and relatively large.

slightly undulate adult leaves. ..... ■ r -.u

To the west of the type locality, in the vicinity of Moyston , is a form with a
lustrous, appreciably green canopy and tightly clustered sessile fruits. In the field it

resembles a manna gum. ■ i

Populations with green adult leaves and tightly sessile fruits fruit also occur m low
woodland communities in the vicinity of Anglesea. These populations also possess

relatively broad juvenile leaves. ^ . r. ^ c m

In the Black Range near Stawell and near Hall s Gap and Pomonal a fonn with
narrow conspicuously waxy juvenile leaves occurs on granite soils. Other populations
with relatively narrow juvenile leaves occur on undulating terrain to the north-west
of Mt Buangor. These have smaller fruits and narrower adult leaves than typical popula-

Ponulations with juvenile leaves of variable width occur along the Grampian s Mt
William Range at an altitude of between 800 and 1000 m. They differ from typical
populations in exhibiting lustrous, relatively coriaceous juvenile leaves rather than the
dull, soft-textured ones of other fonns. Further, these populations are often shrubby m
habit carry reduced amounts of rough bark and possess adult leaves that are markedly
coriaceous, lustrous and relatively narrow. Fruits of this form are larger than most

Outlier populations occur on relatively dry slopes and ridges of the Pyrenees and St
Amaud ranges. These are small-fruited with small, blue-green or grey-green adult leaves
and their juvenile leaves are within the typical range. In the Pyrenees Range, particularly
on Mt Avoca, fruits have flattened discs and the St Amaud Range trees exhibit a bark

that is neat, shallowly furrowed and slightly tessellated in appearance. , .

Lastlv the most divergent form located so far occurs as a single, somewhat disjunct
nopulation on dry sedimentary slopes of the Fryers Range near Castlemaine in
North-central Victoria. Its distinctive features include smaller adult leaves and fruits
than typical and linear-oblong, markedly falcate juvenile leaves.

New species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia

143

Acknowledgements

Don Foreman and Neville Walsh of the National Herbarium of Victoria are thanked for
their assistance and advice given during the preparation of this paper. In addition, Cliff
Beauglehole of Portland, Don McMahon of Blackburn, Neil Marriott of Stawell, Bill
Molyneux of Dixon’s Creek and Alf Salkin of Mt Waverley are thanked for their advice
and assistance given during the study.

References

Briggs, J.D. and Leigh, J.H. (1989). Rare and Threatened Australian Plants Special Publication 14.
(Australian National Parks and Wildlife Service: Canberra.)

Boorasma, C.D. (1981). Native Trees oj South Australia. Bulletin No 19. (Woods and Forest Department:
Adelaide.)

Chappill, J.A., Ladiges, P.Y. and Boland, D. (1986). Eucalyptus aromaphloia Pryor and Willis - A redefini-
tion of geographical and morphological boundaries. Australian Journal of Botany 34: 395-412.

Hill. K..D. and Johnson, L.A.S. (1991). Systematic studies in the eucalypts - 3, New taxa and combinations in
Eucalyptus (Myrtaceae). Telopea 4(2): 223-267.

Johnson, L.A.S. (1962). Studies in the taxonomy of Eucalyptus. Contributions from the New South Wales
National Herbarium. 3(3): 103-126.

Pryor, L.D. and Willis, J.H. (1954). A new Victorian (and South Australian) eucalypt. The Victorian
Naturalist 1\: 125-129.

Pryor, L.D. (1955). The genetic and systematic status of Eucalyptus huberiana, E. viminalis Labill and E.
aromaphloia Pryor & Willis. Transactions of the Royal Society South Australia 78: 156-164.

Willis, J.H. ( 1 973). A Handbook to Plants in Victoria Vol. 2. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)

Revised paper received 2 November 1995.

Muel!eria9: 145-159(1996)

A revision of the Cardamine gunnii-lilacina complex (Brassicaceae)

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

School of Botany, The University of Melbourne, Parkville, 3052, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Phenetic analysis of morphological variation in alpine and sub-alpine populations of
Cardamine transplanted from the field and grown from seed resulted in the identifica-
tion of two new species, Cardamine franklinensis 1. Thomps. formerly included in
Cardamine gunnii and Cardamine robusta I. Thomps., formerly included in Cardamine
lilacina. Examination of herbarium material, field observations and growth trials
resulted in the identification of a further new species, Cardamine astoniae I. Thomps.,
formerly included in Cardamine lilacina.

Introduction

Cardamine L. is a genus of about 200 species in the family Brassicaceae. The majority
of species occur in temperate regions of northern and southern hemispheres. In
Australia, a small number of endemic species are currently recognised, the majority of
which are confined to south-eastern Australia, including Tasmania. They occur in moist
habitats which include lowland swamps or watercourses, forests, sub-alpine woodlands
and a variety of alpine habitats. Several introduced species have become naturalised in
Australia and, although predominantly urban weeds, can occupy similar habitats to the
native species.

Several Australian species in the genus Rorippa resemble Australian Cardamine
and, until fairly recently, were placed in the latter genus. These taxa are still occasional-
ly misidentified as Cardamine. They can be distinguished by several features including
the shape of the replum (septum) margin of the siliqua which is flanged in Cardamine
but not in Rorippa, seed morphology and the mechanism of dehiscence (in Cardamine
this is explosive and results in the valves becoming coiled as they rapidly separate from
the replum).

An account of Australian Cardamine in 1982 by Hewson (1982), although perhaps
describing more of its diversity than previous flora treatments, failed to fully resolve its
taxonomy. Her treatment of the Cardamine gunnii-lilacina complex (terrestrial,
glabrous perennials with petals greater than 4 mm long) has created some uncertainty.
Forms within this complex grow predominantly in higher altitude areas of south-eastern
Australia and Tasmania. Hewson’s key separates the two species as follows:

style up to 1 mm long - C. gunnii',

style 1 -3 mm long - C. lilacina.

Style length refers to its length in the mature siliqua. Descriptions of the two species
point to petal length as another means of distinguishing these species although the
ranges for this character overlap. Petal length and style length, although useful charac-
ters, are unsatisfactory on their own for distinguishing forms within this complex. These
characters vary within populations depending on season and stage of flowering and
some populations have been found to have plants with style lengths ranging from less
than 1 mm to more than 1 mm.

Hewson identified two informal variants of C. gunnii, one with pinnate and
pinnatisect leaves with a large terminal ovate or reniform lobe, and the other with leaves
entire-spathulate or pinnatisect with an elliptic to ovate terminal lobe. She identified
four informal variants of C. lilacina, which vary in the dimensions of flower, fruit and
seed and in the shape and number of leaf pinnae. She noted that variation was almost
continuous and that further study was necessary to resolve this complex of variants. The

145

146

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

following Study encompasses some of this variation and is based on live plant material
collected from the field.

Materials and methods

Plants and seeds were collected in February and March, 1994 from six major regions
(Fig. 1). Four in north-eastern Victoria (Mts Buffalo, Bogong, Nelse and near Mt.
Hotham), one in south-eastern New South Wales (Kosciusko National Park) and one on
the western border of the Australain Capital Territory (Brindabella Ranges). In most
localities, especially in Victoria, populations were small and ripe fruits were present on
only a few plants as the main flowering period is in November and December.
Consequently, the number of plants removed for transplanting to pots was low in most
cases and seed was collected from a small range of plants. Plants to be transplanted were
maintained in plastic bags prior to potting up.

Two trials of alpine and sub-alpine plants were set up using the material collected
from the field. A transplant trial containing 40 plants from 12 populations was
established in February and March, 1994 by potting up the field-collected plants using a
standard potting mix. The transplants were maintained outdoors over seven months and
were subjected to Melbourne’s climate. A seedling trial of 153 plants from 12 popula-
tions was established in April and May by germinating field-collected seeds in punnets
in a heated glasshouse. For each population, seeds were derived from a variable number
of parent plants ranging from one to four. In most cases, seeds germinated readily 7-21
days after sowing and gennination rates approached 100%. Seedlings were transferred
to 10 cm pots at the two-leaf stage and grown on in a heated glasshouse with pots
an'anged in a random-block design. Seedlings were also grown outside for comparison
with the glasshouse-grown seedlings.

Revision of the Cardamine gunnii-lilacina complex

147

Herbarium material, from a greater range of collecting sites in south-eastern
Australia, from SYD, CANS, CBG, MEL and MELU was also examined.

FHblNbllL AlNALi:5i:3 , o , i

Nineteen vegetative and reproductive characters were used for the phenetic analysis ot
the transplants and twelve vegetative characters were used for the analysis ot the

seedlings (Table 1). , • , u

Morphological data from the seedling and transplant trials were phenetically

analysed using the PATN package (Belbin, 1987). All data were range standardised. The
Manhattan Metric (Williams, 1976) association measure was used to calculate a dissimi-

Two agglomerative methods were used to produce an hierarchical classification,
the Unweighted Pair-Group Method of Averages (UPGMA) and the Weighted Pair-
Group Method of Averages (WPGMA). Dendrograms were produced using the DEND
program and Cramer values were used to determine which characters best discriminated

the final groups identified. , ■ t-u t-vcD

The dissimilarity matrix was also used in an ordination analysis. Ihe RYbP pro-
gram used Hybrid Multi-Dimensional Scaling (HMDS; Faith el ai, 1987) to prodiice a
three dimensional ordination. The ordination with the lowest stress was selected from
twenty iterations.

The agglomerative classification of 40 transplants identified three maiir groups (Fig. 2),
two consisting of individuals from single collection sites and the third consisting of
individuals from a number of sites.

The three Blue Lake individuals (BL) were the most distinct, forming a cluster
(group 1 ) that fused last in the classification (node a. Fig. 2). Two unique attributes
distinguished the Blue Lake individuals. Firstly, vegetative stems of these plants
elongate vertically as new leaves form, resulting in the rosette of leaves being held well
above soil level, and secondly, inflorescence branches do not form from the axils of the
cauline leaves as they do m the other transplants. Furthennore, Blue Lake plants have
longer, and particularly broader petals than plants from other localities. Within the Blue
Lake population, some variation occurred in petal shape, style length at anthesis and
inflorescence architecture.

TABLE 1 . LIST OF CHARACTERS FOR PHENETIC ANALYSIS OF TRANSPLANTS AND SEEDLINGS.

Transplant trial characters:

1 . Petal length

2. Petal width

3. Style length at anthesis

4. Filament width

5. Filament length to width ratio

6. Sepal length

7. Pedicel length at anthesis

8. Siliqua length

9. Siliqua width

10. Seed length

1 1 . Rosette leaves -maximum length

12. Rosette leaves - maximum no. of
leaflets

Seedling trial characters:

1 . Cotyledon lamina length

2. Cotyledon lamina width

3. Cotyledon lamina length to width ratio

4. Cotyledon petiole length

5. Leaf number of first pinnate leaf

6. Leaf petiole width

7. Leaf length

8. Maximum number of leaflets/leaf

9. Cotyledon lamina margins recurved or
not

10. Cotyledon lamina surface plane or
concave

11. Terminal leaflet base cuneate or
truncate-cordate

12. Vegetative stem elongating or not

148

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

TABLE 1. CONTINUED.

T ransplant trial characters: Seedling trial characters:

13. Cauline leaves -no. per scape

14. Rosette leaves terminal pinna cuneate or
tmncate-cordate

15. Lateral pinnae sessile or not

16. Projections from leaf rachis, present
or absent

17. Cauline 2° inflorescences, present
or absent

18. Flowers opening below, level with or
above cluster of buds

19. Vegetative stem elongating or not

Plants collected from Mt. Franklin (FN, FS) clustered into two quite separate
groups. Seven individuals formed group 2 (node b. Fig. 2, all from FN) and are distinct
from all other transplants on the basis of leaf morphology. The tenninal pinnae of basal
leaves (laminae in the case of simple leaves) are elliptic and strongly cuneate at the
base, and lateral pinnae, if present, are sessile (Fig. 5). All other individuals have basal
leaves with terminal pinnae that are ovate to orbicular with a slightly cuneate to strongly
cordate base and lateral pinnae that are petiolulate.

The remaining major group, group 3, clustered at node c of the dendrogram (Fig.
2). These transplants all form a rosette at soil level (as do group 2 plants), have leaves
unlike those of group 2, and produce secondary inflorescences from the axils of their
cauline leaves. Within this group further clustering was evident which corresponded
closely with geographical distribution.

Five individuals from Mt Higginbotham, Victoria (HI) were distinguished by
having erect pedicels and flowers that clearly overtop the buds in the same raceme. They
also have broader siliquas than other plants in group 3. In four of these individuals,
small, leafy triangular projections were present along the margins of the leaf rachis. This
feature was not observed in other individuals. Eleven individuals from Mt Franklin (FS,
FN) and three from Mt Gingera (GA) were similar; Mt Franklin plants differ, however,
from those from Mt Gingera in having shorter basal leaves, fewer cauline leaves,
narrower siliquas, smaller seeds, spreading pedicels and flowers opening well below the
level of the buds in the same raceme. Mt Gingera individuals have flowers mostly
opening at the same level as the buds.

Individuals from several Victorian populations, Mts Nelse (NE), Bogong (BO),
Loch (LO) and Buffalo (BU), were similar to three Charlotte Pass (CP, NSW) individu-
als being short styled (mean 0.9 mm, style length measured at anthesis) and having
small petals (mearr-6.4 mm). This contrasts with the larger flowered plants from Mts
Higginbotham, Franklin and Gingera. Charlotte Pass individuals have more slender
staminal fdaments and longer pedicels than the small-flowered Victorian populations.

A three-dimensional ordination of the 40 individuals is displayed in Figures 3 and
4. Clusters corresponding to the three groups identified in the classification are well
separated and reasonably discrete. Clusters recognised within group 3 in the classifica-
tion mostly do not overlap in the ordination but are less well separated than the major
groups.

Only vegetative characters were available for analysis in the seedling trial. The
results of a phenetic analysis of the seedlings generally supported the groups identified
by the transplant trial. Vegetative stem elongation and shape of terminal pinna,
two characters that helped characterise groups 1 and 2 in the transplant trial, also
distinguished these groups in this trial. Petiole width distinguished Higginbotham and
Franklin (larger- flowered populations in group 3 of the transplant trial) from Nelse,

Revision of the Cardamine gunnii-Iilacina complex

149

Bogong, Buffalo and Charlotte Pass (smaller-flowered populations in group 3 of the
transplant trial).

Discussion

Classification and ordination analyses of transplants, and classification analysis of
seedlings, demonstrated a pattern of morphological variation of discrete forms such that
the recognition of taxa is warranted. Examination of herbarium material of these forms
further supports the results of the phenetic analyses.

The Blue Lake population (Cardamine robusta sp. nov.) is representative of one
taxon (Fig. 2, group 1). Plants from this locality have distinct above-ground stem
morphology, large flowers and do not form secondary inflorescences from cauline leaf
axils. There are, however, differences within the population in floral and inflorescence
morphology. Subsequent examination of underground parts of transplants showed this
taxon to also have unique robust underground stems which ascend to produce new
rosettes a variable distance from the parent rosette. This taxon has been informally
recognised in the Flora of Australia as the robust, snow-patch variant of C. lilacina and
as species A2 in the Flora of NSW (Harden, 1991). The description of this variant in
these floras does not, however, identify the above features.

Mt Franklin plants are recognisable as a second taxon (Cardamine franklinensis sp.
nov.) on the basis of unique leaf morphology, that is, the combination of elliptic
terminal pinnae and sessile lateral pinnae (Fig 2, group 2). This taxon has been
informally recognised (Hewson, 1982) as the spathulate-leaved variant of C. gunnii.
Non-spathulate-leaved populations conforming strictly to C. gunnii, as circumscribed by
Hewson, were not collected. As noted in the introduction, the distinction between
these forms and C. lilacina based on examination of herbarium material and Hewson’s
descriptions is not clear (see also notes under C. franklinensis below).

The remaining group constitutes a third taxon and is referrable to C. lilacina Hook.
There is some evidence of discrete morphological variation within this group but low
population sizes in the transplant trial and a limited seed diversity in the seedling trial
disallows formal recognition of these discrete forms at this stage. For this complex to be
fully assessed, comparisons need to be made with a greater range of populations of C.

Fig. 2. Dendrogram showing results of cluster analysis of 40 alpine and sub-alpine transplants. Entire dendro-
gram shown (UPGMA fusion strategy). Group 1 locality - Blue Lake (BL); Group 2 locality - Mt. Franklin
(FN); Group 3 localities - Mt. Buffalo (BU), Mt. Nelse(NE), Mt. Bogong(BO), Mt. Loeh (LO), Mt
Higginbotham (HI), Mt. Franklin (FS, FN), Mt. Gingera (GA), Charlotte Pass (CP).

150

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

2

Fig. 3. Ordination of 40 transplants (Hybrid multi-dimensional scaling). Axes 1 and 2. A - Group 1 (Blue Lake)
individuals; ■ - Group 2 (Mt Franklin) individuals: • - Group 3 individuals.

lilacina and C. giinnii, in particular those occurring in lower altitude forests.

Chromosome counts from root tip squashes stained with lactoaceto-orcein indicat-
ed that the diploid number for each of these taxa was 48, although precise counts were
not achieved. This number corresponds to counts by Thurling (1968) for higher altitude
Cardamine in the Brindabella Ranges and Kosciusko area.

Subsequent to the phenetic analyses described above, field examination and
growth trials of three alpine or sub-alpine Cardamine populations in Victoria and NSW,
confirmed the existence of a new species, C. astoniae sp. nov. The existence of this
species had been indicated by examination of herbarium records. This species is separa-
ble from C. lilacina^ in which it was previously included, on the basis of stem and leaf
characters. In the vegetative stage of growth above-ground stems grow horizontally and
leaves do not form into a basal rosette. Leaves are usually simple or with only one pair
of lateral pinnae. At flowering time the stem turns upwards to form a vertical scape.

Revision of the Cardamine gunnii-lilacina complex

151

3

1

Fig. 4. Ordination of 40 transplants (Hybrid multi-dimensional scaling). Axes 1 and 2. A - Group 1 (Blue Lake)
individuals; • - Group 2 (Mt Franklin) individuals; • - Group 3 individuals.

Taxonomy

Cardamine robusta l.Thomps. sp. nov.

Cardamini Ulacinae Hook, affmis, caulibus robustioribus, sobolibus robustis producen-
tibus, caespitibus latis facientibus, folds rosulae basibus aggregatis minoribus secus
caulem, caule florenti simplici plerumque differt.

TYPUS; New South Wales, Club Lake, Kosciusko area 36°25’S, 148°16’E, 10 Jan. 1960,
B.G. Briggs (holotypus: NSW).

Perennial herb forming dense swards to c. Im diameter, up to 30 cm tall, glabrous.
Roots fibrous. Vegetative stems robust (3- 10mm diameter), frequently branching above
and below ground level, underground stems, white, growing more or less horizontally
and then ascending to above ground level, above-ground stems of pressed specimens
often wrinkled; flowering stem relatively slender and usually unbranched. Leaves

152

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

somewhat fleshy; basal leaves forming a rosette of erectly held leaves, the rosette
usually distinctly above ground level and leaf bases somewhat loosely arranged along
the stem, long petiolate, to 25 cm long, pinnate with l-2(-3) pairs of lateral pinnae and a
larger terminal pinna; tenuinal pinna broad-ovate to oblate the base cuneate to shallowly
cordate, lateral pinnae similar in shape, long-petiolulate; cauline leaves 0-4, similar to
basal leaves or much shorter and with pinnae becoming much narrower and more
cuneate up the stem. Inflorescences few to many-flowered racemes, often condensed,
sometimes more elongate. Sepals green, ovate, 3-4.5 mm long, petals broad, divided
into limb and claw, 8-12 mm long, 5-7 mm wide, white; stamens 6; style at maturity 1-3
mm long. Siliquas 20-40 mm long, 2-3 mm wide on stout pedicels to 20 mm long. Seeds
oblong-elliptic, 2-2.5 mm long. (Fig. 5)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Cardamine robusta is endemic to alpine regions of the Kosciusko National Park in the
Southern Tablelands of NSW and is recorded from several localities mostly associated
with glacial lakes in this area, e.g. Blue Lake, Club Lake and Lake Albina. It does not
appear to be threatened. (Fig. 6)

HABITAT

Cardamine robusta grows in alpine herbland/grasslands amongst granite boulders on
moist slopes bordering glacial lakes, often bordering melting snow-patches.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet of the new species refers to the vegetative stems which are more
robust than in other native Cardamine species.

NOTES

Cardamine robusta has broad fruits and large seeds, similar to C. astoniae and higher
altitude forms of C. lilacina. The development, in C. robusta, of thick underground
stems to facilitate vegetative spread does not occur in these species although some
vegetative spread can occur. In contrast to C. lilacina, secondary flowering stems are
not normally produced from the axils of cauline leaves and typically racemes do not
extend as far above the apices of the leaves (flowering often commences at or below the
summit of the leaf mass). Petals are always white and large in C. robusta. Above ground
vegetative stems are somewhat brittle when fresh and often are noticeably wrinkled
following pressing. Basal leaves form a rosette with leaf bases relatively loosely
arranged along a gradually elongating vegetative stem resulting in most basal leaves
arising well clear of ground level. Leaves are often long and tend to be held fairly
erectly. The propensity of C. robusta for vegetative spread means that broad and dense
clumps up to c. 1 metre (or more?) in diameter can form. It flowers between January and
April.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (25 specimens examined)

NEW SOUTH WALES; Club Lake (Mt Kosciusko), 6200 ft, 20 Jan. 1951, L.A.S. Johnson (NSW); Lake
Cootapatamba (Mt Kosciusko), 7 Jan. 1956, M.E. Phillips (NSW); Blue Lake, west bank (Mt Kosciusko) 21
Mar. 1971, C. Totterdell (NSW); 150 m downstream along Lady Northcote’s Creek from Lake Albina,
Kosciusko National Park, 6 Feb. 1993, F.A. Zich 219 (NSW, MEL); Blue Lake, Southern Tablelands, 31 Jan.
1972, /.«. Telford 3058 iCBG).

Cardamine franklinensis l.Thomps. sp. nov.

Cardamini lilacinae Hook, affmis, foliis simplicibus et spathulatis late, vel dissectis
pinna terminali elliptica, pinnatis lateralibus in 1-2 paribus sessilis obovatis, seminibus
parvioribus differ!.

HOLOTYPUS; Australian Capital Territory, 2 miles [3.2 km] above Bendora on Mt
Franklin Road, 13 Nov. 1953, C.fV.E. Moore 2777 (NSW).

Revision of the Cardamine gmmii-lilacina complex

153

Fig 5. Cardamine rohusta. Stem and leaves. From Briggs (NSW).

Perennial herb, to 30 cm tall, glabrous. Tap-rooted. Stems erect, usually branched from
base and from cauline leaf axils. Leaves thin; basal leaves petiolate, to 15 cm long,
simple or pinnate, mostly less than 7 cm long, fonning an often dense persistent rosette;
simple leaves entire to crenate, somewhat spathulate; pinnate leaves with an elliptic to
ovate terminal pinna and 1-2 pairs of sessile, obovate, attenuate-based lateral pinnae,
cauline leaves 0-3, reducing in size up the stem, lower ones sometimes similar to
pinnate basal leaves, otherwise leaves simple, pinnatifid to entire. Inflorescences _com-
monly many-flowered racemes. Sepals green or purple pigmented, ovate, 2-3 mm long;
petals clearly divided into limb and claw, 4. 5-6.5 mm long, all white or pink on the
outside; stamens 6; mature style 1-2 mm long. Siliquas sub-erect, 25-35 mm long,
1 5-1 8 mm wide, pedicels erecto-patent c. 10 mm long. Seeds elliptic, 1.3-1. 5 mm long.
(Fig. 7)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Cardamine franklinensis has been recorded from the Brindabella Ranges on the western
boundary between Australian Capital Territory and New South Wales mostly in the
vicinity of Mt Franklin, from Smiggin Holes in Mt Kosciusko National Park, from the
eastern highlands of Victoria and from the central highlands in Tasmania. This species
is not common and the only region from which there are multiple collections is the
Brindabella ranges. The inconspicuous nature of the plant means that it is likely to be

154

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

overlooked and may partly explain the small number of collections of this species. It is
represented in Namadgi, Kosciusko and Alpine National Parks. (Fig. 8)

HABITAT

Cardamine franklinensis forms small colonies in sub-alpine woodland on rocky scree
slopes or amongst Poa tussocks.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet of the new species is named after the mountain (Mt Franklin) in the
Brindabella ranges around which most collections of this species have been made.

NOTES

Cardamine franklinensis was formerly included in C. giinnii based on its petal size
(between 4 and 6 mm long) and mature style length (less than 1 mm). In growth trials,
however, the mature style of this species consistently exceeded 1 mm in length.

The lectotype of C. giinnii and several matching specimens on the same sheet have
a distinctive root system with several sub-tuberous tapering roots arising from the base)
and white petals 6-7 mm long. These are slightly longer than the often pink petals of C.
franklinensis. Cardamine gunnii sensii stricto also has fewer basal leaves, different leaf
morphology, (the terminal pinna of basal leaves mostly being triangular-ovate), is some-
times papillate and produces fewer-flowered racemes. It is thus appropriate to separate
these two entities. Only one specimen of C. gunnii s. sir. has been collected in the past
90 years, this a 1968 collection from Marsh’s swamp near Mt Burr in south-east South
Australia, although there are several nineteenth century collections from South
Australia, Victoria and Tasmania. There is some doubt therefore as to whether C. gunnii
s. sir. is still in existence in Victoria and Tasmania. Locality information indicates that it
occurs (or occurred) on lowland swamp margins and this further distinguishes it from C.
franklinensis

Revision of the Cardamine gunnii-lilacina complex

155

Fig. 7. Cardamine fmnklinensis. a - habit, b - basal leaf variant, a from Burhidge 6692 (CBG), b from cultivat-
ed specimen.

Leaf morphology readily distinguishes C. franklinensis from the C. lilacinQ
complex which is otherwise similar. Seeds of C. franklinensis are slightly smaller than
the range for C. lilacina (1.5-3 mm long). Thurling (1968) seems to have included
this entity in his breeding study of CQvdcuuiuc. A population collected for this study
(denoted as Race D) was described as entire-leaved (as C. franklinensis usually is) and it
proved to be reproductively isolated from the other populations of Cardamine used in
the trial, some of which are likely to have been C. lilacina based on collection site
information.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS SEEN (12 specimens examined)

NEW SOUTH WALES: 2 milcs [3.2 km] from Bendora on Mt. Franklin Road, 13 Nov.

1953, C.W.E. Moore

2777 (NSW).

AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY: Eighty Acrcs, 6 km from Cotter River crossing at Cotter Flats to\vards
Orroral Tracking Station, 2 Nov. 1976, E.M. Canning 4116 (CBG); Brindabella Ranges 19.2 krn from
Picadilly Circus towards Mt Franklin, 1440 m., 29 Oct. 1986, H. Thompson 761 and P. Ollerenshaw (CBG)
victoria: Bogong High Plains, near Wilkinson Lodge, 5400 feet, 6 Nov 1961, T.B. Miiit 2504 (MEL),
Central Eastern Highlands, logging road c. 6 km NNE of Snowy Plains airstrip, Wonnangatta-Macalister R.
divide, 1524 m, 7 Dec. 1970,///. Willis (MEL).

TASMANIA: Sandbanks Tier, 1280 m, 18 Mar. 1989,/. Moscal 17292 {HO).

156

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

Cardamine astoniae 1. Thomps., sp. nov.

Cardamini lilacinae Hook, affinis, caulibus stoloniferis, non rosulatis, foliis simplicibus
vel pinnatis paucioribus differt.

HOLOTYPUs: Victoria, Snowfields, Bogong High Plains, between Rocky Valley
Reservoir and Basalt Hill, Falls Creek area, 36°54’S, 147°18’E, 1650 m., 28 Dec. 1994,
Ian Thompson 84 (MEL).

Perennial herb, glabrous. Roots fine and fibrous. Vegetative stems long, growing
horizontally, rooting at nodes, occasionally branching, turning upwards to produce an
erect, usually unbranched flowering stem to c. 25 cm high. Leaves somewhat fleshy;
basal leaves long-petiolate, simple or pinnate with 1-2 pinna pairs and a larger terminal
pinna, to c. 15 cm long, mostly arising singly along vegetative stem, sometimes several
clustered at base of flowering stem; tenninal pinna ovate to elliptic, cuneate to cordate at
the base; lateral pinnae orbicular to elliptic; cauline leaves usually several, pinnate to
pinnatisect,the lateral lobes/pinnae angled strongly forwards. Inflorescences short
many-flowered racemes. Sepals green, ovate, 3-4 mm long; petals broad, divided into
limb and claw, 6-1 1 mm long, 3-6 mm wide, all white or pink on outside; stamens 6;
mature style 1-3 mm long. Siliquas erect to sub-erect, 20-30 mm long, 2-2.5 mm wide;
pedicels 10-20 mm long. Seeds oblong-elliptic, c. 2 mm long. (Fig. 9)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Cardamine astoniae is recorded from several disjunct localities in Victoria, NSW and
Tasmania. Areas include Barrington Tops National Park in the Northern Tablelands of
NSW, the Southern Tablelands of NSW, several localities in the Alpine region of
Victoria, notably Falls Creek and Mt Hotham areas, and from near Cradle Mountain in
Tasmania. It is protected in National Parks. (Fig. 10)

Revision of the Cardamine gunnii-Ulacina complex

157

HABITAT

Cardamine astoniae forms small to large colonies and grows amongst Poa or
Empodisma tussocks in open, moist to boggy, alpine and sub-alpine environments.

ETYMOLOGY

Cardamine astoniae is named after Helen Aston, botanist and author of Aquatic Plants
in Australia, who was the first to collect this species in Victoria.

NOTES

Cardamine astoniae has a distinctive habit which sets it apart from other larger-
flowered species in Australia. It is inconspicuous when not in flower because it does not
form a rosette of leaves. The horizontal stems grow through the litter layer with the
lamina of the basal leaves just reaching above the level of the tussocks of grasses or
rushes through which it creeps. The full extent of a single plant has not been ascertained
but branches of the horizontal network of stems are up to 20 cm long. The flowers and
fruits are similar to those of some larger-flowered alpine and sub-alpine populations of
C lilacina but the flowering stem is less commonly branched. The flowering period
seems to be confined to late December and early January. Transplants from the field of
C. astoniae maintain their horizontal growth habit.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (16 specimens examined)

victoria: N side of Mt Cope, Bogong High Plains, 1966, A.C. Beauglehole 15508 (MEL); Timbarra R,
Nunniong plateau, east Gippsland, 1964, J.H. Willis (MEL); At Pretty Valley, Bogong High Plains, 27 Dec.
1958, H.I. Aston 182 (MEL); Bucketty Plain, N.G. Walsh 3602 (MEL); Mt Loch 28 Dec. 1994, l.R.
Thompson 83 (MEL).

158

Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges

Fig. 10. Distribution of Cardamine astoniae.

NEW SOUTH wales: S branch of Back Flat Creek, 0.25 mile [0.4 km] SE of Grey Mare Hut (upper Geehi

R district), 28 Dec. 1968, A. Rodd 717 (NSW); Merritt’s Creek, Kosciusko area, 10 Jan. 1960, B.C. Briggs

(NSW); Saxby’s Creek, 1 km NW of Carey’s Peak, Barrington Tops, 29 Dec. \969,J. Pickard 821 (NSW)
TASMANIA: Leary’s Corner, Middlesex plains, 17 Nov. 1986, yJ. Moscai 13508 (HO).

KEY TO CARDAMINE GUNNII-LILACINA COMPLEX

The leaf blade of simple leaves is referred to here as the terminal pinna. The tenn
pinna refers both to leaflets of pinnate leaves and to lobes of pinnatisect leaves when
they resemble leaflets (i.e. if they are narrower towards the base).

Some species produce secondary inflorescences on flowering stems arising from the
base of the primary stem or from cauline leaf axils. These inflorescences are typically
fewer flowered than the primary inflorescence. In this key, the number of flowers per
raceme refers to the primary inflorescence. Depauperate specimens will have fewer
flowers per raceme.

1 Vegetative stems stoloniferous, basal leaves mostly arising singly at intervals along
horizontal stem, the stem turning upwards to form an erect flowering

Cardamine astoniae

1 : Stems not stoloniferous, basal leaves forming a many-leaved rosette 2

2 Plants spreading by means of robust underground stems which ascend to fonn new
rosettes, bases of rosette leaves somewhat loosely arranged along stem, flowering
stem simple, flowers large (petals greater than 8 mm long), white
Cardamine rohusta

2: Plants not spreading as above, bases of rosette leaves usually tightly clustered, flow-
ering stem simple or branched, flowers variable in size (4-12 mm long), pink or white
3

Revision of the Cardamine gtinnii-lilacina complex

159

3 Terminal pinna of basal leaves elliptic to ovate, cuneate at the base and lateral pinnae,
if present, somewhat obovate, sessile and with attenuate bases, seeds 1.3- 1.5 mm

long, petals 4-6.5 mm long Cardamine franklinensis

3: Terminal pinna of basal leaves orbicular to ovate, often cordate at base, and most
lateral pinnae distinctly stalked (petiolulate), seeds greater than 1 .5 mm long, petals
4-12 mm long Cardamine lilacina

Acknowledgements

We are grateful to the National Herbarium of Victoria for the use of their facilities, to
Neville Walsh of MEL for his assistance with the Latin diagnoses, to Dr. Tim Entwisle
of MEL, and to Mali Moir for one of the accompanying illustrations. We are also grate-
ful to the Directors/ Curators of AD, CANB, CBG, HO, K, MEL and NSW for the loan
of specimens.

References

Harden, G.J. (ed.) (1991). Flora of New South Wales. 1: (New South Wales University Press: Sydney.) pp.
Mi-All.

Hewson, H.J. (1982). Flora of Australia. 8: (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra.) pp. 311-
318.

Thurling, N. (1968). A cytotaxonomic study of Australian Cardamine. Australian Journal of Botany 16: 515-
523.

Revised paper received 9 November 1995.

Muelleria9: 161-173 ( 1996 )

A revision of the Cardamine paucijuga eomplex (Brassieaceae)

Ian R. Thompson

School of Botany, The University of Melbourne, Parkville, 3052, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Four new species Cardamine lineariloha I. Thomps., Cardamine microthrix I. Thomps.,
Cardamine papillata I. Thomps. and Cardamine moirensis I. Thomps. are described and
illustrated. Cardamine paucijuga is contrasted with the new species.

Introduction

Cardamine L. is a genus of about 200 species in the family Brassieaceae. The majority
of species occur in temperate regions of northern and southern hemispheres. In
Australia, a small number of endemic species are currently recognised, the majority of
which are confined to south-eastern Australia, including Tasmania. They occur in moist
habitats which include lowland swamps or watercourses, forests, sub-alpine woodlands
and a variety of alpine habitats. Species described in this paper mostly occur at lower
altitudes. Several introduced species in Australia are similar to, and can occupy similar
habitats to, the native species although more commonly they occur in urban environ-
ments

Cardamine paucijuga was described by Turezaninov in 1 854 based on a Western
Australian specimen collected in 1848 by Drummond. This name was subsequently not
recognised m Australian floras until resurrected by Hewson (1982). She included all
native Cardamine from south-east Australia and Tasmania with petals less than 4 mm
long in this species. Before this time, these taxa were identified as either C. hirsuta L. or
C. parviflora L., two northern hemisphere species. Hewson described C. paucijuga as
an annual, tap-rooted species, glabrous or sometimes hairy (but not with long, straight
hairs like the introduced C. hirsuta and C. flexuosa With.) and with petals 2 5-3 5 mm
long. Examination of herbarium specimens and evidence from field work and growth
trials indicates the existence of four entities separable from C. paucijuga on the basis of
foliar, stem, floral and inflorescence characters.

Taxonomy

Cardamine papillata I.Thomps., sp. nov.

Cardamini paueijugae Turez. affinis, habitu humiliore, caulibus foliaceis minus, foliis
caulium minoribus dissectis, racemis primariis brevioribus et floribus paucioribus
caulibus et pedicellis papillatis plerumque, stylo breviore plerumque diffeiT.

^‘‘^toria, Maramingo Creek area, c. 4 km direct NE of Genoa P O 26 Dec
1969, A.C.Beauglehole 32819 (MEL).

Small annual to ?perennial herb, to 25 cm high, glabrous or papillate. Tap-rooted.
Stems erect to ascending, slender, glabrous, sometimes minutely papillose, often branch-
ing from the base and from cauline leaf axils. Leaves thin; basal leaves long-petiolate
simple or pinnate with 1-2 pairs of lateral pinnae and a much larger terminal pinna to 7
cm long forming a persistent rosette; terminal pinna entire, orbicular, slightly cuneate or
more often shal owly cordate at the base; lateral leaflets orbicular, short-stalked or
sessile, cauline leaves 0-3, variable in shape, sometimes with papillose margins the
lowermost sometimes similar to basal leaves, simple or with 1-2 pinna pairs, otherWise

161

162

Ian R. Thompson

much reduced in length, usually less than 2 cm, and dissection, pinnate or pinnatifid and
sessile. Inflorescences 1-10(-15) flowered racemes, often very few-flowered.
Sepals ovate, green or purple-pigmented, 1.5-2. 5 mm long, petals slender, cuneate to
spathulate, 3-4.5 mm long, all white or pink on the outside; stamens 6; stigma sub-
sessile or mature style up to c. 1 mm long. Siliquas erect to sub-erect, linear, 20-35 mm
long, c. 1 mm wide, pedicels erecto-patent, 5-15 mm long, sometimes minutely
papillose. Seeds elliptic, 1.0- 1.2 mm long. (Fig. 1)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Cardamine papillata has a scattered distribution in hilly to mountainous regions of
South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales and Tasmania. In South Australia it is
confined to hills east of Adelaide and southward down the Fleurieu peninsula. In New
South Wales it has a somewhat disjunct distribution though this is possibly due to it
being a small and inconspicuous species that is not commonly collected with its actual
distribution being more continuous along the Great Dividing Range. Although not
common it does not appear to be threatened, (Fig. 2)

Fig. I . Cardamine papillata. a - habit, b - pedicel and stem with papillae. From Beauglehole 32819 (MEL).

Revision of Cardamine paucijuga

163

HABITAT

Cardamine papillata occurs most commonly in hilly, forested areas at lower altitudes,
but has also been recorded from near coastal localities. It prefers moist, shaded areas
often in rocky sites near streams and growing amongst mosses. Plants in these habitats
are often tiny and produce primary racemes of only 1 -3 flowers.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet of the new species refers to the small papillae that often develop on
the stems, pedicels and leaf margins of this species.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (80 specimens examined)

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Hindmarsh Tiers, Southern Lofty, 28 Aug. 1965,/B. Cleland (AD).
victoria: Bentley Plains road, 18 Feb. 1971 A.C. Beauglehole 36799 (MEL); Little Hard Hills area east
of Hall’s road, Enfield Forest Park, 24 km SSW of Ballarat P.O., 23 Oct. 1978, A.C. Beauglehole 61009
(MEL); Gippsland Lakes Coastal Park, SE of Rotamah Island 9 Sep. 1987, /. Crawford 633 (MEL);
Briagolong State Forest, 28 Sep. 1984, A.C. Beauglehole 77461 (MEL); Port Campbell National Park between
Crown of Thorns and the Grotto, 29 Oct. 1966, A.C. Beauglehole 21 5 19 and E. W. Finch (MEL); Daylcsford,
1880, Wallace (UEL).

NEW SOUTH WALES: Near Back (or Stony) creek, 0.5 km NW of Ramshead creek, 1981, S.J. Forbes 662
(MEL); Attunga State Forest, 620 m., 27 Oct. 1990, J.R. Hosking !H6 (NSW); Warrabah National Park, 450
m., 9 Sep. 1987, J.R. Hosking (NSW); Beside Nimmitabel-Bega Rd., Glenbog State Forest, Southern
Tablelands, 10 Dec. 1970, 2 l.M Rodd 1 577 (NSW).

TASMANIA; Clarke Is., 1893, J.H. Maclaine (MEL); Saltwater Lagoon, Friendly Beaches, 30 Dec. 1983,
A.M. Buchanan 2I5R (HO); Florentine Valley, 12 Dec. 1952, W.M. Curtis (HO); Allwrights Lagoons, 5 km
NNE of Waddamana, 882 m, 1 Dec 1990, A. Moscal 20282 (HO).

Cardamine lineariloba I. Thomps. sp. nov.

Cardamini paueijugae Turez. affinis, foliis simplicibus, linearibus ad spathulatos
anguste, vel dissectis lobis lateralibus linearibus directis prorsum, lobo terminale
longiore multo, racemis primariis brevioribus et floribus paucioribus, stylo breviore
plerumque differt.

164

Ian R. Thompson

HOLOTYPUS: Victoria, Mt Arapiles SE slope along watercourse c. 1 mile [1.6 km] down
from top, 22 Sep. 1968, A.C. Beauglehole 28699 (MEL).

Small, annual herb, glabrous, to 25 cm high. Fibrous rooted with slender tap-root
sometimes persisting. Stems slender, erect to ascending, usually much branched from
the base and from cauline leaf axils. Leaves thin; basal leaves simple, to 6 cm long,
persisting early in flowering; often entire, narrow oblanceolate the base very attenuate,
occasionally shallowly lobed distally, sometimes pinnatisect with 1 -several sessile linear
lateral lobes angled forward and with a much longer almost linear terminal lobe, lobes
entire, 0.3-2 cm long; cauline leaves mostly several, initial flowering stem often naked,
similar to basal leaves, gradually reducing in size up the stem. Inflorescences mostly
few-flowered racemes. Sepals green, ovate, 1.5-2 mm long; petals cuneate, 3-5 mm
long, white, stamens 6; stigma sub-sessile or mature style up to 1mm long. Siliqiias
erect, linear, 9-20 mm long, c. 1 mm wide on erecto-patent pedicels 5-10 mm long.
Seeds elliptic, c. 1.2 mm long. (Fig. 3)

DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY

Cardamine lineariloba occurs in Victoria and South Australia extending from near Lake
Terangpom in the south-west of Victoria north-westwards to the Little Desert region of
Victoria and westwards to an area between Mt. Gambier and Naracoorte in South
Australia. Not often collected. Its conseiwation status is uncertain. (Fig. 4)

HABITAT

Cardamine lineariloba occurs in lowland areas along stream banks and in seasonally
wet lowland environments such as swamp margins.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet of the new species refers to its leaf morphology.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (23 Specimens examined)

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Bugle Range, 1848, F. Mueller (MEL); 5 km SW of Taqieena (AD); 150 m S of
cxclosure, Calectasia Conservation Park, 29 Oct. 1986, P. Gibbons 586 (AD).

victoria: Between Lake Gnarpurt and Lake Terangpom, 24 km NE of Camperdown P.O., 7 Oct. 1977,
GJ. Hirth (MEL); Saline flats near Mt William, Sept 1879, D. Sullivan 31 (MEL); 3 km S of Dadswell

Fig. 3. Cardamine lineariloba. a — habit, b - leaf variant, a — from Beauglehole 74495 (MEL), b — from
Beauglehole 28699 (MEL).

Revision of Cardamine paiicijuga

165

Fig. 4. Distribution of Cardamine lineariloha.

Bridge, Grampians National Park, 30 Aug. 1983, A.C. Beaiiglehole 74495 (MEL); c. 4 km NE of Goroke P.O.,
Goroke State Forest, 4 Sep. 1986, A.C. Beaiiglehole 83709 (MEL): Roadside adjacent to Darlot Swamp, NE of
Horsham, 2 Sep. 1995, LR. Thompson 96 (MEL).

Cardamine microthrix I. Thomps., sp. nov.

Cardamini paucijitgae Turcz. affinis, robustiori, erecta, caulibus pilosis interdum, pinnis
foliorum caulium margine ciliatis sparse, pinna tenninali latiore, 3-9-lobata differ!.

HOLOTYPUS; Victoria, Clarke Lagoon Wildlife Reserve, north-east study area, 28 Oct.
1987, A.C. Beaiiglehole 89710 and L. W. Huebner (MEL).

Annual herb, to 30 cm high. Tap-root slender to stout. Stems slender to robust, usually
erect, glabrous to sparsely hairy, branching from the base and from cauline leaf axils.
Leaves thin; basal leaves long petiolate, mostly pinnate, to 8 cm long,with 1-2 pinna
pairs, forming a rosette, somewhat persistent; terminal pinna large, broadly ovate with a
cordate base; lateral pinnae ovate, petiolulate; margins of pinnae entire, crenate or
shallowly lobed; cauline leaves usually 2 or more, usually well-developed, pinnate with
l-2(-3) pairs of lateral pinnae; terminal pinna often broad, ovate, (3-)5-9 lobed, often
deeply and acutely; lateral pinnae ovate, petiolulate, usually trilobed; few to many
minute cilia on margins of some to all pinnae of cauline leaves. Inflorescences few to
many-flowered racemes, commonly 8 or more per raceme. Sepals green, ovate, c. 1.5
mm long; petals cuneate c. 3 mm long, white; stamens 6; style 0.5 to 1 mm long.
Siliquas sub-erect to erect, sometimes crossing over the rachis, 20-30 mm long, c. 1mm
wide on sub-erect pedicels 5-10 mm long. Seeds elliptic c. 1.2 mm long. (Fig. 5)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Cardamine microthrix occurs in eastern Victoria and NSW in higher rainfall areas
between the Great Dividing Range and the coast and has a disjunct distribution in South
Australia. In Victoria it is found in central to east Gippsland and in the far north-east of
the state. In New South Wales it appears to be more widespread and has a scattered
distribution from the far north to the far south of the state and its northerly distribution
suggests that it is likely to occur in at least the far south of Queensland. In South
Australia it is restricted to hilly country to the east and south of Adelaide with an older
record from Wellington near the mouth of the Murray. Its widespread distribution indi-
cates that it is not threatened. (Fig. 6)

166

Ian R. Thompson

Fig. 5. Cardamine microthrix. a - habit, b - leaf margin x2. a-b from Wilson (MEL).

Revision of Cardamine paiicijuga

167

HABITAT

Cardamine microthrix occurs along river, stream and lagoon banks and adjacent
low-lying areas.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet of the new species refers to the minute cilia present on pinna
margins. This character is not present in other native species of Cardamine.

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS ( specimens examined)

SOUTH AUSTRALIA: Kaiser Stuhl, 1848, F. Mueller (MEL); Clarendon, 1882, Tepper (597 (MEL); Manning
Reserve, 30 km S of Adelaide, 24 Mar. \91\,A.G. Spooner 1216 (AD).

victoria: East Gippsland, Ellery Forest Block, Ferntrec Creek near Sardine Creek road, 7 Jan. 1987, C.E.
Earl 3S8 (MEL); Colquhoun Regional Park, 29 Oct. 1984, A.C. Beaugletiole 79076 and J.R. Turner an 'dJ.G.
Eichler (MEL); Perry River Bridge area, 18 km ESE of Stratford P.O., 6 May 1985, A.C. Beauglehole 79632
and J.R. Turner (MEL); Cobberas National Park, 27 Oct. 1987, A.C. Beauglehole 89511 and L W Huehner
(MEL).

NEW SOUTH wales: Jembaicumbene Ck. 10 km SW of Braidwood, Alt. 660 m, 20 Oct. 1991, B.J. Lepsclii
598 (SYD, CANB, HO); Richmond River, 1876, Fawcett, (MEL); Tilba Tilba, 1881, Miss Mary Bate 113,
(MEL); Devlin’s Creek in Pennant Hills Park, Cheltenham, 2 Nov. 1982, R.G. Covenv 11328 (MEL); Nepean
River, Merangle, 13 Jan. 1968, E.J. McBarron 14839 (NSW); Below Marshall Falls, 1 mile (1.6 km) S of
Alstonville, North Coast, 25 Oct. 1961, C.F. Constable (NSW); Wollondilly River, S of Gibralter Rock 6 km
N of Marulan, 30 Oct. 1977, L.A.S. Johnson 8384 (NSW); Sandy Creek, Bulahdclah-Booral Rd., north coast
28 Sep. 1973, ,4.77. Rodcl2353 (NSW).

Cardamine moirensis I. Thomps., sp. nov.

Cardamini paucijugae Turcz. affinis, pinna terminali foliorum basalium truncata
ad cuneatam basi, foliis pinnis plus habentibus, pinnis lateralibus lobatis saepe, racemo
primario breviore et floribus paucioribus, stylo breviore plerumque differt.

TYPUS: Victoria, eastern end of reserve on Ulupna Island, 10 km NW of Strathmerton in
the Murray Valley, 35°51’, 145°26’, 20 Sep. 1978, T.B. Muir 5965 (holotypus- MEL’
ISOTYPUS: NSW, HO, AD, CANB).

168

Ian R. Thompson

Small annual herb, to 30 cm high, glabrous. Tap-root slender to stout. Stems slender,
erect to ascending, branching from the base and from cauline leaf axils, sometimes
reddish at maturity. Leaves thin; basal leaves long-petiolate, to 8 cm long, pinnate with
1-4 pinna pairs, forming a few-leaved non-persistent rosette; terminal pinna ovate,
trilobed, truncate to cuneate based, lateral pinnae entire or often with one or two lateral
teeth, elliptic to narrow obovate; cauline leaves usually 3 or more, similar to basal
leaves but shorter and with pinnae narrowing, becoming narrowly obovate to filiform
and entire towards the summit. Inflorescences few-flowered racemes, mostly 2-8 flow-
ered. Sepals green, ovate, 1.5-2 mm long; petals cuneate, 2-3.5 mm long, white; stamens
6, stigma sub-sessile or mature style to 1 mm long. Siliquas linear, 15-30 mm long, c.
1.0 mm wide, usually sub-erect on erecto-patent pedicels 5-15 mm long. Seeds elliptic,
1.0- 1.2 mm long. (Fig. 7)

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Cardamine moirensis has been recorded mostly from the Riverina region in northern
Victoria and southern NSW, between Rutherglen and Kerang, but also from an area in
far western Victoria adjacent to the Little Desert and from Hattah-Kulkyne National
Park (Murray Mallee). In NSW it has been recorded from Henty, Balranald and
Mathoura. Although not protected in any National Parks, it does not appear to be imme-
diately threatened assuming there are no major disturbances to the watercourses and
swamps where it occurs. (Fig. 8)

HABITAT

Cardamine moirensis forms sparse to dense colonies in low-lying areas adjacent to
streams and swamps. In northern Victoria it is commonly associated with Eucalyptus
camaldulensis and Rorippa laciniata.

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet of the new species refers to the County of Moira (also now the Shire
of Moira) which is the region in northern Victoria where it has most frequently been
collected and which is approximately at the centre of its distribution in the Riverina
region .

REPRESENTATIVE SPECIMENS (40 specimens examined)

NEW SOUTH WALES: Balranald, 1878, Dr Lucas (MEL); Dudal Comer Swamp, SW of Henty, 18 Oct. 1971,
B.G. Briggs 4390 and L.A.S. Johnson (NSW).

victoria: Black Swamp Wildlife Reserve, 25 Sep. 1985, A.C. Beauglehole 80917 (MEL); Two Mile
Swamp Wildlife Reserve, 6 Sep. 1985, A.C. Beauglehole 801 1 1 (MEL); Lake Moodemere Reserve, 25 Sep.
1985, A.C. Beauglehole 80957 (MEL); Loch Garry Wildlife Management Co-operative Area, 11 Sep. 1985,
A.C. Beauglehole 80317 (MEL); Yarriambiack Creek, County of Borung, 8 Oct. 1903, F.M. Reader (MEL);
Ulupna Island Reserve in Murray Valley, 3 miles NW of Strathmerton, 7 Oct. 1969, T.B. Muir 4706 (MEL);
Far North West, Hattah Lakes National Park lake area, 21 Oct 1969, G.W. Anderson (MEL); Roadside adja-
cent to Darlot Swamp, NE of Horsham, 2 Sep. 1 995, 1.R. Thompson 97 (MEL).

NOTES

The type specimen of C. paucijuga was collected from the Swan River in south-west
Western Australia in 1848 (Drummond 131). In 1867, Cardamine specimens differing
from the type were collected from Warren River and Porongonip also in the south-west
of the state). To my knowledge, there have been no further records of native Cardamine
from WA since 1867. The type specimen consists of two sheets showing ten separate
flowering and/or fruiting stems but information about basal leaf and root morphology is
lacking. Thus, it has proved difficult to assign eastern Australian Cardamine to this
species with certainty. Although specimens from Victoria, New South Wales and
Tasmania similar to the type of C. paucijuga (Fig. 9), but differing from the new species
described above, are for now still assigned to C. paucijuga^ they are somewhat polymor-
phic and some of the fornis may not be C. paucijuga sensu stricto. Indeed, unless more
information is forthcoming regarding the nature of the Western Australian entities it
may be wiser not to continue to include these remaining eastern Australian entities in C.

Revision of Cardcimine paueijuga

169

Fig. 7. Cardamine moirensis. a — habit. From Beauglehole 64513 (MEL).

paueijuga. These forms occur in southern Victoria, north-east Victoria and from several
localities in New South Wales and Tasmania (Fig 10).

Leaf morphology is the most important factor in distinguishing the four new
species. In particular, leaves of C. lineariloba and C. microihrix are distinctive. The
leafmess of stems, the tendency of cauline leaves to reduce in size and dissection up
the stem and the tendency of basal leaves to persist is also important, especially
in distinguishing C. papillata from the other species. The presence of papillae in C.
papillata and hairs on the stem and pinna margins in C. microthrix are also important
characters. C. paueijuga tends to have laxer stems and racemes than the other species
and pressed specimens of C. paueijuga often have more collapsed and shrivelled stems
suggesting that its stems are more tender.

Cardamine moirensis differs from other species by having leaves with more pairs
of lateral pinnae and pinnae that are more frequently lobed or dentate (except compared
to C. microthrix). Eastern Australian forms that remain in C. paueijuga have at least
some basal leaves with a terminal pinna that is cordate at the base, whereas the terminal
pinna of basal leaves of C. moirensis is never cordate. Cardamine lineariloba,

C. moirensis and C. papillata commonly have a very few-flowered (1-8) primary
raceme, whereas C. paueijuga and C. microthrix commonly have primary racemes
with 8 or more flowers. It is important to note that secondary racemes and racemes
of depauperate specimens tend to be fewer-flowered and so will not be as useful in

170

Ian R. Thompson

distinguishing these species. Tasmanian specimens identified as Cardamine sp. aff.
corymbosa, by Hewson (1982) are considered to be merely depauperate forms of C
papillata.

Cardamine lineariloha and C. moirensis appear to be true annuals whereas the
capacity of the other three species to persist into a second season is uncertain.
Cardamine papillata is able to persist into a second season when grown as a pot plant
and there is evidence from pressed specimens that C. paiicijuga can also persist.

Cardamine lineariloha and C. moirensis occur in lowland areas that are seasonally
flooded or wet and are largely geographically separated from the other small-flowered
native species. At several localities in the Wimmera (Western Victoria) they occur
together. Cardamine papillata, C. microthrix and C. paucijuga occur in more elevated
or near coastal sites.

Plants matching specimens from Taiwan, labelled as C. flexuosa, in MEL and AD
occur in most capital cities of Australia. This form resembles typical C. flexuosa but
is sufficiently different to warrant taxonomic recognition (see key below under C. aff.
flexuosa) At this point I have been unable to determine if this has already occurred. It is
mentioned here because it has often been misidentified as C. paucijuga in Australia. It
occurs predominantly (?only) in urban areas or areas close to human habitation and
therefore is presumed to be introduced. It has been recorded at numerous sites in the
inner Melbourne area especially in municipal garden beds and in plant nurseries. It has
also been recorded from nurseries in Canbeira, Perth and Sydney, and from near Coffs
Harbour. Cardamine hirsuta has also been misidentified as C. paucijuga. Presumably
this has occurred because the sparsely hairy leaves of C. hirsuta can appear glabrous
unless closely examined. The following key includes these and two other species in
Australia with similar flower sizes that could be confused with the native species
described above.

KEY TO CARD.4MINE PAUCIJUGA AND ALLIES

The leaf blade of simple leaves is referred to here as the terminal pinna. The term
pinna refers both to leaflets of pinnate leaves and to lobes of pinnatisect leaves when

Revision of Cardamine paiicijtigci

171

Fig. 9. Cardamine paueijuga. Habit,, from Drummond 131 (G).

they resemble leaflets (i.e. if they are narrower towards the base).

All of these species produce secondary inflorescences on flowering stems arising
from the base of the primary stem or from cauline leaf axils. These inflorescences
are often fewer flowered than the primary inflorescence. In this key, the number of
flowers per raceme refers to the primary inflorescence. Depauperate specimens will
have fewer flowers per raceme than is usual for that species.

1 Leaves and/or stems with simple hairs (sometimes requires close inspection),
1 : Leaves and stems glabrous or minutely papillose

.2

6

172

Ian R. Thompson

2 Upper surface of leaves glabrous (pinna margins may be sparsely hairy)

2: Upper surface of leaves with scattered hairs 4

3 Fmits sub-erect, inclined at less than 45° to rachis, terminal pinna of cauline leaves

3-9 lobed, basal leaves forming a rosette, seeds greater than 1 .0 mm long, stems
usually green and glabrous Cardamine microthrix

3: Fruits spreading to c. 60° to rachis, terminal pinna of cauline leaves entire

to trilobed, basal leaves few, seeds less than 1.0 mm long, base of stems often
reddish- purple and pubescent (weed of gardens and nurseries)
* Cardamine flexuosa

4 Leaves mostly with 0-2 pairs of lateral pinnae, flowering stems not held erect, often

not developed, pedicels commonly arising in whorls of 3 or 4, sometimes appearing
to arise singly trom the base, siliquas less than 1 mm wide, flowers often apetalous
or with less than 4 petals (weed of gardens, two collections, from Melbourne and
Hobart) * Cardamine corymbosa

4: Leaves with 1 -6 pairs of lateral pinnae, main flowering stem erect, pedicels alternat-
ing along rachis, fruits 1-1.5 mm wide, flowers usually 4 petalled 5

5 Stems glabrous to very sparsely hairy, stamens mostly 4, fruits glabrous or hairy,

sub-erect, inclined at less than 45° to rachis and usually clearly overtopping open
flowers in the same inflorescence, inflorescence rachis straight, cauline leaves
0-3. rarely more, leaf surface not obviously tuberculate *Cardaniine hirsuta

5: Stems sparsely to densely hairy, stamens mostly 6, siliquas glabrous and spreading,

inclined at greater than 45° to rachis and not or hardly overtopping open flowers of
the same inflorescence, inflorescence rachis often flexuose, cauline leaves 2 or
more, leaf surface often tuberculate due to tubercle-based hairs
Cardamine flexuosa

6 Seeds 0.8- 1.0 mm long, basal leaves few, usually shorter than cauline leaves and
not persisting, racemes many-flowered with siliquas erecto-patent to spreading.

Revision of Cardamine paucijiiga

173

inclined at 45-90° to rachis, flower buds often with several hairs (weed of gardens
and nurseries) *Cardamine aff. flexuosa

6: Seeds 1.0- 1.3 mm long or more, plants not combining the above features (native

species) 7

7 Basal and cauline leaves simple and linear to narrowly spathulate, or often pinnati-

sect with one to several short to long linear lobes projecting forwards from one or
both sides of an otherwise narrow linear lamina, annual plant with few-flowered
racemes Cardamine lineariloba

7: At least some leaves not as above 8

8 Terminal pinna of cauline leaves 3 or more lobed or toothed, lateral pinnae usually
also lobed or toothed, most pinnae with several minute cilia on margins
Cardamine microthrix

8. Terminal and lateral pinnae of cauline leaves entire or with one or two lateral
lobes or teeth, pinnae not minutely ciliate on margins (but may be papillate)
9

9 Cauline leaves 0-3, size and dissection reducing markedly with successive leaves,

lateral pinnae of basal and sometimes lower cauline leaves orbicular to elliptic,
entire, basal rosette of leaves commonly persisting Cardamine papillata

9: Cauline leaves usually 2 or more, all pinnate to deeply pinnatisect with overall leaf

shape and size changing only gradually with successive leaves, lateral pinnae of
basal and cauline leaves elliptic to narrow obovate, entire or with one or two lateral
teeth, basal leaves usually not persisting 10

10 Petals 2-3.5 mm long, white, terminal pinna of basal leaves usually distinctly
trilobed, the base truncate to cuneate, mature style usually less than 1 .0 mm long, at
least some pinnae of cauline leaves lobed, inflorescences mostly 2-8 flowered,
stems and pedicels of pressed specimens not markedly shrivelled
Cardamine moirensis

10: Petals 3-6 mm long, white or pink, terminal pinna of basal leaves not trilobed, the
base of at least some cordate, mature style up to 2.0 mm long, pinnae of cauline
leaves all or mostly entire, inflorescences often more than 8 flowered, stems and
pedicels of pressed specimens often collapsed and shrivelled Cardamine paucijuga

Acknowledgements

1 am grateful to Prof. Pauline Ladiges of the University of Melbourne and to Dr. Tim
Entwisle of MEL for their general assistance and to Neville Walsh of MEL for his assis-
tance particularly with the Latin diagnoses. 1 am also grateful to the Directors/ Curators
of AD, CANB, CBG, HO, K and NSW for the loan of specimens.

Reference

Hewson, H.J. (1982), Flora of Australia. Vol. 8. (Australian Government Publishing Service: Canberra.) pp.

Revised paper received 9 November 1995.

Muelleria9: 175 - 189 ( 1996 )

A review of the Erigeron pappocromus Labill. complex

Stephen J. Forbes' & Dennis I. Morris-

' Kings Park and Botanic Garden, West Perth, 6151, Western Australia, Australia.
^ Tasmanian Herbarium, G.P.O. Box 252C, Hobart, 7001, Tasmania, Australia.

ABSTRACT . , , • f

The Erigeron pappocromus Labill. complex occurs in alpine and sub-alpme areas ot
south-eastern Australia. A review of the complex indentifies nine species. The generic
status of the complex is discussed, and the complex assigned to Erigeron pending
further studies.

The first Erigeron collected in Australia was that found in 1792 at Recherche Bay in
Tasmania by J.J.H. Labillardiere during D’Entrecasteaux’s voyage. The specimens
provided the basis for the description of Erigeron pappocromus Cpappocroma’) Labill.,
Nov. Holl. PI. (1806). J.D. Hooker’s explorations of Tasmania m 1840 resulted in the
publication of four new species (viz. E. bellidioides, E. gunnii, E. stellatus, E. tasmani-
cus) based on Ronald Campbell Gunn’s collections (Hooker, J.D. 1847). Hooker identi-
fied all but one of the Tasmanian species recognised in this paper under (H)ApIopappus.
In 1856 in Flora Tasmaniae, Hooker reconsidered both the generic status and specific
ranks within the E. pappocromus group. Hooker reduced two of the species published in
1847 to varieties, and transferred all taxa to Erigeron, thereby accepting Labillardiere’ s
original generic assignment.

This later and more conservative treatment of the Erigeron pappocromus group
reflects the difficulty Hooker had in accommodating Australian mainland material sent
by Mueller. "[Erigeron gunnii] very much resembles E. Tasmanicimi, but is covered
everywhere with glandular pubescence, has much broader, often toothed leaves, with
shorter petioles and stouter scapes, with fewer and longer bracteoles. Mueller sends a
form of this species, with much stouter setae on the leaves than the Tasmanian speci-
mens, and considers it a variety of E. Pappochroma. It does not at all resemble that
species in general appearance, but without a very full series of specimens of subalpine^
plants, from many localities, it is not possible to ascertain the limits of their variation. ’
The glandular pubescence, although a feature of E. gunnii (Tas.), E. paludicola (Vic.,
N.S.W.) and E. nitidus (Vic., N.S.W.), is not a feature of E. bellidioides (Tas., Vic.,
N.S.W.) although these species appear to be closely related.

In 1867 Bentham reviewed all of the Australian material available but he was
unable to clearly distinguish the taxa recognised at that time. Bentham noted that, "The
... varieties, all alpine, appear at first sight to be distinct species, but it is difficult to
assign any precise limits to any of them.' Bentham treated the typical form as a new
variety (E. pappochroma var. biUardieri) and followed Hooker in treating E. bellid-
ioides and E. gunnii as a single variety (E. pappochroma var. gunnii). Of the mainland
forms, Bentham recognised only E. setosa as E. pappochroma var. setosa.

Erigeron is now accepted as being masculine (ICBN 62.1 ex.l), although earlier
authors treated the name as feminine or neuter. Paul Wilson (pers. comm.) argues that
Labillardiere’s spelling of the specific epithet for E. pappocroma was intentional, .and
further, that Labillardiere was was treating "pappocroma ’ as an adjective, and giving the
genus a feminine gender. Labillardiere frequently modified Latin or Greek words to
make names more euphonius. Paul Wilson cites the example of Calytrix rather than
Calythrix or Calycothrix. J.D. Hooker (1847) changed the spelling to "Pappochroma'
under the genus Aplopappus . Hooker apparently considered Labillardiere s spelling

175

176

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

incorrect. The capitalisation of the first letter of the specific name suggests Hooker’s
view that the specific name was derived from a generic name.

Generic status

The absence of native Erigeron species from New Zealand, and the clear distinction
between the E. pappocromus Group and the other Australian Erigeron species has
resulted m speculation with regard to generic status (Hooker 1856; Given 1973).
Whereas Given tentatively places Erigeron pappocromus in an assemblage including
Damnamenia. Celmisia. Pleurophyllum and the macrocephalus species of Olearia, the
analysis is a pieliminary one. In particular the relationship between Erigeron pappocro-
mus and South American and Northern Hemisphere Erigeron species requires examina-
tion. Examination of the alpine New Guinean Erigeron species recognised bv Van
Royen (1983) is also desirable.

Nesom (1994a) segregated Erigeron setosus and E. stellatus into the new genus
Lagenithrix Nesom, and the remainder of the Australian species in the E. pappocromus
complex into Lagenopappus (viz. L. pappocromus (Labill.) Nesom, L. gunnii (Hook.f ),
Nesom and L. tasmanicus (Hook.f) Nesom, and, by inference, Erigeron sp. A, Erigeron
sp. B and Erigeron sp. C sensu Costin et al. 1979).

Although the generic status of the E. pappocromus complex requires further exami-
nation, the analysis by Nesom is unhelpful.

Nesom suggests ‘[£". setosus and E. stellatus T] putative relationship to Erigeron is
hypothesised to he superficial and they are recognised here as a separate genus." (viz.
Lagenithrix), however, the analysis presented is unsatisfactory. The descriptions
indicate that Nesom has observed only a few specimens. Characters used by Nesom to
distinguish Lagenithrix include a tendency to produce 4-merous corollas in E. stellatus
(although Nesom illustrates the typical 5-merous form), the smooth achenes with
occasional viscid glands, and the short, thickened neck. The indistinct development of
these features is of doubtful significance in determining new genera within the E.
pappocromus complex. In particular, 4-merous corollas have not been observed in E.
stellatus, the achenes are not smooth in E. setosus, E. stellatus and E. trigonus, and the
‘thickened apical collar’ is rather illusory and certainly not comparable to that of
Lagenifera. Nesom notes additional characters ineluding the stoloniferous
habit, obovate to spathulate leaves, short white ligules, and sterile disk florets. The
stoloniferous habit reflects the more exposed alpine habitat of E. setosus and E.
stellatus, while the remaining characters are inconclusive. The fertility of the florets is
difficult to establish as mature achenes are rarely produced, possibly reflecting harsh
conditions at anthesis. Further study of the breeding systems is recommended.

In distinguishing Lagenopappus from Erigeron, Nesom suggests the importance of
"...achenial glands and other features that are more similar to Australian genera than
true Erigeron." Erigeron trigonus lacks achenial glands, and the ‘other features’ remain
obscure. The presence of a well-developed pappus and the broad-lanceolate or triangular
style-branches, abaxially papillose, of the disk florets suggest links with northern
hemisphere Erigeron and South American Haplopappiis.

Further, Nesom suggests dt is not clear that Lagenopappus and Lagenithrix are
even most closely related to each other, their similarities apparently plesiomorphic in
nature." Clearly Nesom has no field knowledge of the E. pappocromus complex. The
common alpine habitat, and clear gradation in the series of species from E. pappocro-
mus to E. tasmanicus and E. stellatus are strongly suggestive of a common origin. The
generic boundaries between Lagenopappus and Lagenithrix outlined by Nesom reflect
differences in habitat. The differences in dimensions suggested by Nesom are not
supported by the material examined for the preparation of this paper.

Nesom (1994b) later amends the nomenclature of Australian Erigeron species
referred to Lagenoappus). In this latter paper, Nesom accepts that the correct generic
name for the Erigeron pappocromus complex is Pappochroma Raf and considers
Pappochroma uniflora Raf. the correct name for the type of the genus. Paul Wilson
(pers. comm. ) argues that the correct name for the type of this genus is "Pappochroma

Review of the Erigeron pappocromus complex

177

pappoewmum' . Rafinesque treated the genus as feminine, and presumeably considered
that such a combination would result in the creation of a tautonym.. As the Greek
‘chroma’, is neuter, the name "Pappochwma pappocromunf is legitimate, and the name
Pappocroma imiflonim "uniflora’ is superfluous and accordingly, illegitimate.

Further studies of the intra and intergeneric relationships of species in the Erigeron
pappocromus complex are required to justify the erection of a new genus or genera.
Accordingly, this paper retains the use of Erigeron for the Erigeron pappocromus
complex.

KEY TO THE TAXA WITHIN ERIGERON PAPPOCROMUS LABILE. COMPLEX

1 Leaves glabrous or if hairy with few marginal setae 2

1: Leaves ± covered with multicellular or sessile glandular hairs, margins

± ciliate with multicellular hairs 5

2 Leaves spathulate 3

2; Leaves elliptic or linear, sessile or petiole gradually expanding into lamina 4

3 Leaves flat or occasionally folded, thin {herbaceous), textured; margins

crenulate; petiole gradually expanding into lamina (Tas.)

1 . Erigeron pappocromus

3: Leaves ± concave or folded, thick textured {corneus or crassus), margins ± entire,
petiole distinct to 25 mm long (Alpine Tas. & Baw Baws) .. 6. Erigeron tasmanicus

4 Leaves elliptic; rosettes typically forming distinct colonies, only occasionally in

alpine cushions; disk florets usually yellow (Alpine Tas.) 7 . Erigeron. stellatus

4: Leaves linear; rosettes solitary or forming colonies of a few plants in alpine
cushions; disk florets usually purple (Alpine Tas.) 8 . Erigeron trigonus

5 Leaves spathulate, entire, yellowish-green, 5-15 mm long, 2-4 mm wide, petiole

gradually expanding into lamina, setose with multicellular hairs 1-2.5 mm long;
scape to 2 cm long (Alpine N.S.W.) 9. Erigeron setosus

5; Leaves not setose, plants typically larger than above 6

6 Plants with spreading rhizomes in montane and alpine swamps; lower bracts on

scape typically similar to leaves, scape slender, involucre narrow to 1.5 cm wide at
maturity (Vic., N.S.W.) 2. Erigeron paludicola

6: Plants with short rhizomes forming colonies; lower bracts on scape distinct from
leaves, scape robust, involucre broad 1.2-2. 5 cm wide at maturity 7

7 Leaves more or less cuneiform, with distinct border of multicellular acicular and

glandular hairs 0. 1-0.3 mm long, apex praemorse or ovate-crenate, expanding
into lamina (Tas.) 5. Erigeron gunnii

7: Leaves spathulate, lamina hirsute or glutinous, commonly crenate or denticulate
towards apex 8

8 Leaves hirsute with multicellular hairs (Tas., Vic., N.S.W.). 4 . Erigeron bellidioides

8: Leaves glutinous from more or less sessile glandular hairs (Vic., N.S.W.)

3 . Erigeron nitidus

Species descriptions

1. Erigeron pappocromus LabilL, Nov. Holl. PL 2: 47 1. 193 ( 1 806) "pappocroma’

Pappochroma uniflonm Raf., FI. Telluriana 2: 48 (1837) "uniflora’ nom. illeg., based
on above; Erigeron phlogotrichus Spreng., Syst. Veg. 3; 520 (1826) nom. illeg.-,
(H)Aplopappus pappocromus (LabilL) Hook.f., Hooker’s London J. Bot. 6: 1 1 1 (1847)
"Pappochroma’-, Erigeron pappocromus var. hillardierei Benth., FI. Austral.

178

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

3:494(1867) "BillardierV comb, illeg. "pappochroma'\ Lagenopappus pappocromus
(Labill.) Nesom, Phytologia 76: 154 (1994).

type: ‘Habitat in capite van-Diemen’ (Recherche Bay, Tasmania), lectotype (here
chosen): [J.J.H. de] Labillardiere, Nova Hollandia; MEL 594988; isolectotypes:
Specimen collect. Billardiere. com. Prof. Lehmann; MEL 619735, FI (p.p.); see note
below.

Rhizomic herb forming ascending rosettes, typically distant although occasionally
condensed. Rhizomes spreading widely, yellowish-green to brown, glabrous, 1-1.5 mm
diameter. Leaves spathulate, entire, margins slightly thickened or revolute, crenulate.
Bat or partly folded, herbaceous, mid-vein apparent, secondary venation sometimes
apparent below, 0.7-2(^) cm long, 2-7(-ll) mm wide, lamina glabrous or with a few
marginal cilia, apex obtuse, base attenuate, petiole gradually expanding into lamina.
Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scape 1.5-15(-23) cm long, 0.5-1 mm diameter,
sparsely scabrid towards apex with tubercle-based, acicular hairs to 0. 1 mm and glandu-
lar hairs; bracts 2-6, distant, linear, 5 mm long towards apex. Involucre turbinate
1.1 -1.5 cm wide, 0.6- 1.0 cm high; bracts 26-32, imbricate, 2-3-seriate, linear, acute,
apex ciliate or laciniate, often purplish; margins hyaline; outer bracts sparsely scabrid on
basal margins with tubercle-based acicular hairs to 0.2 mm; inner bracts glabrous apart
from apical setae. Ray florets 34-46, 1-3 seriate; corolla white or purplish with limb 3-4
mm long, 0.5 mm wide; style 3.5 mm long, style-anns: subulate 0.5-1 mm long. Disc
florets 8-14; corolla narrowly funnelfonn, 5-lobed, 4.5 mm long; style 3.5 mm long;
style-arms narrowly elliptic 1 mm long. Pappus capillary, white, 3-5 mm long. Achenes
2.5 mm long, flattened, smooth with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Fig. la)

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Tasmania; alpine and sub-alpine from 750-1200 m altitude, occasional in herb, grass
and sedgelands, heaths, cushion plant communities, sphagnum bogs.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron pappocromus is restricted in habitat, and although uncommon appears to be
adequately reserved.

NOTE ON LECTOTYPE

A photograph of the sheet of type material in Herbarium Webbianurn (FI) indicates that
this may be a mixed collection including E. tasmanicus. The material of Florence is not
readily available for examination to resolve the ambiguity apparent from the photo-
graph. Accordingly a lectotype has been selected from two sheets representing part of
Labillardiere’s original collection and held at MEL. The first sheet is from Bonder’s
Herbarium, and the second sheet appears to be from Steetz’s Herbarium. The fonner
includes only fragmentary material, and accordingly the latter is selected as a lectotype.
The specimen is in accordance with Labillardiere’s description.

SELECTED SPECIMENS

TASMANIA: Jubilee Range, alt. 886 m, 13 Jan. 1985, A. Buchanan 5204 (HO); South West of Bam Bluff,
alt. 1020 m, 15 Jan. 1989. P. Collier 3933 (HO); West alpine Tasmania, 1894, IV.V. Fitzgerald (MEL); Mt
Field National Park, near eucalypt Lodge, alt. 1000 m, 24 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1289 (CANB, HO, MEL);
Hartz Mountains National Park, flat at head of Arve River on Hartz Road, alt. 800 m. 29 Jan. 1983, S.J.
Forbes 1312 p.p. (AD, CANB, HO, MEL, NSW); 7 km NE Mt LaPerouse on walking track near campsite at
head of tributary Many Falls Creek, alt. 760 m, 31 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1348 (CANB, HO, MEL); Mt
Wellington, s.d.. Gulliver (MEL); Mt Wellington, 1 Jan. 1 839. /t.C. Gunn / 749 (NSW); Summit of ‘Cracrotts
on Middle Mount, between Franklin & Gordon Rivers, Macquarie Harbour, 6 Feb. 1847,7. Milligan 875 (HO,
MEL); Cockle Creek, Rccherehe Bay, Feb. 1857, C. Stuart 1857 (MEL); Summit Mt Lepeyrouse, Mar. 1857.
C. Stuart 1855 (MEL).

2. Erigeron paludicola S.J. Forbes, sp. nov.

Erigeron pappocromus Labilf Form A; M. Gray in A.B. Costin et ai, Kosciusko Alpine
FI. 364 (1979). Erigeron sp. B; M.F. Porteners in G.J. Harden (ed.), El. New South
Wales 3: 177(1992).

Fig. 1. Leaf shapes and leaf margin details. Top, from left to right: a — Erigeron puppocromus x 1.5; b — E. tasmaniciis x 1.5; c — E. stellatiis x 4.4); Bottom, from left to
right: d. E. guimii x 1 .5; e — E bellidioides x 1 .5; f — E. setosus x 3.

180

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

Fig. 2. Erigeron pa/udicola S.J. Forbes. From left to right: a — Whole plant x 0.85; b — Leaf margin detail x
1 1 ; c — Whole plant x 1 .2.

Review of the Erigeron pappocromus complex

181

Erieerontem bellidioidem simulans sed characteribiis sequentibus differ!. Herba
rhizomatosa typice in turbario rosulas debiles ascendentes formans, inflorescentia 5-30
cm altitudine. Folia spathulata integra, flavo-virentia, 2-10 cm longitudme, 4-13 mm
latitudine, apice obtuso, base attenuata, petiolo leniter in laminam expansa sparsirn
setosa pilis multicellularibus 0.2-0.3 mm longitudme et pilis sparsis glanduliteris ad 0. 1
mm longitudine. Bracteae 2^, secus pedunculum distantes, foliis similibus vel basin
reductae, linearescentes, versus apicem 5—10 mm longitudine. Involucmm turbmatum
1 .0-1 .5 cm latitudine, 7-8 mm longitudine.

type: Bogong High Plains, head of Cope Creek, 36°55’15”S, 147°17’00”E, alt. 1700 m,
2 Jan. 1983, SJ. Forbes 1199; holotype; MEL; isotype: CANB.

Rhizomic herb forming weak, ascending rosettes. Rhizomes spreading widely, yellow-
ish-green to brown, glabrous, 1-1.5 mm diameter. Leaves spathulate, entire, yello^wish-
green, 2-10 cm long, 4-13 mm wide, apex obtuse, base attenuate; petiole gradually
expanding into lamina, sparsely setose with multicellular hairs 0.2-0. 3 mm long with
occasional glandular hairs to 0.1 mm. Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scape 5-30 cm
long, sparsely setose with multicellular hairs 0.2— 0.3 mm long with occasional glandular
hairs to 0.1 mm; bracts 2-A, distant along scape, similar to leaves or reduced at base,
becoming linear, 5-10 mm long towards apex. Involucre turbinate 1 .0-1.5 cm wide, 7-8
mm high- bracts 22-28, imbricate, 2-seriate, linear, acute, ciliate; margins hyaline;
apices often purplish; outer bracts sparsely setose with multicellular hairs 0.2-0.3 mm
long with occasional glandular hairs to 0.1 mm; inner bracts almost glabrous apart from
apical cilia. Rav florets 22-51, 1-3 seriate; corolla white or purplish with limb 3-4 mm
long, 0.5-1 mm wide; style 3.5 mm long; style-arms subulate, 0.4-0. 8 mm long. Disc
florets 6-11, hermaphroditic; corolla narrowly funnelform, 5-lobed, 4 mm long; style
3.5 mm long; style-arms narrowly elliptic 1 mm long. Pappus capillary, white, 4 rnm
long. Achenes 3 mm long, flattened, smooth with distinctly thickened marginal ribs.
(Fig. 2a-c)

etymology

The specific epithet is derived from Latin and refers to the swampy habitat ot the
species.

distribution AND HABITAT

New South Wales and Victoria; in alpine and sub-alpine swamps on mainland Australia.
CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron paludicola is restricted in habitat, but is widely distributed and adequately
reserved.

SELECTED SPECIMENS

NEW SOUTH WALES: Sources of the Hunter River, 1887, Miss Carter (MEL).

victoria: Mt Buller, near top of ‘Bourke Street’, alt. 1650 m, 29 Jan. 1958, T.B. Muir 354 (MEL), Mt
Baw Baw, approx 1.8 km NE of Ski Village along track to Mustering Flat, 19 Feb. 1980, P.S. Short 1115
(MEL); Mt Buffalo National Park, c. 2 km NE from the Horn, alt. 1480 m, 7 Feb. 1982, N.G. Walsh 645
(MEL)!

3 . Erigeron nitidus S.J. Forbes, sp. nov.

a Erigeronte bellidioide circumlitione vernicosa foliorum e glandibus sessilibus
exudante, pilis glandulosis et pilis acicularibus plerumque ad nervos pedunculos
margines folii restricts differ!.

type: Bogong High Plains, head of Cope Creek, 36°55’30”S, 147°17’00”E, alt. 1700 m,
1 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1194. holotype: MEL; isotypes: CANB, HO, NSW.

182

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

Fig. 3. Erigeron iiilidiis S.J. Forbes. Whole plant x 1.6.

Review of the Erigeron pappocromiis complex

183

Erigeron pappocroinus Labill. Form B, M. Gray in A.B. Costin et al., Kosciusko Alpine
FI. 364 (1979). Erigeron sp. A, M.F. Porteners in G.J. Flarden (ed.), FI. New South
Wales y 177 (1992).

Rhizomic herb, often forming colonies comprising rosettes 4-10 cm in diameter.
Rhizomes not spreading widely, reddish-brown, 2-A mm in diameter. Leaves spathulate,
15-50 mm long, 6-15(-20) mm wide, multicellular glandular and acicular hairs usually
restricted to margins and nerves; lamina surface viscid from sessile glands, commonly
crenate or denticulate towards apex, base attenuate; petiole gradually expanding into
lamina. Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scape 2.5-17 cm long, glutinous, sparsely
woolly with multicellular hairs; bracts 2-6, distant along scape, becoming linear,
5-10(-20) mm long towards apex of the scape. Involucre turbinate, 1.5-2. 5 cm wide, 1
cm high.; bracts 25-42, 2-3 seriate, linear, acute, margins hyaline, ciliate towards apex,
apices often purplish, viscid with sessile glandular hairs as well as occasional multicel-
lular hairs. Rav florets 43-100; corolla white or purplish with limb 4-5 mm long; style
4.5 mm long;’ style-arms subulate, 1 mm long. Disc florets 12-40, hermaphroditic,
corolla narrowly funnelform, 5-lobed, 5 mm long; style 3.5 mm long; style-arms
narrowly elliptic 1 mm long. Pappus capillary, white, 5-6 mm long. Achenes 7 mm
long, flattened, smooth with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Figure 3)

ETYMOLOGY

The specific epithet refers to the shiny, varnished leaf surface characterising this
species.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

New South Wales and Victoria; in alpine grasslands and heathlands of mainland
Australia where sympatric with E. bellidioides.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron nitidus is restricted in habitat, but is widely distributed and adequately
reserved.

SELECTED SPECIMENS

NEW SOUTH wales: Munyang Mountains, alt. 4-6,000 ft, Jan. 1855, F. Mueller (MEL); Mt Kosciusko,
Jan. \%1 A. F. Mueller (MEL).

victoria: Hotham Heights, 27 Mar. 1973, A.C. Beauglehole 41693 (MEL); Upper Mitta Mitta, F.
Mueller (MEL); Dargo High Plains, Lankeys Plain, 1 Jan. 1982, N.G. Walsh (MEL).

4. Erigeron bellidioides (Hook.f ) S.J.Forbes & D. I. Morris, comb. nov.

(H)Aplopappus bellidioides Hook.f, Hooker’s London J. Bot. 6: 112 (1847); Erigeron
gunnii var. bellidioides (Hook.f) Hook.f, Flora Tasman. 1: 183, t.46B (1856).

Erigeron pappocromiis var. gunnii auct. non (Hook.f) Benth.: M.F. Porteners in G.J.
Harden (ed.), FI. New South Wales 3: 176 (1992). Erigeron pappocromiis Labill. Form
C, M. Gray in A.B. Costin et al., Kosciusko Alpine FI. 364 (1979).

type: Middlesex Plains, Tas., Gunn 692\ holotype: K photograph seen, see note.

Rhizomic herb, often forming spreading colonies of rosettes 4-10 cm in diameter.
Rhizomes not spreading widely, reddish-brown, 2-4 mm in diameter, clothed in
scale-like deltoid bracts 1-2 mm long, narrowly triangular, 6-10 mm at base of rosette.
Leaves spathulate, 15-80 mm long, 5-15(-20) mm wide; lamina hirsute with multicellu-
lar hairs 0.1-1 mm long with a few sessile glands, commonly crenate or denticulate
towards apex, base attenuate, margins ciliate, petiole gradually expanding into lamina.
Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scape 1.5-30 cm long, at first woolly with multicellu-
lar hairs to 0.5 mm. Bracts 2-6, distant along scape, becoming linear, 5-10(-20) mm
long towards apex of scape. Involucre turbinate, 1.5-2. 5 cm wide, 1 cm high; bracts
25-45, 2-3 seriate, linear, acute, margins hyaline, ciliate towards apex, apices often

184

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

purplish, viscid with sessile glandular hairs as well as occasional multicellular hairs. Ray
florets 33-100; corolla white or purplish with limb 4-5 mm long; style 4.5 mm long,
style-arms subulate, 1 mm long. Disc florets 8-40, hennaphroditic; corolla narrowly
funnelfonrt, 5-lobed, 5 mm long; style 3.5 mm long; style-arms narrowly elliptic 1 mm
long. Pappus capillary, white, 5-6 mm long. Achenes 5.5-7 mm long, flattened, smooth
with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Fig. le)

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania; in alpine and sub-alpine grasslands and heath-
lands of mainland Australia where sympatric with Erigeron nitidiis, and extending from
alpine to montane grasslands and heathlands in Tasmania.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron bellidioides is restricted in habitat, but i's widely distributed and adequately
reserved.

NOTES

The two large specimens on the left of the holotype sheet are apparently from Middlesex
Plains - the remainder of the material on the sheet is from St Patricks River. The
holotype may include specimens illustrated by Fitch in Flora Tasmaniae t.46 B as E.
giinnii, although the details are apparently of the holotype of E. gimnii.

SELECTED SPECIMENS

NEW SOUTH wales: Barrington Tops National Park. Polblue Swamp, 12 Dec. 1989, A. Anderberg & A-L.
Anderberg 7189 (MEL, S); Mt Kosciusko, Jan. 1874, F. Mueller (MEL).

victoria: Bogong High Plains, Cope Creek, alt. 1700 m, S.J. Forbes 1192 (CANB, HO, MEL, NSW);
Moroka Valley, Mar. 1861, F. Mueller (MEL); Bogong High Plains, headwaters of Cope Creek, 1.75 km NE
Mt Cope, alt. 1690 m, 1 1 Dec. 1980, H. van Rees 222 (MEL); Mt Baw Baw, 1.8 km NE of Ski Village along
track to Mustering Flat, 19 Feb. 1980, P.S. Short 1118 (MEL); Mt Buffalo National Park, snow plain at base
of Mt McLeod, alt. 1400 m, 27 Jan. i982, P.S. Short 1390 (MEL); ‘Diggers Holes’, Nunniong Plateau., alt.
4,500 ft. 5 Jan. 1949,7V.vl. Wakefield 2635 (MEL).

TASMANIA: Iris River-Cradle Valley Road crossing, 10.5 km by road N Waldheim, 20 Jan. 1983, S.J.
Forbes 1240 (CANB. HO. MEL); Ben Lomond National Park, ski-slopes near summit Legges Tor, alt. 1550
m, 4 Feb. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1395 (CANB. HO. MEL, NSW); Diddleum Plains, St Patricks, 16 Nov. 1844,
R.C. Gunn 692 (NSW);

5. Erigeron gunnii (Flook.f.) F. Muell. ex Hook.f Flora Tasman. 1; 183 (1856).

(H)Aplopappus gunnii Flook.f., Hooker's. London J. Bot. 6: 1 1 1 (1847); Erigeron
pappocromus Labill. var. gunnii (Hook.f.) Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 494 (1867);
Lagenopappus gunnii (Hook.f.) Nesom, Phytologia 76: 154 (1994); Pappochroma
gunnii (Hook.f) Nesom, Phytologia 76:426 (1994).

type: Mount Wellington, Tasmania; 31 Jan. 1840, R. Gunn 115P, holotype: K
photograph seen; isotype: NSW 275467; possible isotype: MEL.

Rhizomic herb, often forming colonies, in rosettes 2-10 cm in diameter. Rhizomes not
spreading widely, reddish-brown, 2-A mm in diameter clothed in scale-like triangular or
broad triangular bracts, c. 2.5 mm long, triangular to narrow-triangular c. 3 mm long at
base of rosette. Leaves cuneiform, 10-50 mm long, 5-15 mm wide, lamina glabrous to
sparsely scaberulous from tubercle-based deciduous hairs, margins with distinct border
of multicellular acicular and glandular hairs 0. 1-0.3 mm long, or occasionally with
acicular hairs only, apex praemorse or ovate-crenate, commonly, base attenuate, petiole
usually distinct and gradually expanding into lamina. Inflorescence a simple capitulum.
Scape 3-15(-25) cm long, at first woolly with multicellular acicular and glandular hairs
to 0.3 mm. Bracts 2-6(-7), distant along scape, becoming linear, 5-10 mm long towards
apex. Involucre turbinate, 1. 2-2.0 cm wide, 0. 8-1.0 cm high. Bracts 25-30, 2-3 seriate,
linear, acute, margins ciliate towards apex, margins hyaline, apices often purplish,
sparsely setose with multicillular glandular hairs 0.2-0. 3 mm long, inner bracts almost

Review of the Erigeron pappocronms complex

185

glabrous apart from apical setae. Ray florets 35-95; corolla white or purplish with limb
4 mm long. SU’le 4.5 mm long, style-arms subulate, 1 mm long. Disc florets 12-29,
henuaphroditic, corolla narrowly funnelform, 5-lobed, 3.5 mm long. Style 3.5 mm long;
style-arms narrowly elliptic 1 mm long. Pappus capillary, white 5 mm long. Achenes c.
3.5 mm long, flattened, smooth with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Fig. Id)

SELECTED SPECIMENS

TASMANIA: 1 km ENE of Nevada Peak, alt. 1 190 m, 25 Feb. 1990, P. Collier 4551 (HO); Mt. Wellington
near pinnacle, 28 Jan, 1983, S.J. Forbes ISOS (MEL); Hartz Mountains National Park, near summit Hartz
Peak alt 1230 m, 1 Feb. 1983, SJ. Forbes 1354 (CANB, HO, MEL, NSW); Ben Lomond National Park, Ski
Village, alt. 1480 m, 3 Feb. 1983, SJ. Forbes 1387 (HO, MEL); Mt Wellington, Diamond Springs above
Ploughed Field, 27 Mar. 1878, J. Milligan 1132 (MEL); Snowdrift Tarn, Snowy Range, 22 Mar. 1983, A.
Moscalim (HO).

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Alpine and sub-alpine grasslands and heathlands of Tasmania.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron gitnnii is restricted in habitat, but is widely distributed and adequately
reserved.

NOTE

The holotype includes preliminary drawings for the details illustrated by Fitch in Flora
Tasmaniae t. 46B as E. gunnii. The mature plants illustrated are probably referable to E.
bellidioides .

6. Erigeron tasmanicus (Flook.f.) Flook.f, FI. Tasman. 1; 183, t.46A (the right-hand
figure) (1856).

(H)Aplopappus tasmanicus Hook.f., Hooker’s. London J. Bot. 6: 110 (1847); Erigeron
pappocronms Labill. var. oblongatus Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 494 (1867); Lagenopappus
tasmanicum (Hook.f.) Nesom, Phytologia 76: 154 (1994); Pappochroma tasmanica
(Hook.f.) Nesom, Phytologia 76; 426 (1994).

type: Mount Wellington, Tasmania, Gunn 1150', holotype: K, photograph seen; possi-
ble isotype: NSW 51741.

Rhizomic herb forming ascending rosettes, typically distant although occasionally
condensed. Rhizomes spreading widely, yellowish-green to brown, glabrous, 1-3 mm
diameter. Leaves spathulate, entire, margins thickened, sometimes distantly and minute-
ly serrulate, often more or less concave or folded, bright-green, with only mid-vein
apparent, (0.7-)l-5(-7) cm long, 3-9 mm wide, lamina at first sparsely and minutely
scabrid with tubercle based multicellular hairs to 0. 1 mm long and occasional sessile
glands, apex acute or occasionally emarginate, base attenuate; petiole gradually expand-
ing into lamina, occasionally with a few distant marginal cilia at the base. Inflorescence
a simple capitulum. Scapes 1.5-15 cm long, sparsely scabrid with tubercle-based
acicular hairs to 0.1 mm. Bracts 2-6, distant along scape, similar to leaves at base,
becoming linear, 5 mm long towards apex. Involucre turbinate 1.1-1. 5 cm wide, 0.6 cm
high; bracts 24^0, imbricate, 2-3-seriate, linear acute, apex minutely ciliate; margins
hyaline, apices often purplish, outer bracts sparsely scabrid with tubercle-based, acicular
hairs to 0.2 mm, inner bracts glabrous apart from apical cilia. Ray florets 23-55, 1-3
seriate; corolla white or purplish with limb 3 mm long, 0.5-0. 6 mm wide; style 3.5 mm
long; style-arms subulate 0.5-1 mm long. Disc florets 4-14, hermaphroditic; corolla
nan'owly funnelform, 5-lobed, 3.5 mm long; style 3.5 mm long; style-arms narrowly
elliptic, 1 mm long. Pappus capillary, white, 3 mm long. Achenes 2.5-3 mm long,
flattened, smooth with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Fig. lb)

186

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

SELECTED SPECIMENS

victoria: Baw Baw National Park, Currawong Flat, alt. 1465 m, 5 Dec. 1981, N.C. Walsh 682 (MEL);
Baw Baw Plateau, Currawong Flat, alt. 1470 m, 26 Feb. 1991, N.G. Walsh 3052 (MEL); Baw Baw Plateau,
Pauciflora Flat, alt. 1450 m, 26 Feb. 1991, 7V.G. Walsh 3056 (MEL).

TASMANIA: 1 km N of Resevoir Lake, alt. 750 m, D.G. Adams 30 (FIO); West alpine Tasmania, 1894,
W.V. Fitzgerald (MEL); Cradle Mountain National Park, Crater Peak lookout-Horse Trail intersection, 3 km
NNW summit Cradle Mountain, alt. 1240 m, 19 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1219 (CANB, HO, MEL); Hartz
Mountains National Park, flat at head of Arve River on Hartz Road, alt. 800 m. 29 Jan. 1983, SJ. Forbes 1312
p.p. (AD, CANB, HO, MEL, NSW); Mt Wellington near pinnacle, 28 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1307 (CANB,
HO, MEL); Hill One, 5 km NNE Mt La Perouse on walking track, alt. 980 m, 31 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1337
(MEL); Ben Lomond National Park, ski village, alt. 1480 m, 3 Feb. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1386 (CANB, HO,
MEL).

DISTRIBUI ION AND HABITAT

Tasmania and Victoria, on the Baw Baw Plateau; in alpine and sub-alpine grassland,
herbfield and heathland.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron tasmanicus is restricted in habitat, but is widely distributed and adequately
reserved in Tasmania. The species is rare in Victoria, and although adequately reserved,
appears vulnerable due to rarity

7. Erigeron stellatus (Hook.f.) W.M. Curtis, Students FI. Tas. Pt.2: 463 (1963).

(H)Aplopappus stellatus Hook.f., Hooker’s. London J. Bot. 6: 112 (1847); Erigeron
tasmanicus var. stellatus (Hook.f.) Hook.f, Flora Tasman. 1: 183, t.46A (the left-hand
figure)! 1856); Erigeron pappocromus var. stellatus Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 494 (1867);
Lagenithrix stellata (Hook.f) Nesom, Phytologia IF. 151 (1 994).

type: Mountains (? Hampshire Hills), Tas., Gunn 279\ holotype: K, photograph seen,
the top three specimens on the sheet are referable to this collection; possible isotype:
NSW 275470

Rhizomic herb forming stiff rosettes. Rhizomes spreading, yellowish-green to brown,
glabrous, scales triangular 2-3 mm long, 1-2.5 mm diameter. Leaves narrowly elliptic,
occasionally broadest above the middle or spathulate, entire, yellowish-green, 1-3 cm
long, 1.5-3. 5 mm wide, apex obtuse with a few apical setae 0.3-0. 8 mm long, base
attenuate, sessile or petiole gradually expanding into lamina, lower margin with a
few tubercle-based multicellular setae 0.3-0. 8 mm long, and occasional multicellular
glandular hairs to 0. 1 mm, otherwise glabrous. Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scapes
5-6.5 cm long, sparsely setose with multicellular hairs 0.2-0. 3 mm long with occasional
glandular hairs to 0.1 mm. Bracts 2-A, distant along scape, similar to leaves at base,
becoming linear, 5-10 mm long towards apex. Involucre turbinate 0.6-0.8(-l .5) cm
wide, 1.0-1. 6 cm high; bracts 22-28, imbricate, 2-seriate, linear, acute, apex ciliate
often purplish; margins hyaline; outer bracts sparsely setose with multicellular hairs
0.2-0. 3 mm long with occasional glandular hairs to 0.1 mm; inner bracts almost
glabrous apart from apical cilia. Ray florets 22-51, 1-3 seriate; corolla white or purplish
with limb 3-4(-5) mm long, 0.5-1. 5 mm wide; style 3.5 mm long; style-anus subulate,
0.4-0.8 mm long. Disc florets 6-ll(-28) hermaphroditic, corolla narrowly funnelform,
5-lobed, 4 mm long; style 3.5 mm long; style-arms narrowly elliptic 1 mm long. Pappus
capillary, white, 3^ mm long. Achenes 2.5-3 mm long, flattened, sparsely setose with
occasional sessile glandular hairs, and with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Figs Ic
& 4e)

SELECTED SPECIMENS

TASMANIA: Mt Counsel, western slopes, highest point, north, in view from Melaleuca Settlement, alt.
2,400 ft, 19 Mar. 1954, M. Davis 1465 (MEL); Cradle Mountain National Park, summit Cradle Mountain, alt.
1540 m, 19 Jan. 1983, S.J. Forbes 1220 (CANB, HO, MEL); SE slope of Great Dome, alt. 1200 m, 22 Jan.
1983, S.J. Forbes 1266 (MEL); Mt Sorcll, Macquarie Harbour, alt. 3000 ft, 25 Jun. 1847, J. Milligan 874
(MEL); Mt Gaffney, alt. 480 m, 14 Jan. 1986, A. Moscal 11678 (HO); Mt Field National Park, low saddle
between top of ski tow and Mt Mawson, alt. 1280 m, 14 Feb. 1989, N.G. Walsh 220 (MEL).

Review of the Erigeron pappocromus complex

187

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Tasmania; on exposed alpine areas of Tasmania although absent from Ben Lomond and
Mt Wellington, and occuring as low as 480 m in the south west.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron stellatus is restricted in habitat, but appears adequately reserved.

8. Erigeron trigonus S.J.Forbes & D.I. Morris, sp. nov.

a Erigeronte stellato foliis 5-14 mm longitudine, linearibus, ± trigonis, apiculatis, mar-
ginibus non nisi prope basin pectinato-ciliatis et flosculis disci proprie atropurpeis dif-
fer!.

type: Hamilton Crags, Ben Lomond, Tas., 41°43’S, 147°41’E, 1460 m, 5 Jan. 1992, A.
Moscal 22287; holotype: HO; isotype: MEL, NSW.

Rhizomic herb forming distant rosettes. Leaves 5-14 mm long, glabrous, coriaceous,
shining, linear, trigonous to almost terete, becoming channelled on drying, flattened
below; margins of the flattened part pectinate-ciliate, the cilia septate; apex purple,
narrowing ± abruptly to a stout colourless apiculum up to 0.5 mm long, this eroding
with age. Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scape 2.3-5 cm high, purple, glabrous or
with scattered glandular or eglandular septate hairs or a combination of both. Bracts
l-3(-7) linear, 2-4 mm long. Involucre turbinate, c. 10 mm wide; bracts 25-35, 2-3
seriate, 3-5.5 mm long, purple, margins glabrous or minutely ciliate. Ray florets 20-30;
corolla white or tipped purple or pink, limb c. 4.5 mm long, tube with a few weak hairs
at throat; style c. 2 mm long; style-anus 1 mm long. Disc florets 5-12, purple, corolla,
narrow-funnelform, 5-lobed, 5 mm long, with a few weak hairs at the midpoint. Pappus
capillary, white, 3.5-4 mm long. Achenes 2-2.5 mm long, flattened, sparsely hairy with
a denser tuft of hairs at the base. Mature achenes not seen. (Fig. 4a-d)

etymology

The specific epithet refers to the characteristically three-sided leaves of Erigeron
trigonus.

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Tasmania; in alpine heath and feldmark, often amongst cushion plants.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron trigonus is restricted in habitat and rare. Although adequately reserved the
species appears vulnerable due to rarity.

SELECTED SPECIMENS

TASMANIA: Ncwdegate Slopes, 4 May 1930, H.F. Comber 2635 (HO); Eliza Plateau, 22 Jan. 1983, 1200
m, S.J. Forbes 1263 (MEL); Eliza Plateau, 22 Jan. 1983, 1200 m, S.J. Forbes 1264 (MEL); Mt Field National
Park, low saddle between top of ski tow and Mt Mawson, alt. 1280 m, 14 Jan. 1989, N.G. Walsh 22HI (MEL).

9 . Erigeron setosus (Benth.) M. Gray, Contr. Herb. Aust. 6: 1 (1974).

Erigeron pappocromus var. setosus Benth., FI. Austral. 3: 494 (1867); Lagenithrix
setosa (Benth.) Nesom, Phytologia 76: 150(1 994).

type: ‘In vertice montis Kosciusko, locis glareosis, 6000-6500 ft radius albus vel
rubellus, 1 Jan. 1855, F. Mueller. Munyang Mountains, Victoria, F. Mueller 6000-6500
ft’. LECTOTYPE (fide M. Gray, 1974): MEL 1012236.

Rhizomic herb producing crowded rosettes. Rhizomes spreading, yellowish-green to
brown, glabrous, scales triangular, 2-3 mm long, 1-2.5 mm diameter. Leaves spathulate.

188

Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris

Review of the Erigeron pappocromus complex

189

entire, yellowish-green, 5-15 mm long, 2-4 mm wide, apex obtuse, base attenuate,
petiole gradually expanding into lamina, setose with multicellular hairs 1-2.5 mm
long. Inflorescence a simple capitulum. Scapes to 2 cm long, sparsely setose with multi-
cellular hairs 1-2.5 mm long with occasional glandular hairs to 0.1 mm. Bracts
linear. Involucre turbinate 0.6-0. 8 cm wide, 1.0-1. 6 cm high; bracts 19-32, imbricate,
2-seriate, linear, acute, apex ciliate, often purplish; margins hyaline; outer bracts sparse-
ly setose with multicellular hairs 0.2-0. 3 mm long with occasional glandular hairs to 0.1
mm; inner bracts almost glabrous apart from apical setae. Ray florets 32-38, 1-3 seriate;
corolla white or purplish with limb 2.5-3 mm long, 0.5 mm wide; style 3 mm long;
style-arms subulate 0.4-1 mm long. Disc florets 6-9, hennaphroditic; corolla narrowly
funnelfonn, 5-lobed, 3 mm long; style 3.5 mm long; style-arms narrowly elliptic 1 mm
long. Pappus capillary, white, 4 mm long. Achenes 3 mm long, flattened, smooth or
sparsely glandular, with distinctly thickened marginal ribs. (Figure 1 f)

DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT

Kosciusko Plateau, New South Wales; in alpine herbfields.

CONSERVATION STATUS

Erigeron setosiis is restricted in habitat, but appears adequately reserved.

SELECTED SPECIMENS

NEW SOUTH WALES: I km ENE Rams Head, W of Mt Kosciusko foot track from summit of Thredbo
Village main chairlift, alt. 2100 m, 12 Feb. 1985, SJ. Forbes 2816 (MEL); Etheridge Range, 1 km SSW of
Seamans Hut, alt. 2012 m, 17 Jan. 1972, J. Thompson 1344 (MEL, NSW); Hcdley Tarn below Blue Lake,
Kosciusko Plateau, 5 Feb. 1946, J.H. Willis (MEL).

Acknowledgements

Thanks to Jim Ross for encouragement and support, and to Phillip Short and Neville
Walsh for helpful discussions and assistance with field collecting. Thanks to Paul
Wilson for guidance through helpful and critical comments on the manuscript. Dennis
Morris has prepared the illustrations in this paper.

References

Bentham, G. (1867). Flora Australiensis. Vol. 3. (Lovell Reeve & Co.: London.)

Given, D.R. (1973). Damnamenia gen. nov. A new subantarctic genus allied to Celmisia Cass. (Astereae-
Compositae). New Zealand Journal of Botany 1 1: 785-96.

Hooker, J.D. (1847). Florae Tasmaniae Spicilcgium; or contributions towards a flora of Van Diemens’s Land.

Hooker's London, Journal oj Botany 6: 110-113.

Hooker, J.D. (1856). Flora Tasmaniae. (Reeve & Co.: London.)

Labillardiere, J.H.H.de (1 804-1807). Novae Hollandiae Plantarum Specimen. 2 vols. (Huzard: Paris.)
Nesom,^aL.^n^994a). Taxonomic dispersal of Australian Erigeron (Asteraceae: Astereae). Phytologia. 76(2):

Nesom, G.L. (1994b) Pappochroma Rafm is the correct generic name for Erigeron pappochroma Labill
Phytologia 76(5): 426.

Porteners, M.F. (1992). In G.W. Harden (ed.) Flora of New South Wales. Vol. 3. (New South Wales
University Press: Kensington.)

Van Royen, P. (1983) The Alpine flora oj New Guinea. Vol. 4. Taxonomic part Casuarinaceae to Asteraceae
(Cramer: Baduz.)

Revised paper received 27 November 1 995.

Miielleria9: 191 - 193 ( 1996 )

A new species of Gynatrix (Willd.) Alef. (Malvaceae) from eastern
Victoria

N.G. Walsh

National Herbarium of Victoria, Royal Botanic Gardens, Birdwood Avenue, South
Yarra, 3141, Victoria, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Gvnatrix macrophylla is described as a new species distinguished from G. pulchella by
its larger, more densely indumented leaves, and larger flowers and fruit. Its distribution,
habitat and conservation status are outlined.

Introduction

In preparing an account of the Malvaceae to be published in Volume 3 of the Flora of
Victoria, it became apparent that there are 2 distinct species of Gynatrix in Victoria. The
opportunity is here taken to name a previously undescribed taxon prior to the Flora’s
publication later this year.

Taxonomy

Gynatrix macrophylla N.G. Walsh sp. nov.

a Gynatrix pulchella (Willd.) Alef. folds majoribus, cordatis magis, pagina abaxiali
steliato-tomentosa dense et aequaliter, floribus majoribus (calyce 4. 5-6. 5 mm longo,
petalis 6-10 mm longis in floribus masculis; calyce 3. 5-4. 5 mm longo, petalis 2-3 mm
longis in floribus femineis), fructibus majoribus (mericapiis 5-6 mm longis, seminibus
3-3.5 mm longis) distinguitur.

TYPUs: Victoria, North-east, Howqua River, 5 km south-east from Mt Timbertop, 28
May \9S7, N.G. Walsh 1845 (holotypus: MEL; isotypi: CANB, PERTH).

Dioecious shrub or small tree to c. 5 m high. Leaves ovate to broad-ovate, (4-)6-12(-20)
cm long, (2.5-)4-9(-14) cm wide, deeply cordate at base, and often with the basal lobes
overlapped; margins crenate or crenate-serrate; grey or whitish beneath, with the lower
lamina obscured by a dense, even layer of stellate trichomes; upper lamina green to
grey-green, glabrescent or with sparse to dense stellate trichomes persisting. Male
flowers', calyx cupular, 4. 5-6. 5 mm long, densely stellate-pubescent, divided to Just
above midway, lobes broadly acute; petals cream, narrowly obovate, 6-10 mm long,
minutely stellate-pubescent toward the apex on the abaxial surface; anthers minutely
stellate-pubescent. Female flowers', calyx as for males but smaller, 3. 5-4. 5 mm long
(enlarging to c. 5 mm long in fruit); petals cream, shortly united with ovary near base,
the free part c. oblong, stellate-pubescent near apex, exceeding calyx by c. 1-2 mm;
style-branches stellate-pubescent along abaxial surface; ovary densely stellate-
pubescent. Mature mericarps 5-6 mm long, c. 3 mm wide; seeds smooth, dark brown,
3-3.5 mm long, 1.5-2 mm diami., obliquely ovoid with a minutely incurved, uncinate tip,
more or less trigonous in section. (Fig. 1)

PHENOLOGY

Flowering specimens have been collected in February, May, October, November and
December. The flowers of one male specimen were described as ‘chocolate-scented’.
Fruiting specimens have been collected in December and February.

191

192

N.G. Walsh

houdtype

Drt«?wo«rit ■*.

rayA oWNV e^alei'/N V

tXUTmintrfti i<Wiv

MELI 557!':2

national herbarium of victoria fMEL)

MfLBoslwr. «i*snt4UA

Cyaatfix putchella IWliXd,) Alef.

Fwnilv^ Kaivaceafr

Lot. VJCTORJa— North-east. South bank of Howqua
River, e. 400 » downstream frca Sheepyard
flat (c-laarcrd ar«al. S.O ks south-east
from Nt Timbertop.
tjH, 146*l9'40*Kr«od

CfM.: N.G. Walsh 1845 ,

28 May 1987.

Note* flowars cream, chocolate-scented.

Male plant and only specimen observed in
c. 2 km betwoer. Sheepyard 6 frys.

I

Assoc, app. include t’ornadems ast^ra ,
frotsarla spinosa. Acacia melanoxvlon.
Correa lavtenciana .

D„pl ?ESTH. C»G.

NATIONAI. OF

VICTORH <MLI). Ai:SIRAH\

Fig. 1. The holotype of Gynatrix macrophylla.

New species of Gynatrix

193

ETYMOLOGY

The epithet (from Greek, meaning large-leaved) refers to the leaves that are typically
larger than those of G. pulchella, the only other member of the genus.

DISTRIBUTION AND CONSERVATION STATUS

Apparently endemic in Victoria, where known from the catchments of the Howqua,
Macalister, Avon, Mitchell, Tambo and Buchan Rivers in the Eastern Highlands, East
Gippsland and Snowfields Natural Regions (Conn, 1993). From herbarium labels, popu-
lations of G. macrophylla are typically quite small (one plant to occasional in communi-
ty). Although moderately widespread in eastern Victoria with a range exceeding 150
km, it appears to be poorly represented in conservation reserves, and is probably best
regarded as rare, with Risk Code 3rci (Briggs & Leigh, 1989).

HABITAT

Apparently confined to riparian sites at altitudes between c. 100 and c. 1000 m, with
associated species including Eucalyptus viminalis, E. radiata. Acacia dealbata, A.
melanoxylon, Pomaderris aspera, Brachychiton populneum. Bursaria spinosa and
Hyinenanthera dentata.

NOTES

Gynatrix macrophylla differs from G. pulchella in having larger, relatively broader
leaves (those of G. pulchella being 4-10(-15) cm long, 1.5-3(-6) cm wide), that are
densely and evenly stellate-pubescent beneath and have more pronouncedly cordate
bases and less attenuated apices. The flowers are up to twice as large in all features as
those of G. pulchella, and the mature mericarps and seeds larger (those of G. pulchella
being c. 3.5 and 2.5 mm long respectively). The seeds of G. macrophylla are also
relatively more slender and have a small uncinate process at the apex.

While G. pulchella includes forms that vary from having leaves virtually glabrous to
distinctly stellate-pubescent, the abaxial indumentum is (from specimens observed to
date) neither as dense or as even as that of G. macrophylla. Distinctly pubescent fonns
of G. pulchella equate to Plagianthus pulchellus Willd. var. tomentosa Rodway (type
from Tasmania, but extending through the range of the species), but this variety has not
been maintained in contemporary works and no combination for it exists in Gynatrix.

SPECIMENS EXAMINED

victoria: East Gippsland, Melick Munjie Creek, 15 Dec. 1970, A.C. Beaugtehole 35554 (MEL):
Snowfields/Eastem Highlands, Carey River, 1 1 Nov. 1992, E.A. Chesterfield 347 ! (MEL); Eastern Highlands,
Barkly River, 11 Nov. 1992, E.A. Chesterfield 34 73 (MEL); Gippsland, Murrindal River at the Pyramids, 1
Dec. 1990, D.E. Albrecht 4618 (MEL); Central Gippsland, Freestone Creek, upstream of Culloden, 27 April
1992, D.E. Albrecht 4966 (MEL); Beside the Wongungurra River, c. 7 km due east from Mt Murray, 19 Feb.
1985, K.A. Menkhorst s.n. (MEL, PERTH); Mitchell River, c. 20 miles (32 km) north-west of Bairnsdale, 18
July 1971, D. Quinton (MEL); Beside Tambo River, c. 1 km upstream from Collins Road Bridge, 18 km NNE
from Bruthen, 12 Oct. 1988, N.G. Walsh 2157 (BRl, HO, MEL); Buchan River, c. 0.5 km upstream of the
township, 26 Jan. 1987, D.E. Albrecht 3036 (MEL); Collector and locality unknown (MEL).

References

Briggs, J.D. & Leigh, J.H. ( 1989) Rare or Threatened .Australian Plants. Special Publication 14. (Australian
National Parks and Wildlife Service, Canberra.)

Conn, B.J. (1993) Natural Regions and Vegetation of Victoria. In D.B. Foreman and N.G. Walsh (cds) Flora
of Victoria. Vol. 1. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.) pp. 79-158.

Paper received 17 November 1995.

Muelleria 9 : 1 95- 1 96 ( 1 996 )

Nomenclatural changes in Cullen (Fabaceae: Psoraleeae)

James W. Grimes

Harding Laboratory, New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, NY 10458, United States of
America.

ABSTRACT

Several new combinations in Cullen Medik. (Fabaceae: Psoraleeae) are made and six
names in Psoralea are lectotypified.

Introduction

The following new combinations are made in advance of a revision of the genus Cullen
Medik., in order to make the names available for the forthcoming Volume 3 of the Flora
of Victoria. The opportunity is also taken to lectotypify six names in Psoralea.

New combinations and lectotypifications

Cullen australasicum (Schltdl.) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea australasica Schltdl., Linnaea 20: 668, No. 197 [misprint for 196, see Lee,
1980] (1847). type: ‘[South Australia], Ueberall bei Bethanien [Bethany, ca. 5 km NE
of Adelaide], meist am Wasser.’ holotype: H.H. Behr 196 (HAL 42501)- jsotype-
MEL 89796.

Cullen cinereum (Lindl.) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea cinerea Lindl. in T. Mitch., Three Expeci. Australia. 2: 66 (1838). type:
Provenance unknown, holotype: CGE (unavailable); isotype: [labelled May the 6, No.
122, Mitchell Journey, 1836], MEL 1563694.

Cullen discolor (Domin) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea discolor Domin, Bibliothec. Bot. 20(89^): 738 (1926). type: ‘Sudwest-
Australien: Drummond 1850 No. 96, 1849, No. 158.’ lectotype (here designated):
Drummond 96 (K); jsolectotypes: K, NSW, OXF, W.

Cullen mkrocephalum (Rchb. ex Kunze) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea microcephala Rchb. ex Kunze, Linnaea 20: 72 (1847). type: ‘...benevole
communicata nobiscum est ab hort academ. Dresdensi.’ lectotype (here designated):
[labelled ‘Psoralea microcephala Oct 1844’] W. Psoralea adscendens F.Muell., Trans.
Philos. Soc. Victoria 1: 40 (1855). type: ‘On the grassy moist banks of the’ Snowy
River, Gibbo River, Mitta Mitta, Owens River, and along torrents of the Australian
Alps. LECTOTYPE (here designated): ‘Mitta Mitta’ (MEL 694217); isolectotypes: K,
MEL 694233, MELU 14423. Psoralea gunnii Hook.f., Flora Tasman. 1: 99 (1856)'
type; ‘Hab. Woolnorth, Gunn.’ lectotype (here designated); Gunn 1061 (K)- isolec-
totype: K, NSW 30605.

Cullen pallidum (N.T.Burb.) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea pallida N.T.Burb., Telopea 2: 127 (1980). type; ‘App. 22 miles south of Alice
Springs, on railway line road, N.T. Burbidge & M. Gray 4379.’ holotype- CANB-
isotype: NSW.

Cullen parvum (F.Muell.) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea parva F.Muell., Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1: 40 (1855). type: ‘In dry

195

196

James W. Grimes

pastures on the Thompson and Latrobe Rivers, and in South Australia, on the Torrens
and Gawler Rivers, on the Barossa Ranges.’ lectotype (here designated): ‘Thompson
River’, Apr. 1854, F. Mueller {MEL 1563777); isolectotype: K.

Cullen patens (Lindl.) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea patens Lindl. in T. Mitch., Three Exped. Australia. 2: 8 (1838). type; prove-
nance unknown, holotype: CGE (unavailable, but seen by Lee, 1980); isotype: W.
Psoralea eriantha Benth., ex T. Mitch., J. Exped. Prop. Australia. 131 (1848). TYPE:
‘Sub-tropical New Elolland, Ap. 16-46, T.L. Mitchell 90.’ lectotype: (here designated)
K; isolectotype: NSW.

Cullen tenax (Lindl.) J.W. Grimes, comb. nov.

Psoralea tenax Lindl. in T. Mitch., Three Exped. Australia. 2: 9 (1838). type:
Provenance not recorded, but probably along the banks of the Darling, holotype: CGE
(not available).

Reference

Lee, A. ( 1980). The Piora/eopotow complex. Telopeal : 129-141.

Paper received 6 December, 1995

Muellei-ia9: 197-228 (1996)

Chromosome number determinations in the Australian Astereae
(Asteraceae)

K. Watanabe'. P.S. Short', T. Deiula', Y. Siizukb, M. Ito\ T. Yahara^ & K. Kostige'

^Department of Biology, Faculty of Science, Kobe University, Kobe 657, Japan.
'National Herbarium of Victoria, Birdwood Avenue, South Yarra, 3141, Victoria,
Australia.

^Department of Biology, Faculty of Science, Chiba University, Chiba, Japan.

Department of Biology, Faculty of Science, Kyushu University, Hukuoka 812, Japan.

ABSTRACT

Chromosome number determinations from 200 populations attributed to 99 species
or infraspecific taxa of ten genera are presented in Table I. They inelude the first
substantiated reports for Brachyscome glandulosa (2n = 36), B. muelleroides (n = 3),
B. obovata (2n = 18), B. petrophila (2n = 18), B. tatei (n = 9), ErodiophyUum elderi (2n
= 16), Miniiria gardneri {n = 9), M. integerrima (n = 18), Olearia astrotricha (n = 9),
O. ferresii (n = 9), O. imbricata (n = 9), O. plucheacea (n = 9), O. raimilosa (n = 9),
O. xerophila (n = 9), Vittadinia cuneata (n = 9), V. gracilis (n = 9), V. muelleri (« = 9),
V. pterochaeta (n = 9), V. piistulata (n = 9) and V. sulcata (n = 9). Polyploidy is reported
for the first time in Brachyscome dissectifolia, B. cardiocarpa, Calotis anthemoides and
in the Olearia phlogopappa complex. Remaining counts support previously reported
determinations and add to the knowledge of chromosome number distribution within
taxa. Some taxonomic problems are briefly discussed. It is concluded that chromosomal
variation in Australian Astereae is similar to that found in North America.

Introduction

In a recent census of Australian vascular plants 83 1 native species of Asteraceae were
listed under c. 130 genera (Hnatiuk 1990). About 330 formally recognised species
belong to the tribe Astereae, and most are currently distributed amongst four genera, i.e.
Olearia Moench (c. 130), Brachyscome Cass. (c. 70), Vittadinia A. Rich. (29) and
Calotis R.Br. (c. 28). The remaining genera here considered to belong to the Astereae
are Achnophora F.Muell. (1), Camptacra N.T.Burb (2), Celmisia Cass. (c. 10),
Centipeda Lour. (5), Ceratogyne Turcz. (1), Dichrocephala DC. (1), Dichromochlamys
Dunlop (1), Dimorphocoma F.Muell. & Tate (1), Elachanthus F.Muell. (2), Erigeron L.
(c. 10), ErodiophyUum F.Muell. (2), Eurybiopsis DC. (1), Isoetopsis Turcz. (1),
Ixiochlamys F.Muell. & Sond. (4), Kippistia F.Muell. (1), Minuria DC. (10 or 11),
Lagenifera Cass. (4) and Solenogyne Cass. (3).

Chromosome number surveys have been primarily restricted to just two genera, i.e.
Brachyscome (Smith-White et al. 1970, Carter 1978, Watanabe & Short 1992) and
Calotis (Stace 1978, 1982). In this paper we report further chromosome number
determinations for both of these genera as well as new determinations for native species
of ErodiophyUum, Lagenifera, Minuria, Olearia, Solenogyne and Vittadinia, briefly
examine previous reports, and comment on some associated taxonomic problems.

A number of species of Astereae belonging to Aster L., Beilis L., Conyza Less.,
Erigeron L. and Solidago L. are naturalised in Australia but with the exception of
Erigeron karvinskianus they have not been examined.

Materials and methods

Chromosome counts were obtained from either floral bud material fixed in the field, or
from root tips obtained from seedlings grown from fruit of known provenance. For the

197

198

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et at.

Fig. I. Mitotic and meiotic chromosomes in Australian Astereae. A - Brachyscome muellerioides n = 311
{Watanabe 3). B - B. readeri n = 511 {Watanabe 4). C - B. sp. aff. nova-angtica n = 511 {Short 3969).
D - fi. sp. aff. angustifolia 2n= 10 {Short 3979). E - B. tatei n = 9II {Watanabe 184). F - Minuria lep-
tophvlla 2(7 = 18 {Watanabe 194). G - Vittadinia gracilis n = 911 {Short 3925). H - Erodiophvllum
elderi 2n=\6 {Short 3779). Scale: 10 pm.

Chromosome number detenninations in Astereae

199

cultivation of specimens and the preparation of material for chromosome number deter-
minations the procedures of Smith- White et al. (1970) and Watanabe et al. (1975) were
followed. Herbarium vouchers have been gathered for all but two species (Brachyscome
petrophila and Olearia mmulosa) and a complete set of vouchers is housed at MEL. An
incomplete set will be deposited in TI and voucher specimens of non-Victorian popula-
tions will be deposited in the major government herbarium (AD, BRI, NSW, PERTH) of
the State from which collections were gathered.

Results

Chromosome number detenninations from 200 populations attributed to 99 species or
infraspecific taxa of ten genera are presented in Table 1. They include the first substanti-
ated reports for Brachyscome glanditlosa (2n = 36), B. muelleroides (n = 3), B. obovata
(2n = 18), B. petrophila (2n = 18), B. tatei (n = 9), ErodiophyUiim elderi (2n = 16),
Mimiria gardneri (n = 9), M. integerrima (n = 18), Olearia astrotriclia (n = 9),
O. ferresii (n = 9), O. imbricata (n = 9), O. plucheacea (n = 9), O. ramulosa (n = 9),
O. xerophila [n - 9), Vittadinia cuneata (n = 9), V. gracilis (?i = 9), V. nnielleri (n = 9),
V. pterochaeta (n = 9), V. pustulata (n = 9) and V. sulcata (n = 9). Some reports for
apparently distinct, but undescribed, taxa such as Calotis aff lappulacea (« = 8) and B.
temdscapa aff var. tenuiscapa (2u = 28) are also presented, as are new detenninations
for some previously examined taxa, e.g. Brachyscome microcarpa (n = 6, 2n = 12; cf n
= 10 reported by Smith- White et al. 1970). Polyploidy is reported for the first time in
Brachyscome dissectifolia, B. cardiocarpa, Calotis anthemoides and in the Olearia
phlogopappa complex and B chromosomes are newly reported in Brachyscome
ciliocarpa, B. diversifolia, B. iberidifolia, B. trachycarpa, Mimiria leptophylla and
Olearia pimelioides.

The meiotic or mitotic chromosomes of some species are displayed in Fig. 1 .

The new data is incorporated (by reference to Watanabe et al. 1996) in Table 11
which summarises known chromosome numbers for taxa of Australian Astereae.

Discussion

As previously pointed out (Watanabe & Short 1992) there are many taxonomic
problems within Brachyscome. There are unresolved species complexes, e.g. B.
nova-anglica and its allies and the B. ciliaris complex, and generic delimitation is also a
problem. The same is true for many of the other genera and the placement of Isoetopsis
in the Astereae is debatable and perhaps not tenable (Bremer & Anderberg in Bremer
1987, Bruhl & Quinn 1990, Bremer & Humphries 1993). Although there are taxonomic
problems it is none the less possible to generally review the state of knowledge of chro-
mosome numbers in the Australian Astereae. An absence of chromosome numbers for
some genera, i.e. Achnophora, Camptacra, Dichrocephala, Dichromochlamys,
Dimorphocoma and Elachanthus is unfortunate, although between them these genera
contain only 12 Australian species.

TABLE 1. NEW CHROMOSOME NUMBER DETERMINATIONS FOR AUSTRALIAN ASTEREAE

Species & locality

n 2n

Brachyscome Cass.

B. aculeata (Labill.) Less.

5.5 km SE of Sawyers Hill, 911

Kosciusko N.P., N.S.W.,

3 Feb. 1992, Short 3982

Sawpit Creek, Kosciusko N.P.,
N.S.W., 4 Feb. 1993, Short 3996

9II

200

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et al.

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

6 km from Catheart toward Roeky
Hall, 9 Feb. 1993,N.S.W.,

Short 4010

Bundara R. crossing on Omeo to
Tallangatta road, Viet., 9 Feb. 1993,
Short 4018

9II

1811 + 2Bs

B. sp. aff angustifolia A. Cunn. ex DC.

Mt KaputarN.P., N.S.W., 28 Jan. 1993,
Short 3944

5II

10

Stewart Forest, Barrington Tops State
Forest, N.S.W., 1 Feb. 1993, Short 3979

5II

10

Polblue Picnic Site, Barrington
Tops State Forest, N.S.W.,

1 Feb. 1993, Short 3981

10

B. basaltica F.Muell.
var. basaltica

4 km NE of Millmerran, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 25

8 II

16

var. gracilis Benth.

14 km N of Booligal, N.S.W.,
6 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 76

12

Barmah State Park, Viet.,
23 Sept. 1 992, Watanabe 1

611

20 km N of Apsley, Viet.,

25 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 222

611

B. cardiocarpa F.Muell. ex Benth.

Digby to Strathdownie road, Viet., 35

3 Sept. \ 990, Short 3919

19 km NW of Apsley, Viet., 35

12 Oet. 1995, Watanabe 306

B. cheilocarpa F.Muell.

94 km N of Galena Bridge on NW 1 8

Coastal Hwy, W.A., 6 Oet. 1993,

Short 4083

1 km W of NW Coastal Hwy along 18

road to Blowholes, W.A., 7 Oet. 1993,
Short 4097

B. aff cheilocarpa (A)

Pt Quobba, W.A., 7 Oet. 1993,

Short 4091

18

Chromosome number determinations in Astercae

201

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n 2n

B. aff. cheilocurpa (B)

Cleary to Paynes Find road, W.A.,
17 Sept. \990, Short 3823
Yalgoo, W.A., 10 Oct. 1993,

Short 4108

911

9II

ciliaris (Labill.) Less, complex
Cape Riche, W.A., 14 Oct. 1993,
Short 4126

911

Toorebumip Scenic Lookout, W.A.,
14 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 173

911

35 km E of Jerramungup, Fitzgerald
River Crossing, W.A., 15 Oct. 1993,
Watanahe 174

911

6 km W of Coolgardie, W.A.,
2 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 107

27

4 km NE of Millmerran, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 27

27

52 km SW of Louth, N.S.W.,
2 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 47

27

1 3 km N of Carnamah, W.A.,
5 Oct. \993, Short 4075

36

33 km from Blowholes along road
to Carnarvon, W.A., 7 Oct. 1993,
Short 4094

36

5 km E of Pindar, W.A., 9 Oct. 1993,
Short 4105

36

27 km from Great Northern Hwy along
road to Warriedar Hmsd, W.A.,

10 Oct. \993, Short 4116

36

63 km W of Balladonia, W.A.,
1 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 103

36

6 km W of Coolgardie, W.A.,
2 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 106

36

12.5 km W of Coolgardie, W.A.,
2 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 110

36

Bonnie Rock, W.A., 1 1 Oct. 1993,
Watanahe 158

36

E edge of Lake Wallambin, W.A.,
1 1 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 163

36

202

K, Watanabe, P.S. Short el al.

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

25 km NW of Pt Augusta, S.A.,
29 Sept. 1993, Watanabe 101
61 km N of Hawker, S.A.,

20 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 191

36

36

10 km NNE of Ashford, N.S.W.,
26 Sept. 1 992, Watanabe 15

36

B. ciliocarpa W. Fitzg.

‘The Loop’, Murchison River,
Kalban-i N.P., W.A., 6 Oct. 1993,
Short 4080

18 + 2BS

40 km from Yalgoo, W.A.,
9 Oct. 1993, Short 4107

911

30 km from Paynes Find along road
to Cleary, W.A., 10 Oct. 1993,
Short 4119

18

B. sp. aff ciliocarpa

41 km E of Quilpie, Qld,
17 Aug. 1989, Short 3607

911

B. curvicarpa G.L.R. Davis

59.5 km SW of Bourke, N.S.W.,
2 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 41

411 + BI

0.9 km SW of Louth, N.S.W.,
2 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 43

411 + Bl

B. debilis Sond.

Mt Arapiles, Viet., 25 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 217

311

6

B. decipiens Hook.f

Sawyers Hill, Kosciusko N.P.
N.S.W., 3 Feb. 1993, Short 3986

911

18

B. dentata Gaudich.

Dalby,N.S.W., 30 Sept. 1992,
Watanabe 29

411 or
411 + Bl

44 km SW of Louth, N.S.W.,
2 Oct. 1 992, Watanabe 46

411

24 km NE of Wirrealpa, N.S.W.,
3 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 55

411

80 km SE of Broken Hill, N.S.W.,

6 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 70

48 km SE of Martins Well, N.S.W.,811

3 Oct. 1 992, Watanabe 53

411 + Bl

Chromosome number dclemiinations in Astereae

203

Table 1. Continued

Species & locality

n

2n

27 km S of Tilpa, N.S.W.,
2 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 52

1211

c. 45 km SE of Broken Hill, N.S.W.,
6 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 67
33 km SW of Broken Hill, N.S.W.,
22 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 201

1211

1211

c. 43 km SE of Broken Hill, N.S.W.,
22 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 203

1211

20 km E of Elmore, Viet.,
7 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 77

1211

B. dissectifolia G.L.R.Davis

3.5 km NW of Backwater, N.S.W.,
30 Jan. \991>, Short 3973

1211

24

B. diversifolia (Hook.) Fischer & Meyer
17 km SE of Halls Gap, Viet.,

27 Sept. 1993, Watanahe 95

1211

Polblue Creek, Barrington Tops
State Forests, N.S.W., 1 Feb.
\993, Short 3981

1811

36 + 0-lB

B. exilis Sond.

Mullett Lake Nature Reserve, near
Esperance, W.A., 16 Oct. 1993,
Watanahe 1 78

911

18

B.formosa P.S. Short

1.6 km SE of Coonabarabran, N.S.W.,
24 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 6

911

B. glandulosa (Steetz) Benth.

Boyagin Rock, W.A., 12 Oct. 1993,
Watanahe 165

36

B. gracilis G.L.R. Davis

7.5 km towards Ashford from Bonshaw
to Glen Innes road, N.S.W., 29 Jan.
\993, Short 3962

18

B. graminea (Labill.) F.Muell.

Sawpit Creek, Kosciusko N.P.
N.S.W., 6 Feb. 1993, Short 4008

911

Green Cape Lighthouse, N.S.W.
7 Feb. \993, Short 4015

911

18

B. halophila P.S. Short

13 km N of Camamah, W.A.,

911

5 Oct. \99?>, Short 4072

204

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et ul.

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

1 1 km W of Pindar, W.A.,

9 Oct. \99^, Short 4101

B. iberidifolia Benth. complex
Moora, W.A., 4 Oct. 1993,

Short 4065

13 km N of Camamah, W.A.,

5 Oct. \993, Short 4074

2.5 km S of Binnu, W.A.,

5 Oct. \993, Short 4077

2 1 km from Carnarvon along road
to Gascoyne Junction, W.A.,

7 Oct. 1993, Short 4087

29 km N of Galena Bridge, W.A.,

8 Oct. \993, Short 4100

Cosy Comer, W.A., 13 Oct. 1993,

Short 4124

Mt Chudalup, W.A., 13 Oct. 1993,
Short 4125

9 km N of Nallan Homestead
turn-off along Great Northern Highway,
W.A., 26 Aug. 1995, Short 4227

Cape Leeuwin, W.A., 3 Nov. 1995,
Short 4550

74 km WSW of Coolgardie, W.A.,

2 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 111

Yellowdine, W.A., 2 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 113

c. 5 km NW of Bonnie Rock, W.A.,

1 1 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 161

Lake Wallanbin, W.A., 1 1 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 164

35 km E of Jerramungup, Fitzgerald
River crossing, W.A., 15 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 1 75

B. latisquamea F. Muell.

Pt Quobba, W.A., 7 Oct. 1993,

Short 4090

n 2n

9H

9II

18

9II

18

9II

9II

9II or
9II + BI

9II

9II

9II

9II

911

9II

911

Chromosome number detenninations in Astercae

205

TABLE 1 . CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

33 km from Blowholes along road
to Carnarvon, W.A., 7 Oct. 1993,
Short 4093

18

B. lineariloba (DC.) Druce

S of Border Village on S.A./W.A.
border, 29 Sept. 1993, Watanahe 102

12

12.5 km W of Kimba, S.A.,
19 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 187

12

6 km W of Coolgardie, W.A.,
2 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 105

16

7 km S of Bimbijy Hmsd turn-off
along Paynes Find to Cleary Road,
W.A., 10 Oct. \993, Short 4122

16

33 km from Broken Hill on Menindee
road, N.S.W., 22 Oct. 1993,

Watanahe 200

16

B. melanocarpa Sond, & F.Muell
1 .4 km W of Menindee, N.S. W.,
22 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 209

1211

B. microcarpa F.Muell.
Girraween N.P., Qld,

29 Jan. 1992, Watanahe 80

611

12

6 km S of Boonoo Boonoo, N.S.W.,
30 Jan. \993, Short 3970

611

B. muelleroides G.L.R. Davis
Ulupna Island, Viet.,

23 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 3

3II

B. aff multicauUs F.Muell.

8 km W of Kiandra, N.S.W.,
3 Feb. \993, Short 3988

9II

18 + 0-2BS

B. multifida DC. complex

3 km S of Glen Alpin, Qld,
30 Jan. {993, Short 3965

711

Warrumbungles N.P., N.S.W.,
25 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 7
Mt Kaputar N.P., N.S.W.,

25 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 11

711

711

14

Nr Clover Flat along Big River
Fire Track, Viet., 9 Feb. 1993,
Short 4021

9II

18

206

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et a!.

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

1.2 km NW of MacKenzie Falls, Viet.,
27 Sept. 1993, Watanabe 97

9II

B. nivalis F.Muell.

Club Lake, Mt Kosciusko N.P.,
N.S.W., 5 Feb. 1993, Short 4005

nil

22

B. nodosa P.S. Short & K.Watan.

Bracket Creek, Qld, 29 Sept. 1992,
Watanabe 19

3II

15.5 km E of Inglewood, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 20

3II

2 km E of Inglewood, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 24

3II

69 km N of Coonabarabran, N.S.W.,
25 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 8

311

B. nova-anglica G.L.R. Davis
Girraween N.P., Qld,

29 Jan. 1993, Watanabe 79

7II

14

26.5 km SE of Wongwibinda, N.S.W.,
31 Jan. XOO-i, Short 3978

7II

14

B. aff nova-anglica (A)

3 km S of Glen Aplin, Qld,
30 Jan. \993, Short 3969

511

10

B. aff nova-anglica (B)

Mt Kaputar N.P., N.S.W.,
25 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 9

6II

12

B. obovata G.L.R. Davis

Daners Gap, Mt Koskiusko N.P.
N.S.W., 4 Feb. 1993, Short 3993

18

Blue Lake to Charlotte Pass
Mt Kosciusko N.P., N.S.W.,
5 Feb. 1993, Short 3997

18

Mustering Flat, Baw Baw Plateau,
Viet, 26 Feb. 1991, Walsh 3051

18

B. oncocarpa Diels

100 km N of Galena Bridge on NW

18

Coastal Hwy, W.A., 6 Oct. 1993,
Short 4084

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

207

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality n 2n

B. papillosa G.L.R.Davis

28.7 km S of Ivanhoe, N.S.W.,
6 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 73

4II or
4II + IB

Muggabah Creek, 14 km N of Booligal,
N.S.W., 6 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 75

8

B. perpusilla (Steetz) J.M. Black

Totadgin Rock, W.A., 3 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 115

18

Bonnie Rock, W.A., 1 1 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 160

18

B. petrophila G.L.R.Davis
Angler’s Rest, Viet.
Unvouchered colln, Feb. 1993

18

B. procumbens G.L.R.Davis
Mt KaputarN.P.,N.S.W.,
28 Jan. 1993, Short 3951

18

B. ptychocarpa F.Muell.

Mt Mittamatite Regional Park, Viet.,
3 Dec. \993, Short 4151

6II

12

B. pusilla Steetz

W edge of Lake King, W.A.,
1 Nov. \995, Short 4533

911

B. radicans Steetz ex Lehm.

Mother of Ducks Nature Reserve, Guyra,
N.S.W., 31 Jan. 1993, Short 3976

1311

26

B. readeri G.L.R.Davis
Ulupna Island, Viet.,

23 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 4

511

10

B. rigidula (DC.) G.L.R.Davis
Lake Omeo, c. 0.4 km S of
intersection of Blowhard road
and Lake Omeo road, Viet.,

9 Feb. 1993, Short 4016

911

18

B. scapigera (Sieber ex Sprengel) DC.
3.5 km NW of Backwater, N.S.W.,
30 Jan. \993, Short 3972

9II

18

Buckety Plains, Bogong N.P., Viet.,
9 Feb. 1993, Short 4023

9II

B. smithwhitei P.S. Short & K.Watan.
28.7 km S of Ivanhoe, N.S.W.,

6 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 72

6IIor

3IV

208

K. Watanabc, P.S. Short et cd.

TABLE 1 . CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

1.4 1cm W of Menindee, N.S.W.,
22 Oct. 1993, WatanabellO

6II or
3IV

B. spathulata Gaudich.

Sawyers Hill, Kosciusko N.P., N.S.W.,
3 Feb. 1993, Short 3985

2711

Daners Gap, Kosciusko N.P., N.S.W.,
4 Feb. 1993, Short 3994

2711

Club Lake, Kosciusko N.P., N.S.W.,
5 Feb. \993, Short 4003

911

18

Cathcart to Rocky Hall, N.S.W.,
6 Feb. 1993, Short 4011

2711

B. stolonifera G.L.R.Davis

Club Lake, Kosciusko N.P., N.S.W.,
5 Feb. 1993, Short 4006

1511

30

B. stiiartii Benth.

Girraween N.P., Qld, 29 Jan. 1993,
Watanahe 81

611

12

1 1 km from Deepwater towards
Tenterfield, N.S.W., 29 Jan. 1993,
Short 3964

611

B. J.M. Black

42.5 km E of Border Village, S.A.,
18 Oct. 1993, Watanahe 184

911

18

B. temiiscapa Hook.f

van pubescens (Benth.) G.L.R.Davis
3.5 km NW of Backwater, N.S.W.,
30 Jan. \993, Short 3975

911

aff var. tenuiscapa

3.5 km NE of Mt Reynard, Snowy

Plains, Viet., Walsh s.n..

Cultivated RBG, Accession No. 905484

28

B. trachycarpa F.Muell.

Ceduna, S.A., 12 Sept. 1990,
Short 3781

18 + 0-2BS

B. sp. aff trachvearpa F.Muell.
25 km WofDalby, N.S.W.,
30 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 31

271 or 1111
+ 0-911 + Is

Brachyscome sp.

8 km NW of Glendambo, S.A.,

9II

26 Aug. 1989, Short 3673

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

209

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n 2n

1 19 km N of Glendambo, S.A.,
26 Aug. \9%9, Short 3682

911

Calotis R.Br.

C. anthemoides F.Muell.

Ulupna Is., Viet.

26 Sept. 1993, Watanahe 92

1411

C. cuneata (F.Muell. ex Benth.) G.L.R.Davis
var. cuneata

25 km WofDalby, N.S.W.,

30 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 32

1611

C. cuneifolia R.Br.

1 7 km SW of Dubbo, N.S.W.
24 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 5

8II 16

15.5 km E of Inglewood, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 23

811

20 km E of Elmore, Viet.,
7 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 78

8II

25 km W of Dalby, N.S.W. ,
30 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 34

1611

C. cymbacantha F.Muell.

Tilpa, N.S.W., 2 Oct. 1992,
Watanahe 48

1411

C. dentex R.Br.

3 km S of Glen Alpin, Qld,
30 Jan. \993, Short 3967

811 16

C. erinacea Steetz

15 km SW of Kimba, S.A.,
21 Sept. \9?,2, Short 1766

1211+ IIV

C. lappulacea Benth.

15.5 km E of Inglewood, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanahe 21

1411

C. aff lappulacea

15.5 km E of Inglewood, Qld,
29 Sept. 1 992, Watanahe 22

811

C. multicauUs (Turez.) Druce
38 km N of Pt Augusta, S.A.,
5 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 62

411

C. plumulifera F.Muell.

24 km NE of Wirrealpa, S.A.,
4 Oct. 1992, Watanahe 56

511 + Bll

210

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et al.

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

72 km S of Charleville, Qld,
1 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 38

51I + BII

45 km SE of Broken Hill, N.S.W.,
6 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 66

5II + 2B1

80 km SW of Broken Hill, N.S.W.,
6 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 69

5II + 2B1

C. scabiosifolia Sond. & F.Muell
var. scabiosifolia
15 km SW of Louth, N.S.W.,
2 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 45

811

28.7 km S of Ivanhoe, N.S.W.,
23 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 213

8II

Sawpit Creek, Kosciusko N.P.,
N.S.W., 4 Feb. 1993, Short 3995

1611

C. scapigera Hook.

Louth, N.S.W., 2 Oct. 1992,
Watanabe 42

8II

6 km NE of Jerilderie, N.S.W.,
26 Jan. \993, Short 3933

1611

Erigeron L.

E. karvinskianus DC.

4 km N of Mt Slide, Viet.,
March \99\, H.Manson s.n.,
(MEL 1592608)

36

Erodiophyllum F.Muell.

E. elderi F.Muell.

41 Km ENE of Iron Knob,
S.A., 12 Oct. \990, Short 3779

16

Kippistia F.Muell.

K. suaeclifolia F.Muell.

Lake Austin, W.A., 25 Aug. 1995,
Short 4221

911

Lagenifera Cass.

L. huegellii Benth.

4 km N of Zumstein, Grampians,
Viet., 26 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 225

18

L. stipitata (Labill.) Druce

Mt Kaputar N.P., N.S.W. 28 Jan. 1993
Short 3952

911

18

Barington Tops State Forests,
N.S.W., 1 Feb. 1993, Short 3980

18

Chromosome number detenninations in Astcreae

211

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

Minuria DC.

M. cunninghamii (DC.) Benth.

Lake Austin, W.A., 25 Aug. 1995
Short 4223

911

Tilpa, N.S.W., 2 Oct. 1992
Watanabe 49

911

M. gardneri Lander & R.Bany

Lake Austin, W.A., 25 Aug. 1995,
Short 4222

911

M. integerrima (DC.) Benth.

Dalby, N.S.W., 30 Sept. 1992,
Watanabe 30

1811

28 km W of Condamine, N.S.W.,
30 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 35

1811

0.9 km SW of Louth, N.S.W.
2 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 44

1811

M. leptophylla DC.

Wudinna Hill, S.A., 19 Oct. 1993,
Watanabe 186

911

28.5 km N of OtToroo, S.A.,
21 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 194

911

18 + 0-2BS

Olearia Moench

0. astrotricha (F.Muell.) F.Muell. ex Benth.
Victoria Range road, Grampians,

Viet., 2 Dec. 1986, Corrick 10103

911

O. ciliata (Benth.) F.Muell. ex Benth.

10 km SE of Ravensthorpe, W.A., 911

3 Sept. \9^6, Short 2663

Between Karkoo and Mount Hill, S.A., 911

29 Sept. 1993, Watanabe 100

O.ferresii (F.Muell.) F.Muell. ex Benth.

S. boundary of Ormiston Gorge N.P., 911

N.T., 12 Aug. 1988, Short 3148

O. humilis Lander

Sandstone to Yuinmery, W. A., 911

14 Oct. \986, Short 2563

Yuinmery, W.A., 14 Oct. 1986,
Short 2565

911

212

K. Watanabe. P.S. Short et al.

TABLE 1. CONTINUED

Species & locality

O. imbricata (Turez.) Benth.

10 km SE of Ravensthorpe, W.A.,
3 Sept. \9%6, Short 2662

9II

O. phlogopappa (Labill.) DC. complex
Falls Creek, Viet., 2 March 1987
Short 3035

1811

O. pimelioides (DC.) Benth.

53.5 km E of ‘Nallan’, W.A.,
1 986, Lander 1391

911

Sandstone-Paynes Find road, W.A.,
24 Aug. 1 986, Short 2564

Parachilna to Blinman road, S.A.,
20 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 193

911

0. plucheacea Lander

Kennedy Range, W.A.,

20 Aug. 1 986, Short 2535

9II

0. ramulosa (Labill.) Benth. complex
Golton Gorge, Grampians,

Viet. 11 Sept. 19^6, RBG 86/1735

911

0. rudis (Benth.) Benth.

19 km SW of Three Springs, W.A.,
9 Sept. \98,6, Short 2795

9II

10 km S of Mt Hope, N.S.W.,
16 Sept. \98,1, Short 3078

9II

17 km N of Patchewollock, Viet.,
25 Aug. 198,8,, Short 3174

9II

0. stuartii (F.Muell.) Benth.

Kennedy Range, W.A., 20 Aug. 1986
Short 2538

911

O. xerophila (F.Muell.) Benth.

Dales Gorge, W.A., 30 Aug. 1995,
Short 4275

911

Olearia sp.

23.6 km N of Maroubra Rd/Scotsman Rd
intersection, W.A., 1986, Lander 1408

911

Solenogyne Cass.

S. dominii L.G. Adams
Ulupna Island, Viet.,

25 Jan. 1993, Short 3923

18

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

213

TABLE 1 . CONTINUED

Species & locality

n

2n

Vittadinia A.Rich.

V. cuneata DC.

var. hirsuta N.T.Burb.

4 km NE of Milmerran, Qld,
29 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 26

9II

18

y. gracilis (Hook.f.) N.T.Burb.

2 km W of Hines Hill, W.A.,
23 Oct. 1995, Short 4450

911

Ulupna Island, Viet.,

25 Jan. 1993, Short 3925

911

V. muelleri N.T.Burb.

44 km NE of Narrabri, N.S.W.,
26 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 14

9II

V. pterochaeta (F.Muell. ex Benth.) J.M. Black
24 km NE of Wirrealpa, S.A.,

3 Oct. 1992, Watanabe 57

9II

V. pustulata N.T.Burb.

28 km W of Condamine, N.S.W.,
30 Sept. 1992, Watanabe 36

9II

V. sulcata N.T.Burb.

c. 10 km S. of Wild Dog Glen, S.A.,
20 Oct. 1993, Watanabe 190

911

BRACHYSCOME

As in Watanabe & Short (1992) our references to species and species complexes
in Tables I & 11 are largely the concepts of Davis (1948, 1949, 1955, 1959) and
Smith-White et al. (1970) although the concept of ‘superspecies’ is not used. As we are
primarily concerned here with the presentation of new chromosome number detennina-
tions and with reviewing chromosome numbers in the Australian Astereae, further
comments on species or generic delimitation are here kept to a minimum. Such
problems will be the subject of future papers and will follow after the completion of
detailed anatomical, morphological, cytological and macromolecular studies.

As currently recognised Brachyscome is a genus of more than 80 species and
occurs in Australia, New Guinea and New Zealand. Of these, over 70 species are
confined to Australia. Davis (1948) recognised two subgenera within Brachyscome, i.e.
‘Eubrachyscome' and "Metabrachyscome". They are illegitimate names but are
frequently adopted in cytological papers (e.g. Smith-White el al. 1970).

The majority of species were referred by Davis to ‘subgenus Eubrachyscome' and
this group was the subject of cytological investigations by Smith- White et al. (1970).
They found an array of chromosome numbers in the group and suggested that it
represents a reducing series, i.e. x = 9 to x = 2. It was also noted that most species with n
= 9 (including polyploids) are mesic, perennial species. In contrast, species of arid
regions frequently display an annual habit and this is correlated with lower chromosome
numbers. Chromosome number determinations by Watanabe & Short (1992), and in this
paper for species not examined by Smith- White et al., are consistent with these observa-
tions. Thus B. goniocarpa (n = 4), B. gracilis (n = 4), B. muelleri (n = 3) and B.
muelleroides (n = 3) are all annual species which occur in arid, or seasonally dry areas.

214

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short etal.

As noted by Carter (1978a), species referred by Davis to ‘subgenus
Metahrachyscome’ are chromosomally conservative compared to members of
‘Euhrachyscome\ All species have x = 9, with polyploidy mainly confined to the B.
ciliaris complex. Many of the species are also annuals confined to arid regions.

The B. iheridifolia complex referred to in both Tables is mainly confined to
Western Australia and includes B. hellidioides and B. pusilla. The complex belongs to
‘subgenus Metahrachyscome'. There is considerable diversity in collections referred by
us to this complex and additional taxa undoubtedly should be recognised.

The chromosome complements of B. nivalis {2n = 22), B. radicans (2n = 26), B.
temdscapa aff var. tenuiscapa {2n = 28) and B. stolonifera (2n = 30) are markedly
different from those found in most other species, their karyotypes displaying two differ-
ent sizes of chromosomes. This is in marked contrast to the unimodal karyotypes found
in species with 2n = 18. However, species with chromosome numbers less than 2n= 18
frequently have bimodal karyotypes, a feature explained by descending aneuploidy
caused by reciprocal translocation and loss of centromeric fragments. Species with
chromosome numbers greater than 2« = 18 are perhaps amphidiploids originating as a
result of hybridization between taxa with chromosome numbers less than n = 9.

Both the array of chromosome numbers and the discrepancies in numbers reported
by us with those published by Smith-White et al. (1970) for B. diversifolia, B. micro-
carpa, B. multifida and B. nova-anglica may in part be the result of misidentification.
However, they primarily reflect the morphological complexity of the taxa concerned.
More work is required to clarify the delimitation of the various entities in these
complexes and therefore discussion of the significance of chromosome numbers in these
taxa is premature.

CALOTIS

A genus containing 28 fonnally recognised species Calotis mainly occurs in semi-arid
and arid regions of Australia.

Stace (1978, 1982) has reported on the cytoevolution of the genus and noted two
significant trends, i.e. a reduction from a base of x = 8 down to x = 4 in the mainly arid
zone annuals, and a high degree of polyploidy. Two-thirds of the species were found
to be polyploids and this condition was found to be as frequent in low chromosome
number annuals as in high chromosome number perennials.

Our data presented in Table 1 support the observations made by Stace.

CELMISIA

Celmisia contains about 70 species confined to Australia and New Zealand. They are
mainly found in alpine regions and most are endemic to New Zealand, only about ten
species occurring in Australia. Celmisias are perennial herbs or subshrubs of diverse
habit and a cytological survey of 65 species (Hair 1980, Given & Gray 1986) indicates
that most are at least 12-ploid, with n = 54. Haploid numbers of n = 54 and n = 108 have
been found in Australian species.

CERATOGYNE

Ceratogyne obionoides, the only member of this genus, is an annual species with n = 6
and is found throughout much of arid Australia.

ERODIOPHYLLUM

A ditypic genus, Erodiophyllum occurs in semi-arid and arid mainland Australia. Both
species are perennial herbs with « = 8.

Chromosome number detemiinations in Astereac

215

TABLE II. SUMMARY OF CHROMOSOME NUMBER DETERMINATIONS IN NATIVE AUSTRALIAN
ASTEREAE

n

2n

Brachyscome Cass.

B. aculeata (Labill.) Cass, ex Lessing

9,18

0-6Bs

18

Stace 1981;
Watanabe et al. 1996

B. aff. aculeata

9+ IB

Stace 1981

(Mr Ginger a)

B. aff. aculeata

27

Stace 1981

(Halls Gap)

B. angustifolia A.Cunn.ex DC.

var. angustifolia

9

Smith- White et al.
1970

var. heterophylla (Benth.)
G.L.R. Davis

9

Smith- White et al.
1970

B. sp. aff angustifolia

5

10

Watanabe et al. 1996

B. hasaltica F.Muell.

var. basaltica

8

16

Smith-White et al. 1970;
Watanabe & Short 1992;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

var. gracilis Benth.

6

12

Smith- White et a/. 1970;
Watanabe & Short 1992;
Watanabe et al. 1996

B. breviscapis C.R. Carter

4

8

De Jong 1963; Smith-
White et al. 1970; Carter
1978c; Watanabe &
Short 1992

B. campylocarpa J.M. Black

5

10

Smith- White et al. 1970,
as ‘5. campylocarpa sp.
B’, Watanabe & Short
1992

B. cardiocarpa F.Muell. ex Benth.

9

36

Smith- White et al. 1970;
Watanabe et o/. 1996

B. cheilocarpa F.Muell.

9

Carter 1978a; Watanabe
et al. 1996

B. aff cheilocarpa (A)

18

Watanabe et al. 1 996

B. aff cheilocarpa (B)

9

Watanabe et al. 1 996

B. chrysoglossa F.Muell.

4

8 +
0-3BS

mith-White et a/. 1970;
Watanabe & Short 1992

B. ciliaris (Labill.) Less, complex

9,18

27,36

De Jong 1963; Smith-

27, 361

81

White et al. 1970; Carter
1978a; Watanabe &
Short 1992; Watanabe
et al. 1996

216

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et al.

TABLE II. CONTINUED

B. ciliocarpa W.Fitzg.

B. sp. aff. ciliocarpa
B. cuneifolia Tate
B. curvicaipa G.L.R.Davis

B. debilis Sond.

B. decipiens Hook.f.

B. dentata Gaudich.

B. dichromosomatica C.R. Carter

B. dissectifolia G.L.R.Davis

B. diversifolia (Hook.) Fischer &
C. Meyer var. diversifolia

n 2n

9 18 +

0-2Bs

9

9 18

4 8 +

0-5Bs

3 6

9,27 18,54

4,8,12 8,16

+ 0-4Bs 24 +

0-4Bs

2+ 4 +

0-3Bs + 0-3Bs

micro Bs +micro
Bs

6,12 12,24

12,16 24,

18,c.20 36 +

0-lB

Carter 1978a; Watanabe
& Short 1992; Watanabe
et al. 1996

Watanabe et «/. 1996
Stace 1981

Smith- White et fl/. 1970;
Watanabe & Short 1992;
Watanabe et al. 1996

Smith- White et al. 1970;
Watanabe & Short 1992;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

Solbrigetn/. 1964;

Smith- White et a/. 1970;
Watanabe eta/. 1996

Smith- White et a/. 1970;
Watanabe & Short
1992; Watanabe et
al. 1996

Smith- White 1968,
as B. lineariloba',

Smith- White et al.

1970, as ‘5.
lineariloba sp. A’;

Smith- White &

Carter 1970, as ‘S.
lineariloba sp. A’;
Watanabe et al.

1975, as ‘5.
lineariloba race A’;

Carter 1978b; Carter
1978c; Smith-White
& Carter 1981;

Nagl & Pfeifer 1988;
Watanabe et al.

1991; Watanabe &

Short 1992

Smith- White et al.

1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

Smith-White et al.
1970; Watanabe &
Short 1992;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

217

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n

2n

B. eriogona (J.M. Black) G.L.R. Davis

4

8

Smith-White et al.
1970, as ‘5.
campylocarpa sp. A’;
Watanabe & Short
1992

B. exilis Sond.

9

18

Carter 1978a;
Watanabe et a/. 1996

B.formosa P.S. Short

9

Short 1988;
Watanabe et a/. 1996

B. glandulosa (Steetz) Benth.

36

Watanabe et al. 1 996

B. goniocarpa Sond. & F.Muell.

4

8

Watanabe et al.
1991; Watanabe &
Short 1992

B. gracilis G.L.R. Davis

4

8

Smith-White et al.
1970, as B.
diversifolia var.
dissect a G.L.R.
Davis; Watanabe &
Short 1992;
Watanabe et al. 1996

B. graminea (Labill.) F.Muell.

9

18

Smith- White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. halophila P.S. Short

9

18

Short 1988;
Watanabe & Short
1992; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. iberidifolia Benth.

9 +
0-lB

18

De Jong 1963;
Chouksanova et al.
1968; Gupta 1969;
Turner 1970,
including specimens
referred to B.
bellidioides;

Carter 1978a;
Keighery 1978;
Gupta & Gill 1983,
1989; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. latisquamea F.Muell.

9

18

Carter 1978a;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

B. leptocarpa F.Muell.

3

6

Smith-White et al.
1970, probably

218

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et al.

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n 2n

B. lineariloba (DC.) Druce

B. lyrifolia J.M. Black

B. melanocarpa Send. & F.Muell.

B. microcarpa F.Muell.

B. muelleri Sond.

B. muelleroides G.L.R.Davis
B. multicaulis F.Muell.

B. aff. multicaulis

B. multifida DC. complex

B. nivalis F.Muell.

conspecific with B.
debilis

6,8 10,12 Smith-White 1968;

4II + 21 16 Smith- White et al.

1970; Carter &
Smith- White 1972;
Kyhosett?/. 1977;
Watanabe et al.

' 1985; Watanabe &

Smith- White 1987;
Watanabe & Short
1992; Watanabe et
al. 1996;

Watanabe etal. 1996

6,12

12,30

Smith- White et al.

1970 and Carter
1978, as to Parachila
collections of B.
ciliaris', Watanabe &

Short 1992

Smith- White et al.

1970; Watanabe &

Short 1992; Watanabe et al.
1996

6, 10 12

1011 + 41

Smith- White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

Watanabe & Short
1992

6

18

18 +
0-2Bs

Watanabe eta/. 1996

Watanabe & Short
1992, as B. rigidiila

Watanabe et al. 1 996

7,9 14,18 Smith- White et fl/.

1970, including var.
dilatata Benth. and
var. multifida-,
Watanabe & Short
1992; Watanabe et
al. 1996

1 1 22 Smith-White et al.

1970, excluding
record of n = 9,
re Stace 1981;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

219

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n

2n

B. nodosa P.S. Short & K.Watan.

3

6

Smith- White et al.
1970, as ‘B.
goniocarpa;
Watanabe & Short
1992, as ‘5. sp. aff.
goniocarpa’ ; Short &
Watanabe 1993;
Watanabe et al. 1996

B. nova-anglica G.L.R. Davis

7

14

Smith-White et al.
1970, a count of 3n =
18 is probably
erroneous; Watanabe
et al. 1 996

B. aff. nova-anglica (A)

5

10

Watanabe et al. 1996

B. aff. nova-anglica (B)

6

12

Smith- White et al.
1970, as B. nova-
anglica', Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. obovata G.L.R.Davis

18

Watanabe et al. 1 996

B. oncocarpa Diels

9

18

Carter 1978a;
Watanabe ef fl/. 1996

B. papillosa G.L.R. Davis

4 +
0-2Bs

8

Smith-White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. parvula Hook.f

9

Smith-White et al.
1970; Carter 1978a

B. perpusilla (Steetz) J.M. Black

9

18,36

Smith- White et al.
1970;Carter 1978a;
Watanabe & Short
1992; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. petrophila G.L.R. Davis

18

Watanabe et al. 1996

B. procumbens G.L.R.Davis

9

18

Smith-White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. ptychocarpa F.Muell.

6

12

Smith- White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. pusilla Steetz

9

18

Carterl978a;
Watanabe et al.
1996

220

K. Watanabe. P.S. Short etal.

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n

2n

B. radicans Steetz

13

26

Smith-White el al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. rara G.L.R. Davis

6

12

Watanabe & Short
1992

B. readeri G.L.R. Davis

5

10

Watanabe & Short
1992; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. rigidula (DC.) G.L.R. Davis

9

18

?Smith-White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. riparia G.L.R. Davis

9

Watanabe & Short
1992

B. scapigera (Sprengel) DC.

9

18

Smith-White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. sieberi DC.
var. glut nil DC.

9 + 0-lB

Stace 1981

B. smithwhitei P.S.Short & K.Watan.

3,6

6,12 +
0-2Bs

Smith- White et al.
1970, as "B.
campylocarpa sp. C’;
Watanabe & Short
1992, as "B. sp. aff.
campylocarpa'-.

Short & Watanabe
1993; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. spathulala Gaudich.
subsp. glabra (DC.) Stace

9

18

Stace 1981

subsp. spathulata

9,18,27

36,45

Stace 1981;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

B. stolonifera G.L.R.Davis

15

30

Smith- White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. stuartii Benth.

6

12

Smith-White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

B. tatei J.M. Black

9

18

Watanabe ctrt/. 1996

B. tenuiscapa Hook.f.
var. pubescens (Benth.)
G.L.R.Davis

9

18

Smith- White et al.

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

221

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n

2n

1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

aff. var. tenuiscapa

28

Watanabe ef a/. 1996

B. tesquorum J.M. Black

9

18

Smith-White et al.
1970

B. tetrapterocarpa G.L.R. Davis

4 + 0-lB

8

Watanabe & Short
1992

B. trachycarpa F.Muell.

27

18 +

0-2Bs,

36

De Jong 1963; Carter
1978a; Watanabe
et al. 1996

B. sp. aff. trachycarpa

271 or
1III +
0-9II + Is

Watanabe ct a/. 1996

B. uliginosa G.L.R.Davis

9

Smith- White et al.
1970

B. whitei G.L.R.Davis

5

10

Smith- White et al.
1970; Watanabe &
Short 1992

Brachyscome sp.

9

Watanabe et al.

1996, referred to
B. iberidifolia, FI. S.
Aust.

Calotis R.Br.
C.ancyrocarpa J.M. Black

4

8

Stace 1978

C. anthemoides F.Muell.

7,14

14

Solbrig et a/. 1964;
Stace 1978;
Watanabe et o/. 1996

C. cuneata (F.Muell. ex Benth.)
G.L.R.Davis

16

32 +
0-1 OBs

Stace 1978;
Watanabe et al.
1996

C. cuneifolia R.Br.

8,16

16,32

Solbrig eta/. 1964;
Stace 1978;
Watanabe eta/. 1996

C. cymbacantha F.Muell.

7,14

28

Stace 1978;
Watanabe et a/. 1996

C dentex R.Br.

8

16

Stace 1978;
Watanabe et a/. 1996

222

K. Watanabc, P.S. Short e/ a/.

TABLE It. CONTINUED

C. erinacea Steelz

C. glandulosa F.Muell.

C. hispidula (F.Muell.) F. Muell.

C. inermis Maiden & Betche
C. lappulacea Benth.

C. ? aff. lappulacea
C. latiuscula F.Muell. & Tate

C. multicaulis (Turcz.) Dmce

C. plumulifera F.Muell.

C. porphyroglossa F. Muell.

C. scabiosifolia Sond. & F.Muell.
var. integrifolia F.Muell. ex Benth.

var. scabiosifolia

C. scapigera Flook.

C. squamigera C.T. White
C xanthosoidea Domin
Celmisia Cass.

C. asteliifolia Hook/.' complex
C. longifolia Cass, complex

C. sericopltylla J.H. Willis

Ceratogyne Turcz.

C. obionoides Turcz.

n

2n

7,14

14,28

Turner 1970; Stace

21,28

56

1978; Watanabe et
al. 1996

8

16

Stace 1978

16

Stace 1978

8

16

Stace 1978

14

Stace 1978;
Watanabe ct fl/. 1996

8

Watanabe et al. 1 996

7,14

14,21

Stace 1978, 1982

28

4,8

8,16

Turner 1970; Stace
1978, as C.
multicaulis sp. B;
Watanabe eta/. 1996

5 +

10,20

Stace 1978, as

02Bs

C. multicaulis sp. B;
Watanabe e/ a/. 1996

10

20

Stace 1978

8,16

16,32

Stace 1978

8,16

16,32

Stace 1978;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

8,16

Stace 1982;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

16

Stace 1978

8

16

Stace 1978

54

108

Hair 1980

108

216

54

108

Hair 1980

108

108

Hair 1980

6 Turner 1970

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

223

TABLE II. CONTINUED

Erodiophyllum F.Muell.

E. acanthocephalum Stapf

E. elderi F.Muell.

Isoetopsis Turcz.

I. graminifolia Turcz.

Kippistia F.Muell.

K. suaedifolia F.Muell.

Lagenifera Cass.

L. huegelii Benth.

L. stipitata (Labill.) Druce
Minuria DC.

M. cunninghamii (DC.) Benth.

M. gardneri Lander & R. Barry
M. integerrima (DC.) Benth.

M. leptophylla DC

Olearia Moench
O. adenolasia F.Muell.

O. algida N.A.Wakef.

O. argophylla F.Muell.

O. astroloba Lander & N.G. Walsh

O. astrotricha (F.Muell.)

F.Muell. ex Benth.

O. axillaris (DC.) F.Muell. ex Benth.

O. ciliata (Benth.) F.Muell. ex Benth.

O.ferresii (F.Muell.) F.Muell.
ex Benth.

n

2n

8

Solbrig et al. 1 964

16

Watanabe et al. 1996

17

Turner 1970

9

Short 1986;
Watanabe et al. 1996

9

18

Turner 1970;
Watanabe et al. 1996

9

18

Smith- White et al.
1970; Watanabe et
al. 1996

9

18

Turner 1970;
Watanabe et al. 1996

9

Watanabe et fl/. 1996

18

Watanabe et fl/. 1996

9

0-2Bs

18 +
1986;

Turner 1970; Short
Watanabe et
al. 1996

9

Turner 1970

18

Beuzenberg & Hair
1984

54

Solbrig eta/. 1964

9

Short in Lander &
Walsh 1989

9

Watanabe et al. 1 996

9

Solbrig eta/. 1964

9

Turner 1970;
Watanabe et al. 1996

9

Watanabe et a/. 1996

224

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short etal.

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n

2n

O.floribunda (Hook.f.) Benth.

9

Pai 1964

O.frostii (F.Muell.) J.H. Willis
O. humilis Lander

9

18

Beuzenberg & Hair
1984

Turner 1970, as
Olearia sp.; Short in
Lander 1989;
Watanabe et al. 1996

0. imbricata (Turcz.) Benth.

9

Watanabe et al. 1 996

0. muelleri (Sond.) Benth.

9

Turner 1970

O. pannosa Hook.

90

Beuzenberg & Hair
1984

O. phlogopappa (Labill.) DC. complex 9,18

Solbrig et al. 1 964;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

0. pimelioides (DC.) Benth.

9

18 +
0-2Bs

Turner 1970, and as
O. propinqua;
Watanabe et al. 1 996

O. plucheacea Lander

9

Short in Lander
1990; Watanabe et
al. 1996

O. ramulosa (Labill.) Benth. complex

9

Watanabe et al. 1996

O. rudis (Benth.) Benth.

9

Turner 1970;
Watanabe ct a/. 1996

O. stuartii (F.Muell.) F.Muell.
ex Benth

9

Short in Lander
1989; Watanabe et
al. 1996.

O. xerophila (F.Muell.) Benth.

9

Watanabe et a/. 1996

Olearia sp.

9

Watanabe et al.

1 996, syn. Eurybia
dampieri DC.

Solenogyne Cass.

S. bellidioides Cass.

9

Smith- White et al.
1970; Adams 1979

S. dominii L.G. Adams

9

18

Adams 1979;
Watanabe et a/. 1996

S. gunnii (Hook.f.) Cabrera

9

Adams 1979

Vittadinia A. Rich.
V. cuneata DC.

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

225

TABLE II. CONTINUED

n

2n

var. hirsuta N.T.Burb.

9

18

Watanabe et al. 1996

V. dissecta (Benth.) N.T.Burb.
var. hirta N.T.Burb.

9

Turner 1970, as V.
triloba & Vittadinia
sp.

V. gracilis (Hook.f.) N.T.Burb.

9

Watanabe et al. 1996

V. N.T.Burb.

9

Watanabe et al. 1996

V. pterochaeta (F.Muell.
ex benth.) J.M. Black

9

Watanabe et al. 1996

V. pustulata N.T.Burb.

9

Watanabe et al. 1996

V. sulcata N.T.Burb.

9

Watanabe et al. 1996

ERIGERON

Given (1973) and Given & Gray (1986) noted that Australian species of Erigeron
should be excluded from that genus. Nesom (1994a,b) has subsequently referred most
Australian species to three genera, i.e. lotasperma Nesom, Lagenithrix Nesom and
Pappochroma Labill. (syn. Lagenopappus Nesom), but has left the placement of E.
conyzoides F.Muell. unresolved. Cladistic studies (by PSS) in Australian Astereae do
not wholly support Nesom’s treatment and will be the subject of a future paper.

The alpine E. pappochroma complex {Lagenithrix & Pappochroma sensu Nesom)
seemingly has affinities with the Olearia-Celmisia complex (Given & Gray 1986) and
could be expected to have a base ofx = 9.

The count of 2n = 36 for the introduced E. karvinskianus is consistent with those
obtained by Montgomery & Yang (1960, as E. mucronatus DC.).

LAGENIFERA & SOLENOGYNE

Whether or not Solenogyne is deserving of generic rank or should be relegated to
synonymy under Lagenifera has been the subject of debate for some years (Drury 1974,
Adams 1979). They are here maintained as separate genera pending further work. All
species are perennials and tend to be found in mesic conditions. Our chromosome
number determinations, i.e. n = 9 and 2n = 18, are consistent with the observations of
previous workers (Smith- White et al. 1970, Turner 1970, Adams 1979).

KIPPISTIA & MINURIA

Eleven species are currently placed in this genus (Lander & Barry 1980b, Lander 1987b,
Short 1991) although one, M. macrorhiza, should possibly be reinstated as Eurybiopsis
(see below). All but one, M. annua (Tate) J.M. Black, are apparently perennial herbs or
small shrubs although several, including M. multiseta P.S. Short may be short lived. We
have confirmed earlier reports of « = 9 for M. cunninghamii and M. leptophylla (Turner
1970, Short 1986) and here record the tetraploid condition for M. integerrima. The
presence of B chromosomes is here reported for the first time in this genus.

Kippistia, a monotypic genus, at one time relegated to synonymy under Minuria
but reinstated by Lander & Barry (1980a), is seemingly very closely related to the latter
genus. K. suaedifolia is a small shrub with n = 9.

226

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et al.

OLEARIA

Olearia consists of about 180 species and occurs in Australia, New Guinea and New
Zealand. About 130 species occur in Australia (Lander 1992) and the genus is currently
under revision. All species are shrubs and the genus is widespread in alpine, temperate
and arid regions of Australia. Few species have been cytologically examined but our
data are consistent with the finding for New Zealand species that the base number is x =
9. However, most Australian species are diploids, a contrast to the situation in New
Zealand where only 12-, 14-, 32- and 48-ploid levels have been recorded (Beuzenberg &
Hair 1984). For the first time B chromosomes are also reported for this genus, having
been observed by us in O. pimelioides.

VITTADINIA, CAMPTACRA & EURYBIOPSIS

Burbidge (1982) revised Vittadinia and recognised 29 species, most of which are
confined to Australia. She segregated two further genera, describing ditypic Camptacra
(Lander 1987b) and reinstating monotypic Eurybiopsis. Lander (1987a) has sub-
sequently reduced Eurybiopsis to synonymy under Minuria although more recent work
by Wiggins (1990) suggests that the former genus should be maintained.

Chromosome counts are lacking for Camptacra and Eurybiopsis and until now for
all but one species of Vittadinia. Chromosome numbers are now known for seven
species (Table II). Of these, three are, or possibly are, annuals. All seven species have n
= 9. One of these is more or less confined to temperate areas, the others extend from
temperate to arid areas.

Base numbers and comparisons

With the exception of Isoetopsis, which possibly should be placed in the Gnaphalieae
vBremer & Humphries 1993), ditypic Erodiophyllum, monotypic Ceratogyne, and the
essentially arid-zone genus Calotis, all Australian genera for which data are available
have one or more species with u = 9 or a base number that is a multiple of 9. Therefore,
it seems reasonable to conclude that x = 9 is the base number for the Australian
Astereae, a conclusion that is in keeping with previous findings for the tribe Astereae
(Raven et al. 1960, Solbrig et al. 1964, 1969). Following a survey of mainly Northern
Hemisphere genera (38 out of 53) and some Southern Hemisphere genera (22 out of 65)
Solbrig et al. (1964) also noted that many species with low chromosome numbers (« = 4
& 5) belong to mainly annual genera that are concentrated in southwestern North
America and that low numbers were probably correlated with dry habitats. As noted
above, the same correlations are apparent in annual species of Brachyscome ‘subgenus
Eubrachyscome' , Calotis and Ceratogyne. Chromosomal variation in Australian
Astereae is clearly similar to that found in North America. In fact, although fewer
chromosome number determinations were available to him. Turner (1970) previously
suggested this to be the case, not just for the tribe Astereae, but the entire family.

Acknowledgement

Research was supported by grants (nos. 04041071 and 07041 140) in Aid for Scientific
Research and Field Research from the Ministry of Education, Science and Culture,
Japan.

References

Adams, L.G. (1979). A review of the genus Sotenogyne (Asteraceae) in Australia and New Zealand. Bnmonia
2: 43-65.

Beuzenberg, E.J. & Hair, J.B. (1984). Contributions to a chromosome atlas of the New Zealand flora - 27
Compositae. New Zealand Journal of Botany 22: 353-356.

Bremer, K. (1987). Tribal interrelationships of the Asteraceae. Cladistics 3: 210-253.

Bremer, K. & Humphries, C.J. (1993). Generic monograph of the Asteraceae-Anthemideae. Bulletin of the
Natural History Museum London (Botany) li: 71-177.

Bruhl, J.J. & Quinn, C.J. (1990). Cypsela anatomy in the ‘Cotuleae’ (Asteraceae-Anthemideae). Botanical
Journal of the Linnean Society 102: 37-59.

Chromosome number determinations in Astereae

227

Burbidge, N.T. (1982). A revision of Vittadinia A. Rich. Compositae) together with reinstatement of
Eiirvhiopsis DC. and deseription of a new genus, Camptacra. Bnmonia 5: 1-72.

Carter, C.R. (1978a). The cytology of Brachycome. 11. The subgenus Metahrachycome: a general survey.
Australian Journal ofBotanv 26: 699-706.

Carter, C.R. (1978b). The cytology of Brachycome. 8. The inheritance, frequency and distribution of B chro-
' mosomes in B. dichromosomatica (n = 2), fonnerly included in B. lineariloba. Chromosoma (Berlin).
67: 109-121.

Carter, C.R. (1978c). Taxonomy of the Brachycome lineariloba complex (Asteraceae). Telopea 1: 387-393.

Carter! C.R. & Smith-White, S. (1972). The cytology of Brachycome lineariloba. 3. Accessory chromosomes.
Chromosoma (Berlin) 39: 361-379.

Chouksanova, N.A., Sveshnikova, L.l. & Alrandrova, T.U.(1968). Data on karyology of the family
Compositae Giseke. Citologija 10: 198-206.

Davis, G.L. (1948). Revision of the genus Brachycome Cass. Part. 1. Australian species. Proceedings of the
Linnean Society of New South Wales 13: \A2-24] .

Davis, G.L. (1949). Revision of the genus Brachycome Cass. 111. Description of three new Australian species,
and some new locality records. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 74: 145-152.

Davis, G.L. (1955). Supplementary notes on the genus Brachycome Cass. Proceedings of the Linnean Society
of New South Wales 79: 203-210.

Davis, G.L. (1959). Two new Australian species of Brachycome Cass. Muelleria 1 : 111-113.

De Jong, D.C.D. (1963). Documented chromosome numbers in plants. Madrono 17: 1 16-1 17.

Drury, D.G. (1974). A broadly based taxonomy of Lagenifera sect. Lagenifera and Solenogyne (Compositae-
Astereac) with an account of their species in New Zealand. New Zealand Journal of Botany 12:
365-395.

Given, D.R. (1973). Damnamenia gen. nov. A new subantaretic genus allied to Celmisia Cass. (Astereae-
Compositae). New Zealand Journal of Botany 1 1 : 785-796.

Given, D.R. & Gray, M. (1986). Celmisia (Compositae-Astereae) in Australia and New Zealand. In Barlow,
B.A. (ed.), Flora and fauna of alpine Australia. (CSIRO: Melbourne), pp. 451-470.

Gupta, P.K. (1969). Cytological investigations in some Indian Compositae. Cytologia 34: 429-438.

Gupta, R.C. & Gill, B.S. (1989). Cytopalynology of north and central Indian Compositae. Journal ofCytolog)’
and Genetics 24: 96-105.

Hair, J.B. (1980). Contributions to a chromosome atlas of the New Zealand flora - 20 Celmisia and
Damnamenia (Compositae). New Zealand Journal of Botany 18: 553-558.

Hnatiuk, R.J. (1990). Census of Australian vascular plants. (AGPS: Canberra).

Keighery, G.J. (1978), Chromosome numbers in Western Australian plants 1. Journal of the Royal Society of
Western Australia (>f):

Kyhos, D.W., Carter, C.R. and Smith-White, S. (1977). The cytology of Brachycome lineariloba. 1. Meiosis
in natural hybrids and race relationships. Chromosoma (Berlin) 65: 81-101.

Lander, N.S. (1987a). New combinations in Camptacra N.Burb, (Asteraceae, Astereae). Nuytsia 6: 61 .

Lander, N.S. (1987b). New combinations in Minuria DC. (Asteraceae, Astereae). Nuytsia 6: 63-66.

Lander, N.S. (1989). Taxonomy of Olearia stuartii (Asteraceae: Astereae) and allied species, Nuytsia 1: 25-36

Lander, N.S. (1990). New species of Olearia (Asteraceae: Astereae) endemic to Western Australia. Nuytsia 1:
141-159.

Lander, N.S. (1992). Olearia. In Harden, G.J. (ed.), Flora of New South Wales. (NSW University Press:
Kensington.). Vol, 3, pp. 185- 197.

Lander, N.S. & Barry, R. (1980a). Reinstatement of the genus Kippistia F.Muell. (Asteraceae, Astereae).
Nuytsia 3: 2\5-2\9.

Lander, N.S. & Barry, R. (1980b). A review of the genus Minuria DC. (Asteraceae, Astereae). Nuytsia 3:
221 237.

Lander, N.S. & Walsh, N.G. (1989). Olearia astroloba (Asteraceae: Astereae), a new speeies endemic to
Victoria. Mwe//cria 7: 123-125.

Montgomery, F.H. & Yang, S. (1960). Cytological studies in the genus Erigeron. Canadian Journal ofBotanv
38: 381-386.

Nagl, W. & Pfeifer, M. (1988). Karyological stability and microevolution of a cell suspension culture of
Brachycome dichromosomatica (Asteraceae). Plant Systematics and Evolution 158: 133-139.

Nesom, G.L, (1994a). Taxonomie dispersal of Australian Erigeron (Asteraceae: Astereae). Phvtologia lb:
143-159.

Nesom, G.L. (1994b). Pappochroma Rafin. is the correct generic name for Erigeron pappochroma Labill.
Phytologia 76: 426

Pai, O.J. (1964). Some chromosome numbers of cultivated plants. Journal of Heredity. 55: 186-192.

Raven, P.H., Solbrig, O.T., Kyhos, D.W. & Snow, R. (I960). Chromosome numbers in Compositae 1.
Astereae. American Journal ofBotanv 47 : 1 24- 1 32.

Short, P.S. (1986). Chromosome number reports in Australian Asteraceae. Taxon. 35: 610.

Short, P.S. (1988). Two new species of Brachyscome Cass. (Compositae: Astereae), with a note on the orthog-
raphy of the generic name. Muelleria 6: 389-398.

Short, P.S. (1991). A new species of Minuria DC. (Asteraceae: Astereae). Muelleria 1: 361-367.

Short, P.S. & Watanabe, K. (1993). Two new species of Brachyscome Cass. (Asteraceae: Astereae) from
eastern Australia. Australian Systematic Botany 6: 335-342.

Smith-White, S. (1968). Brachycome lineariloba: a species for experimental cytogenetics. Chromosoma
(Berlin). 23: 359-364.

Smith-White, S, & Carter, C.R. (1970). The cytology of Brachycome lineariloba. 2. The chromosome species
and their relationships. Chromosoma (Berlin) 30: 129-153.

228

K. Watanabe, P.S. Short et al.

Smith-White, S. & Carter, C.R. (1981). The maintenance of B chromosomes in Brachycome dichromosomati-
ca. in Atchley, W.R. & Woodruff, D. (eds). Evolution and Speciation. Essavs in honour of M. J. D
White. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge), pp. 335-355.

Smith-White, S., Carter, C.R. and Stace, H.M. (1970). The cytology of Brachvcome. 1. The subgenus
Euhrachycome: a general survey. Australian Journal of Botany 18: 99-125.

Solbrig, O.T., Anderson, L.C., Kyhos, D.W., Raven, P.H. & Rudenberg, L. (1964). Chromosome number in
the Compositae. Astereae. American Journal of Botany 51:513-519.

Solbrig (D.T., Anderson, L.C., Kyhos, D.W. & Raven, P.H. (1969). Chromosome number in the Compositae
Vll. American Journal of Botany 56: 348-353.

Stace, H.M. (1981). Biosystematics of the Brachyscome aculeata (Labili.) Less, sensu G. L. Davis species
complex (Compositae: Astereae). Australian Journal of Botany 29: 425-440.

Stace, H.M. (1978). Cytoevolution in the genus Calotis R.Br. (Compositae: Astereae). Australian Journal of
Botany 26: 287-307.

Stace, H.M. (1982). Calotis (Compositae), a Pliocene arid zone genus? In Barker, W. R. & Greenslade P. J.
M. (eds). Evolution oj the flora and fauna of arid Australia. (Peacock Publns: Frewville). pp. 357-367

Turner, B.L. (1970). Chromosome numbers in the Compositae. xii. Australian species. American Journal
5oto/iy 57: 382-389.

Watanabe, K., Carter, C.R. and Smith-White, S. (1975). 'The cytology of Brachvcome lineariloba. 5.
Chromosome relationships and phylogeny of the race A cytodemes (n = 2). Chromosoma (Berlin) 52:
383-397.

Watanabe, K., Carter, C.R. and Stnith-White, S. (1976). The cytology of Brachvcome lineariloba. 6.
Asynchronous chromosome condensation and meiotic behaviour in B. lineariloba A (n = 2) x S
campylocarpa A (n = 4). Chromosoma (Berlin) 57: 3 1 9-33 1 .

Watanabe, K., Carter, C.R. and Smith-White, S. (1985). The cytology of Brachycome lineariloba. 9.
Chromosomal heterogeneity in natural populations of cytodeme C (2n = 16). Canadian Journal of
Genetics and Cytology 27: 410-420.

Watanabe. K. & Short, P.S. (1992). Chromosome number determinations in Brachvscome Cass. (Asteraceae:
M^ereae) with comments on species delimitation, relationships and cytogeography. Muelleria 7:

Watanabe, K., Short, P.S., Kosuge, K. & Smith-White, S. (1991). The cytology of Brachvscome Cass.
(Asteraceae: Astereae). 11. Hybridization between B. goniocarpa Sond. & F. Muell. ex’Sond. (n = 4)
and Brachyscome dichromosomatica C. R. Carter (n = 2). Australian Journal Botany 39: 475-485.

Watanabe, K, and Smith-White, S. (1987). Phyletic and evolutionary relationships of Brachvcome lineariloba
6 (ComposiXao). Plant Systematics and Evolution. 157:121-141.

Wiggins, D.J. (1990). A cladistic analysis of the generic concepts of Vittadinia A. Richard (Asteraceae-
Astereae). Unpublished B.Sc.(Hons.) thesis. University of New South Wales.

Revised paper received 20 April 1995; last update 24 November 1995.

Muelleria 9: 229-237 (1996)

Elaeocarpus (Elaeocarpaceae) endocarps from the Early to Middle
Miocene Yallourn Formation of Eastern Australia

Andrew C. Rozefelds' & C. Christophel’

' Tasmanian Herbarium, G.P.O. Box 252C, Hobart, 7001, Tasmania, Australia.

^ Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, G.P.O. Box 496, Adelaide, 5005, South
Australia, Australia.

ABSTRACT

Elaeocarpus cerebriformis sp nov. is described, from near the base of the middle to late
Miocene Yallourn Fonnation of south-eastern Victoria. The ellipsoid, usually trilocular
endocarp, and bastionate external ornamentation of the endocarp wall suggest affinities
with an undescribed extant taxon from montane areas of north eastern Queensland.

Introduction

The Elaeocarpaceae is a moderately large, essentially southern hemisphere family with
about 520 species in nine genera (M. Goode pers comm. 1995). Fruit morphology is
variable in the family with dehiscent ± woody fruits (Sloanea, Peripentadenia,
Dubouzetia), berries (Sericolea, Aristotelia), and drupes (Elaeocarpus, Aceratium). The
endocarp in Aceratium is generally weakly lignified and has prominent and persistent
mesocarp fibres, while in Elaeocarpus the endocarps are generally woody, strongly
ornamented and lack persistent mesocarp fibres. An exception is E. johnsonii F.Muell.
which has persistent mesocarp fibres, and the endocarp is not woody. The fossil fruits
described here are hard, woody, strongly ornamented drupes and therefore are referable
to Elaeocarpus.

Elaeocarpus has been recognised as a ubiquitous element of the Tertiary floras of
eastern Australia, because of the distinctive morphology of the endocarps, and also
because the woody endocarps are robust and survive fossilisation (Kirchheimer 1935,
Selling 1950, Rozefelds 1990a, Blackburn & Sluiter 1994, Rozefelds & Christophel
1996). The affinities of many of the fossil endocarps that have been compared with, or
referred to Elaeocarpus, remain poorly studied. The present material was collected from
near the base of the Yallourn Formation. It was identified as Elaeocarpus by Blackburn
(1985), and mentioned by Blackburn & Sluiter (1994, p. 346) who also commented that
pollen types that are comparable with the genus Elaeocarpus are common throughout
the Yallourn and Morwell coal seams’. Christophel (1994) also illustrated these same
specimens but did not examine the systematic placement of this material in more detail.
The Yallourn Formation is considered to be Early to Middle Miocene, and is part of the
Triporopollenites bellus palynological Zone (Blackburn & Sluiter 1994). Holdgate et al.
(in press) suggest the Yallourn Seam covers a period of about a million years from 16.5
to 15.5 m. y., at the Early-Middle Miocene boundary (A. P. Kershaw pers comm. 1995).

In this paper, the systematic relationships of this taxon are examined, based upon a
comparative study of the endocarps of extant Australian and New Zealand taxa
(Rozefelds 1990b, Rozefelds & Christophel in. prep.). A study of endocarps of extant
Elaeocarpus species from New Zealand and Australia (Rozefelds 1990b, Rozefelds &
Christophel in prep.) showed that endocarp morphology is highly variable (Table 2).
Similarities in endocarp morphology between the fossil and extant Elaeocarpus taxa are
recognised and the biogeographical implications of these fossil taxa are discussed.

Materials and methods

The material studied is preserved as ‘charcoalified’ fruits. Prior to photographing the

229

230

Andrew C. Rozefelds & D.C. Christophel

GO

Ogo

O

T3

C

—

>>

X O

Cri

UJ

H

<

Li,

o

LU

u

D

o

on

Q

Z

<

O

H

U

LJj

o

Cj

t

Zj

<

u

o

•r^

W

^ ON
lo

so •

(N <

o

J

• '■-Sri
55 "O
> X
DiX

*0 o
0,) so
^ >
c cZ

(U [T

Q

LiJ

2

<

X

in

ac

in

H

<

Z

<

H

X

in

Li,

o

in c
j o

CQ X

^4

CO

D:^

a

m

'O

(N

TD

C

03

>.

X

t4

GO

D:^ o

ou

-V c/5

Ss

^,(L>

^ g

g'U

o<

W

<C o

i-

J <

J= O

C '-g
o _5

^ -O
■O 'C
o H

a «

Id

Q, <-

Z)

1 )
- o
o >-

Qi K)

U. °
GO Z

6«

t4

CO

CZ

a

o^

so

cn

>^

03

i-i

a

X

Os

O

(N

00

m

O

03

3

O

GO

<V

Z

uT

o3

X)

00

c

'E

X

<D

B

3

a

s:

«5

CO

cz

a

c

o

c/5

i,

(D

T3

C

oJ

CO

X

lO

CO

b

b

o

os

<

OjO

c

'ob

oc

o

X

3

X

iZ

GO

OC

tij

TABLE 2. ORNAMENTATION TYPES IN SELECTED EXTANT AND FOSSIL ELAEOCARPUS SPECIES, BASED UPON ROZEFELDS AND CHRISTOPHEL (IN PREP.)

Ornamentation Description of Extant Australian species Fossil taxon with

Types Ornamentation in T. S. with ornamentation type ornamentation type

Baculate Rod-like, the maximum diameter of rod E. arnhemiciis F.Muell.

is less than height

Elaeocarpus endocarps from the Early to Middle Miocene

231

^ 2
N

0 - 0 )

(V = N
^ O

.§ i
i ■5^’^

^ ^

ki Ui kj U w

B

d o

<D ^

3

'g ■§
5 ^

6b "x 5"
ki ki ki

t/5 C/5

o

'

C3

<U (U c/3

£ OJ -o
.2 X) (u

to 0 "5

X c ^
(L> B ^
— .22 *1^

(tt "O c/5

o ^ ^

f- X c/5
T2 0>

X3 C y
V— o3 O

0>

-w

eo

lU

N

O

CtC

s

u

^ .

-o

c -
—

>s

cu s!)
^ -2

>x
<U ^

2

CQ •

S £

Li: c/5

■>5

£ '5 -2
^ ^

ki ki ki ki ki

c ^

o t-

<u £

D, S

-O

dj

^ X

o

Q-

0

-o X
o %

C s

cd ~~~.

-T-

it §■

LJ Lt|

o

Q,

CX)

u

O

-o

CU

■o

c

3

O

X

3

c/3

(U I

3

*rt ^

: ^ c/5

^ a

s g.s

u-i oi

. (U

l§t

■2 d-.-

^ c/l ^

ki ttj u

03

u.

mi tH -C

<u a •-
2 E E
2

cd O tz?

S S ^

Q § ”§
Co

ki ki ki

c

o

D-

<D

'O

TJ

<U

"O

D

X

u

3

CL) ^

-a X
§>

. X

1^-
^ U

U ■

"O

c

3

X g

I I I I?

ki ki ki ki

o

o

s

c/5

H

u

>s

3

ca

Lli

s:

ki

3

X

OX)

o

-o

QJ

-a

c

3

0

_3

01

<L>

t

dj

3

232

Andrew C. Rozefelds & D.C. Christophel

fossil endocarps, the material was whitened with ammonium chloride to highlight
surface features and ornamentation. Modern endocarps were photographed without
whitening. SEM examination of extant endocarps yielded few additional insights that
were not available from examining the material with light microscopy. Comparative
extant material of North Queensland Elaeocarpus species was provided by CSIRO,
Atherton (QRS) and Brisbane (BRI) and the material examined is listed in Table 1.
Fossil material is lodged in the Department of Botany, University of Adealide

Results

SYSTEMATICS
Family: Elaeocarpaceae
Elaeocarpus L.

Type species Elaeocarpus serratus L.

Elaeocarpus cerebriformis Rozefelds and Christophel sp. nov.

Elaeocarpus sp. in Blackburn, 1985, p. 49-50, pi 28, a, b, d. Elaeocarpus sp. in
Christophel, 1994, fig. 2.10E.

DIAGNOSIS

Distinguished from other Elaeocarpus species by the following combination of charac-
ters: ellipsoid, 10.1-12.2 mm long, 7.0-8. 1 mm wide, three-partite endocarps; bastion-
ate ornamentation, 0.7-0. 8 mm high.

DESCRIPTION

Woody endocarp, ellipsoid in lateral view, with three sutures, less frequently two
sutures, 10.1-12.2 mm long by 7.0-8. 1 mm wide. Apex and base of endocarp rounded in
lateral view. Prominent bastionate ornamentation (0.7-0. 8 mm high), consisting of irreg-
ularly shaped ridges which arise perpendicularly from base of endocarp wall, giving a
cerebriform appearance. Wall of endocarp 1.1-1. 2 mm thick. Sutures recessed, below
ornamentation. Locule in UAY004 is 5.6 mm long by 3.4 mm wide. Seed anatropous,
ellipsoid in lateral view, apex broadly rounded.

holotype: UAYOOl. type locality: Yalloum Fonnation, Yalloum Coal Mine, Latrobe
Valley, Victoria (38°12’S, 146°20’E). (Fig. 1)

ETYMOLOGY

For the cerebrifonn, brain-like external appearance of the endocarps.

MATERIAL EXAMINED

UAYOOl-004, Yalloum Formation, Latrobe Valley, Victoria. (Fig. 1)

REMARKS

The endocarp in Elaeocarpus cerebriformis (Fig. 2) is ellipsoid in outline, with usually
three recessed sutures and bastionate ornamentation. The three sutures indicate that the
endocarp was derived from a three locular ovary. In the developed fnnt only one locule
is evident as the other two have been compressed by growth of the fertile locule. The
wall of the seed is preserved but details of the internal structure of the seed are not
preserved. Groups of taxa within Elaeocarpus can be identified by their endocarp
morphology, particularly ornamentation types and endocarp shape (Table 2). The
various ornamentation types are given in Table 2. Three extant Australian species
have bastionate ornamentation: E. grandis F.MuelL, E. williamsiamis Guymer, and an
undescribed taxon (Elaeocarpus sp. nov. 1, Coode 1984) from north eastern Queensland
(Fig. 1; Table 2). The first two taxa have spherical endocarps and hence differ from the
ellipsoid endocarps of the fossil material being described here. Elaeocarpus grandis also
differs from E. cerebriformis in that the non-fertile locules are not obscured by growth
of the fertile locule (Fig. 4A). The ellipsoid form of the usually trilocular endocarp, and

Elaeocarpus cndocarps from the Early to Middle Miocene

233

bastionate ornamentation suggest
affinities with Elaeocarpus sp. nov. 1
from north eastern Queensland. The
endocarps of Elaeocarpus sp nov. 1
differ from E. cerebrifbrmis in being
larger c. 14 x 10 mm (Coode 1984),
and the ornamentation is also more
pronounced i.e. (0.7-1. 5 mm high).
Elaeocarpus sp nov. 1 (Sanderson 6,
Fig. 3) is restricted to montane heath
and rain forest, at Thornton Peak, and
the Windsor Tableland, in north-
eastern Queensland (Coode 1984).

Coode (1984) was uncertain of
the infra-generic placement of
Elaeocarpus sp. nov. 1, because
flowers were not known. He com-
pared it to E. coorangooloo using
fruit and seed characters. The endo-
carp of E. coorangooloo, like
Elaeocarpus sp. nov. 1 is ellipsoid in
lateral view. It differs from E. cere-
hriformis, in the more rounded,
verrucate ornamentation of the endo-
carps, and usually bilocular endocarp.
Elaeocarpus arnhemicus is also
comparable to E. cerebriformis in
that it has ellipsoid endocarps, with
prominent processes. It also differs
from E. cerebriformis in having a
bilocular endocarp, and the processes
are baculate in form.

Coode (1984) emphasised the
importance of seed characters, in
defining groups within Elaeocarpus,
particularly whether the embryo was
curved or straight. The wall of the
seed is preserved in E. cerebriformis
but it is not possible to determine
whether the embryo was curved or
straight (Fig. 4A). Elaeocarpus
arnhemicus, E. coorangooloo and E.
sp. nov. 1 all have straight embryos.
It would seem likely therefore that E. cerebriformis also had a straight embryo. The
alternative possibility is that the trilocular condition in E. cerebriformis implies affini-
ties to the E. foveolatus group or E. ruminatus, although the ornamentation in these taxa
differs in being smooth or echinate (Table 2, Figs. 4B & 4C ).

Two fossil taxa, E. mackayii (F.Muell.) Kirchheimer and E. spackmaniorum
Rozefelds, have bastionate ornamentation and could be compared to E. cerebriformis
(Table 2). These taxa both differ from E. cerebriformis in being spherical in shape.
Elaeocarpus spackmaniorum also differs from E. cerebriformis in that the non-fertile
locules are not obscured by the development of the fertile locule.

Fig. 1 . Fossil record of fossil Elaeocarpus cerebriformis
and the modem distribution of extant Elaeocarpus sp. nov.
is arrowed.

Discussion

Elaeocarpaceae pollen of uncertain affinities were recorded from the Latrobe Valley
Coal Measures (Luly et ai, 1980, Sluiter & Kershaw 1982). Blackburn & Sluiter (1994)

234

Andrew C. Rozefclds & D.C. Christophel

Fig. 2. Elaeocarpus cerehriformis from Yallourn Formation, Yallourn Coal Mine, Victoria, a - Holotype
(UAYOOl ) and paratype (UAY002) in matrix, Flolotype lower specimen, b - Holotype enlarged to show
details of prominent bastionate ornamentation, c - Internal view of part of endocarfi (UAY004) showing
anatropous seed in place, d - External view of part of endocarp (UAY003) showing bastionate ornamen-
tation. c-h - External and internal views of parts of the endocarps of paratype (UAY004), illustrating the
variation in ornamentation within one endocarp. Scale bars = 0.25 cm.

Elaeocarpus endocarps from the Early to Middle Miocene

235

Fig. 3. Elaeocarpus sp. nov. 1 (Sanderson 6). a - Mesosutural view, b - Sutural View, b - Apical view. Scale
bars = 0.5 cm.

Fig. 4. a - Elaeocarpus cerebriformis. Drawing of part of endocarp of UAY004, showing seed in place
in locule, and an adjacent compressed locule. b - Longitudinal section through endocarp of E.
ruminatus with seed removed showing the attachment scar, c - Seed of E. ruminatus showing
attachment scar (arrowed) and raphe, (e, endocarp; x, compressed locule; s, seed; r, raphe). Scale
bars = 0.25 cm.

236

Andrew C. Rozefelds & D.C. Christophel

considered that some of Elaeocarpaceae pollen types were comparable with
Elaeocarpus. The fossil endocarps, and probably the pollen, indicate that Elaeocarpus
was a ubiquitous element of the Yalloum palaeoflora.

Elaeocarpus in Australia is essentially a rain forest genus restricted to mesic forest
communities. This fruit record would support the existing palynological literature that
rain forest communities were present in the Early to Middle Miocene in the Yalloum
area (Sluiter & Kershaw 1982). Interseam clays at the base of the Yalloum Formation
have also yielded fmits i.e. Menispermaceae, Vitaceae and Proteaceae with rain forest
affinities (Rozefelds 1995).

A diverse range of ornamentation types occurs in the endocarps of extant
Elaeocarpus species in Australia (Table 1). Most of these ornamentation types are
represented by taxa in north eastern Queensland, which is the centre of diversity for the
genus in Australia. Fossil taxa with a range of ornamentation types have also been
recognised in mid Tertiary deposits in eastern Australia. The new fossil taxon E. cere-
briformis, and previously described E. spackmaniorum Rozefelds and E. mackayii
(F^Muell.) Kirchheimer, have bastionate ornamentation. Elaeocarpus cunningii
Rozefelds has echinate ornamentation, and Rozefelds & Christophel (1996) are describ-
ing taxa with punctate ornamentation (Table 2). The extensive fossil record of
Elaeocarpus in Australia, as exemplified by the diversity of fmit morphotypes in the
mid-Tertiary, indicates that the genus was morphologically diverse at this time. The
fossil record of Elaeocarpus in southern and eastern Australia also suggests that mon-
tane and lowland rain forests near Cairns, in north eastern Queensland, are a refugia for
taxa with affinities to these mid-Tertiary species.

A number of endemic Elaeocarpus species in north eastern Queensland (e.g. E. sp.
nov., E. linsmithii, E. thelmae, E. jolmsonii) are restricted to montane habitats.
Endemism is common in montane floras in tropical and subtropical regions e.g. Hawaii
and Afro-alpine floras of eastern African mountains (Stott 1981, Cox & Moore 1980). A
high level of endemicity also occurs in Elaeocarpus in New Guinea and New Caledonia
and this is probably related to the physiographic and edaphic variation of these islands
(Coode 1978, Tirel 1982). Stott (1981) presented two hypotheses to explain the origin of
mountain endemics; i.e. that the isolated conditions in montane floras, prevents inflow
of potential competitors and evolution is accelerated, and the relictual populations dif-
ferentiate through adaptive radiation and vicariance. Alternatively, Stott (1981) pro-
posed that these relictual floras have been stranded on mountain tops through climatic
change.

The most closely related taxon to Elaeocarpus cerebriformis occurs in montane
rain forests in north eastern Queensland. The Yalloum Formation was a low altitude
depositional environment, and the presence of the closest analogue in high altitude mon-
tane forests suggests possible altitudinal change, and reduction in range, and/or migra-
tion since the mid-Miocene. Reduction in range and/or migration of taxa, and altitudinal
displacement, can be correlated generally with the increasing aridity of the climate from
the Miocene onwards (Sluiter & Kershaw 1982).

Acknowledgements

We wish to thank the staff of the Museum of Victoria for access to collections. The
Museum of Victoria also provided funding for our visit. Extant endocarp material used
for comparative research was provided by Atherton (QRS) and Brisbane (BRI). We
thank Drs B. P. M. Hyland and G. Guymer for making this material available. Drs M.
Coode and A. P. Kershaw made useful comments on an earlier draft. Dr G. Kantvilas
also provided advice that improved the manuscript.

References • •

Blackburn, D.T. (1985). Palaeohotany of the Yalloum and Morwell coal seams. (State Electricity

Commission of Victoria, Palaeobotany Project Report No. 3). (unpublished) , dc

Blackburn, D.T. & Sluiter, I.R.K. (1994). The Oligo-Miocene coal floras of south eastern Australia. In K.S.

Elaeocarpus endocarps from the Early to Middle Miocene

237

Hill (ed.). Historv of the Australian Vegetation: Cretaceous to Recent. (Cambridge University Press:
Cambridge.) pp. 328-367.

Christophel, D.C. 1994. Prehistory of the Flora of Victoria. In D.B. Foreman & N.G. Walsh (eds). Flora of
Victoria. Vol. I. Introduction. (Inkata Press: Melbourne.) pp. 3-23.

Coode, M.J.E. (1978). A conspectus of Elacocarpaceae in Papuasia. Brunonia 1 : 131-302.

Coode. M.J.E. (1984). Elaeocarpus in Australia and New Zealand. Kew Bulletin 39(3): 509-586.

Cox, C.B. and Moore, P.D. 1980. Biogeography an ecological and evolutionary approach. (Blackwell
Scientific Publications: Oxford.)

Holdgate, G.R. Kershaw A. P. & Sluiter. I.R.K. (1995). Sequence stratigraphic analysis and the origins of
Tertiary brown coal lithotypes, Latrobe Valley, Gippsland Basin, Australia. International Journal of
Coal Geology (not seen).

Kirchheimer, F. (l’935). Palaobotanische Mitteilungen 11. Das Vorkommen von Elaeocarpus L. in den
begrabenen Goldseifen Australiens. Sonder Ahdruck Zentralblatt f. min Abt. B. 5: 178-183.

Luly, J., Sluiter, I.R.K. & Kershaw, A.P. (1980). Pollen studies of Tertiary brown coals: preliminary analyses
of lithotypes within the Latrobe Valley, Victoria. Monash University Publications in Geography. No
23.

Rozefelds, A.C. (1990a). A mid-Tertiary rain forest flora from Capella, central Queensland. In J.G. Douglas &
D.C. Christophel (eds) Proceedings of the Third International Organization on Pulaeobotany
Symposium 1988. (A-Z Printers: Melbourne.) pp. 123-136.

Rozefelds, A.C. (1990b). A taxonomic study of extant and fossil fruits of the genus Elaeocarpus
(Elaeocarpaceae) in Australia and New Zealand. Unpublished Honours Thesis, Botany Department,
University of Adelaide.

Rozefelds, A.C. (1995). Miocene Wilkinsonia fruits (Hicksbeachiinae, Proteaceae) from the base of the
Yallourn Formation, Latrobe Valley, Victoria. Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of
Tasmania 129: 59-62.

Rozefelds, A.C. & Christophel, D.C. (1996). Elaeocarpus (Elaeocarpaceae) endocarps from the
Oligo-Miocene of eastern Australia. Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania.

Rozefelds, A.C. & Christophel, D.C. (in prep). Endocarp morphology of Elaeocarpus species from Australia
and New Zealand.

Selling, O.H. (1950). Some Tertiary plants from Australia. Svensk Botani.sk Tidskrift 44 (4): 551-561.

Sluiter. I.R. & Kershaw, A.P. (1982). The nature of late Tertiary vegetation in Australia. Alcheringa 6:
211 - 222 .

Stott. P. (1981). Historical plant geography. (George Allen and Unwin Ltd: London.)

Tirel, C. (1982). Elaeocarpaceae. Flora de la Nouvelle Caledonie et Dependances. (Museum D'Historie
Naturelle: Paris.) pp. 3-124.

Revised paper received 14 August 1995.

9 : 239-254 ( 1996 )

An annotated list of the taxa of fungi in the published Australian
papers of H.J. Swart

J.A. Simpson' & C.A. Grgurinovic-

Research Division, State Forests of N.S.W., P.O. Box 100, Beecroft, 21 19, New South
, Wales, Australia.

Australian Biological Resources Study, G.P.O. Box 636, Canberra, 2601, Australian
Capital Tendtory, Australia.

ABSTRACT

The taxa of fungi in the papers on Australian fungi by Dr H.J. Swart are listed in
alphabetical order. Subsequent changes in classification or nomenclature are noted.
Pathogens are listed also under hosts. One new combination is made, namely.
Verm ispori urn sam iieli i.

Introduction

Between 1966 and 1989 Dr Haring (‘Harry’) Johannes Swart was employed as a
mycologist in the School of Botany, at The University of Melbourne. In those years
he published alone or with various co-authors 42 papers on aspects of Australian
mycology. His particular interest became the leaf-inhabiting fungi of the native plants of
south-eastern Australia where he made an outstanding contribution (Parbery, 1994). Dr
Swart published the results of his Australian studies only in the Transactions of the
British Mycological Society. Though generally short the papers were wide ranging and
dealt with a very large number of taxa. Swart & Williamson (1983) also published a
recipe for Eucalyptus agar though it does not seem to have been widely used. To
facilitate reference to this invaluable literature by mycologists, ecologists, and those
concerned about biodiversity in Australia, we have prepared an annotated list of the
fungal taxa referred to in the published papers of Dr Swart.

There have been substantial changes in recent years in concepts of many of the taxa
studied by Swart e.g. the Monochaetia, Pestalotia, Seimatosporium complex (Nag Raj
1993), Leotiales (Spooner 1987), pyrenomycetous ascomycetes (Barr, 1990, 1994) and
bitunicate ascomycetes where Swart followed the classification of Muller & von Arx
(1962) and von Arx & Muller (1975). We have attempted to use the most up to date
nomenclature. Order and family have been included for ascomycete genera using the
classification of Eriksson & Hawksworth (1993). However, orders and families have
been omitted for the Dueteromycotina. We have also listed pathogens reported by Swart
under the name of the host species but using the nomenclature of Chapman (1991 ).

Taxa in bold are described and usually beautifully, illustrated. Numbers in bold
refer to the volume number of Transactions of the British Mycological Society’-, lower
case numbers give the first page in each paper where a species or one of its synonyms is
cited. Names of authors of plant names are abbreviated according to Brummitt & Powell
(1992).

Fungi

Alatospora acuminata Ingold 86; 497.

Allelochaeta gaubae Petr. = Diploceras dilophosporum.

Alternaria brassicicola (Schwein.) Wiltshire 60: 129.

Amerostege latitans (Sacc.) Theiss. = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Amphichaeta europaea Grove = Seimatosporium hysterioides.

Amphichaeta grevilleae Loos = Sarcostroma grevilleae. Nag Raj (1993) did not accept

239

240

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

Swart s opinion ( 72 : 405) that A. grevilleae is a synonym of Seimatosporium
kennedyae.

Amphichaeta kennedyae McAlpine = Sarcostroma kennedvae
Anguillospora crassa Ingold 86: 497.

Anixiopsis fiilvescens (Cooke) de Vries var. stercoraria (Hansen) de Vries =
Aphanoasciis fiilvescens.

Anthracostroma persooniae (Henn.) Petr. (Dothideales) 84 : 733 . Teleomorph of
Camarosporula persooniae. The family placement of Anthracostroma Petr is
uncertain.

Aorta Cif 87: 99.

Aphanoasciis fiilvescens (Cooke) Apinis (Onygenales: Onygenaceae) 79- 508 The
genus Ascophanus Zukal was revised by Cano & Guarro ( 1 990).

Aphanostigme Syd. (Dothideales: Dimeriaceae) 91 : 4^56.

Apiothyrium arcticiim Petr, (order uncertain: Hypone'ctriaceae) 90: 449.

Apiothyrium tasmanicum H.J.Swart (Hyponectriaceae) 90 : 448. The Hyponectriaceae
are included m either the Xylariales or Phyllachorales (Barr 1990)

Arnaudiella Petr. (Dothideales: Microthyriaceae) 87: 86. Swart suggested Microthvrium
eiicalypticola might be better placed in Arnaudiella. Crous & Kendrick (1994)
ave described a species of Arnaudiella and its Xenogliocladiopsis anamorph
from Eucalyptus from South Africa. ^ t' n

Ai naudiella hanci oftii Hansf. = Phaeothvriolum microthvrioides
Articulospora tetracladia Ingold 86: 497.

Articulospora sp, 86: 497.

Ascocoma H.J.Swart (Leotiales: Phacideaceae) 87: 606. See also 90- 287

Ascocoma eucalypti (Hansf) H.J.Swart 87 : 607. Anamorph, by association only is
Coma circularis.

Ascocoma eucalypti var. didymospora H.J.Swart 87: 607.

Asperopilum juncicola Spooner (Leotiales: Hyaloscyphaceae) 80 : 550.

Aspergillus clavatus Desm. 64 : 513.

Asterina sp. 57 : 460; 65 : 84; 91 : 459.

Asterina baileyi Berk. & Broome = Placoasterella haileyi.

Asterina banksiae Hansf 53 : 322. An invalid name suggested by Hansford (1954) who
provided no Latin description.

Asterina correicola Cooke & Massee (Dothideales: Asterinaceae) 53: 323.

Asterina microthyrioides G. Winter = Phaeothvriolum microthvrioides
Asterina sepulta Berk. & M. A. Curt. = Dothidasteromella sepulta.

Asterina systema-solare Massee = Dothidasteromella svstema-solar
Asterina systema-solare Massee var. minor E. E. Fisher. = Dothidasteromella svstema-
sotare.

Asterinella baileyi (Berk. & Broome) Petr. = Placoasterella bailevi

& Massee) Arx & E. Miill. (Dothideales: Asterinaceae)
87. 90. 87: 603; 90: 286. Anamorph is Thyrinula eucalypti.

Aulographum eucalypti Cooke & Massee = Aidographina eucalvpti.

Balansia Speg. (Hypocreales: Clavicipitaceae) 79: 566.

Balladynella banksiae (Sacc. & Bizz.) Hansf = Episphaerella banksiae
Beauveria bassiana (Bals.-Criv.) Vuill. 79 : 507.

Bla.sdalea Sacc. & Syd. (Dothideales: Vizellaceae) 57: 456.

Blastacervulus H.J.Swart 90: 289.

Blastacervulus eucalypti H.J.Swart 90: 289.

Botryosphaeriaceae Theiss. & Syd. (Dothideales) 57: 457.

Botiyosphaeria banksiae Hansf = Coccodiella banksiae.

Broomella Sacc. (Xylariales: Amphisphaeriaceae) 61 : 73; 79. Anamorphs are species of
Pe.stalotiopsis and Truncatella Steyaert.

Camarosporula persooniae (Henn.) Petr. 84 : 733. Anamorph of Anthracostroma per-
sooniae. ^

Camposporium antennatum Harkn. 86: 497.

Annotated list of taxa of fungi — H.J. Swart

241

Camptomeris acaciae (Syd.) Cif. = Colletogloeum acaciicola.

Candelabrum brocchiatum Tubaki 86: 497.

Candelabrum spinulosim Beverw. 86: 497.

Candelabrum sp. 86: 497.

Casaresia sphagnorum Gonz. Frag. 86: 497.

Ceuthospora innumera Massee 90: 280. The teleomorph is presumed on the basis of
association to be Phacidium eucalypti G.W. Beaton & Weste (1977) (Leotiales:
Phacidiaceae).

Ceuthospora lauri (Grev.) Grev. 90 : 280.

Cladosporium sp. 64: 305. A possible hyperparasite of Vizella grevilleae. See also 90 :
289.

Clavariopsis aquatica de Wild. 86: 497.

Clypeococcum D. Hawks. (Dothideales) 91: 462.

Ciypeophysalospora H.J. Swart (Xylariales: Amphisphaeriaceae) 76: 93.
Clypeophysalospora latitans (Sacc.) H.J. Swart 76: 95. See also 78: 259.

Coccodiella banksiae (Hansf ) H.J.Swart (Phyllachorales: Phyllachoraceae) 91 : 455.
Coccostroma Theiss. & Syd. = Coccodiella Hara.

Coccostroma banksiae Sivan. = Coccodiella banksiae.

Codinea assamica (Agnithothr.) S. Hughes & W.B.Kendr. 79: 510
Codinea simplex S. Hughes & W.B.Kendr. 79: 509

Colletogloeum acaciae (Cooke & Massee) B.C. Sutton & H.J.Swart 87: 93.
Colletogloeum acaciicola B.C. Sutton & H.J.Swart 87: 95.

Colletogloeum simmondsii B.C. Sutton & H.J.Swart 87: 97.

Coma circularis (Cooke & Massee) Nag Raj & W.B.Kendr., 87: 603. Teleomorph is
Ascocoma eucalypti. Swart observed no spermatial state though Nag Raj &
Kendrick (1972 ) had. See also 89: 487.

Coniothyrium Corda 86: 494; 90: 289.

Coniothyrium ahmadii B.C. Sutton 86: 494.

Coniothyrium eucalypticola B.C. Sutton 86: 494.

Coniothyrium kallangurense B.C. Sutton & Alcom 86: 494.

Coniothyrium ovatum H.J.Swart 86: 495.

Coniothyrium parvum H.J.Swart 86: 495.

Cooksonomyces H.J.Swart & D. A. Griffiths 63: 152.

Cooksonomyces banksiae H.J.Swart & D. A. Griffiths. 63: 152. Includes a detailed study
of conidium ultrastructure.

Coryneopsis Grove = Sporocadus vide Nag Raj (1993) and not Seimatosporium as pro-
posed by Swart 90 : 633.

Corynespora acaciae H.J.Swart 84: 175.

Coryneum Nees ex Schwein. 63: 151; 87: 93.

Coryneum acaciae McAlpine = Colletogloeum acaciae.

Coryneum cardinale W.W.Wagener = Seiridium cardinale.

Coiyneum juniperinum Ellis & Everh. 61: 80.

Coryneum umbonatum Nees ex Steud. 61: 78.

Crandallia Ellis & Sacc. 87: 99.

Cryptocoryneum Fuckel 63: 151.

Cryptocoryneum banksiae. An unpublished Hansford manuscript name. 63: 151.
Ciyptostictis cupressi Guba = Seiridium unicorne.

Cryptostictis falcata B.C. Sutton - Vermisporium falcatum .

Cryptostictis grevilleae (Loos) Subram. & K.Ramakr. = Sarcostroma grevilleae.
Cryptostictis hakeae B.C. Sutton = Sarcostroma hakeae.

Cryptostictis hollowsii Toth = Seimatosporium hollowsii.

Cryptostictis kennedyae (McAlpine) Subram. = Sarcostroma kennedyae.

Cryptostictis macalpinei Subram. & K.Ramakr. = Sarcostroma kennedyae.
Culicidospora R.H. Petersen 86: 497.

Cyclodomus Hohn. 87: 102.

Cylindrocarpon tonkinense Bugnic. 79: 508.

242

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

Cylindrosporium Grev. 87: 93.

Cylindrosporium acaciae Anahosur = Colletogloeum acaciicola.

Cvlindrosporium acutiim. = Vermisporiiim aciitum. A McAlpine manuscript name. 78 :
269; 81 : 497.

Cylindrosporium eucalypti. Unpublished Hansford manuscript name for a hyperparasite
on Pachysacca samuelii. 79 : 267; 81 : 501.

Cylindrosporium eucalypti McAlpine = Vermisporium eucalypti.

Cylindrosporium obtusum. An unpublished McAlpine manuscript name. 81 : 493.

Cylindrosporium samuelii Hansf. = 'Vermisporium samuelii.

Cytostagonospora martiniana (Sacc.) B.C. Sutton & H.J.Swart 87: 99.

Dasyscyphus apala (Berk. & Broome) Dennis = Lachnum apalum.

Dasyscyphus macrolanceolatus G.W. Beaton = Lachnum apalum var. heatonii.

Davisoniella H.J.Swart 90 : 289.

Davisoniella eucalypti H.J.Swart 90: 288.

Dendiy phiella arenaria 'H'xcot. 60: 129.

Dichomera persooniae Henn. = Camarosporula persooniae.

Didymella Sacc ex D.Sacc. (Dothideales) 78: 259.

Didymosphaeria hanksiae Cooke & Massee = Lineostroma hanksiae.

Diheterospora chlamydosporia (Goddard) G.L. Barron & Onions 79 : 508.

Dimeriiim hanksiae (Sacc. & Bizz.) Petr. = Episphaerella hanksiae.

Diploceras dilophosporum (Cooke) Sacc. 60 : 123. Anamorph of Discostromopsis
stoneae. A form with wider conidia occurs on Melaleuca decussata. See also 59 :
311; 62 : 365; 73 : 213; 81 : 499; 84 : 174.

Diploceras discosioides (Ellis & Everh.) Nag Raj. 61 : 78.

Diploceras elegans (H.J.Swart) Nag Raj. 73: 213. Presumed teleomorph is
Discostromopsis elegans. Nag Raj (1993) reported the conidia to be much longer
than given in Swart’s description.

Diploceras hypericinnum (Ces.) Died. 78: 268.

Diploceras kriegerianum (Bres.) Nag Raj. 73 : 213. Presumed anamorph of
Discostromopsis callistemonis.

Diploceras leptospermi (R.G.Bagn. & Sheridan) Nag Raj. 72 : 409; 73 : 214; 81 : 491.
Presumed anamorph of Discostromopsis leptospermi.

Diploceras muehlenbeckiae (McAlpine) Nag Raj. 72: 407.

Discostroma Clem. (Xylariales: Amphisphaeriaceae) 72 : 409. The genus Discostroma
has been revised by Brockmann (1977) and Barr (1990, 1994). Anamorphs are
species of Seimatosporium sensu stricto, and Sporocadus.

Discostromopsis H.J.Swart (Xylariales: Amphisphaeriaceae) 73: 217. Eriksson &
Hawksworth (1993) consider Discostromopsis to be a later synonym of
Discostroma. However, Nag Raj (1993) has maintained Discostromopsis as a dis-
tinct genus with a distinctive anamorph, Diploceras.

Discostromopsis callistemonis H.J.Swart 73 : 217. Presumed teleomoi'ph of Diploceras
kriegerianum.

Discostromopsis elegans H.J.Swart 73 : 217. Teleomorph of Diploceras elegans.

Discostromopsis leptospermi H.J.Swart 73: 218. Teleomorph of Diploceras leptosper-
mi.

Discostromopsis stoneae H.J.Swart 73: 217. Teleomorph of Diploceras dilophosporum.
See also 84 : 174.

Dothidasteroma casuarinae H.J.Swart (Dothideales: Parmulariaceae) 91 : 582.

Dothidasteromella evanescens (Rehm) Arx (Dothideales: Asterinaceae) 91 : 460.

Dothidasteromella sepulta (Berk. & Curtis) Holm. 91 : 460.

Dothidasteromella systema-solare (Massee) H.J.Swart 53 : 322; 91 : 459.

Dothidella evanescens Rehm = Dothidasteromella evanescens.

Dothidella inaequalis Cooke = Rehmiodothis inaequalis.

Dothiora schizospora Luttr. (Dothideales: Dothioraceae) 91 : 456.

Entopeltidaceae Arx & E. Mull. 57 : 456. Invalid name because published without a
Latin description.

Annotated list of taxa of fungi — H.J. Swart

243

Entopeltis Hohn.. 57 : 456. Swart considered this genus to be a synonym of Vizella.
Epipolaeum hanksiae (Sacc. & Bizz.) Arx = Episphaerella banksiae.

EpisphaereUa banksiae (Sacc. & Bizz.) H.J.Swart (Dothideales: Dimeriaceae) 91 : 453.
Eudarbica Speg. (Dothideales: Phaeosphaeriaceae) 90 : 287.

Eiipemcillium baarnense (T.H.Beyma) Stolk & D.B. Scott (Eurotiales: Trichocomaceae)
55: 310.

Enpenicillium katangense Stolk 55: 310.

Fairmaniella leprosa (Fairm.) Petr. & Syd. 90: 280.

Flabellospom Alas. 86: 497.

Fusarium solani (Martius) Sacc. 64 : 513.

Ganbaea Petr. 87: 99.

Gelineostroma H.J.Swart (Rhytismatales) 90 : 445. There is uncertainty as to which
family this genus should be placed.

Gelineostroma athrotaxi H.J.Swart 90: 445.

Geniculospora sp. 86: 497.

Geotrichum candidum Link 79: 508.

Gliocladium roseum Bainier 79: 508.

Gloeosporiella eucalypti Hansf = Coma circularis.

Harknessia eucalypti Cooke. 59: 311. Conidia from Leptospenmim mvrsinoides were
smaller than reported previously. An evanescent mucilaginous sheath was not
observed. Occurs also on non-myrtyaceous hosts (Sutton & Pascoe 1989).
Harknessia renispora H.J.Swart. 59: 309. Occurs also on non-myrtaceous hosts (Sutton
& Pascoe 1989).

Harknessia uromycoides (Speg.) Speg. 59: 311. On non-myrtaceous hosts too (Sutton
& Pascoe 1989).

Helicodendron triglitziense (Jaap) Linder 86: 497.

Helicomyces sp. 86: 497.

Heliscus lugdunensis Sacc. & Therry 86: 497.

Heliscus sp. 86: 497.

Hendersonia Berk. 86: 495; 87: 95; 90 : 633. Hendersonia is a nomen rejiciendum for
Stagonospora.

Hendersonia acaciae Gonz. Frag. 87: 93.

Hendersonia canberrica Petr. = Colletogloeiim acaciae.

Hendersonia coiynoidea Cooke & Harkn. 90 : 633.

Hendersonia eucalypti Cooke & Harkn. = Sporocadiis lichenicola.

Hendersonia eucalypticola A. R. Davis = Sonderhenia eucalypticola.

Hendersonia eucalyptina A. C. Santos 90 : 633.

Hendersonia eucalyptorum Hansf = Sonderhenia eucalyptonim .

Hendersonia fraserae Hansf = Sonderhenia eucalypticola.

Hendersonia grandispora McAlpine = Kirramyces epicoccoides.

Hendersonia persooniae Henn. = Camarosporula persooniae.

Hendersonia phyllodiorum Sydow 87: 93.

Humicola fuscoatra Traaen 79: 507.

Humicola grisea Traaen 79: 508.

Hymenopleella Munk 61 : 73. A synonym of Lepteuhpa vide Barr (1994).
Hypodermellina Hohn. (Rhytismatales) 90 : 445.

Hysterostornella fdicina (Berk. & Broome) Hohn. Misidentification of Rhagadolobium
dicksoniifolium. 91 : 581.

Idiocercus australis (Cooke) H.J.Swart 90 : 283. Nag Raj (1993) excluded this taxon
from Idiocercus but did not transfer the species to another genus.

Janetia capnophila S. Hughes 84 : 175.

Janetia interna H.J.Swart 84 : 174. A mycoparasite?

Jubispora B.C. Sutton & H.J.Swart 87 : 97.

Jubispora acaciae B.C.Sutton & H.J.Swart 87: 99.

Kirramyces epicoccoides (Cooke & Massee) J.Walker, B.C.Sutton & Pascoe 90 : 640.

See Walker et al. (1992) for a discussion of the genus Kirramvces.

Kirramyces eucalypti (Cooke & Massee) J.Walker, B.C.Sutton & Pascoe 90 : 640. See

244

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

also Walker et al. (1992).

Labridella 'QxQnckXc 63: 172.

Lachnum apalum (Berk. & Broome) Nannf. (Leotiales; Hyaloscyphaceae) 80 : 550.
Lachnum apalum (Berk. & Broome) Nannf. var. beatonii Spooner 80 : 550. See also
Spooner (1987).

Laestadia eucalypti Rolland = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Laestadia eucalypti Speg. = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Laestadia rollandi Sacc. & Syd. = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Lauterbachiella dicksoniifolia Dingley = Rhagadolobium dicksoniifolium.

Lembosia eucalypti F.L. Stevens & Dixon-Stew. = Aulographina eucalypti.

Lembosina persooniae H.J. Swart (Dothideales: Asterinaceae) 58: 420.

Lembosiopsis eucalyptina Petr. & Syd. = Aulographina eucalypti.

Lepteutypa Petr. (Xylariales: Amphisphaeriaceae) 72 : 409; 73 : 220.

Lepteutypa cupressi (Nattrass, C. Booth & B.C. Sutton) H.J. Swart (Xylarialaes:
Amphisphaeriaceae) 61 : 79; 81 : 495. Besides a Seiridium anamorph {S. unicorne)
Swart also reported a spermatial state. See 74 : 289 for details of conidial wall
structure. There is still no confirmed record of this species from North America
(Barr, 1994).

Lepteutypa hippophaes (Fabre) Arx 61 : 73.

Leptosphaeria sp. 61 : 78.

Leptosphaeria hippophaes (Sollm.) Sacc. = Lepteutypa hippophaes.

Leptostromella (Sacc.) Sacc. 87: 97.

Leptostromella acaciae Syd. & P.Syd. = Colletogloeum acaciicola.

Leptostromella eucalypti Cooke & Massee = Thyrinula eucalypti.

Lineostroma H.J. Swart 91 : 464.

Lineostroma banksiae (Cooke) H.J. Swart 91 : 460. A spermatial state was reported but
not named.

Lunulospora curvula Ingold 86: 497.

Macrohilum H.J. Swart 90 : 287.

Macrohilum eucalypti H.J. Swart 90: 287.

Malbranchea sp. 79: 508.

Manginula Amaud. 57 : 455. An anamorph of Vizella 64 : 301.

Mariannaea elegans (Corda) Samson var. punicea Samson 79 : 508.

Marssonia acaciae Cooke & Massee = Colletogloeum acaciae.

Marssonia Fischer 87: 95.

Marssonia Karst. 87: 95.

Melanconium eucalypticola Hansf. = Fairmaniella leprosa.

Melanomma hippophaes Fabre 61 : 73.

Melasmia Lev. 87: 99.

Metarhizium anisopliae (Metschn..) Sorokin 79: 508.

Metarhizium brunneum Fetch 79: 508.

Microsphaeropsis Hohn. 85: 494.

Microthyrium amygdalinum Cooke & Massee = Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides.
Microthyriiim eucalypti Henn. 87: 81. Swart (87: 611) suggests this taxon is a synonym
of Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides.

Microthyrium eucalypticola Speg. (Dothidiales: Microthyriaceae) 87: 88. Perhaps a
species of Arnaudiella according to Swart.

Monochaetia lomatiae McAlpine apud Hansf = Sarcostroma lomatiae.

Monochaetia lutea H.J. Swart & D. A. Griffiths 62:152. See also 62: 365; 74: 295.
Monochaetia monochaetia (Desm.) Sacc. 62: 151; 74: 289.

Monochaetia muehlenheckiae McAlpine apud Hansf. = Diploceras muehlenbeckiae.
Monochaetia unicornis (Cooke & Ellis) Sacc. = Seiridium unicorne.

Montagnella eucalypti Cooke & Massee = Rehmiodothis eucalypti.

Montagnella rugulosa Cooke 87 : 609. Swart considered this a nomen dubium 89 : 487.
Mucor circinelloides Tiegh. 79 : 508.

Mucor hiemalis Wehmer. 64 : 511.

Mucor plumbeus Bonard. 79: 508.

Mucor recurvus E. E. Butler 64: 514.

Annotated list of taxa of fungi — H.J. Swart

245

Mycomicrothelia eucalyptina (Syd.) E. Miill. = Phaeothyriolmn microthyrioides.

Mycosphaerella Johansoti (Dothideales; Mycosphaerellaceae) 58: 417; 65: 88.

Mycosphaerella mycoparasitica H.J. Swart 65 : 88. Mycoparasitic on Thallomycetis
oritidis on Orites lancifolia foliage. The pycnidial spermatial state was not
identified. See also 90 : 287.

Mycosphaerellaceae 58 : 417; 78 : 259.

Ophioboliis Riess (Dothideales: Leptosphaeriaceae) 91 : 456.

Ophiodothella atromacidans (Henn.) Hohn. 79: 566.

Ophiodothella longispora H.J. Swart (Phyllachorales: Phyllachoraceae) 79 : 567. See
also 85 : 554.; 90 : 280.

Ophiodothis atromacidans Henn. 79: 566.

Pachysacca Syd. (Dothideales: Dothideaceae) 79 : 261; 79 : 566. See also 87 : 609.

Pachysacca eucalypti Syd. 79: 261. The phialidic spermatial state was illustrated but
not named. The putative conidial state, Phomachora eucalypti Syd. was not
observed in any collection. Swart mentions a pycnidial hyperparasitic fungus in
one collection. See also 64 : 305.

Pachysacca pusilla H.J. Swart. 79: 268. No spennatial state was reported.

Pachysacca samuelii (Hansf ) H.J. Swart 79: 267. A phialidic spermatial state was
reported but not named; hyperparasites frequently present.

Paecilomyces farinosus (Holmsk.) A.H.S.Br. & G.Sm. 79: 508.

Paecilomyces lilacinus (Thom) Samson 79: 508.

Parodielia hanksiae Sacc. & Bizz. = Episphaerella banksiae.

Penicillium aurantiogriseum Dierckx 79: 508.

Penicillium citreonigrum Dierckx 79: 508.

Penicillium dimorphosporium H.J. Swart 55: 310. Pitt (1979) placed this species in
Penicillium subgenus Aspergilloides Dierckx.

Penicillium expansum Link 79: 508.

Penicillium restrictum J.C. Gilman & E.V. Abbott 55: 312.

Penicillium verrucosum Dierckx var. cyclopium (Westling) Samson, Stolk & Hadlok =
Penicillium aurantiogriseum.

Pestalotia De Notaris 60 : 123; 61 : 79; 62 : 152; 62 : 295; 63 : 169; 74 : 289. At present
Pestalotia is a monotypic genus (Nag Raj 1993). The teleomorph is not known.

Pestalotia funerea Desm. = Pestalotiopsis funerea.

Pestalotia pezizoides de Not. 63 : 169; 62 : 302. The ultrastructure of the conidia is
described.

Pestalotiopsis Steyaert 62 : 159; 62 : 295; 63 : 153; 63 : 169; 73 : 220; 74 : 289. A very
large genus with species separated on the basis of host and small morphological
differences. Teleomorphs in Pestalosphaeria Barr and Broomella.

Pestalotiopsis funerea (Desm.) Steyaert 61 : 80, 62 : 296.

Pestalotiopsis monochaetoides (Doyer) Steyaert 62 : 302.

Pestalotiopsis triseta (Moreau & Mme J. Moreau) Steyaert 62 : 296.

Pestalozziella circularis Cooke & Massee = Coma circularis.

Phaeoseptoria Speg. 90 : 640. See also Walker et al. (1992).

Phaeoseptoria eucalypti Hansf. = Kirramyces epicoccoides.

Phaeoseptoria papayae Speg. 90 : 640. See also Walker et al. (1992).

Phaeothyriolum eucalyptinum Syd. = Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides.

Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides (G.Winter) H.J.Swart (Dothideales: Microthyriaceae)
87: 81. See also 87: 603; 90: 287.

Phialocephala sp. 79: 508.

Phloeospora Wallr. 87: 93.

Phoma australis Cooke = Idiocercus australis.

Phomachora eucalypti Syd. 79: 263. The putative conidial state o^ Pachysacca eucalyp-
ti though Swart thought this unlikely.

Phycomyces hlakesleeanus Burgeff 64: 513.

Phyllachora Nitschke ex Fuckel (Phyllachorales; Phyllachoraceae) 61 • 73' 79- 566' 85 '
552; 87: 81; 89: 483; 91: 458. , • , .

Phyllachora (Montagnella) eucalypti Cooke & Massee = Rehmiodothis eucalypti.

246

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

Phyllachora eucalypti (Cooke & Massee) Theiss. & Syd. = Plectosphaera eucalypti.

Phyllachora eucalypti (Speg.) Petr. = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Phyllachora ficuum Niessl 85: 553.

Phyllachora (Dothiclella) inaequalis Cooke 81: 497.

Phyllachora maculata Cooke = Plectosphaera eucalypti.

Phyllachora punctum (Schwein.) Orton. 79: 566.

Physalospora Niessl (Hyponectriaceae) 76: 91.

Physalospora eucalypti (Rolland) Schrantz = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Physalospora eucalypti Narendra & V. G. Rao 76: 95.' Described from India (Narendra
&Rao, 1977).

Physalospora latitans Sacc. = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Physosporella eucalypti (Speg.) Hohn. = Clypeophysalospora latitans.

Placoasterella haileyi (Berk. & Broome) Arx (Dothideales: Asterinaceae) 51: 148.
Swart also gives a preliminary account of an unidentified hyperparasitic fungus.

Placostroma inaecjualis (Cooke) Theiss. & Syd. = Rehmiodothis inaecjualis.

Plectosphaera Theiss. (Phyllachorales: Phyllachoraceae). A synonym of Phyllachora
according to Eriksson & Hawksworth ( 1 993 ).

Plectosphaera banksiae H.J. Swart 91: 457.

Plectosphaera eucalypti (Cooke & Massee) H.J. Swart 76: 91. Swart described but did
not name the conidial state. See also 79: 566; 85: 554. Pascoe (1990) published
detailed studies of the ascus structure. He found the asci were bitunicate with an
annellate apical apparatus different to that of the Australian species of
Phyllachora examined. Fissitunicate discharge of the ascus was demonstrated.

Plectosphaera eucalypti (Cooke & Massee) Theiss. & Syd. 85: 554. This seems to be an
error by Swart in citation of authors. Bettucci & Saravay (1993) reported
Plectosphaera eucalypti Theiss. to be a common endophyte in Eucalyptus
globulus in Uruguay. We have not been able to locate the place of publication of
this binomial.

Pleospora Rabenh. ex Ces. & De Not. (Dothideales: Pleosporaceae) 78: 259.

Polystigmataceae Hohn. ex Nannf = Phyllachoraceae.

Prillieuxina systema-solare (Massee) M.H.Ryan = Dothiclasteromella systema-solare.

Pseudohelotium asperotrichum Beaton (Leotiales: Hyaloscyphaceae) 80: 549.

Pseudohelotium juncicola Dennis = Asperopilum juncicola.

Pseudopeziza eucalypti Hansf = Ascocoma eucalypti.

Pseudosphaeria samuelii Hansf = Pachysacca samuelii

Rehmiodothis eucalypti (Cooke & Massee) H.J. Swart (Phyllachorales:
Phyllachoraceae) 87: 609; 89: 483. Kutumoto (1991) gave a detailed description
ot R. osheckiae (Berk. & Broome) Theiss. & Syd. the type species of the genus.
Katumoto considered Rehmiodothis to be a monotypic genus.

Rehmiodothis inaequalis (Cooke) H.J. Swart 89: 483.

Rhagadolobium dicksoniifolium (Dingley) Arx & E.Miill. (Dothideales:
Parmulariaceae) 91: 581.

Rhizoctonia solani Kuhn 64: 514.

Rhizopus stolonifer (Ehrenberg:Fr.) Lind 64: 514.

Rhopographus Nitschke ex Fuckel (Dothideales) 87: 608.

Rhynchosphaeria cupressi Nattrass, C. Booth & B.C. Sutton = Lepteutypa cupressi.

Rhytisma eucalypti Henn. 87: 61 1. Swart suggests this might be a species of Ascocoma.

Rosencheldiella oleariae H.J.Swart (Dothideales; Venturiaceae) 58: 417.

Sarcostroma acaciae Nag Raj 62: 151; 72: 407 (as Seimatosporium arhuti).

Sarcostroma arbuti (Bonar) Nag Raj 62: 151.

Sarcostroma brevilatum (H.J.Swart & D.A.Griffiths) Nag Raj 62: 360; 78: 265.

Sarcostroma cadicola (B.C. Sutton) Nag Raj 62: 151; 72: 407.

Sarcostroma daviesiae (McAlpine) Nag Raj 72: 406.

Sarcostroma grevilleae (Loos) Nag Raj 60: 124; 62: 159; 62: 365; 72: 403. According
to Nag Raj ( 1 993) this may be a complex of two or more species.

Sarcostroma hakae (B.C. Sutton) Nag Raj 72: 403. Swart considered this species to be
conspecific with Sarcostroma kennedyae.

Annotated list of taxa of fungi - - H.J. Swart

247

Sarcostroma kennedyae (McAlpine) Nag Raj 72: 403; 59: 311. The collection on
Platylohiinn reported by Swart needs to be re-examined in view of changed
species concepts.

Sarcostroma leucopogonis (H.J. Swart) Nag Raj 72: 409.

Sarcostroma lomatiae (McAlpine) Nag Raj 72: 403. Swart briefly described a possible
teleomorph (72: 409) that seemed to belong to an undescribed genus. At present
no teleomorph has been described for any species of Sarcostroma (Nag Raj 1993).

Sarcostroma mariae (Clinton) Nag Raj 72: 408.

Schizothyrium sp. (Dothideales: Schizothyriaceae) 87: 90.

5c/;777m Nitschke ex Fuckel (Dothideales: Dothideaceae) 91 : 462.

Scolecodothis hvpophvlla (Theiss.) Theiss. & Syd. (Phyllachorales: Phyllachoraceae)
79 : 566. According to Eriksson & Hawksworth (1993) Scolecodothis is a syn-
onym of Ophiodothella (Henn.) Hohn.

Seimatosporium Corda 62 : 152; 62 : 295; 63 : 153; 63 : 169; 72 : 403; 81 : 491. Nag Raj
(1993) concluded that Seimatosporium sensu lato was not monophyletic and seg-
regated the taxa into five genera. The teleomorph of Seimatosporium sensu stricto
is Discostroma.

Seimatosporium arhuti (Bonar) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma arbiiti. See also 72 : 407.

Seimatosporium arhuti (Bonar) Shoemaker sensu H.J. Swart 62: 151 = Sarcostroma aca-
ciae.

Seimatosporium hrevilatum H.J. Swart & D. A. Griffiths = Sarcostroma hrevilatum.

Seimatosporium cadicola (Sutton) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma cadicola.

Seimatosporium cylindrosporum H.J. Swart = Vermisporium cylindrosporium.

Seimatosporium daviesiae (McAlpine) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma daviesiae.

Seimatosporium dilophosporum (Cooke) B.C. Sutton = Diploceras dilophosporum.

Seimatosporium discsioides (Ellis & Everh.) Shoemaker = Diploceras discosioides.

Seimatosporium elegans H.J. Swart = Diploceras elegans.

Seimatosporium eucalypti (McAlpine) H. J. Swart = Vermisporium eucalypti.

Seimatosporium falca'tum (B.C. Sutton) Shoemaker = Vermisporium falcatum.

Seimatosporium fusisporum H.J. Swart & D.A.Griffiths = Sarcostroma hrevilatum.

Seimatosporium grevilleae (Loos) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma grevilleae.

Seimatosporium hakeae (B.C. Sutton) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma hakae.

Seimatosporium hollowsii (Toth) Shoemaker is not conspecific with Seimatosporium
kennedvae as proposed by Swart (72: 403) and may be a species of Sarcostroma
according to Nag Raj (1993).

Seimatosporium hypericiniim (Ces.) B.C. Sutton = Diploceras hypericinum .

Seimatosporium hysterioides (Fuckel) Brockmann 72: 407.

Seimatosporium kennedyae (McAlpine) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma kennedyae.

Seimatosporium kriegerianum (Bres.) Morgan-Jones & B.C. Sutton apud B.C. Sutton =
Diploceras kriegerianum.

Seimatosporium leptospermi Bagnall & Sheridan = Diploceras leptospermi.

Seimatosporium leucopogonis H.J. Swart = Sarcostroma leucopogonis.

Seimatosporium lichenicola (Corda) Shoemaker & E. Miill. = Sporocadus lichenicola.

Seimatosporium mariae (Clinton) Shoemaker = Sarcostroma mariae.

Seimatosporium muehlenheckiae (McAlpine apud Hansf.) H.J. Swart = Diploceras
muehlenheckiae.

Seimatosporium rosae Corda 78: 265.

Seimatosporium samuelii (Hansf) J. Walker & H.J. Swart = Vermisporium samuelii.

Seiridium Nees:Fr. 61 : 71; 62 : 152; 74 : 289. Anamorphs of species of Lepteiip’pa and
Blogiascospora Shoemaker, E. Miill. & Morgan-Jones. One species known from
Eucalyptus {kiag'R.ai 1993).

Seiridium cardinale (W. W. Wagener) B.C. Sutton & 1 . A. S. Gibson 61 : 78.

Seiridium unicorne (Cooke & Ellis) B.C. Sutton 61 : 78. Teleomorph Lepteutypa cupres-
si. See 74 : 289 for details of conidium wall structure. Nag Raj (1993) considered
Seiridium cupressi (Guba) Boesewinkel, which has been reported from
Australasia (Boesewinkel 1983), to be conspecific with S. unicorne.

Semifissispora H.J. Swart (Dothideales) 78: 259. The family placement is uncertain.

248

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

Sentifissisporu elongatu H.J. Swart 78: 260. An unidentified hypersaprophytic
ascomycete was also present in the collections examined and was figured by
Swart.

Semifissispora fusiformis H.J.Swart 78: 259. Cultures from the type collection yielded
a fungus forming phialospores in pycnidia; Swart did not identify it.
Semifissispora rotundata H.J.Swart 78: 259.

Septogloeum Sacc. 87: 93.

Septogloeiim acaciae Syd. = Colletogloeum acaciicola.

Septogloeum acaciae Verwoerd & du ?\qs.s\s = Jiihispora acaciae.

Septoria acaciae Neerg. 87: 93 .

Septoria cytisi Desm. 87: 102.

Septoria martiniana Sacc. = Cytostagonospora martiniana.

Septoria phyllodionim Cooke & Massee = Cytostagonospora martiniana.

Septoria phyllodionim Sacc. 87: 93.

Septoria pulcherrima Gadgil & M.Dick = Kirramyces eucalypti.

Septoriella Oudem. 87: 99.

Seynesia banksiae Henn. = Dothidasteromella systema-solare.

Seynesia microthyrioides (Winter) Theiss. = Phaeothyriolum microthvrioides.

Seynesiella G.Amaud (Dothideales: Microthyriaceae) 87: 87.

Sirosporium Bubak & Serebrian. 51 : 150.

Sonderhenia H.J.Swart & J. Walker 90 : 640.

Sonderhenia eucalypticola (A.R.Davis) H.J.Swart & J. Walker 90: 640.

Sonderhenia eucalyptorum (Hansf ) H.J.Swart & J. Walker 90: 640.

Sordaria Inimana (Fuckel) Winter 79: 508.

Sphaeria hippophaes Sollm. 61 : 73.

Spilomyces dendriticus Hansf 79: 264.

Sporocadus Corda 72 : 407.

Sporocadus lichenicola Corda 61 : 78; 72 : 407; 90 : 633. Teleomorph Discostroma
corticola.

Stagonospora (Sacc.) Sacc. 87: 95; 90: 633.

Stagonospora acaciae Hansf 87: 93.

Stagonospora delegatensis Park & Keane 90 : 284. Pycnidial anamorph of
Mycosphaerella delegatensis R.F.Park & Keane. Walker et al. (1992) considered
S. delegatensis not to be a species of Stagonospora but did not transfer it to
Kirramyces where it would appear more appropriately placed.

Stagonospora orbicularis Cooke = Vermisporium orbiculare.

Stagonospora pidcherrima (Gadgil & M.Dick) H.J.Swart = Kirramyces eucalypti.
Staninwardia B.C. Sutton 90 : 289.

Srigmatea conferta (Fr.) Fr. 65: 84.

Stigmatea oritidis Hansf = Thallomyces oritidis.

Stigmina Sacc. 63: 152.

Stilbospora foliorum Cooke 90 : 279.

Sympodiocladium frondosum Deseals 86: 497.

Syncephalastrum sp. 64 : 514.

feratosphaeria Syd. & P.Syd. (Dothideales: Phaeosphaeriaceae) 91 : 464.

Tetracladium marchalianum De Wild. 86: 497.

Tetracladium setigerum (Grove) Ingold 86: 497.

Thallochaete baileyi (Berk. & Broome ) Hansf = Placoasterella baileyi.

Thallomyces H.J.Swart (Dothideales: Parmulariaceae) 65: 84.

Thallomyces oritidis (Hansf) H.J.Swart 65 : 85.

Thoracella Oudem. 87: 99.

Thyrinula eucalypti (Cooke & Massee) H.J.Swart 90 : 286. Anamorph of Aulographina
eucalypti.

Thyrinula eucalyptina Petrak & Sydow = Thyrinula eucalypti.

Toxosporiopsis B.C. Sutton & Sellars 90 : 279.

Trabutia eucalypti Cooke & Massee = Plectosphaera eucalypti.

Trichocladium asperum Harz 79: 509.

Annotated list of taxa of fungi — H.J, Swart

249

Trichoderma koningii Oudem. 79: 508.

Trichoderma viride Pers. ex Fr. 79: 508.

Tiichosporon sp. 79: 508.

Tricladium attenuatum S. H. Iqbal 86: 497.

Tricladium patulum Marvanova & Marvan 86: 497.

Tricladium splendens Ingold 86: 497.

Tricladium terrestre D.Park 86: 497.

Tricladium sp. 86: 497.

Triscelophorus acuminatus Nawawi 86: 497.

Triscelophorus monosporus Ingold 86: 497.

Triscelophorus sp. 86: 497.

Troposporella fumosa P. Karst. 86: 497.

Truncatella Steyaert 62: 152; 62: 302; 73:220.

Uromycladium simplex McAlpine (Uredinales) 62: 151.

Vermisporium H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 491.

Vcnnisporium aciitum H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 495. Spennatia present.
Vermisporium biseptatum H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 492.

Vermisporium brevicentrum H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 493.

Vermisporium cylindrosporum (H.J. Swart) Nag Raj 78: 267; 81: 491.

Vermisporium eucalypti (McAlpine) Nag Raj 78: 267; 81: 491.

Vermisporium falcatum (B.C. Sutton) Nag Raj 78: 265; 62: 359.

Vermisporium obtusum H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 499. ‘May be a complex of
species’.

Vermisporium orbiculare (Cooke) H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 497; 78: 268.
Vermisporium samuelii (Hansf.) J. A. Simpson & Grgurin. comb. nov.

Basionym: Cylindrosporium samuelii Hansf. in Proceedings of the Linnaean
Society of New South Wales 81: 46, 1956. Specimen examined'. ADW 3840, on
Eucalyptus sp., Pinnaroo, Sept. 1924 , G. Samuel. 90: 287.

Vermisporium walkeri H.J. Swart & M. A. Will. 81: 495. Spermatia on sympodially
proliferating conidiophores also present. See also 87: 609; 89: 487.

Vermisporium sp. 81: 498. Perhaps a new species.

Verticillium alboatrum Reinke & Berthold 64: 514.

Verticillium dahliae Kleb. 64: 513.

Verticillium psalliotae Treschow 64: 514.

Verticillium spp. 79: 509.

Vizella Sacc. (Dothideales: Vizellaceae) 57: 455; 64: 301; 65: 83.

Vizella banksiae H.J. Swart 57: 458; 64: 301. With unnamed conidial and spermatial
states.

Vizella bingervilliana C. Moreau & M. Moreau 57: 462.

Vizella grevilleae H.J. Swart 64: 303. Unnamed conidial and spermatial states also
present.

Vizella hendrickxii (Flansf ) S. Hughes 57: 455. 64: 306.

Vizella interrupta (Winter) S. Hughes 57: 457.

Vizella memorahilis (Dilcher) Selkirk 64: 301.

Vizella oleariae H.J. Swart. 57: 462. Swart did not provide names for either the conidial
or spermatial states; he indicated that Manginula might be an anamorph genus of
Vizella.

Vizella pycnanthae Sivan. 64: 301.

Vizellaceae H.J. Swart. 57: 456. A family in the Dothideales.

Westea H.J. Swart (Dothideales) 91: 456. The family in which this genus should be
placed is still to be decided (Eriksson & Hawksworth 1993).

Westea banksiae H.J. Swart 91: 455.

Wettsteinina Hohn. 79: 266.

250

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

Hosts

Acacia arabica (Lam.) Willd.

Colletogloeum acaciicola
Acacia annata R. Br.

Septoria acaciae
Acacia catechu (L.f.) Willd.

Colletogloeum acaciifolia
Acacia complanata Benth.

Colletogloeum simmondsii
Acacia elata Benth.

Stagonospora acaciae
Acacia glanctiifonnis Benth.

Hendersonia phyllodiorum
Acacia longifolia (Andrews) Willd.

Cytostagonospora martiniana
Acacia melanoxylon R.Br. (as A.
melanopsilonj
Hendersonia acaciae
Acacia obliquinervia Tindale
Cojynespora acaciae
Acacia penninenis DC.

Colletogloeum acaciae
Acacia pycnatha Benth.

Colletogloeum acaciae
Cojynespora acaciae
Monochaetia lutea
Sarcostroma acaciae
Uromycladium simplex
Acacia rehmanniana Schinz

Colletogloeum acaciicola
Acacia tortilis (Forssk.) Hayne
Jubispora acaciae

Acacia tortilis subsp. spirocarpa (Hochst.
ex A. Rich.) Brenan
Jubispora acaciae
Acrotriche sp.

Sarcostroma cadicola
Allocasuarina luehmannii (R.T. Baker)
L. A. S. Johnson
Dothidasteroma casuarinae
Angophora sp.

Phaeo thyrio him microthyrioides
Athrotaxis cupressoides D.Don
Apiothyrium tasmanicum
Gelineostroma athrotaxi
Athrotaxis selaginoides D.Don
Gelineostroma athrotaxi
Banksia integrifolia L. f.

Lineostroma banksiae
Plectosphaera banksiae
Vizella banksiae
Westea banksiae
Banksia marginata Cav.

Coccodiella banksiae
Cooksonomyces banksiae
Dothidasteromella systema-solare
Episphaerella banksiae

Lineostroma banksiae
Banksia robiir Cav.

Dothidasteromella systema-solare
Banksia serrata L. f.

Lineostroma banksiae
Banksia spinulosa Sm.

Cooksonomyces banksiae
Brachypodium sylvaticum (Huds.)
P.Beauv.

Pestalotiopsis triseta
Callistemon citrinus (Curtis) Stapf
Diploceras dilophosporum
Diploceras kriegerianum
Vermisporium sp.

Callistemon macropunctatus (Dum.
Cours.) Court
Diploceras dilophosporum
Callistemon pallidus (Bonpl.) DC

Diploceras dilophosporum (Cooke)
B.C. Sutton

Callistemon sieberi DC

Diploceras kriegerianum
Correa reflexa (Labill.) Vent.

Sarcostroma mariae
Cupressus macrocarpa Hartw.

LepteuU’pa cupressi
Pestalotiopsis funerea
Seiridium unicorne
Daviesia latifolia R. Br.

Sarcostroma daviesiae
Dicksonia antarctica Labill.

Rhagadolobium dicksoniifolium
Eucalyptus amygdalina Labill.

Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Vermisporium obtusum
Eucalyptus baxteri (Benth.) J.M. Black
Vermisporium biseptatiim
Vermisporium obtusum
Vermisporium walkeri
Eucalyptus behriana F.Muell.

Clypeophysalospora latitans
Semifissispora fusiformis
Vermisporium cylindrosporium
Eucalyptus botiyoides Sm.

Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Vermisporium sp.

Eucalyptus camaldiilensis Dehnh.
Pachysacca eucalypti
Pachysacca samuelii
Semifissispora rotundata
Vermisporium biseptatiim
Eucalyptus cephalocarpa Blakely
Pachysacca samuelii
Eucalyptus creba F.Muell.

Vermisporium falcatiim
Eucalyptus delegatensis R.T. Baker
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides

Annotated list of taxa of fungi — H.J. Swart

251

Schizothyrium sp.

Stagonospora delegatensis
Vermisporiiim falcatum
Vermisporium obtiisum
Eucalyptus diversifolia Bonpl.

Pachysacca eucalypti
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Vermisporium cylindrosporum
Eucalyptus dives Schauer
Coniothyrium ovatum
Schizothyrium sp.

Vermisporium falcatum
Eucalyptus dumosa Oxley

Vermisporium brevicentrum
Eucalyptus elata Dehnh.

Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Eucalyptus eximia Schauer

Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Eucalyptus fasciculosa F.Muell.

Fairmaniella leprosa
Eucalyptus foecunda Schauer
Vermisporium biseptatum
Eucalyptus globulus Labill.

Clypeophysalospora latitans
Hendersonia corynoidea
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Physalospora eucalypti
Sarcostroma brevilatum
Sonderhenia eucalypticola
Sporocadus lichenicola
Vermisporium bisetatum
Eucalyptus goniocalyx Miq.

Ophiodothella longispora
Pachysacca samuelii
Plectosphaera eucalypti
Eucalyptus gracilis F.Muell.

Idiocercus australis
Eucalyptus leucoxylon F.Muell.

Sonderhenia eucalyptorum
Eucalyptus macrorhyncha Benth.
Coniothyrium ovatum
Verm ispori um biseptatum
Vermisporium obtusum
Vermisporium orbiculare
Vermisporium walkeri
Eucalyptus mannifera Mudie
Plectosphaera eucalypti
Eucalyptus marginata Smith
Davisoniella eucalypti
Eucalyptus melliodora Schauer
Coniothyrium parvum
Plectosphaera eucalypti
Vermisporium biseptatum
Eucalyptus nitens (FI. Deane & Maiden)
Maiden

Kirramyces eucalypti
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides

Eucalyptus ohliqua L’Fler.

Aulographina eucalypti
Blastacen’ulus eucalypti
Coniothyrium ovatum
Pachysacca samuelii
Thyrinula eucalypti
Vermisporium obtusum
Vermisporium orbicidare
Vermisporium walkeri
Eucalyptus odorata Behr
Pachysacca samuelii
Spilomyces dendriticus
Eucalyptus ovata Labill.

Verm isporium brevicen trum
Eucalyptus paiiciflora Spreng.

Ascocoma eucalypti var. didymo-
spora

Ascocoma eucalypti var. eucalypti
Aulographina eucalypti (Cooke &
Massee) von Arx & Muller
Candelabrum brocchiatum
Candelabrum spinulosum
Candelabrum sp.

Coma circularis
Helicodendron triglitziense
Phaeo thyri olum micro thyrioides
Vermisporium obtusum
Vermisporium walkeri
Eucalyptus polyanthemos Schauer
Fairmaniella leprosa
Macrohilum eucalypti
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Sarcostroma brevilatum
Sonderhenia eucalypticola
Eucalyptus radiata DC

Phaeothrioliim microthyrioides
Verm isporium falcatum
Vermisporium obtusum
Eucalyptus regnans F. Muell.
Coniothyrium parvum
Idiocercus australis
Ophiodothella longispora
Pachysacca pusilla
Plectosphaera eucalypti
Vermisporium biseptatum
Vermisporium falcatum
Vermisporium obtusum
Eucalyptus rubida H. Deane & Maiden
Kirramyces eucalypti
Eucalyptus tetrodonta F.Muell.

Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Eucalyptus viminalis Labill.

Pachysacca eucalypti
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Plectosphaera eucalypti
Vermisporium biseptatum
Verm isporium brevicen trum

252

J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic

Eucalyptus sp.

Ceuthospora innumera
Clvpeophysalospora latitans
Idiocercus australis
Phaeothyriolum microthyrioides
Plectosphaera eucalypti
Relimiodothis inaequalis
Semifissispora elongata
Stilhospora foliorum
Vermisporium acutatum
Vennisporium orbiculare
Ficus Virens Ait.

Phyllachora ficuum
Grevillea aquifolium Lindley
Vizella grevilleae
Grevillea chrysophaea Meissner
Sarcostroma grevilleae
Grevillea laurifolia Sprengel
Sarcostroma grevilleae
Grevillea robusta R.Br.

Sarcostroma grevilleae
Grevillea rosmarinifolia A.Cunn.
Diploceras dilophosporum
Sarcostroma grevilleae
Grevillea steighitziana N.A.Wakef.
Placoasterella baileyi
Sarcostroma grevilleae
Grevillea victoriae F.Muell.

Sarcostroma grevilleae
Hakea crassifolia Meissn.

Vizella banksiae

Hakea dactyloides (Gaertner) Cav.
Sarcostroma hakeae

Hardenbergia violacea (Schneev.) Steam
Sarcostroma kennedyae
Hypericum perforatum L.

Diploceras hypericinum
Juncus sarophorus L. A. S. Johnson
Lachnum apalurn van beatonii
Pseudohelotium asperotrichum
Kennedya prostrata R.Br.

Sarcostroma kennedyae
Leptospermum juniperinum Sm.

Diploceras leptospermi
Leptospermum myrsinoides Schldl.

Harknessia eucalypti Cke
Leptospermum scoparium Forster &
G. Forster

Diploceras leptospermi
Leucopogon lanceolatus (Sin.) R.Br.

Sarcostroma leucopogonis
Lomatia ilicifolia R.Br.

Sarcostroma lomatiae
Melaleuca decussata R.Br.

Diploceras dilophosporum (wide
spored form)

Melaleuca ericifolia Sm.

Diploceras elegans
Melaleuca lanceolata Otto
Diploceras elegans
Harknessia renispora
Vermisporium cylindrosporum
Melaleuca squarrosa Sm.

Diploceras dilophosporum
Discostromopsis stoneae
Harknessia eucalypti
Harknessia renispora
Janetia interna
Melaleuca wilsonii F.Muell.

Diploceras elegans
Muehlenbeckia sp.

Diploceras muehlenbeckiae
Olearia argophylla (Labill.) Benth.
Rosencheldiella oleariae
Vizella oleariae
Orites lancifolia F.Muell.

Mycosphaerella mycoparasitica
Thallomyces oritidis
Persoonia arborea F.Muell.

Lembosina persooniae
Persoonia elliptica R.Br.

Camarosporula persooniae
Persoonia salicina Pers.

Camarosporula persooniae
Persoonia sp.

Anthracostroma persooniae
Camarosporula persooniae
Platydobium ohtusangulum Hook.
Harknessia uromycoides
Sarcostroma kennedyae
Rosa sp.

Sporocadus lichenicola
Vitis sp.

Seimatosporium hysterioides

Annotated list of taxa of fungi — H.J. Swart

253

References

Arx, J.A. von & Miiller, E. (1975). A re-evaluation of the bitunicate ascomycetes with keys to families and
genera. Studies in Mycology 9: 1-159.

Barr, M.E. (1990). Prodromus to nonlichenizcd, pyrcnomycetous members of class Hymenoascomycetes.
Mycotaxon 39: 43-184.

Barr, M.E. (1994). Notes on the Amphisphaeriaceae and related families. Mycotaxon 51: 191-224.

Beaton, G. & Swart, H.J. (1983). Two inoperculate discomycetes found on Juncus in Australia. Transactions
o] the British Mycological Society 80: 549-552.

Beaton, G. & Weste, G. (1977). New species of Helotiales and Phacidiales from Australia. Transactions of the
British Mycological Society 68: 13-11 .

Beilharz, V.C., Parbery, D.G. & Swart, H.J. (1982). Dodine: a selective agent for certain soil fungi.
Transactions of the British Mycological Society 79: 507-5 1 1 .

Bettucci, L. & Saravay, M. (1993). Endophytic fungi of Eucalyptus globulus-, a preliminary study.

Mycological Research 97: 679-682.

Boesewinkel, IJ.J. (1983). New records of three fungi causing cypress canker in New Zealand, Seiridium

cupressi (Guba) comb, nov., and S. cardinale on Cupressocyparis and S. unicorne on Cryptomeria and
Cupressus. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 80: 544-547.

Brockmann. 1.(1 977). Untersuchungen iiber die Gattung Discostroma Clements (Ascomycetes). Svdowia 28:
275-338.

Brummitt, R.K. & Powell, C.E. (1992). Authors of plant names. (Royal Botanic Gardens: Kcw.)

Cano, J. & Guarro, J. (1990). The genus Ascophanus. Mycological Research 94: 355-377.

Chapman, A.D. ( 1991). Australian plant name index. Australian Flora and Fauna Series. Numbers 12-15
(Australian Government Printing Service: Canberra.) pp. 1-3055.

Crous, P.W. & Kendrick, W.B. (1994). Arnaudiella eucalyptorum sp. nov. (Dothidcales, Ascomycetes), and
its hyphomycetous dindiVnorfn Xenogliocladiopsis gen. nov., from Eucalyptus leaf litter in South
Africa. Canadian Journal of Botany 72: 59-64.

Eriksson, O.E. & Hawksworth, D.L. (1993). Outline of the Ascomycetes - 1993. Svstema Ascomvcetum 12:
51-257.

Fisher, E.E. ( 1950). Some sooty moulds collected in Queensland. Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria
62: 129-135.

Griffiths, D.A. & Swart, H.J. (1973). Fine structure of conidia in two species of Seimatosporium. Transactions
of the British Mycological Society 60: 123-131.

Griffiths, D.A. & Swart, H.J. (1974). Conidial structure in two species of Pestalotiopsis. Transactions of the
British Mycological Society 62: 295-304.

Griffiths, D.A. & Swart, H.J. (1974). Conidial structure in Pestalotia pezizoides. Transactions of the British
Mycological Society 63: 169-173 -t plates lb-11 .

Hansford, C.G. (1954). Australian fungi 11. New records and revisions. Proceedings of the Linnean Society of
New South Wales 19: 91-\4\.

Katumoto, K. (1991 ). Three ascomycetous fungi from the Ryukyo Islands, Japan. Transactions of the
Mycological Society of Japan 32: 37-43.

Muller, E. & Arx. J.A. von. (1962). Die Gattung der didymosporen Pyrenomyceten. Beitrdge ziir
Kryptogamenfloru der Schweiz 1 1: 1-922.

Nag Raj, T.R. (1993). Coelomycetous anamorphs with appendage-bearing conidia. (Mycologue Publications:
Waterloo, Canada.)

Narendra, D.V. & Rao, V.G. (1977). A new species of Physalospora from India. Mycologia 69: 1 191-1 193.

Parbery, D.G. (1994). Haring Johannes Swart 1922-1993. Australasian Plant Pathology’. 23: 29-35.

Pascoe, l.G. (1990). Observations on ascus structure of Plectosphaera eucalypti (Phyllachoraceae).
Mycological Research 94: 675-684.

Pitt, J.l. 1979. The genus Penicillium and its teleomorphic states Eupenicillium and Talaromyces. (Academic
Press: London.)

Roberts, D.C. & Swart, H.J. (1980). Conidium wall structure in Seiridium and Monochaeta. Transactions of
the British Mycological Society 74: 289-296.

Spooner, B.M. (1987). Helotiales of Australasia: Geoglossaceae, Orbilaceae, Sclerotiniaceac,
Hyaloscyphaceae. Bibliotheca Mycologica 116: 1-711.

Sutton, B.C. & Pascoe, l.G. (1989). Addenda to Harknessia (Coelomycetes). Mycological Research 91:
431-439.

Sutton, B.C. & Swart, H.J. (1986). Australian leaf-inhabiting fungi XXlll. Colletogloeum species and similar
fungi on Acacia. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 87: 93-102.

Swart, H.J. ( 1 968). An interesting case of hyperparasitism. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 5 1 ■
148-151

Swart, H.J. (1969). Proliferating croziers in Asterina. Transactions of the British Mycological SocieN 53'
322-323.

Swart, H.J. (1970). Penicillium dimorphosporium sp. nov. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 55'
310-313.

Swart, H.J. (1971). Australian leaf-inhabiting fungi 1. Two species of Vizella. Transactions of the British
Mycological Society 57: 455-464.

Swart, H.J. (1972). Australian leaf-inhabiting fungi 11. Two new ascomycetes. Transactions of the British
Mycological Society 58:41 7-42 1 .

Swart, H.J. (1972). Australian leaf-inhabiting fungi 111. Observations on Harknessia. Transactions of the
British Mycological Society 59: 309-3 II.

Swart, H.J. ( 1 973 ). The fungus causing cypress canker. Transactions of the British Mycological Society 6 1 :

W«e/ferio 9: 255-256 (1996)

Book Review

The Orchids of Victoria. Gary Backhouse & Jeffrey Jeanes. Published by Miegunyah
Press, an imprint of Melbourne University Press, Melbourne. 1995, 388 pp. ISBN 0 522
84393 X, Price SAU59.95

If you haven’t discovered the diverse, the often bizarre, the frequently captivating, and
the exceedingly beautiful array of orchids native to this State, then you must buy The
Orchids of Victoria. If, on the other hand, you are already in love with these fascinating
flowers then buy two copies: one for heavy use in the field, the other to drool over on
those rare occasions when there is not an orchid blooming in Victoria. Gary Backhouse
and Jeff Jeanes have created a field guide that stands out from all others. It is compre-
hensive, it is botanically accurate, it is beautifully designed and what’s more it works. It
is the definitive guide to orchids in Victoria.

Every orchid taxon recorded from Victoria is described, mapped and illustrated
(even dubious records from the literature are considered, with explanations given as to
why these have been excluded). Each taxon is given a full page, including: a detailed
description (using traditional but familiar botanical jargon); a list of simitar taxa, fiower-
ing time; distribution in terms of floristic regions, the familiar Churchill & de Corona
grid system (A to Z) and a map; habitat notes; taxonomic and conservation notes;
conservation status (using the Briggs & Leigh codes); and a maginficent colour photo-
graph (labelled with its locality; e.g. Anglesea). Genera are described and discussed in
terms of biology and taxonomic relationships, and a key is provided to all species.
Preceding the taxonomic heart of the book are chapters on format and photography,
orchid terminology and structure, taxonomy and nomenclature, habitats, and conserva-
tion and threatened species. A glossary, an index, and bibliographic details of the
references cited complete the book. It’s well packaged and a delight to use.

Taxonomically, the text is up-to-date. It takes into account the flurry of activity in
1991 and the tidying up that followed, as well as newly described taxa and synonymies
unearthed to the end of 1994 (in only one case is a name used prior to its formal publica-
tion, i.e. Genoplesium morrisii var. contortum). The circumscription of genera is little
changed from Willis’s first volume of A Handbook to Plants in Victoria in 1970.
Exceptions are the now widely accepted separation of Genoplesium from Prasophylhim,
and the more controversial (but quite logical and responsible) return of Caladenia
menziesii to its own genus, Leptoceras. There are few differences between the taxa
accepted in this volume and in the Flora of Victoria, and where the texts do diverge,
unresolved taxonomic problems still exist. It is a pity, however, that the botanical
regions used by Backhouse and Jeanes are not the same as those used in the Flora of
Victoria.

The alphabetic listing of taxa is not to my taste, particularly in large genera such as
Caladenia and Pterostylis (I’d prefer to have all the C. patersonii relatives or the
rw/a-group species of Pterostylis bunched together for easier comparison). My main
complaint, however, is the dominance of text over illustration. The photographs can
certainly take enlargement, which would reveal some of the finer details: e.g. column
structure in Thelymitra aristata and T. ixioides. The photographs are almost without
exception of excellent quality, setting a new standard for field guides (in the orchid
world, surpassing the generally excellent photographs in Bates & Weber’s Orchids of
South Australia and Hoffman & Brown’s Orchids of South-west Australia). It is shame
to have such beautiful portraits overwhelmed by such large frames. Close-ups of key
features would assist in identification, but presumably the book would move from its
very reasonable price up into the expensive category.

My final, and more lengthy, quibble would also add considerably to the cost and
should be read largely as a self indulgent aside. In accepting all newly described taxa,
the authors have (somewhat ironically I guess) taken the more conservative path. A
variant named in the scientific literature gains a status far above that of a mere localized
growth fonn. Not only does a Latin name create a sometimes unwarranted credibility,
but to get rid of the damn thing you have to explicitly ‘sink’ the name in a formal
synonymy. Easier and safer to accept all names and grumble a little about them in the

255

256

Tim Entwisle

taxonomic notes (I know, because I’ve frequently followed this course in Flora of
Victoria). But of course the mystique builds with every usage of the name.

Unfortunately, conservation worldwide is species driven (occasionally a subspecies
or variety makes the grade, but the point is that a scientific name or explicit scientific
recognition is all important). Whether or not the avalanche of new orchid names from
Australia in recent years includes ‘good’ or ‘bad’ species is not the issue. Recently
described species have helped to highlight the diversity of our native orchids and in
most cases the species are well characterized by their morphology and biology. The real
concern (to me at least) is that these taxonomic constructs (whether viewed as arbitrary
slices through a lumpy continuum or some sort of preordained entities) have no place in
conservation except to aid communication between consenting adults. To conserve the
diversity of orchids in Victoria we must conserve as much of the genetic variation as
possible. Local growth variants, colour mutants, and geographically separated
populations are all part of this diversity.

So what has all this to do with the book in hand? I support the description and
illustration of as much variation as possible. If variants are formally described and
named, well and good. What I would like to see, however, is more illustration of
variation within species and of variants not lucky enough to carry names. The authors do
include sp. afT s in six of the genera, but all of these are expected to be described as
species or infraspecies in the near future. To display the real diversity of our flora,
named (or pendingly named) taxa should be used as a framework only. This gives Gary
Backhouse and Jeff Jeanes a few more volumes to prepare as well as licence to accuse
me, as a writer and editor of Floras, of double standards. But that’s my prerogative as a
reviewer: this book is so good that I want it to be perfect.

It is also my prerogative to unashamedly and unreservedly recommend this book.
The authors end their preface with the sentence, ‘Our ambition is to have the users of
this book rejoicing in the beauty of orchids in the wild for many years to come, and not
turning the pages sadly and reflecting on the images of things that once were but are no
longer’. What is certain is that users of this book will be rejoicing in their purchase
forever.

Tim Entwisle

Muelleria 9:257 ( 1 996)

Corrigendum

Muelleria 8(3): 391-394 (1994)

Notes on Pultenea Sm. (Fabaceae) in Victoria
M.G. Corrick

In this paper reference was made to Pultenaea helophila on pages 391 and 392. These
references should be replaced by the name Pultenaea sericea.

Australian alpine scapose radiate taxa of Senecio (Asteraceae)

— Robert O. Belcher i 1 5

Three new Victorian species related to Eucalyptus aromaphloia L.D.Pryor

& J.H. Willis and notes on the polymorphic nature of that species

— K.Rule 133

A revision of the Cardamine gunnii-lilacina complex (Brassicaceae)

— Ian R. Thompson & Pauline Y. Ladiges 145

Revision of the Cardamine paucijuga complex (Brassicaceae)

— Ian R. Thompson 1 6 1

A review of the Erigeron pappocromus Labill. complex

— Stephen J. Forbes & Dennis I. Morris 1 7 5

A new species of Gynatrix Alef (Malvaceae) from eastern Victoria

— V.G. Walsh ' 191

Nomenclatural changes in Cullen (Fabaceae: Psoraleeae)

— James W. Grimes 195

Karyology

Chromosome number determinations in the Australian Astereae
(Asteraceae)

— K. Watanabe, P.S. Short, T. Denda, Y. Suzuki, M. Ito,

T Yahara & K. Kosuge 197

Paleobotany

Elaeocarpus (Elaeocarpaceae) endocarps from the Early to Middle
Miocene Yalloum Formation of Eastern Australia

— Andrew C. Rozefelds & D.C. Christophel 229

Checklist

An annotated list of the taxa of fiingi in the published Australian papers
of H.J. Swart

— J.A. Simpson & C.A. Grgurinovic 239

Book Review

The Orchids of Victoria

— Tim Entwisle . 255

Corrigendum 257

CONTENTS
Volume 9 1996

Page

Obituary

Dr James Hamlyn Willis AM — 28 January 1910-10 November 1995

— Helen I. Aston 1

Systematics

A taxonomic revision of Aleurites J.R.Forst. & G.Forst. (Euphorbiaceae)
in Australia and New Guinea

— Paul I. Forster 5

Notes on Hovea R.Br. (Fabaceae): 6

— J.H. Ross 15

Ectocarpus siliculosus (Dillwyn) Lyngb. from Hopkins River Falls,

Victoria — the first record of a freshwater brown alga in Australia

— John A. West & Gerry T. Kraft 29

New combination in Viola (Violaceae)

— T.A. James 35

A new species of Asplenium L. section Thamnopteris C.Presl
(Aspleniaceae) from Lord Howe Island

— David L. Jones 37

Reinstatement of Caladenia alpina R.S. Rogers (Orchidaceae) as distinct
from Caladenia lyallii Hook.f and the description of Caladenia cracens,
a related new species from southern Tasmania

— David L. Jones 41

»

Resolution of the Prasophyllum alpinum R.Br. (Orchidaceae) complex in
mainland south-eastern Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand

— David L. Jones 5 1

Two new endemic species of Sagina L. (Caryophyllaceae) from Australia

— L.G. Adams 63

Miscellaneous notes on Genoplesium ciliatum (Ewart & B.Rees)

D.L. Jones & M. A. Clem. (Orchidaceae)

— David L. Jones & Jeffrey A. Jeanes 61

New taxa and some new nomenclature in Eucalyptus

— MJ.H. Brooker & A. V. Slee 75

Notes on Tetratheca procumbens Gunn ex Hook.f (Tremandraceae)

— Jeffrey A. Jeanes 87

New species of Pronectria, Vouauxiomyces, Wentiomyces and
Zwackhiomyces from Australasia

— Sergey Y. Kondratyuk 93

Dipodium pardalinum (Orchidaceae), a new species from Victoria and

South Australia

— David L. Jones 1 05

The consequences of a footnote: typifications and place of first valid pub-
lication of two Australian Abutilon (Malvaceae) species published by

Mueller

— R.M. Barker 1 1 1